Ministry of Water & Energy
Tana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development
Project
Design, Development & Support in
Implementation & Operation of a Basin
Information System
Interim Report
October 2013
I n g e n i e r i e                  KalcrowDESIGN, DEVELOPMENT & SUPPORT IN
IMPLEMENTATION & OPERATION OF A BASIN
INFORMATION SYSTEM
INTERIM REPORT
Table of Content
1. BACKGROUND OF THE PROJECT 
1.1   Phase 1 : Inception Phase
1.2    Phase   2: Design Phase
1.3   Phase   3: Implementation and Operationalisation Phase
1.4    Phase   4: Final Reporting Phase
2. INTRODUCTION TO THE IMPLEMENTATION AND
1
1
2
2
OPERATIONALISATION PHASE........................................................ ..................... 3
2.1 Methodological approach
2.1.1 Key Methodological points
2.1.2 Implementation strategy
2.2 Project Monitoring
2.3 Work plan
2.4 Resource
2.5 Expected deliverables
TENDER PROCESS...................................................... 3.1 Introduction
3.2 Procurement support
3.2.1 Preparation of document 3.2.2 Bidding process
3.2.2.1 Clarifications
3.2.2.2    Pre bid meeting 3.2.2.3 Field visit
3
3
5
6
8
10
12
. 13
13
13
13
14
14
15
15
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim ReportTable of Content
3.3   Bid evaluation
3.3.1    First bid evaluation
3.3.2    Cost estimate during the design phase
3.3.3    Updating estimation during the tender process 3.3.4    Second bid evaluation
3.4   Present constitution of the system
18
18
19
19
3.5   Work plan for construction, commissioning and operationalisation                   20
4. BIS DEVELOPMENT
4.1  Previous phases
4.1.1    Architecture and functionality of the system 4.1.1.1     Hydrological information system 4.1.1.2     Spatial Data System
4.1.1.3     Information Management System 4.1.1.4     Knowledge Management System 4.11.5     Dissemination Data System
4.1.1.6     Non Functional Requirements 4.1.1.7     Architecture of the software
4.1.2    Characteristics of the proposed system
4.1.3    GIS aspects 
4.1.3.1     Key tasks performed during the previous phases 4.1.3.2     Data collection
4.1.3.3     Maps Prepared
4.2 Implementation: Contents of release n°1 (June 2012)
4.2.1    Site repository 
4.2.1.1     Water quality sites 
4.2.1.2     Hydrological sites 
4.2.1.3     Ecological sites 
4.2.2    Variable repository 
4.2.2.1    Water quality sites 
4.2.2.2    Hydrological sites 
4.2.2.3    Ecological sites 
4.3 Implementation: Contents of release n°2 (April 2013)
4.3.1    Variable repository
4.3.2    Main functionalities of the release
4.3.2.1     User interface
21
21
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
24
24
24
25
29
30
30
30
32
33
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
4.3.2.2     Rating curves management
4.3.2.3     Deriving the time series
4.3.2.4    Gap filling
4.3.2.5    Time series validation
4.3.2.6    Range constraint validation
4.3.2.7     Variation constraint validation
4.3.2.8     Velocity constraint validation
4.3.2.9    The double mass and the cumulative residual method
4.3.2.10   Exporting data to HDA processing
4.3.2.11   Mapping tool
38
39
40
42
43
43
43
44
45
45
46
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim ReportTable of Content
4.4 next releases
46
4.4.1    Complement of release 2                                                                                                 47
4.4.2    Release 3
4.4.3     Release 4
4.5 Hydrological design aids HDA
47
48
49
4.6    GIS                                                                                                                            49 5. TRAINING
I I h
II
II
5.1 Introduction
5.2 HIS     and BIS software
5.2.1     Release n°1 (done)
5.2.1.1     Introduction
5.2.1.2     Training participants 5.2.1.3     Contents 
5.2.1.4     Conclusion 5.2.2     Release n 2 (done)
e
5.2.2.1     Introduction
50
50
50
50
51
51
52
52
52
5.2.2.2     Training participants                                                                                        52
5.2.2.3     Contents 
5.2.2.4     Conclusion
5.2.3 Release n°3 (planned after hardware commissioning)
53
53
54
5.2.3.1     Objectives                                                                                                         54
5.2.3.2     Program
54
5.2.4     Release n°4 (planned after all equipment commissioning)                                             55
5.3 Hydrological design aids HDA
5.3.1     Introduction
55
55
5.3.2     Training participants                                                                                                     55
5.3.3     Contents 
5.3.3.1     Day 1: Background
5.3.3.2      Day 2: Main data derivation procedures 
5.4 Hydrometry - “On the job training” 
5.4.1     Introduction
5.4.1.1    Background
5.4.1.2    Objectives of the training
56
56
56
57
57
57
57
5.4.1.3    Participation                                                                                                     57
5.4.2     Field activities 
5.4.2.1    Day 1-Monday 5 November 2012 5.4.2.2    Day 2 - Tuesday 6 November 2012
53
53
59
5.4.2.3    Day 3 to 5 (7 November 2012 - 9 November 2012)                                         60
5.4.3     Second training
5.5 Hydrology and Hydraulics: HEC Software
5.5.1     Introduction
5.5.2     List of participants
5.53 HEC-HMS
5.5.3.1      Day one: Introduction
5.5.3.2      Day two: Developing HEC-HMS Project
5 5.3.3 Day three; Developing HEC-HMS Project (Cont’d)
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Repon
61
d/dY] „
[I
fl
n
n 11 11
11 11 11
■Table of Content
5.5.4    HEC-RAS
5.5.4.1    Introduction
5.5          4.2 Overview of program capabilities
5.5.4.3    Practical exercise
5.5.5    Conclusion
5.6 Water quality
5.6.1 First “on the job training"
5.6.1.1    Introduction
5.6.1.2     Training participants
5.6.1.3     Delivery of the hands on training and locating water quality monitoring stations 
5.6.2   Second “on the job training"
5.7    Environment
5.7.1    Terrestrial ecology 
5.7.2    Aquatic ecology 
5.7.3    Land resources 
5.73.1     Purpose
5.7.3.2    Methods  and programs 
GIS
5.8.1    General
5.8.2    Methodology
5.8.3    Training outcome
65
65
65
66
66
67
70
71
71
71
72
72
72
75
75
76
76
ANNEXES.................................................................................................................................. 78
Annex 1.
Discharge and sediment measurement guideline
79
Annex 2.
TBIWRDP - User Manual Release N°1 v1.0
80
Annex 3.
TBIWRDP - User Manual Release N°2 v1.0
81
Annex 4.
TBIWRDP-HDAs user manual
82
Annex 5.
TBIWRDP - HEC Software procedure
83
Annex 6.
TBIWRDP - Water Quality user manuals
84
Annex 7.
Procurement: Contract technical specifications
85
Annex 8.
CUASHI Conference
86
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim ReportTables
Tables
Tables
Table 1: Implementation key steps............................................................................................................... 9
Table 2: Spatial data and their respective file format designed to be disseminated by the web
portal....................................................................................................................................26
Table 3:    Spatial dataavailable for the project.........................................................................................27
Table 4:    List of Maps        produced...................................................................................................... 29
Table 5: Training topics to be covered in GIS and Remote Sensing during implementation &
operationalization................................................................................................................ 75
Design, Development & Suppon in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim ReportExecutive Summary
Tender document
One of the main tasks for the Consultant was the preparation of specifications and tender documents for measuring equipment and associated civil works, specifications  for laboratory  equipment and civil works, hardware and software for data entry, processing and storage, and for communication networking between data collection centres, processing centres  and storage centres. The bid document shall specify  post-delivery  support for training and maintenance including calibration. Following different discussion among the main stakeholders  on the way  to process  this  procurement, the document has been finalized in January 2013.
This   section   explains   all   the   procurement   support   and   bid   evaluation   has   been   conducted   up to now.
BIS
In this chapter the BIS software is presented from the conception to the realisation. As it is explained, the consultant proposed a system in line with the needs expressed:
► The data model used for storing measurement data is a simple model, sufficiently transversal to the thematics  and  environments  discussed:  surface  water,  groundwater,  water  quality,  meteorology, air quality and ecology.
► The data model is implemented on a Microsoft SQL Server database.
The software selected is  CUAHSI, from the American university  consortium which provided a set of tools  based on the ODM model such as  an interface to the remote transmission systems, a data import tools in the ODM base, a management tool for day-to-day observation and measurement data, a system of data dissemination based on the format of data on water WaterML, standardized by  the OGC.
This  software as  well as  source code is  freely  available. However, some functions  necessary  for information system management such as gap filling, management of rating curves, and data validation are not covered by  the CUAHSI tools. Interfaces  for simple data entry  are not included either. Additional software has  been developed to complement the range of CUAHSI tools. They  were provided with releases 1 and 2.
Training
As  per the implementation phase, the Consultant support will include training sessions  on all the aspects  of the implemented HIS BIS system, during the whole implementation phase. In fact, training of staff is  essential to build institutional capacity  for a sustainable operation of the Sub-Basin Branch Office (SBBO). Training will be both formal and on-the-job. Especially  the latter type of training is considered important for both the field work and the data entry-, processing-, and quality  control. The data entry, processing and quality  control of historic  data that is  not yet entered in the HYDATA system, is recommended to start by SBBO staff as early as possible, within the Hydrology Section at MoWE.
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim ReportExecutive Summary
Thus, training on the following topics will be organized:
► IT
► Hydrological Design Aids
► Hydrology and hydraulic modelling (on HEC-HMS & HEC-RAS software)
► Hydrology
► Water quality
► Environment
► GIS
This chapter described the training already provided and the program for the ones on coming.
pxd:
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report1. Background of the Project
1
1.  BACKGROUND OF THE PROJECT
The Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System, hereafter referred to as  the Tana and Beles  BIS project, forms  part of the Tana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development Project (TBIWRDP), sub-component A1.
In this section, the background of TBIWRDP- Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System is briefly described. The overall project is composed on three phase
1.1Phase 1 : Inception Phase
A preliminary inception report was submitted in February 2011 and the draft final inception report in April 2011. The final inception report went into much more detail than the preliminary  inception report with respect to design of the hydrometric  network  and other BIS sub-components  and functions, software and hardware considerations, and other elements  necessary  to guide the design phase. The results were based on a detailed interaction with the stakeholders.
The final version of this  inception report (FFIR) was  delivered in September 2011, after the Inception workshop held on June and the Technical Committee recommendations  had been received, analyzed, and integrated.
1.2 Phase 2: Design Phase
This report presents the detailed design features of the Basin Information System (BIS) elaborated on the basis of the findings  and recommendations issued during the previous Inception phase. It provides  an opportunity  to share and discuss  the Consultant’s  technical proposal with respect to the design of each BIS component with the main stakeholders. The report's recommendations are primarily  based on a comprehensive stakeholder consultation, carried out all along the inception and design phases and a review of the existing information and projects.
Based on the existing situation review performed at Inception stage and on identified needs and expectations, the draft Design Report (DDR) describes  proposed improvements  regarding measurement stations  networks, equipment, staffing, and business  process  for surface water, meteorology, groundwater, water quality, environment and ecology  monitoring in the Tana-Beles sub-basins  (Hydrological Information System). It provides  an information collection and dissemination strategy  and the related institutional business  processes. This  suggested strategy guided the design of the BIS architecture. Detailed design features of the BIS components related to raw data collection and processing (Data Acquisition, Processing and Storage System), data analysis  (Hydrological Design Aids), modeling (Decision Support System), spatial data processing (Spatial Data System), information management and dissemination (Knowledge Management System, Information Management System, and Data Dissemination System) are then described and justifications  for technical choices  are provided. The report also provides  draft technical specifications  and costs  estimate for equipment, software and hardware related to each sub component of the HIS/BIS tool. Finally, an action plan is  suggested to insure a proper implementation of the HIS/BIS at short, mid and long terms. This draft version of the Design Report has been submitted to the client on November 2011.
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report2
1. Background of the Project
A soft copy of the final Design Report, taking into account the comments issued from the workshop which took  place in Addis Ababa on days 12 and13 of January 2012, has been provided to the client in June 2012.
The  hard  copy  of  the final version has been provided to the client  in August 2013, following his agreement on the soft copy
The report has been divided in four volumes:
►   Volumes   1   summarizes   the   project,   and   includes   the   action   plan,   cost   estimates   and implementation phase strategy.
►  Volume  2  includes  the  Institutional  aspects  and  business  processes  internal  for  ABA  and external (with the main stakeholders).
► Volume 3 is dedicated to the HIS part of the project and
► Volume 4 includes all the aspects of the BIS.
1.3 Phase 3: Implementation and Operationalisation Phase
►  Procurement Support: the objective of this task has been to ensure that the required equipment is procured property and in a timely fashion. The main task has been to take the results of the design  phase  and  translate  them  into  the  specifications  and  tender  documents  required  for procurement of a wide range of equipment.
►  Implementation and Operational Support- the objective of this task is to ensure that the system is  implemented  and  made  operational  by  the  Abbay  Basin  Authority.  Tasks  include  providing support  in  acceptance  of  equipment  (measuring  and  laboratory  equipment,  hardware  and software), installation, and support of operation.
►   Human  Resources  Training  and  Development:  this  task  covers  the  entire  chain  of  data collection   to   dissemination   including   assistance   at   each   step   of   the   commissioning   to operationalisation, on the job training and theoretical training for software and specific tools.
1.4 Phase 4: Final Reporting Phase
The  final  report  will  include  the  actual  situation  of  equipment  and  software,  with  all  manuals, annexure, etc.
Design. Development * Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report2. Introduction to the Implementation and Operationalisation Phase
3
2.  INTRODUCTION TO THE IMPLEMENTATION AND OPERATIONALISATION PHASE
2.1 Methodological approach
2.1.1  Key Methodological points
Stakeholder involvement
The BIS as  a tool for facilitating integrated river basin planning and management is  of interest to various  stakeholders  that play  a role in the development of the Abbay  Basin and the Tana-Beles sub-basins, including government institutions  at federal and regional level, education and research institutes, NGOs, the private sector and international organizations.
The BIS integrates a wide range of information and will provide various information and knowledge products. It therefore provides a good opportunity for stakeholders to obtain relevant information at basin- or sub-basin level. The various discussions with stakeholders have shown a clear interest in getting easy and centralized access to this information.
In order to make the BIS as relevant as possible the main stakeholders are associated during the implementation phase at testing stages and beginning of operationalization: for the operation of the system it is crucial to have a good understanding of the institutional responsibilities, linkages, and constraints that might influence the interaction of the stakeholders and the exchange of data.
During   the   implementation   phase,   the   Consultant   is   continuing   the   process   of   inter   active exchanges with stakeholders in order to assess stakeholders needs.
COUTERPARTINVOLVEMENT
The Consultant considers  it is  important that the counterparts  are involved in all the steps  of the consultancy. This  is  a key  principle directly  related to the sustainability  of the system, the transparency of the work, and the appropriation of the output.
Apart from MoWE counterparts, ABA, TaSBBO and BeSBBO staff has been involved in the project since they are the one who actually will work with the system. An important lesson learnt from the Institutional Set-up Studies of the Ethiopian Nile (Abbay) Basin project is that the system will only be tested and implemented after the actual people responsible for its operation start working with it. Staff that will be assigned for the HIS activities  are in this  respect most urgently  needed since especially in the field of data entry and processing (quality control) much work could already start. The activities  which could start immediately, prior to the completion of the Stakeholder Needs Analysis, are as follows:
► Quality control of all hydrological data collected from the Tana and Beles sub-basins and already entered into the HYDATA system
► Data entry and quality control of all historic hydrological data collected from the Tana and Beles sub-basins that has not yet been entered into the HYDATA system
► Collection and data entry of observed monthly rainfall series from meteorological stations in- and around the Tana and Beles sub-basins
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report2. Introduction to the Implementation and Operationalisation Phase
4
►  Collection  and  data  entry  of  observed  daily  rainfall  data  from  selected  meteorological  stations in- and around the Tana and Beles sub-basins
► Collection and data entry of observed monthly series of temperature, sunshine hours, humidity 
and wind speed from meteorological stations in- and around the Tana and Beles sub-basins
The above list only summarizes the most relevant hydro-meteorological data to be entered into the HIS database system..
The proposed activities could be carried out within the Hydrology and Water Quality Directorate of MoWE. More experienced staff of this directorate could initially assist in the quality control. Entry of meteorological data, if not already available in digital format, could either be done in MoWE, or in Bahir Dar at the ABA and TaSBBO office.
A  very  important  effect  of  the  above  activities  is  that  the  staff  a)  will  get  a  better  feeling  of involvement  in  the  on-going  project  activities,  and  b)  is  trained in  data  quality  control  which  is  of over-riding importance in the set-up of a database.
Furthermore, rather than waiting for all systems to be fully developed it has been better to involve ABA, TaSBBO and BeSBBO staff as early as possible in the actual preparation, design and testing of other sub-components  as  well. Staff is  also involved in early  testing of prototype versions  of certain software packages, GIS maps, etc.
FOCUS ON A PRACTICAL IMPLEMENTATION STRATEGY
The ToR and Consultant’s proposal structure the BIS implementation in different phases, making a clear distinction between the inception, design and operationalisation phases. In practice, some of the activities  will overlap and even in the operationalisation phase some re-design might be necessary for some components, based on their testing results. On the same way, the design of the interface between the DSS and the BIS cannot be undertaken before the TB DSS has been developed. By  that time the BIS has advanced into the implementation phase. A certain flexibility and a practical approach is therefore necessary.
Sustainability of the system
The sustainability of the system is a major concern to the Consultant. The following aspects have been regarded:
►  Budget aspects and financial resources are the most crucial issues to be solved in the future after external funds provision will be sold out. Even though the finding of a solution to this issue is out of the scope of the project, it should be mentioned.
► Involvement of counterparts (already mentioned above).
►   Involvement  of  the  stakeholders  in  all  phases  of  the  project.  A  BIS  which  answers  to  the stakeholders needs will be sustainable (already discussed above).
►  While including the required functionalities, do not make the BIS too complex and try to keep it easily manageable. The complexity of the system and its user friendliness will be a factor in the system’s sustainability.  In principle,  systems that  are less complex and more user-friendly will be  more  sustainable.  However,  the  more  functions  the  system  has.  the  more  complex  the system will be and the higher the training requirement. Once the fully trained staff is transferred to  another  position  and  no  trained  replacement  staff  is  available,  part  of  the  system’s functionality  may  no  longer  been  used.  Hence,  in  practice  there  is  a  clear  trade-off  between complexity of the system and sustainability. In addition, the more trained and experienced the staff member is. the sooner he will look for a better paid job in the private sector
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation ol a Basin Information System
Interim Report5
2. Introduction to the Implementation and Operationalisation Phase
►  Create awareness  to  a  wide range of  stakeholders  on  how  useful  the BIS  can  be.  The more people   know   about   the   system   the   higher   the   changes   for   its   use,   improvement   and continuation.  The  Tana  Beles  BIS  will  provide  a  unique  opportunity  to  gather  all  the  existing information  useful  for  the  water  resources  development.  In  this  sense,  it  will  raise  interest  but people will have to know about it and start making use of it.
► Train more specialists than only the ones directly in charge of operating (parts of) the system. This ensures that a pool of back-up specialist staff is available who can operate the system in case someone leaves the organisation. “A system which is not used is a dying system .
►  Ensure clear communications links between the data providers, the end users, and the central BIS.
►  Prioritize the  use of  (open source) software  (i) without  royalty  fees, (ii) with regular upgrades, and  (iii)  with  regular  training  possibilities  or  hotlines.  As  some  customised  development  is required, provide for some maintenance service in the future.
►  Ensure  system  security  through  restricted  user access  levels  and  up-dated  anti-virus  software. In order to protect the integrity of the BIS software and database, different user access levels will  have  to  be  established  which  restrict  the  users'  access  to  certain  modules,  depending  on their  status.  For  example  data  entry  staff  should  only  have  access  to  a  limited  part  of  the system,  whereas  the  system  administrator  should  have  full  access.  In  addition,  as  many computer  systems  in  Ethiopia  are  affected  by  virus  attacks,  an  updated  anti-virus  scanner  is needed.
The Consultant will build on the relative failures of the former systems and the lessons leamt from the past experiences.
Training
Training of staff is  essential to build institutional capacity  for a sustainable operation of the Sub Basin Branch Office (SBBO). Training is  both formal and on-the-job. Especially  the latter type of training is considered important for both the field work and the data entry-, processing-, and quality control. The data entry, processing and quality control of historic data that is not yet entered in the HYDATA system, is  recommended to start by  SBBO staff as  early  as  possible, within the Hydrology Section at MoWE.
Capacity  building of staff from ABA, TaSBBO and BeSBBO has  been undertaken in parallel with the development and testing of the BIS sub-components. The active involvement of managers and technical staff is crucial to ensure that the designed system is highly relevant to the actual working environment, roles and functions of the staff responsible for the BIS implementation.
2.1.2 Implementation strategy
The development of the project is viewed as a gradual process that started from a general analysis and that is  evolving in a more defined and specified system along the way. A certain overlap between the phases cannot be avoided. The final target of the implementation phase will be to put everything together, test the system, train people and make final improvements.
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report2. Introduction to the Implementation and Operationalisation Phase
2.2 Project Monitoring
6
The project implementation involves  several steps  development, installation, testing and training. Throughout the process, there are deliverables. To manage the process, (he Consultant has developed a simple activity  monitoring "tracking" system to keep track  of the various  stages  of project implementation. The proposed system (Table here below) is  currently  developed in MSExcel and includes  the work  plan tasks  (main activities  and sub-activities), columns  for expected accomplishment and actual achievement, both in percentages, a column for remarks  by the Consultant and a column for remarks by the client.
This tracking system is made accessible online (see Figures 6-3 and 6-4 concerning the project's website) to the client and regularly updated. The client has opportunities to make some remarks. There is the possibility for the client and/or stakeholders to view only the main tasks or to look into the details of any given task
The tracking system is  of course linked to the tasks  of the workplan presented on the previous page. The Workplan is also made accessible easily together with the tracking system (website). As for the Workplan, the tracking system is detailed and updated on a regular basis.
Finally, the Consultant also believes  that such a tracking system should not only  consider the technical tasks of the project, but also some potential external risks. This is why a risk assessment and mitigation system will also regularly  be updated and be shown together with the activity monitoring tracking system:
A lot of challenges can be faced during this process. Identification, analysis and mitigation of risks and possible measures to counter these risks need to be prepared in advance. For that reason the Consultant designed a simple risk mitigation/management plan. Not all risks can be foreseen and for some planning mitigation measures might be very difficult.
Risks could be identified for different stages of the project as well as for the entire project. The risks can be related to many different challenges that might impede or delay the work of the Consultant, hamper the achievement of results or affect the sustainability of the BIS.
The risks  are mainly  considered external constraints  which are beyond the direct control of the Consultant. Obviously the work might also be affected by internal problems, such as unavailability of experts due to unforeseen reasons, technical problems, etc. but these should be dealt with by the Consultant and the client. Of course, some of the possible internal problems  could also be determined in order to plan corrective or mitigating actions.
For example, the timely  employment of ABA, TaSBBO and BeSBBO staff and the early involvement of these counterparts  in testing of the BIS are considered crucial to a successful implementation and sustainability of the project.
Table below shows the Consultant's proposal of the Risk assessment management.
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information Svstpm Interim Report2. Introduction to the Implementation and Operationalisation Phase
7
1 Pro^
,!?• AcflvZy
RWi or possible constraint            PmtatOy
MHgafing aettons
Ftemartufromma
Corvsutta ri
Rarrerrtrs from the C Dent
Drta*~d descnpCon of scope and BIS wb-
CniinriB in ino-pvon and d-skyn reports
Consutlari
Utounderslandng. daagRirruni an
to'erpr-caSon at Tcrf< 06 scope.
r«or€*-d outxMs
•
rcWy
- -J<£
•x*’- -,{
A<yitrxn on (Mntoto outputs to works hops 1
and 2
Comutant and
Qtont
Frequent cxnstoMon between toe Ort and the
ConsUtsnt on prqect ntur-i
Czrrwrfars and
Ort
3
1 ■t/fcfe>1 ctxxSrepwrf* rwciurTrn
• -
. mrdtorn .,
Ctose oonscTafcn Cormltant. C*ent/MeW E
ComuRant and
Cfcrt
Tbs rite is s0l esSrrwed m
medium team* the
IrwotrmenC of toe
catoterpnrts to toe proems
must ba Increased
Lo- eauhaXl iwetoerrart
iriedkara-high
hrthwert of main stafc encoders in al phases of
proy-d
CamuRanl and
Oterrt
Price crurxr-i - entoang- 0468
.- mtduni
•
•
tmAcsrt kxrTs to carry out the
P»nwri
tow
Agreement wito Clent prtor to toe taddng Stage
7 (X prepMrScn.
cor<*acltog
CamuRant and
Cfcml
don-
cortr actors
■^. medtom
Or (>9*90 of T0R1 and far nar>
pcWon^woc^             nvx/kyVv^
CormAant ABA
Itar
don.
MaxW hazMtJ oenrrmee during
constructon and topterrrrtzdDn cd
KS erjuomr-rt (spuing sLston. rar
medtim
Ptsmng ot const/uc*uon datog dry season
Consulari
tettoricaf e«oerts
• L                ‘
Con^jCiOn of
ne+M3rt
Delays to toe pooxwmrt poceas
'fa
Ctose fattow up of toe process
if *2 if? -*■? --1 SSfiKr*a»
■
CfertwtJ
ConsUtant
to
z
fi
•I
3.
1
a time estemton addendixn
has been ffcen io the
Comuftant till end of
december 201J. Another
addendum wil be needed to
u/pporl the project till the
end.
Hsi^Scn </Moto
Poor quadey tCT oondkont and
cxnvTBMKMan nsbvort to **<jport
BIS too* • to* mad network
O>.«■ttfirwt n O4~i beam
%&&&
Integrate other optona tor sub-components
dssemtoadon. tor utsrahr uses_
CormJlari
tedmiod a ape da
CiWlil tan^K
Tnaned ddB fcer>o»w tor teOM
ptorfyohs
Ftoanelaf and tectorial tocenaees
Cheat
>S3 v/aUrobtoty
Low miwunaaa to toe aaamundy M
SSOs M to pdto toe toantoad
scafen, cansidertng toe/ewers
inuWlL'1 aa toafr omi pmpertm
•. •’
■ • modhum
/
Any ktod of kneantoe
a*x
Motorabcn m3 commoners cd
1 Unntia^fin
• m*Aen
Close canAtocn wKi deoston mtoera
ConuAMS / C*wa
Retoctance or toabdty al
aiitatoddars to protode req^rad
data
kwMnwt of main statLehddert to ad phases of
'meAam
Consuhanl
OfTcM data rrQtMemrrS
dent
Afxxd data ftfwy.
Stow Hemel oonneefan prrverdng veto portal data storing M 58Os
»n-<
r, . medium ..'
CWdaf data rwytonart
Ckard
f
'O'— —«
Design. Development & Support in Implementation
& Operation of a Basin Information System
Interim Report2. Introduction to the Implementation and Operationalisation Phase
8
2.3 Work plan
A  tentative  overall  work  plan  and  staffing  schedule  was  included  in  the  Consultant’s  proposal.  At the  start  of  the  preliminary  inception  phase  the  plan  was  further  developed  and  the  ToR  of  the various  international  and  national  experts  were  prepared  in  line  with  the  identified  tasks.  A  further work plan was proposed to the Client at the end of the inception phase, which was focusing on the design phase of the project. An actualization of this work plan was done at the submission of the final design report in June 2012.
Due to the delay, it is now proposed an updated Work plan which focuses on the implementation phase, till the end of the project. It includes the activities already implemented and the ones to be implemented in the future. This Work plan is provided on the next page.
During  this  phase,  the  Consultant  is  supporting  the  implementation  of  the  project,  taking  into account all relevant conclusions of the workshop n°2.
It includes the following aspects:
►    Procurement   process:   The   procurement   process   includes   instrumentation,   hardware   and licensed   software,   in   terms   of   providing,   installation   and   operation   start   up.   The   Basin Administration  Directorate  is  in  charge  of  the  procurement  of  these  previous  items.  ABA  and SBBOs will be in charge of the onsite installation of the instrumentation and licensed software and  hardware  with  the  participation  of  the  providers  in  the  framework  of  their  contract.  A support will be provided by the Consultant.
►  Specific developments: Some specifics software s are developed by the Consultant in order to provide  a  global  and  coherent  system.  These  developments  take  place  in  parallel  with  the procurement step.
►   Operation  start  up:  The  testing  of  the  equipments  and  their  operation  start  up  will  be performed jointly by the provider and ABA and SBBOs with the support of the Consultant. This step will be an important on the job training period.
►  Training  sessions:  The  Consultant  support  includes  training  sessions  on  all  the  aspects  of  the implemented  HIS  BIS  system,  during  the  whole  implementation  phase.  It  focuses  mainly  on operation  and  maintenance  of  the  system.  The  providers  of  equipments  will  also  provide  a specific training on their specific equipments.
►   Deployment:  The  following  expert  inputs  will  be  provided  during  this  implementation  period: Training   specialist,   IT   technologies.   Water   quality,   GIS,   Ecology/Environmental   monitoring. Water    Surface    modelling,    Communication    Network,    Software    development,    Institutional, Training, Hydrology, and Hydrogeology.
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report2. Introduction to the Implementation and Operationalisation Phase
9
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report2. Introduction to the Implementation and Operationalisation Phase
10
2.4  Resource
The following figure shows  the current team composition. It has  been updated since some replacements  have been accepted to the client and the Consultant also proposes  to add a "supplementary" assistance of a long term IWRM junior specialist (Simon Thibault) in Ethiopia.
The next pages show the updated Consultant's team deployment for the implementation phase.
Design Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report2. Introduction to the Implementation and Operationalisation Phase
11
Co-Team Leader?*) >
IWRM Expert ;i
nuts sotntH
Co-TeamLeoderf.-
IWRMEipirt.
<y;
y'fcurtrif'Xtl
Project Manager
.     <•<. .ST; -£r
Team Leader
Information System Specialists
fiut-no V'OPaV. ■< it&S
• r’ J K' j <£3
Deputy Team Leader for HIS
Local Representative
Information System Team
1
1
1
1
•
1
1
1
I
1
Hydrotool it
Carols CCRW/UT
Hydromttry Exptrt
L»unM TOCQUEVILLE
HISEiptrt
ViLMA Sw'eshi S/i'fotit
u_
!
Surface Waxr<
W«t«r OutNty Expert
AxelAlWOUfT
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
rVaror Quattyi
HydrogtOIOQltl
MUflAPACR
i
i
r
i
i
r
i
--------------------- (
i
i
i
i
«
i
i
____
Technical Speclallats
InetImUyul SpecHUet i
AenW Tffa- »
Others
p too WAX I It Unit—urotJ ay. nurm tw*i iwatucfJOnul ,<fa to
'
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report2. Introduction to the Implementation and Operationalisation Phase
12
2.5 Expected deliverables
Key  deliverables  will be presented by  the Consultant at workshops  to a larger group of stakeholders (in Addis Abba or elsewhere in the basin) in order to get their feedback, suggestions, and comments. The consultant is  expected to make presentation and provide explanations  to the participants. The cost of participants  of the workshop will be covered by  the Ministry  of Water & Energy. Revised reports following such workshops will be approved by the client with the support of the Technical Advisory Committee.
The following Key deliverables on coming to be presented at the workshops will include:
► Draft Interim Implementation Report
► Draft Final Report
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Badn inr Interim Report
formation System3. Tender process
3. TENDER PROCESS 3.1  Introduction
One of the main task  for the Consultant was  the preparation of specifications  and tender documents  for measuring equipment and associated civil works, specifications  for laboratory equipment and civil works, hardware and software for data entry, processing and storage, and for communication networking between data collection centres, processing centres  and storage centres. The bid document shall specify  post-delivery  support for training and maintenance including calibration.
3.2  Procurement support
3.2.1 Preparation of document
During the workshop held in January  2012, the validation of design principles  and most of the technical specifications  have been approved as  well as  the contract terms  for the tender. Following the Workshop, the consultant has  prepared and submitted a first version of the tender to the Client on February 15,h 2012, and the revised final version on 2nd April 2012.
During the next two months, several exchanges  and discussions  between the client and the consultant enable to agree on the terms  and finalize the tender. The two main points  which has been changed by the client are on the pre bid visit and the payment schedule:
►   The  proposed  field  visit  and  pre  bid  meeting  were  dropped  out  from  the  bidding  data  sheet  7-2 and 7-3:
►    In   the   Special   Conditions   of   contract,   GCC   15-1   the   proposed   payment   schedule   was   adapted in   order   to   take   into   account   the   various  steps  of   the   services:   design,   on   shipment,   installation, commissioning and guarantee. To ensure the quality of service during all the steps,
On July  12lh, 2013, the document has  been sent to the World Bank  for revision by  the Client. Comments  from the World Bank  has  been received on August 24th, 2013. Most of the proposition needed minor change and has  been taken in consideration on the revised version. The main issue raises by the World Bank was to split the procurement into two procurements:
►    Procurement   n°1   with   lot   1   (hydrometry   telemetry   ...)   and   lot   2   (Water   Quality   and   environment equipment)
► Procurement n°2 with lot n°3 (Hardware and software)
Following these comments, Bruno Voron, Team leader of the Consultant team came in Ethiopia to discuss  on the comments  and finalize the tender quickly. As  discussed during Bruno Voron visit, updated version, the client and the consultant provided updated version of the tender document on 1 st of October. The document confirmed client and consultant disagreement concerning this splitting into two procurements for the following reasons:
►   it   is  not  recommended  to  split   into  two  procurements  because  this  solution  excludes  any  chance to    get    only    one    provider.    To    get    only    one    provider    allows    avoiding    interfaces    between contractors    and    their    management.    Avoiding    interfaces    is    particularly    important    in    our    case because    of    the    networks    linking    the    different    kind    of    equipments    even    inside    the    BIS equipments   and   software.   One   procurement   with   3   lots   is   more   flexible   and   allows   choosing   1, 2 or 3 providers depending on the quality and prices of the competitors on each lot.
p J««O0118-Uru
.1                  1 N).<4«Io—
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report3. Tender process
14
►   One   or   two   procurements   are   two   very   different   alternatives;   consequently,   we   are   needing   your final    orientation    concerning    this    issue    before    beginning    the    final    write    up    of    the    tender document.
Following different exchange at the end of the year and early  2013, it has  been accepted by  all parties  to change the tender documents  has  been change from one tender divided in 3 lots  by  one tender divided in 3 components. Moreover, extra minor changed has been done in January 2013.
Finally, the World Bank addressed its no objection on February 2013.
3.2.2  Bidding process
The General Procurement Notice (or the "Supply  and installation of hydrologic  network instrumentation, data acquisition and processing hardware and software’ has  been published on Thursday 28,h of February 2013. Bids must be delivered to the client before 10:00 A.M on 11th April
2013.   During   the   bidding   process,   a   pre-bid   meeting   was   planed   on   15   March   2013   at   Addis Abeba.
Following the announcement, several companies  withdrawn the bidding documents  at the client place. It must be noted that most of these companies  are local agents  which represents international firms.
►  Gilead poly - tender trading
►  GIZA system
►  Kehalie international PLC
►  Hades foreign trade assistant enterprise
►  CSI communications
►  SOMTEC trading PLC
►  Temsae IBE PLC
►  CES consulting engineers
►  PEJU Trading
►  AGAD engineer trade enterprise
3.2.2.1  Clarifica tions
During the first days, some of the companies  requested to the clients  clarifications. Most of them were minor clarifications  on the technical specifications  and administrative aspects. The technical and administrative requests  have been managed one by  one after receiving them by  the Client and the Consultant.
The mains request was an extension from several:
►  Request for a field visit conducted by the Client and the Consultant
►  Request for a bid time extension
For  these  two  requests,  it  has  been  decided  but  unresolved  the  issue  till  the  Pre  bid  meeting  or  the question will be raised will the contractors.
InQinltrie
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation ol a Basin Information System Interim Report3. Tender process
15
3.2.2.2  Pre bid meeting
The pre bid meeting has  been held on March 15th 2013. This  company  has  been conducted by  the client representative (Project Coordinator, Procurement officer) and the Consultant (Deputy  Team Leader and Local representative of BRL). The companies presents are the following:
► Gilead poly - tender trading
► Kehalie international PLC (agent) + SIAP & Micros
► Hades foreign trade assistant enterprise
► SOMTEC trading PLC
► Temsae IBE PLC
► PE JU Trading
► AGAD engineer trade enterprise
The   meeting   has   been   divided   in   two   parts:   a)   presentation   by  the  consultant   of   the  project   and   the tender, b) discussion between the client, the consultant and the bidders.
Different   small   technical   and   administrative   issues   have   been   raised.   It   has   been   agree   to   reply   to the bidders by writing to all these questions on the next days. The two mains issues was regarding:
► Request for a field visit conducted by the Client and the Consultant
► Request for a bid time extension
For   the   first   point,   it   has   been   decided   to   organise   a   join   field   on   25   and   26th   March   (see   next paragraph). Staff from MoWE and consultant firms will assist to the field visit.
For the second point, it has  been informed that if bidders  require more time to finalize technical and financial proposal, a formal letter shall be sent to the client with raison of this  request before taking the decision. The request will be then discuss  and decision will be taken jointly  by  the client, the consultant and the financing institution. Finally, few days  later, it has  been decided to postpone the deadline for two weeks, on 30,h April 2013.
3.2.2.3  Field visit
Pre-bid meeting was held on 15 March 2013 at Addis Abeba.
As  indicated in the BID document in order to understand local site requirements  and local technical aspects, the Bidder must visit most of all hydrometric  field sites  (local stations) and some meteorological and hydro-geological ones  for (he assessment of instrumentation and installation requirements. During Pre-bid meeting was  held on 15 March 2013 at Addis  Abeba, bidders requested to have a group field visit to discuss  all potential problems  and to seek  clarification from the MOWE representative officers on site.
The   clients   accepted   the   bidders’   request   and   organized   a   field   visit   on   25,h.26,h     and   27th     March 2013. This field visit has been conducted by the client representative and the Consultant. Note that:
► Travel cost associated with the field site inspections will be borne by the Bidder and is not reimbursable.
► A certificate signed by MOWE representative will be issued to the Bidder as proof of site inspections and may be included in the proposal as an attachment.
I
I
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report16
3. Tender process
The field visit program has been the following:
No
Date
Item
Participants
1
25 March 2013 - Morning
Arrival of experts at Bahrdar, at Abay Basin Authority (ABA)
Office (9:00 am)
Ministry of Water and Energy, BRL Team. Supplier Team
2
25 March 2013 9:00-
10:00
Briefing regarding the scope of the procurement;
Discussion on the program
Visit of ABA and TaSBBO
facilities
Ministry of Water and Energy, BRL Team, Supplier Team + Abay Basin Authority (ABA)
•♦■Tana Sub-Sasin Brach Office
(TaSBBO) + Beles Sub-Basin Brach Office (BeSBBO) + Bahrdar Hydrology and Meteorology 
Branch offices
4
25 March 2013
10:30-12:30
Visit of Bahrdar Met station and Abbay  at Bahrdar flow gauging station.
All participants
6
25 March 2013 -
13:30- 14:30
Visit of Lake Tana gauge at
Bahrdar
Ad participants
7
25 March 2013
14:30-17:30
Visit   of   Gumara   and   Ribb gauging sites
All participants
10
Day3
27 March 2013
13:30-16:00
(Addis Ababa)
IT Facility Visit at
Hydrology and WQ directorate Groundwater Directorate
Geo-information Directorate
National      Meteorological      Agency (near Bole Airport)
Ministry of Water and Energy, BRL Team, Supplier Team
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System3. Tender process
17
3.3  Bid evaluation
3.3.1 First bid evaluation
After   the   deadline   for   the   bid   submission,   MoWE   and   the   Consultant   noted   that   only   one   firm submits its proposal: Kehalie international PLC.
Despite the bid evaluation was  planned to be gathered beginning of May  to process, MoWE decided to postpone the bid evaluation has  only  one bidder submit its  proposal. This  in order to check  and verify  the procedures  in these circumstances. After verification by  the client legal department and the World Bank  guidelines, the MoWE, bid evaluation has  been preceding end of June.
During the evaluation process, the Client and the Consultant observed that administratively  and technically  the Bidder appears  to fulfil our criteria but with may  pints  for negotiations  left. However, the financial offer was  seemed very  exaggerated as  compared equipment price that the know in hydrology  and meteorology  in Ethiopia. Moreover, the global offer (3 137 131,76 Euros  equivalent) was  quiet more expensive that the estimated budget (1 500 000 Euros). So, the client decided not to go with the offer and to rebid it as soon as possible.
In fact, the offer was decomposed as following:
► Component 1 :
Euros - 1 260 806,62
ETB-19 654 318,20
► Component 2 :
Euros - 768 676, 37
ETB - 1 004 348,20
► Component 3 :
Euros - 136761,00
ETB-2 642 640,00
Following discussion between the different stakeholders in July 2013, it appears that:
► Budget for this evaluation has been increased few month before.
► Cost estimation done during the draft design report has been updated on the final report and do
not take in consideration some equipment and facilities.
Then,   it   has   been   decided   to   proceed   to   a   new   cost   estimation   to   be   able   to   evaluate   the   bid adequately.
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report3. Tender process
3.3.2 Cost estimate during the design phase
The summarized investments are presented here below:
18
Investment
Software
co
CD
hardware
66,275 USD
49,390 USD
co
X
Hydrometry Climatology Groundwater Water quality 
Ecology Teletransmission
914,690 USD
99.457 USD
174,361 USD
421,260 USD
152 550 USD 76 094 USD
Total
1,954,077 USD
3.3.3   Updating estimation during the tender process
The investment cost has  not been updated between the draft and the final design report. The aim is to fulfil the tender document price schedule on MOWE request, in order to have a reliable basis  for comparison with SIAP financial proposal.
The adopted rules for this fulfilling are as follows:
►  Prices from the design phase are used when available,
►     New   quantities,   equipments   or   services   were   added   during   the   discussions   about   the   tender document:    quantities    adopted    are    these    of    the    final    version    of    the    tender    document,    new equipments and new services are those of the final version of the tender document.
►  All prices are out of taxes.
The updating cost estimation is presented on the table here below:
present (august 2013) evaluation
HT USS
% of design cost
BIS
Software
Hardware
86 340
167 888
130%
340%
HIS
hydrometry
climatology
hydrogeology
Waler quality
Ecology
teletransmission
2 540 576
128156
34 595
266 960
243 288
76 094
278%
129%
20%
63%
159%
100%
Total
3 543 897
181%
U iroofj oral!_rar>r..rt* mpor uXXi 1 XJ.te.ur> tea I-----------------------------------------------------------------
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report3. Tender process
From the design evaluation to the present one a global increase of 81 % is noticed. This ratio is 
decreased to 65 % by application of a price escalation coefficient of 5% per year between 2011
and 2013. Design costs estimate was including only investment costs, and didn’t include yearly 
costs for operation maintenance and guarantee. Main increases from design phase to tender
phase are due to the following reasons:
► BIS software: changes in quantities and software types + maintenance and guarantee added.
► BIS Hardware: changes in quantities and hardware types + maintenance and guarantee added.
► HIS hydrometry: Guarantee and maintenance periods, ET contracts, front ends, satellite tele
transmission added.
► HIS climatology: FEWS rain gauges tele transmission added, at the beginning only AWLR
FEWS stations were tele transmitted.
► HIS hydrogeology: rehabilitation of existing wells excluded (taken in charge in the hydro
geological project).
► HIS Water Quality: laboratories buildings excluded (buildings are available in Bahar Dar and
Asosa).
► HIS ecology: maintenance and guarantee added.
3.3.4 Second bid evaluation
After   this   update   of   the   cost   estimation,   a   financial   comparison   between   this   update   and   the   bidder proposal has been done:
► Cost estimation: 2.7 M Euros
► Bidder proposal: 3.1 M Euros
The   difference   between   these   two   costs   has   been   considered   as   minor   and   both,   the   client   and   the World bank decided to enter on negotiation with this bidder.
3.4  Present constitution of the system
The system includes:
► HIS climatological local stations (class 1. 3 and 4: see below)
► HIS 43 Hydrological local stations with sensors (water level, turbidity ...), and data collection
platforms. Some of these stations (5) are dedicated to the floods early warning system (FEWS).
The FEWS system is equipped with a dedicated rainfall network composed of 19 automatic rain
gauges (5 of these are jointed with the related hydrological station). All of these 43 local
stations are included in a Teletransmission network.
►   HIS  ground  water  monitoring  system  composed  of  14  existing  wells  to  be  rehabilited,  and  6  new wells   (under   construction   in   the   frame   of   another   contract)   will   be   installed.   This   system   will   be composed     of     water     level     sensor     and     data     loggers.     These     stations     are     out     of     the teletransmission network.
►    HIS   Communication   network:   the   local   stations   (LS),   i.e.   all   the   43   hydrological   stations   (b), FEWS    and    related    rainfall    network    included,    are    connected    to    a    teletransmission    network    by means   of   local   data   collection   platforms.   Through   this   communication   network,   information   from local   stations   will   be   transferred   to   the   Central   stations   (CS)   of   TaSBBO   and   BeSBBO.   Some processed   information   will   be   transmitted   from   these   CS   to   Secondary   stations   (SS)   (ABA   head quarter, MOWE flood early warning service ...).
p UriMW I It
rpa qpon. QtCO 11V             to I O.
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report20
3 Tender process
►    HIS   qualitative   measurements:   a   water   quality   monitoring   system   will   be   installed,   composed   of portative   and   field   laboratories   equipment.   It   will   include   some   kits   for   environment   monitoring in Tana and Beles basins.
►    BIS   Hardware   and   basic   Software   at   Central   and   Secondary   stations.   Specific   software   for   data processing.
The corresponding logical architecture is as follows:
Addis Ababa
3.5     Work plan for construction, commissioning and OPERATIONALISATION
This work plan will be detailed during the negotiations with the selected bidder.
i
to/ow. ------------------------------------------------------------------ -----------------------------------
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information Svsm Interim Report4. BIS development
21
4. BIS DEVELOPMENT
In this chapter the BIS software is presented from the conception to the realisation.
4.1 Previous phases
4.1.1  Architecture and functionality of the system
The   terms   of   reference   have   broken   down   the   system   into   a   set   of   components   and   attached   to each the following specific objectives:
4.1.1.1  Hydrological information system
The collection of observations  and environmental measurements  is  ensured by  the sub-system called "HIS". These data are acquired from automated measurement stations, collected by  field operators  and analytical results  made in the laboratory. Once transmitted, data is  permanently stored in the HIS. The HIS also ensures  the import of data from other environmental organizations such as, for example, the National Meteorological Agency.
The HIS provides the functions of raw data expertise, data validation and temporal aggregations.
4.1.1.2  Spatial Data System
The SDS is  defined as  the repository  of spatial data necessary  for the understanding of natural phenomena and entropic  and enhancing measurement data as  an indicator of decision support. The nature of spatial data is  multiple: administrative data, data on dam structures, physical geography, satellite observations, etc. The homogeneous  and exhaustive SDS catalogue is documented by metadata and managed by the geographic information system (GIS software).
4.1.1.3  Information Management System
The IMS includes  functions  for calculating Decision Support (HDA) indicators  and interfaces  for extracting data relevant to the calculation of an indicator from the HIS. A first indicator list was proposed in the terms of reference and updated during the design phase.
4.1.1.4  Knowledge Management System
It is  expected that the current system under development be soon complemented by  a modelling and planning tool (Decision Support System). The BIS should be able to provide the necessary data when the KMS is  implemented. Therefore it is  expected that the level of interoperability  of the system be significant in order to communicate with the future KMS.
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Repod4. BIS development
22
4.1.1.5  Dissemination Data System
The DDS is the data information portal on basin water. It provides three basic services:
►    Communication   to   the   public  of   the   role   of   the   institution,   issues   of   water  management  projects in progress and upcoming events related to the life of the basin.
► The dissemination of data of synthesis or specific study: reports, yearbooks, etc.
►  The dissemination of data of validated measurements and spatial data.
4.1.1.6   Non Functional Requirements
More   stringent   requirements   have   been   identified   in   the   terms   of   reference   but   also   in   validation workshops:
►    The   system,   particularly   the   Data   Dissemination   System   must   provide   a   controlled   access   to data.   This   means   that   some   of   the   data   available   on   the   web   portal   be   accessible   only   to authorized users.
►    The   system   must   be   reproducible.   One   of   the   major   challenges   of   this   project   is   to   deploy subsequently  this  system  to  other  basins.  To  do  this,  the  cost  of  the  IT  infrastructure  should  be minima!  and  controlled.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  expected  that  the  staff  of  the  ABA  be  capable  of performing a transfer of competence to future basin organizations.
►   In  general,  the  system  must  have  a  high  level  of  interoperability,  allowing  it  to  share  in  the  short and medium term with other national organizations, see international organizations.
4.1.1.7  Architecture of the software
The diagram below shows her?.' each software component is used:
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report4. BIS development
23
Export data
OD’MiSt rea mi ng® ata Loa d e f
Data
I
Data validation HDA processing
Data
HDA processing ^XX^Hydrotools^ij^l
HDA processing HDA processing
^HS
Data replication H4
t
r^-R^.OiJClN)_fl» JftOX>/O«—.
Design, Development & Support in Implementation A Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report24
4. BIS development
4.1.2 Characteristics of the proposed system
Given   the   aforementioned   requirements,   the   consultant   proposed   a   system   in   line   with   the   needs expressed:
►    The  data  model  used  for  storing  measurement  data  is  a  simple  model,  sufficiently  transversal  to the     thematic     and     environments     discussed:     surface     water,     groundwater,     water     quality, meteorology,   air   quality   and   ecology.   The   semantics   of   this   model   is   defined   and   a   community of scientists and waler managers use it.
►    The   data   model   is   implemented   on   a   Microsoft   SQL   Server   database.   Two   reasons:   first,   it   is imperative    that    the    storage    system    be    powerful    and    efficient.    Then,    among    the    proposed solutions    (SQL    Server,    Oracle.    PostgreSQL,    etc.),    the    software    for    the    operation    of    the database is now only compatible with SQL Server.
The   American   university   consortium   CUAHSI   provides   a   set   of   tools   based   on   the   ODM   model such as:
►  An interface to the remote transmission systems,
►  The data import tools in the ODM base,
►  A management tool for day-to-day observation and measurement data,
►    A  system  of  data  dissemination  based  on  the  format  of  data  on  water  WaterML,  standardized  by the OGC.
This  software as  well as  source code is  freely  available. However, some functions  necessary  for information system management such as  gap filling, management of rating curves, and data validation are not covered by  the CUAHSI tools. Interfaces  for simple data entry  are not included either. Additional software has  been developed to complement the range of CUAHSI tools. They were provided with releases 1 and 2.
4.1.3   GIS aspects
The GIS for (he BIS and HIS project of the Tana Beles Integrated Water Resourrp
Project involves three stages: The inception phase was performed with the objective of olm™ GIS datasets relevant to the project area. Besides, stakeholder consultation and ~9 ,henng
made for the preparation of the design framework of spatial data The -econd oh? !®
a
es .srnent
stage was aimed to provide support to focus on the GIS aspects. Re-projection
the conceptual design of the proposed of the existino spatial data to the
Ri<TJkdeS'?n
■.S W' h        specific
tasks performed during the inception and design time so that supemdston of lev" other is possible. Finally the design phase concluded with a recommendation
of         rit °n<L
lhe
Sensing software and their specification
that can benefit the basin and sub h
and       Remote
interim    report    of    the    third    phase,    i.e.    implementation    reviews    the    list    of    avaihw    a^^or,lies      Th,s
and spatial database available for this project.
4.1.3.1 Key tasks performed during the previous phase?
During the previous phases, the following key tasks were performed
aD,e data layers
► Stakeholder consultations and need assessment, specific GIS products) for future users of lhe BIS.
as <sPalial data, knowledge
Design, Development & Suppod in Implementation & Operation of a < Interim Report
°' a Information System25
4. BIS development
►     Review    existing    geographic    information    systems    and    packages    used    by    main    stakeholders,    in particular    MoWR    Water    Resources    Information    Directorate    and    the    system    developed    by    the Abbay    River    Basin    Team.    Identify    sources    (and    nature    of    spatial    data    sets)    including    other consultancy    services    planned    in    TBIWRDP    which    would    provide    spatial    data    Review    inter relationships and current data exchange protocols between various stakeholders.
►    Preparation   of   the   baseline   maps   of   the   Project   Area   for   use   throughout   the   project   by   other team    members    to    assist    with    issues    such    as    hydro-meteorological    network    evaluation    and design.
►     Cataloguing:    From    the    catalogue    prepared    duplicates    are    identified    sorting    by    name    and examining the dates and the file size so that the duplicates are removed.
►    All   the   GIS   datasets   necessary   for   the   project   are   structured   and   archived   for   easy   access.   The structure   is   self-explanatory.   For    someone   unfamiliar    with   the   project,   it   may   seem   difficult   to determine   in   what   directory   your   desired   information   resides.   However,   much   attempt   has   done behind   the   GIS   data   and   layers   to   get   an   understanding   of   the   data   without   having   to   read   the report.    In    many    cases    the    directory    names    are    shortened    and    without    spaces    to    be    usable across multiple operating systems.
►    A    GIS    directory    is    established   that   contains   all   archive   datasets.   These   datasets   are   readily accessible    through    the    GIS    applications.    Additionally,    ArcMap    project    files    are    also    in    this directory.   In   case   of   running   the   GIS   application   is   made   from   other   than   the   work   station,   the data   location   need   to   be   remapped.   The   GIS   application   is   designed   to   run   from   the   CD   with minimal   effort.   When   you   first   open   the   GIS   ArcMap   project   file,   little   red   **!"   will   appear   next   to the   layer   names   in   the   table   of   Contents.   It   indicates   that   is   cannot   find   the   data.   Simply   right click   on   the   layer   name   and   go   to   Data>Set   Data   Source.   A   navigation   box   will   appear   allowing you   to   locate   the   data   in   the   GIS   directory   structure.   Once   you   have   remapped   the   data   layers, you   may   wish   to   save   the   project   on   your   hard   drive   to   keep   from   having   to   perform   this operation in the future.
► Spatial data layers and map scale are defined; standardizing projection and coordinate system.
► Meta database is developed for the watershed limits of the GIS data.
► GIS software specifications.
4.1.3.2  Data collection
A   number   of   GIS   data   layers   were   catalogued   and   compiled   during   the   inception   and   design   time. All   the   data   in   the  GIS  framework  are  in   ESRI  ArcGIS  compatible  format  and  can  be  accessed  from the    project    workstation.    The    metadata    is    developed    in    the    ArcGIS    with    the    FGDC    metadata standard.   Hence   the   most   effective   way   to   retrieve   the   information   gathered   is   to   use   the   ESRI product   software   like   ArcGIS   and   Arc   View.   The   historic   data   which   can   normally   be   called   the primary  is  deposited  and  validated  in  which  no  editing  is  made  on  it.  The  copies  of  archival  data  are supplied   to   the   project,   where   editing   and   analysis   could   be   possible   to   the   context   of   the   project need.   The   table   below   list   the   available   data,   the   study   has   attempted   to   collect   for   the   present project.
Furthermore. GIS maps produced together with their attribute data that can be integrated in the
SDS of the GIS datasets. This will help for the BIS which is implemented as web portal where the
GIS system can be interfaced and users will have access to download the spatial data in native
formats.
All spatial information stored as  mentioned in 1.2 is  converted to the following formats  which are assumed to be compatible and used in a conventional and most widely  used GIS and Remote sensing software.
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report4. BIS development
26
Tabic 2: Spatial data and their respective file format designed to be disseminated by the web porta!
Spatial Representation Type
File Format
■Vector File
Shape file (.shp)
Raster File
GeoTiff, Erdas Imagine
DEM
USGS ASCII DEM, Tiff, Erdas Imagine (,img)
Maps
ArcMap (.mxd)
The current project has prepared maps with different scale and as per user requirement and mentioned herewith.
__------------ ----
_____________ __________________ __ _______
ptow**)0 lopment & support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System27
4 BIS development
Table 3: Spatial data available for the project
Theme domain
Dataset name
Format
Description
Scale/
Resolution
Custodian
Currency
Administrative
boundary
Zone boundary Woreda boundary Kebele boundary
Shape files
This data set contains the shape files of the administrative boundaries to the lowest structure that is Kebele produced by CSA.
NA
CSA
2007
Catchment
boundary
Abay.B, Lake Tana, Tana Sub basin, Tana Beles small sub basins, Tana Beles sub basin
Shape files
The boundary of the Tana Beles sub basin extracte from the big Abay basin. Data accessed from Abay master plan study.
d          NA
MoWE
2006
Topomaps
Refer on the figure
above
Img files
Scanned topo maps and georeferenced
1:50,000
EMA
1994
Satellite images
ASTER
tif
The gdem data is jointly produced by the US (NASA) and Japan (METI)
15m
This project
2010
Landsat
tif
The dataset contains time series of Landsat ETM images for part of Ethiopia
30m
This project
2010
DEM
img
These data are basically from SRTM with 90m resolution and resample to 30m
30m
This project
variable
SPOT
img
SPOT image of the upper beles sub basin
5m
This project
2008
Thematic maps
Geology
Shape file
The geology map of Abay basin
NA
GSE
unknown
Land
Shape file
NA
Soil
The data set contains soil class, soil loss, soil depth and erosional hazard
NA
Drainages
Abay R, Tana jivers, Tana_Beles rivers, Drainages
Shape files
Data extracted from DEM are detail to the minor tributary level. The drainage data covers for the whole Abay basin including the lakes.
NA
BRL
2010
Infrastructure
Dams
Shape files
Irrigation & hydropower Dam constructed ..
NA           | IWMI, MoWE
P
j»pcn c<Xj: I            *fidxr /
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report4. BIS development
28
Theme domain
Dataset name
Format
Description
Scale/
Resolution
Custodian
Currency
Health center &
Hospitals
Point location of Hospitals & health centers.
ILRI
Roads
All roads existing in the Tana-Beles
Scanned maos
BOFED Amhara
Geological map
JPEG
Geological map of Ethiopia
1:2.000.000
GSE
1996
Geological map North
JPEG
Geological map of North western Plateau
1:1.000.000
GSE
Hydrogeological map
Databases
precipitation
■
JPEG
Hydrogeological map of Ethiopia
1:2.000.000
GSE
1988
Excel
Rainfall dala for the stations found in Abhay basin with their period of recording.
NA
MoWR. NMA
Population
Excel
The population size of Ethiopia Io the level of the Woreda.
NA
CSA
Monthly runoff
Excel
Hydrometric discharge data for the river flows in Abbay basin with their period of recording.
NA
MoWE
Sediment
Excel
Hydro-sediment logical data for the rivers in Abbay basin
NA
MoWE
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report4. BIS development
29
4.1.3.3  Maps Prepared
Here are the list of maps  prepared during inception and design phase which the specialists  used for their reporting and analysis. These maps  are presented in the design as  well as  inception reports and summarized below.
Table 4: List of Maps produced
No.
Thematic map
File name
File format
Watershed limits
1
Location map
Localion Map
ESRI (.mxd)
Tana Beles
2
Topographic map
Elevation map
ESRI (.mxd)
Tana Beles
3
Hydrometeorology gauging stations
Gauging stations
ESRI (.mxd)
Abay Basin
4
Meteorological stations
Existing meteo stations
pdf
Tana Beles
5
Flood Early warning systems
FEWS
ESRI (.mxd)
Tana Beles
6
Land cover map
Landcover dasses waterwatch
ESRI (.mxd)
Abay Basin
7
Proposed meteorological stations
Proposed meteo stations
pdf
Tana Beles
8
Updated land cover
map
Landcover_TBHIS BIS
ESRI (.mxd)
Tana Beles
9
Hydrometric stations
Hydrometric stations A4
pdf
Tana Beles
10
Ground water
monitoring
Proposed ground water monitoring
network
pdf
Tana Beles
11
Upgrading hydrometric network stations
Proposed hydrometric network stations
pdf
Tana Beles
12
Geology map
Geology lana beles
pdf
Abay Basin
13
Water quality and
sediment stations
Proposed water quality and sediment
stations
pdf
Tana-beles
p tamMSQO1 W Ur»ibata.taIlk.**
~~ ”
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report4. BIS development
30
4.2 Implementation: Contents of release n°1 (June 2012)
The overall objective of release No. 1 is to provide the users all the functionality required for:
►  Management of reference data: stations, variables, networks, measurement units, etc.
►  Entering measurement and observation data and their import into the database.
►  Importing existing data and import of data from partner organizations.
The 1 & 2 functionalities  of the release are specifically  targeted to personal of SBO that are in charge of data collection. Functionality  3 is  dedicated to the ABA staff that is  responsible for data collection from the National MeteorologicalAgency (NMA) and the production of HDA indicators.
The software packages contained in the No. 1 release are:
Software packages
Role and functionalities
SQL Server Express 2008
RDMS used for training purposes  only. SQL server 2008 will be delivered by  the supplier: 1 instance per SBO, 2 instances  at the ABA.
ODM Data Loader
Used  toimport  repository.stations,  variables,  etc.  This  is  software provided by CUAHSI.
Data Manager
Used toimport observation data and data coming from stakeholders. This  software has  been developed in-house to convert HYDATA, NMA and MoWR proprietary  formatted data into CUAHSI Data Loader format. This  tool incorporates  CUAHSI libraries.
Data Capture
Provides measurements data entry forms to the user.
Data capture forms Editor
A simple tool used to create dedicated forms  by  selection of targeted stations, variables. This  tool incorporates  CUAHSI data access libraries.
The software is provided as a setup package (msi installer)
From the information provided by  the various  expert speakers, a complete list of stations  and a description of the variables  was  established as  an Excel file. File data were then converted to the CUAHSI Data Loader format. A key  objective of the training No. 1 was  to train personnel of the ABA and SBO on importing reference data and updating them when necessary.
Repositories established and stored in the database are presented here below
4.2.1 Site repository
4.2.1.1 Water quality sites
SiteCode
SiteName
Latitude
Longitude
Comments
BE-Bel-1-1
Beles Basin Head
11.73768958
36.84995415
Waier Station - Baseline
BE-Bel-1-15 'BE-Bel-1 16
Beles after irrigation area before
confluence
Beles Before confluence
11,17189623
10.92131993
r 36.29261547 35.21426626
Water & Sediments Station ■ Impact
Water & Sediments Station - Im nan
BE-Bel-1-3
BE-Bel-1-4
Beles after irriqation area after confluence Beles after Dangur planned dam before irriqation area
11,14925345
11.12963462
36.2702195 35,82732478
W ater
-    & Sediments Station - Impact
Water & Sediments Station - Impact
BE-Bel-1-5
Downstream of Beles
10.91824182
35.20738985
BE-Bel-1-7
Beles tributary irrigation area before confluence with Beles
10,91441803
35.21508544
Waler & Sediments Station - Im- art
.   -- ------------- '-'kuuun iiiipaci Water I Sediments Station - Impact
_______ —------------------------------------------
Design. Developmen't  & Suppornt jnmimplyementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report
---------------- - --------------------- ----------------------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------- —4. BIS development
31
SileCode               $
>i(eName
.atitude
Longitude
Comments
BE-Bel-1-8
kies Before Dangur planned Dam
11.00251482
36.03430339
Water Station - Trend
BE-Bel-1-9
kies irrigation area 1
11,4436766
36.48944382
Water Station - Trend
BE-Bel-2-2
Beles after upper Beles planned dam
11,67817148
36.73803917
Water & Sediments Station - Impact
BE-Bel-2-6
3eles Tributary Basin Head
10.68954334
35.59303296
Waler Station - Baseline
BE-Bel-3-10
Beles irrigation area 2
11.08675524
35.38303252
Water Station - Trend
BE-Bel-3-14
3eles Tributary irrigation area
10,880048
35.36354565
Water Station - Trend
BE-Gil-1-13
Downstream  of  Gilgel  Beles  before confluence with Beles
11,15733179
36,33156218
Water Station - Impact
BE-Gil-3-12
Gilgel Beles after Chagny planned dam
11,11018707
36.57876343
Water & Sediments Station - Impact
BE-Gil-4-11
Gilgel Beles Basin Head
11,17792961
36.76488454
Water Station - Baseline
LT-Abb-1-17
Exit of the Tana Lake Before Bahir Dar
11,61605421
37.40988308
Water & Sediments Station - Trend
LT-Abb-1-36
Abbay after Bahir Dar
11,58733916
37.41025308
Waler Station - Impact
LT-Gil-1-18
Downstream of GilgelAbbay  before Lake
Tana
11,83454505
37,11991518
Water & Sediments Station - Impact
LT-Gil-2-22
GigelAbbay  after  planned  dam  in  irrigation area
11,4816926
37,00443955
Water & Sediments Station - Impact
LT-Gil-2-27
GilgelAbbay  upstream before irrigation
area
11.33840086
37.00024035
Water Station - Trend
LT-Gil-2-38
GilgelAbbay after Merawi
11,42486589
37,14755638
Water Station - Impact
LT-Gil-2-48
GilgelAbbay  after  confluence  -  Before irrigation area
11,37062458
37.02983395
Water & Sediments Station - Trend
LT-Gil-3-24
GilgelAbbay irrigation area
11,64792105
37.12004089
Water Station-Trend
LT-Gil-4-25
GilgelAbbay Tributary Basin head 1
11,09383469
37,08309153
Water Station - Baseline
LT-Gil-4-26
GilgelAbbay Tributary Basin Head 2
11.12425793
36,93201605
Water Station - Baseline
LT-Gil-4-28
GilgelAbbay Basin Head
11,3624639
36,85588239
Water Station - Baseline
LT-GiM-37
GilgelAbbay Tributary Basin Head 3
11.39166781
37,17777088
Water Station - Baseline
LT-Gil-4-39
GilgelAbbay   Tributary   before   confluence after irrigation area
11.54866337
37.06736822
Water Station - Impact
LT-Gi-4-40
GilgelAbbay  before  Gilgel  dam.  after Wetel-Abay& irrigation area
11,43337882
37.01527179
Waler Station - Impact
LT-Gil-4-43
GilgelAbbay Tributary before confluence
11,47232067
36.9882981
Water Station - Impact
LT-Gum-1-15
Gumara before Tana Lake
11.89220122
37.50572924
Water & Sediments Station - Impact
LT-Gum-2-13
Gumara after confluence
11.78581856
37.7698619
Water & Sediments Station - Trend
LT-Gum-3-12
Gumara after planned Dam
11.76589183
37.79736655
Water Station - Impact
LT-Gum-3-14
Gumara irrigation area
11.83802084
37.63991659
Water Station - Impact
LT-Gum-4-29
Gumara Tributary Basin Head 1
11.66104137
37.98345597
Waler Station - Baseline
LT-Gum-4-30
Gumara Tributary Basin Head 2
11.86453351
37.89178054
Water Station - Baseline
LT-Gum-4-41
Gumara Tributary before confluence 1
11.78458618
37.78299339
Water Station - Trend
LT-Gum-4-42
Gumara Tributary before confluence 2
11.76283624
37,78679695
Water Station-Trend
LT-Gum-4-9
Gumara Basin Head
11.72130459
38.10064376
Water Station - Baseline
LT-Jem-3-19
Jema after Koga planned Dam in
irrigation area
11.20597714
37.17347216
Water & Sediments Station - Impact
LT-Jem-4-21
Jema Basin Head
11.10131251
37.27056166
Water Station - Baseline
LT-Kog-3-20
Koga  after Jema Planned  dam - Before irrigation area
11.34268002
37.12811897
Water & Sediments Station - Impact
LT-Kog-4-23
Koga Basin Head
11,19759308
37.26897807
Water Station - Baseline
LT-Lak-1-5
Downstream  of  Lake  Tana  Tributary Before Lake Tana
12.24370175
37.11187716
Water & Sediments Station - Impact
LT-Lak-2-34
Lake Tana Tributary after irrigation area 1
12.26263883
37.30724877
Water & Sediments Station - Impact
LT-Lak-2-4
Lake Tana Tributary before Irrigation Area
12.31304652
37.10160653
Water Station - Trend
LT-Lak-2-47
Lake Tana Tributary after irrigation area 2
12.15815882
37.58113702
Water & Sediments Station - Impact
LT-Lak-3-35
Lake Tana Tributary alter city Koladiba
12,40793556
37.323491
Water Station - Impact
LT-Lak-3-45
Lake  Tana  Tributary  before  Tana  Lake after irrigation area
12.27612074
37.39627149
Water & Sediments Station - Impact
LT-Lak-4-3
Lake Tana Tributary Basin Head
12.38421789
37.0528088
Water Station - Baseline
LT-Lak-4-33
Lake Tana Tnbulaiy Basin Head
12.52566656
37.34183386
Water Station - Baseline
LT-Lak-4-44
Lake Tana Tnbutary alter makseqnil
12.38011898
37.53260715
Water Station - Impact
LT-Lak-4-4G
Lake Tana after TwonEntranz
12.21936278
37.6252179
Water & Sediments Station - Impact
LT-Meg-1-1
Downtream of Megech before Tana Lake
12.26385421
37.37045861
Waler & Sediments Station - Impact
LT-Meg-2-10
Megech after planned dam before
12 4790605
I 37,4488620=
| Waler & Sediments Station - Impact
ng^nlfric
;
.M®Ort.OLQ0,                 CXvi , Ln«-> ».«
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report4. BIS development
32
SileCode
SiteName
latitude
Lonaitude
Comments
irrigation area
LT-Meg-4-2
M ecech Basin Head
12.61290195
37.52870337
Water Station - Baseline
LT-Rit>1-8
Downstream of Ribb Before Tana Lake
11.99090865
37.58338946
Water & Sediments Station - Impact
LT-Rib-2-11
Ribb after planned dam
12,04680111
37.9812922
Water & Sediments Station - Impact
LT-Rib-2-49
Ribbirrioalion area
11,99581165
37.71724283
Waler Station - Trend
LT-Rib-3-32
Ribb Tributary after Addis Zemen
12.08818695
37.76510174
Water Station - Impact
LT-Rib-3-7              Ribb Before inxiabon area
12,02603689
37.80570206
Water Station • Trend
LT-Rib-4-31            Ribb Tributary Basin Head
12.17608971
37.82603112
Water Station - Baseline
LT-Rrb-4-6              Ribb Basin Head
11,8136518?
38.18502149
Water Station - Baseline
LT-Tan-1-16           Lake Tana
12.02171783
37.30273741
Water & Sediments Station - Lake
4.2.1.2     Hydrological sites
SiteCode
SiteName
Latitude
Longitude
Comments
111001
Lake Tana at Bahir Dar
11.6
37,39
sensor for waler level recording
111002
GilgelAbbay near Merawi
11.3642
37.035
FEWS * turbidity
111003
Koga near Merawi
11.3718
37.0437
sensor for water level recordinq
111004
Lake Tana at Gorpora
12.2402
37.3016
sensor for waler level recording
111005
Ribb near Addis Zemen
11.9939
37.711
sensor for water level recording* turbidity
111006
Gumara near Bahir Dar
11.8383
37.6364
FEWS* turbidity
111007
Megech near Azezo
12.4872
37,4473
FEWS* turbidity
111009
Upper Ribb near Debre Tabor
12,04
37,99
sensor for water level recording
111010
Anaareb near Gonder
12,6453
37.4821
sensor for waler level recordinq
111011
Lake Tana at Kunzila
11.9
37
• staff qauqe only
111014
Gelda near Ambessame
11.709
37.6379
sensor for waler level recordinq
111015
Ribb near Case
11.8
38.15
sensor for water level recording
111016
Gemero near Maksegnit
12.3905
37.551
sensor for water level recordinq
111017
Feqoda near Arboebeya
11,6287
37,7577
sensor for waler level recordinq
111018
Gamo near Infranz
12,2365
37,6283
sensor for waler level recordinq
111019
GilgelAbbay near Chimba
11,7062
37.1684
FEWS* turbidity
111021
Amen al Dangila
11,26
36.85
sensor for water level recordina
111022
Killitlie near Durbele
11.4771
36.9559
sensor for water level recordinq
111023
Dirma near Kola Diba
12.4271
37.3262
FEWS* turbidity
112003
Abbay al Bahir Dar
11.59
37,41
sensor for water level recording* turbidity
113033
Quashini near A Kidame
11.2
36.87
sensor for water level recording
116004
Gilgef Beles near Mandura
11 1658
36.3383
sensor for water level recording
116005
Main Beles a! Bridge
11,1997
36.3265
sensor for waler level recording
4
Kerari near Addis Zemen
12.1197
37.8399
sensor for water level recording
T00001
Gondar reservoir
0
0
sensor for water level recording
T00002
Koo a reservoir
0
0
sensor for water level recordinq
T00003
Ribb reservoir
0
0
sensor lor waler level recordinq
T00004
Beles at Dangur
11,14
35,83
sensor for water level recording* turbidity
T00005
Lower Beles u/s Renaissance reservoir 1
11.06
35.45
temporary
T00006
Lower Beles u's Renaissance reservoir 2
11,1327
35,4708
postponed
T00007
Upper Beles d/s tailrace HP
0
0
T00010
Enjebara Pal
10.98
36.92
real time ram qauqe for FEWS
T00011
Merawi
11,41
37.15
real time rain naimp fnr fpia/q
T00012
Sekela
11
37.22
real lime rain naune W pcia/q
T00013
AmGebeya
11.63
37.74
real time rain nauno fr»r ccia/c
T00D14
Adds Zemen
12,13
37.78
T00015
Hamusi!
11.78
37.55
700016
MekaneYesus
11.6
38 06 ~
T00017
Woceta
11.92
,
37.68 '
T00318
Tnnr ia
AmbaGiogts
.
T00020
12,77
17
37.6 f
jeal time ram gauge for FEWS real bmc ram gauge for FEWS real time ram oauqe for FEWS real bme ram gauge for FEWS
Bahir Dar
11.6
37.42
37.4?
T00021
Gassaie
11.79
38.14
T00022
Debre Tabor
11.85
real time rain gauge for FEWS
real time rain qauqe for FEWS
iuji urne ram qa jqe for FEWS
38.01
T00023
Dangeta
11.25
36.83
ieal bme ram qauqe for FEWS
real bme ram gauge lor FEWS
Design. Development & Suppon in Implementation & Operation ol a Basin Information System Interim Report4. BIS development
33
SileCode
SiteName
Latitude
Longitude
Comments
NMA004
Bahir Dar
11.603
37,322
NMA precipitation station
NMA009
Dangila
11.434
36.846
NMA precipitation station
NMA016
Oebre Tabor
11.867
37,995
NMA precipitation station
NMA017
Gondar
12.521
37.432     NMA precipitation station
NMA020
Chagni
10.974“]
36.499
NMA precipitation station
NMA023
Motta
11,074
37.89
NMA precipitation station
NMA027
Pawe
11.312
36.41
NMA precipitation station
4.2.1.3    Ecological sites
SileCode
SiteName
Latitude
Longitude
Comments
TB_Aquatic-1
Tana shore at Tana Hotel,
11.60386
37 39416
Source # 3: Mengistu Seyoum, ns Abay 11 HP EIA (Ccyne et Belief et al. 1997)
TB_Aqualic-2
Abay source at Abay bridge;
11.60495
37.408
Source ft 3 : Mengistu Seyoum, Tis Abay II HP EIA (Ccvne et Befer et al. 1997).
TB_Aquatic-3
Abay upstream (Pedagogycollege);
11.60085
37.38256
Source ft 3: Mengistu Seyoum. Tis Abay II HP EIA (Coyne et Beiier et al 1997)
TB_Aquatic-4
Abay downstream (Mendel Andassa);
11.529
37.457
Source ft 3 : Mengistu Seyoum. Tis Abay II HP ELA (Ccyne et Belief et al. 1997).
TB_Aquatic-5
Abay downstream (head race for Tis Abay 1
11.4678
37.58661
5
Source ft 3 : Mengistu Seyoum, Tis Abay II HP EIA (Ccvne et Beiier et al. 1997).
TB Land Resource
TR-1
BRL Training site - terraced slopes below Site ID 2.
11.605058
37.46102
9
NULL
TB.Land Resource.
TR-2
BRL Training site - sleep partly 
vegetated slope between fields
11.605558
37.4601
NULL
TB Land Resource
TR-3
BRL Training site - valley margin with gullied lands
11.60685
37 45999
NULL
TB Land Resource
TR-4
BRL Training site - Field with shelterbelts around edges
11.609317
37.45831
4
NULL
TB_Land_Resource
TR-5
BRL Training site - meandering channel in grassland / wetland with
gullies
11 612705
37.46573
NULL
TB Land Resource
TR-6
BRL Training site - steep well
vegetated slope below plateau
11.607985
37.4737
NULL
TB.Land Resource
TR-7
BRL Training site - arable fields with SWC hedging
11.60449
37.47068
2
NULL
TB_Land_Resource_
TR-8
BRL Training site - arable fields 
encroaching onto grazinq lands
11.61456
37.4728
NULL
TB-Vegetalion-1
Near Abbay Bridge, left bank, on Gondar Road
11.60361
37.41046
Source ft 1: ZerihunWoHu. Tis Abay 11 HP EIA (Coyne et Beiier et al. 1997)
TB-Vegetalion-10
Chiwahit 2
12.33
37.21
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoWu in: BusuNva et al 2008.
TB-Vegelation-11
Delgi Island 1
11.908
37298
Source ft 2: by ZerfounWoWu in. Busu**3 el 812008.
TB-Vegelalion-12
Delgi Island 2
11.92
37.26
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoidu tn: Bus uh* a el al 2008.
TB-Vegelation-13
Enfranz 1
12.305
37 305
Source ft ? by ZenhunWoWu in: Busu*wa et al 2008.
TB-Vegelalion-14
Enfranz 2
12.36
37.26
Source ft 2: by ZenhunWoIdu in. Busuh^a et al 2008.
TB-Vegelation-15
Wetland. Fogera plain
11.94
37.6
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWddu in Susutwa et al 2008.
TB-Vegelalion-16
Gerimawelland
11.61
37.374
Source ft 2. by ZechunWoUu in Busutoa cl ai?008.
T6-Vegelalion-17
Gorgora Hill
12235
37.305
Source ft 2: by ZenhunWokJu m BusuMa et al 2008.
TB-Vegetation-18
GorgoraHolel
12.258
37 308
Source ft 2. by ZenhunWoldu in: 8usuh*a el al 2008.
TB-Vegetalion-19
Hamuslt
11.79
37.55
Source ft 2 by ZenhunWoIdu m. Busuh*a el 812008
lk2i^L-v2M'<^2£
Design. Development & Support, in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report34
4. BIS development
SiteCode
SiteName
Latitude
Longitude
Comments
TBVegetation-2
Right bank Abbay downstream of Bahir Dar
11.56686
37.40252
Source ft 1: ZerihunWoldu, Tis Abay II HP EIA (Coyne el Belier el al. 1997).
TB-Vegetation-20
River Gumara
11.87
37.61
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoldu in: Busulwa et al 2008.
TB-Vegetation-21
Kola Diba 1
1142
37.32
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoldu in: Busulwa el al 2008.
TB-Vegelation-22
Kola Diba 2
12.472
37.366
Source H 2: by ZerihunWoldu in: Busulwa et al 2008.
TB-Vegetatton-23
Kunzila
11.88
37.03
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoldu in: Busulwa el al 2008.
TB-Vegelalion-24
Maksegnit
11456
37.586
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoldu in: Busulwa et al 2008.
TB-Vegetation-25
SerseDingilGuzara Palace
12.33
37.62
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoldu in: Busulwa et al 2008
TB-Vegetation-26
TeraGedam
12.196
37.809
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoldu in: Busulwa et al 2008.
TB-Vegetation-27
TeraGedam Road
12.189
37.783
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoldu in: Busulwa el al 2008.
TB-Vegetalion-28
TeraGedam top
12.198
37.783
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoldu in: Busulwa et al 2008.
TB-Vegelatkxi-29
WawaFogera .farm land
12.273
37.32
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoldu in: Busulwa el al 2008.
TB-Vegelation-3
Church woodland. 5 9km E of Abbay Bridge al Bahir Dar
11.60496
37.46219
Source# 1: ZerihunWoldu, Tis Abay II HP EIA (Coyne et Belier et al. 1997).
TB-Vegetation-30
Wawapump area
12.338
37.373
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoldu in: Busulwa et al 2008.
TB-Vegetation-31
Zege Ararat
11.7
37.35
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoldu in: Busulwa el al 2008.
TB-Vegetation-32
Zeoe Forest
11.69
37.34
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoldu in: Busulwa el al 2008.
TB-Vegetation-33
ZegeWegelsaTerara
11.621
37.33
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoldu in: Busulwa et al 2008.
TB-Vegetalion-34
ZegeWetland
11.72
37.32
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoldu in: Busulwa el al 2006.
TB-Vegctalion-4
Riverine woodland. Abbay right bank. 1.9 km west of Tisisat
11.48987
37.57025
Source ft 1: ZenhunWoldu. Tis Abay II HP EIA (Coyne et Belier et al, 1997).
TB-Vegetalion-5
Woodland, on edge of built up a ea.
r
11.48578
37.58579
450 SW of Tisisat falls
Source ft 1: ZerihunWoldu, Tis Abay II HP EIA (Coyne el Belier el al. 1997).
TB-Vegetation-6
Near Abbay downstream of Tana
11.539
37.402
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoldu in: Busulwa et al 2008.
TB-Vegetation-7
Azezo
12.537
37.475
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoldu in: Busulwa et al 2008.
TB-Vegetalion-8
Bahir Dar
11.59
37.38
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoldu in: Busulwa et al 2008.
TB-Vegelat>on-9
Chiwahft 1
11391
37.258
Source ft 2: by ZerihunWoldu in. Busulwa el al 2008.
Remarks :
► "Koga reservoir". "Gondar reservoir". "Beles at Dangur and Upper Beles d/s tailrace HP" need to be geo-localized.
► Codes and names of water quality and ecology stations are temporary They will be unriaiPd when the MoWRtransmits definitive codes and names. Same remark for new hvdrnlnnXi
stations with codes from T0001 to T00023.
► KerariZemen site code is probably wrong.
new nydr°logical
►  Localization of the ecological sites Gorgora Hill and Gorgora is wrong and needs to be updated
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report4. BIS development
35
4.2.2 Variable repository
4.2.2.1 Water quality sites
Code
Variable Name
Units
Spe
ciation
Value Type
Data Type
General Category
AIRTEMP
Temperature
deqC
Field Observation
Continuous
Water Quality
AL
Dissolved Aluminium
ug/L
Al
Sample
Continuous
Water Quality
BOD5
B0D5
mg/L
02
Sample
Continuous
Water Quality
CA
Calcium
mg/L
Ca
Sample
Continuous
Water Quality
CHLO
Chloride
mg/L
Cl
Sample
Continuous
Water Quality
CLAR
Secchi depth
m
Field Observation
Continuous
Water Quality
COD
COD
mg/L
02
Sample
Continuous
Water Quality
COLI
Coliform, total
CFU/100 ml
Sample
Continuous
Waler Quality
COLO
Color
mg/L
PI
Field Observation
Continuous
Water Quality
COND
Electrical conductivity
uS/cm
Field Observation
Continuous
Water Quality
DOC
Carbon, dissolved organic
mg/L
C
Sample
Continuous
Water Quality
ECOLI
E-coli
CFU/100 ml
Sample
Continuous
Water Quality
ENASP
Water aspect
code
Field Observation
Categorical
Waler Quality
ENBANK
Appearance of banks
code
Field Observation
Categorical
Water Quality
ENCARB
Hydrocarbons trace
code
Field Observation
Categorical
Water Quality
ENCOLO
Water color
code
Field Observation
Categorical
Water Quality
ENHYDR
Hydrological observed
situation
code
Field Observation
Categorical
Water Quality
ENLEA
Leaves or aquatic plants
code
Field Observation
Categorical
Water Quality
ENLIMP
Limpidity
code
Field Observation
Categorical
Water Quality
ENMETEO
Meteorological conditions
code
Field Observation
Categorical
Water Quality
ENMUD
Floating mud
code
Field Observation
Cateoorical
Water Quality
ENODO
Odour
code
Field Observation
Caleqorical
Water Quality
ENOTH
Other bodies
code
Field Observation
Cateq orical
Water Quality
ENSAM
Sample type
code
Field Observation
Caleqoncal
Water Quality
ENSCUM
Surface scum
code
Field Observation
Caleqorical
Waler Quality
ENSHAD
Shade
code
Field Observation
Categorical
Water Quality
ENSILL
Sill
code
Field Observation
Cateoorical
Water Quality
FE
Dissolved Iron
ug/L
Fe
Sample
Continuous
Water Quality
FSTREP
Streptococci, fecal
CFU/100 ml
Sample
Continuous
Water Quality
HCO3
Bicarbonate
mg/L
HCO4
Sample
Continuous
Water Quality
K
Potassium
mg/L
K
Sample
Continuous
KNIT
Waler Quality
Nitrogen, total Kjeldahl
mg/L
N
Sample
Continuous
Waler Quality
MG
Magnesium
mg/L
Ma
Sample
Continuous
MN
Water Quality
Manganese
ug/L
Mn
Sample
Continuous
Water Quality
NA
Sodium
mg/L
Na
Sample
Continuous
NH4
Water Quality
Nitrogen, NH4
mg/L
NH4
Sample
Continuous
Water Quality
NO2
Nitrogen, nitnte (N02)
nitrogen
mg/L
N02
Sample
Continuous
Water Quality
NO3
Nitrogen, nitrate (N03)
mg/L
N03
Sample
Continuous
02
Water Quality
Oxygen, dissolved
mg/L
02
Field Observation
02SAT
Continuous
Water Quality
Oxygen, dissolved percent of saturation
%Sat
02
Field Observation
Continuous
Waler Quality
PH
pH
pH
Field Observation
Continuous
P04
Water Quality'.
Phosphorus, ortophosphate
mg/L
P04
Sample
Continuous
Water Quality
PSTAPH
Palhoqenic Staphylococci
CFU/100 ml
Sample
Continuous
Water Quality
SI02
Silica
mg/L
SiO2
Sample
Continuous
S04
Waler Quality
Sulfate
mg/l
S04
Sample
Continuous
Waler Quality
SULRED
Bacl spore sulfilo-red
CFU/100 ml
Sample
Continuous
Waler Quality
SWTEMP
Temperature
degC
Field Observation
Continuous
Water Quality
TAC
Hardness, carbonate
mg/L
Derived Value
Continuous
Waler Quality
TDS
Solids, total Dissolved
mg/L
Field Observation
Continuous
Water Quality
TH
Hardness, total
mg/l
Derived Value
Continuous
Waler Quality
f tarrUrtSOO I ts .Urw M teU
rtarri.rvpta
1M _ai«. Uh due* J tk»x
'
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report4. BIS development
36
Code
Variable Name
Units
Spe
ciation
Value Type
Data Type
General Category
TOC
Carbon, total organic
mq/L
C
Sample
Continuous
Water Quality
TPHOS
Phosphorus, total
mg/L
P
Sample
Continuous
Water Quality
CHLA
Chlorophyll a
ug/L
Sample
Sporadic
Water Quality
TEMP
Temperature
deqC
Field Observation
Sporadic
Water Quality
TN
Nitrogen, total
uc/L
N
Sample
Sporadic
Water Quality
TP                 | Phosphorus, total
ug/L
P
Sample
Sporadic
Water Quality
4.2.2.2     Hydrological sites
Code
Variable Name
Units
Value Type
Data Type
General Category
PREC
Precipitation
mm
Field Observation
Cumulative
Climate
GWLEV
Water Level
m
Field Observation
Continuous
Geology
BEDSED
Bed Sediment
q/L
Sample
Sporadic
Hydrology
GH
Gage height
m
Field Observation
Continuous
Hydrology
TSS
Solids, total Suspended
mg/L
Sample
Sporadic
Hydrology
TURB
Turbidity
NTU
Field Observation
Continuous
Hydroloay
FLOW
Discharge
m3/s
Derived Value
Continuous
Hydrology
4.2.2.3     Ecological sites
VariableCode
VariableName
Units
ValueType
DataType
General
Category
AM-1
Features of surface armour layer
mm
Field Observation
Cateaorical
Ecology
CP-1
Increase in crop production
code
Derived Value
Categorical
Ecology
CP-2
Recorded change in production
kq/ha
Derived Value
Average
Ecology
EC-1
Chance in salinity
psu
Sample
Averaae
Ecology
FP-1
Fence post exposure
mm
Field Observation
Sporadic
Ecology
GAvq-1
Gully average width (W1) at lip
m
Field Observation
Average
Ecoloqy
GAvq-2
Gully average width (W2) at base
m
Field Observation
Averaae
Ecology
GAvg-3
Gullyaveragedepth
m
Field Observation
Averaae
GAvq-4
Gullyaveragelength
m
Field Observation
Ecolo2g2y
Averaae
---------    _________ Ecology
GMax-1
Gully maximum width (W1) at lip
m
Field Observation
Maximum
Ecology
GMax-2
Gully maximum width (W2) at base
m
Field Observation
Maximum
-------  21____________ Ecoloqy
GMax-3
Gully maximum depth
m
Field Observation
Maximum
------ —22_________ Ecology
GMax-4
Gullv maximum length
m
Field Observation
Maximum
--------- 41_________ Ecoloqy
GMin-1
Gully minimum width (W1) at lip
m
Field Observation
Minimum
Ecology
GMin-2
Gully minimum width (W2) at base
m
Field Observation
Minimum
Ecology
GMin-3
Gully maximum depth
m
Field Observation
Minimum
GMin-4
Gully minimum length
m
Ecology
Field Observation
Minimum
PN-1
Presence of pan/armour layer
code
Ecology
Field Observation
Cateaorical
Fcnlogy
PN-2
Depth to pan layer
mm
Field Observation
Averaqe
Frolnpy
PP-1
Presence of plough pan
code
Field Observation
Categorical
PP-2
Depth of plough pan
mm
Field Observation
Averaae
Fmlnnu
RAva-1
Rillaveraoewidth
mm
Field Observation
Averaqe
FmlfYjy
RAvg-2
Rillaveragedeplh
mm
Field Observation
Average
Fcolngy
RMax-1
Rill maximum width
mm
Field Observation        Maximum
RMax-2
Rill maximum depth
mm
Field Observation
Maximum
RMin-1
Rill minimum width
mm
Field Observation
Minimum
RMin-2
Rill minimum depth
mm
Field Observation
RT-1
SA-1
SA-2
SD-S
SPAvq-1
SPMax-1
SPMin-1
Planl/ireerootexposure
Increase on soilacidity
Decrease in soil acidity pH from liming Increase in soil depth behind terrace
Height average of soil pedestals al locality Height maximum of soil pedestals at locality Height minimum of soil pedestals at locality
mm
PH
£H
mm
mm
mm
mm
Field Observation Sample
Sample
Field Observation Field Observation Field ObservaLon Field Observation
Minimum Average Average Average Average Averaqe Maximum
Minimum
Ecoloay
Ecology
Ecoloqy
Ecology
Ecoloqy
Ecology 
Ecology
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation o( a Basin Information System Interim Report4 BIS development
37
VariableCode
VariableName
Units
ValueType
DataType
Genera!
Category
SS-S
Changes to soil structure
code
Field Observation
Average
Ecology
WT-1
Change in water table
m
Field Observation
Average
Ecology
4.3 Implementation: Contents of release n°2 (April 2013)
4.3.1 Variable repository
The No. 1 release also provides functions for importing existing data, namely.
► The data of water level and flow available for the MoWR.
► The daily rainfall stations from the NMA.
The data were imported during trainings sessions No. 1 and No. 2 as and when they became available.
The following table shows the volumetry values data imported in the database:
Site Code
Site Name
Variable
Code
Variable Name
Begin Date
End Date
Value Count
112003
AbbayatBahir Dar
GH
Gage height
1H/1973
12/31/2009
13514
111021
Amen atDangila
GH
Gage height
1/1/1988
12/31/2010
8401
111010
111023
Anqarebnear Gonder
GH
Gaqe height
1/1/1983
12/31/2010
10227
Dirmanear Kola Diba
GH
Gage height
1/1/1997
12/31/2010
5113
111017
FegodanearArbqebeya
GH
Gage height
1/1/1999
12/31/2010
43831
111002
GilgelAbbaynearMerawi
GH
Gage height
1/1/1980
12/31/2010
11323
116004
Gilqel Beles nearMandura
GH
Gage height
1/1/1982
12/31/2010
10592
111018
Gamonearlnfranz
GH
Gage height
1/1/1987
12/31/2010
8766
111014
GeldanearAmbessame
GH
Gage heiqht
1/1/1984
12/31/2010
9S62
111016
GemeronearMaksegnit
GH
Gaqe heiqht
1/1/1984
12/31/2010
9662
111006
GumaranearBahir Dar
GH
Gage heiqht
1/1/1959
12/31/2009
18628
111022
KillillienearOurbete
GH
Gage heiqht
1/1/1997
12Z31/2010
5113
4
KerarinearAddisZemen
GH
Gaqe height
1/1/2003
12/31/2010
2922
111003
KoganearMerawi
GH
Gage heiqht
1/1/1959
12/31/2010
18993
111001
Lake Tana alBahir Dar
GH
Gage height
1/1/1959
12/31/2010
13993
111004
Lake Tana atGorgora
GH
Gage heiqht
1/1/1999
12/31/2010
4333
111011
Lake Tana atKunzila
GH
Gage height
1/1/1981
12/31/2010
10957
111007
MegechnearAzezo
GH
Gage height
1/1/1980
12/31/2010
11323
116005
Main Beles al Bridge
GH
Gage heiqht
1/1/1962
12/31/2010
17897
113033
Quashininear A. Kidame
GH
Gaqe height
1/1/1984
12/31/2010
9862
111005
RibbnearAddisZemen
GH
Gage heiqht
1/1/1980
12/31/2010
11323
111015
RibbnearGasai
GH
Gage height
1/1/1987
12/31/2000
5114
111009
Upper Ribb near Debre Tabor
GH
Gage height
1/1/1980
12/31/2010
11323
111014
GeldanearAmbessame
FLOW
Discharge
1/1/1934
12/31/2010
9362
112003
AbbayatBahir Dar
FLOW
Discharge
1/1/1973
12/31/2009
13514
111021
Amen atDanqila
FLOW
Discharge
1/1/1988
12/31/2010
8401
mow
Angarebnear Gonder
FLOW
Discharqe
1/1/1983
12/31/2010
10227
111023
Dirrnanear Kola Diba
FLOW
Discharge
1/1/1997
12/31/2010
5113
111017
FegodanearArbqebeya
FLOW
Discharge
1/1/1998
12/31/2010
474S
111002
GilgelAbbaynearMerawi
FLOW
Discharqe
1/1/19S0
12/31/2010
11323
116004
Gilqel Beles nearMandura
FLOW
Discharqe
1/1/1982
12/31/2010
10592
111018
Gamonearlnfranz
FLOW
Discharqe
1/1/1987
12/31/2010
8768
111016
GemeronearMakseg nil
FLOW
Discharqe
1/1/1984
12/31/2010
9S62
111006
GumaranearBahir Dar
FLOW
Discharge
1/1/1959
12/31/2009
18628
111022
KilhttienearOurbelo
FLOW
Discharge
1/1/1997
12/31/2010
5113
-------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- k kwiUrtMOI hInks _hn b»\).uc?arfJ..nunn.nv*ocOJ1_<kr.AAxa IC*—
Design. Development A Support in Implementation & Operation o( a Basin Information System Interim Report38
4. BIS development
Site Code
Site Name
Variable
Code
Variable Name
Beam Date
End Date
Value Count
111003
KoaanearMerawi
FLOW
Discharge
1/1/1959
12/31/2010
18993
116005
Main Beles al Bridge
FLOW
Discharge
1/1/1962
12/31/2010
17897
111007
MegechnearAzezo
FLOW
Disch a tic
1/1/1980
12/31/2010
11323
113033
Quashininear A. Kidame
FLOW
Discharge
1/1/1984
12/31/2010
9862
111005
RibbneafAddisZemen
FLOW
Discharge
1/1/1980
12/31/2010
11323
111015
RibbnearGasai
FLOW
Discharge
1/1/1987
12/31/2000
5114
111009
Upper Ribb near Debre Tabor
FLOW
Discharge
1/1/1980
12/31/2008
10593
NMA004
Bahir Dar
PRECIP
Precipitation
1/1/1961
12/31/2007
17044
NMA020
Chaqni
PRECIP
Precipitation
5/1/1973
9/30/2006
9498
NMA009
Dangila
PRECIP
Precipitation
1/1/1987
10/31/2006
6879
NMA016
Debre Tabor
PRECIP
Precipitation
3/1/1988
10/31/2005
5575
NMA017
Bondar
PRECIP
Precipitation
6/1/1952
9/30/2009
19484
NMA027
Pawe
PRECIP
Precipitation
1/1/1987
12/31/2008
6544
The  functionalities  of  the  release  No.  2  are  addressed  primarily  to  the  business  experts  (hydrology, water quality, etc.) of the SBO and ABA:
► Gauging and rating curves management
► Tools for gap filling
► Time series derivation and temporal aggregation
► Validation tests
► Data exports to HDA processing software or third-party software
The software package of the No. 1 release is the following:
Software packages
Role and functionalities
DataExpert
Provides all functionalities of the Release No. 2
The software is provided as a setup package (msi installer)
4.3.2 Main functionalities of the release
4.3.2.1   User interface
In order to provide an intuitive and simple high-level software interface, development was  driven bv the idea that the user should be able to access  functionality  as  quickly  and simply  as  possible The software is  organized as  a set of floating windows  automatically  updated and ready  to use as  soon as the user selects a time series.
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation ol a Basin Information System Interim Report4. BIS development
41
___________I__________ i • 'QdalityConJrolled.-
The derivation of the time series also allows:
► The conversion of a time series to another using a rating curve.
► The conversion of a time series to another using a calculation formula.
► Temporal aggregation to calculate the minimum, maximum, average, or the sum of a time series for one or more years, months and days.
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation ol a Basin Information System Interim Report4. BIS development
42
4.3.2.4 Gap filling
Several methods are available for users to reconstruct the missing data from a series:
Single interpolation
Linear
Monotone
Akima
Mean Proportion ailty
Cubicspline
-The missing values are estimated by the pondered long-term average of the time series, using the above formula:
Where:
►  Px : Missing data to estimate
►  n : Number of reference time series
►  Pi : Observations belonging to a reference time series
► P : Long-term average of a
t
reference time series
►  Px : Long-term average of the time series to estimate
Unearregression A missing value can be estimated using a multiple linear regression, in the form:
7/ = Qo • x  4 aj • x, + -
0
• x _j 4- a
nn
Where
► yt : Missing data to estimate
► r0,Xj ...Xh-,
n
observations  made in the same time coming from n reference time series
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation ol a Basin Information System Interim Report4. BIS development
43
4.3.2.5  Time series validation
The validation functionalities  are non-intrusive. It means  that the system warns  the user about bador uncertain values. But, the system never corrects  automatically  the time series  data. The available validation tests  are presented below. The correction of the values  is  the responsibility  of business experts.
4.3.2.6  Range constraint validation
Range constraint validation is  a very  simple test, mainly  used in water quality  data management organizations. Unlike meteorology  or hydrology, data are transmitted several times  from the sampler to the laboratory, and then to the laboratory  to the data manager, and sometimes  from a data manager to another. Data are often digitized several times  before being added in a database. Performing a range validation check is the best way to find and correct entry errors.
For example a PH can’t be higher than 14 and lower than 0. Outside values  are impossible values. We also know that in a river a PH measurement is  very  rarely  higher than 12 and lower than 4. Measurements between ranges [0...4] and [12...14] are improbable values.
4.3.2.7  Variation constraint validation
Variation   constraint   validation   applies   on   a   single   time   series.   It   checks   if   the   variation   in   a   given time range does not exceed a maximum percentage and/or a minimum percentage.
i
i imn
in
aow --------- 1_________
Lower data value in
Data value to
the time window
bechecked
Considering P1 and P2 as:
► P1: Data value to be checked
► P2: lower data value in the time window
The validation constraint is defined by
niinunuin <
value(Pl) - value(P2) vcdue(Pl)
x 100 < maximum
f
rmU jrnl atTI
a.. , . , , J "
r
'
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report4. BIS development
44
4.3.2.8  Velocity constraint validation
Velocity  constraint validation test is  an extension of the variation constraint test but it applies  on two time series. Generally  an upstream station (the reference station) is  used to compare the delayed variation velocity against the station to be checked.
Step   1:   Compute   the   variation   vl   between   the   highest   and   the   lowest   values   in   the   times   series   to be checked:
Pl: lowest data
P2: Highest data
val
ue in the ti
me
value in
the
time
window
win
dow
ualue(P2)—ualue(Pl)
value(P2)
Step   2:   Determine   the
variation
between
the
highest
and
the
lowest
values 
in
the
reference
time
series
^tnainierlf
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report4. BIS development
45
value(P2) — vaZue(Pl)
value(Pl)
The velocity constraint is defined as:
minimum < vl — v2 < maximum
4.3.2.9  The double mass and the cumulative residual method
The principle of double mass  method is  to check  the proportionality  of the values  measured at two stations. One of the stations  (station X) is  the reference station, and considered to be correct The other station (station Y) is  the station to be checked. For a selected time step (Yearly, Monthly, Daily) the cumulative value is comparing rather than the actual measured values:
t
x(t)= ^X(i)and y(t) =
1=1
c
1=1
The cumulative residual method (credited to Philippe Bois) is  an extension of the idea of the double mass  method, with the addition of statistical content allowing the application of a true homogeneity test - an important advance. The basic  idea is  study  the cumulative of the residuals  r, resulting from a linear regression between y andx:
Z = Qo + ^xt + ei Interfaces of the double mass and residuals method are shown below:
hffiDcwb! tf rnjsaj
V l/IWI 12.00
G
vmi uro
|UOV»IOnOO
West
1
1
1
/I
*.
,r*
.*■
>•-—
Yana ai batw Oar (lUK l)
U
.. I
Xj.
4.3.2.10   Exporting data to HD A processing
The software provides multiple ways to export data:
► Export time series data values in ODM Data format (tabular format).
► Compute and export distance between existing sites and a given point layer. This functionalityisrequired for IDW compulations.
p UaniaMBJI (1 Jana-,r -
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report4. BIS development
► Export time series data values to a tabular format. The parameters provided to aggregate the
source time series are:
46
Temporal aggregation:
Hourly, Daily. Monthly, Yearly.
Function applied on each sampled groups of
data:
Maximum, Minimum, Mean, Sum, Variance, Skewness, Kurtosis, Percentile
The data values of one or multiple time series can be exported in the following formats:
►  Common Separated Values (CSV)
►  Excel workbook (xIs. xlsx)
►  OGC WaterML
4.3.2.11   Mapping tool
The DataExpert software has a map viewer component for:
►  The visualization of geographic files in ARCGIS Shapefile formal,
► The use of standard functions: zoom, pan, feature selection, full extent, etc.,
►  Import and creation of layers corresponding to the measurement stations present in the database.
s *8 s & afss £           —f a
4.4 NEXT RELEASES
Two new releases are planned and a HAD functionality has to be added and tested in the D Expert software.
aa
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation ol a Basin Information System Interim Report4. BIS development
47
4.4.1 Complement of release 2
The HAD functionality  that allows  annual classification of water quality  data is  being developed. The goal is  to create quality  maps  for each variable, display  them in the map viewer pane of the software. It will be possible to export the layers produced in ARCGIS Shapefile format.
The classification is based on the table below of following thresholds:
Variable
Class of Quality
Code
Name
Unit
(speciation)
MB8S
acceptable                                    7=7i=d' '
COLO
Color
mg Pt/L
<20
20-50
50-100
100-200
>200
COND
Electrical
conductivity
pS/cm
<1000
-
-
•
>1000
PH
pH
pH unit
6,5-8.5
5,5-9
5,5-9
<5,5, >9
-
CHLO
Chloride
mg Cl/L
<200
200-300
300-750
750-1000
>1000
S04
Sulfate
mg S04/L
<100
100-200
200-250
250-400
>400
TDS
Solids, total
Dissolved
mg/L
<50
50-200
200-1000
1000-2000
>2000
02
Oxygen, dissolved
mg 02/L
>7
7-5
5-3
3-1
<1
B0D5
B0D5
mg/L
<3
3-5
5-10
10-25
>25
DOC
Carbon, dissolved organic
mg/L
<30
30-35
35-40
40-80
>80
KNIT
Nitrogen, total Kjeldahl
mg/L
<=1
1-2
2-3
>3
-
N03
Nitrogen, nitrate
(N03)
Mg N03/L
10
10-25
25-50
>50
-
P04
Phosphorus, ortophosphate
Mg P04/L
<=0.2
0.2-0,5
0,5-1
1-5
>5
TPHOS
Phosphorus, total
Mg P/L
<=0,1
0.1-0,3
0,3-0,5
0,5-3
>3
MN
Manganese
ug/L
<=0.1
0.1-0,5
0,5-1
>1
-
This  feature  can  also  be  used  to  produce  maps  of  Air  Quality.  To  date,  we  have  no  specification  of variables and sites of the air quality and no 5 states classification.
4.4.2 Release 3
The release will be dedicated to the Web Portal. It includes the following
► Setup of Internet Information Server on the dedicated Web Server computer.
► Installation of the Content Management Software DotNetNuke.
► Deployment of the ABA Web site. A mockup has been released as show below.
► Creation of the content hierarchy based on the consultant's proposal made in the Design Report.
► Creation of users and their access rights.
► Setup of lime series data access module.
► Setup of the document repository management module and its filter search rules.
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report48
4.   B/S development
The   definitive   equipment   (Web   server   and   its   software   SQL   Server)   is   required   for   the   No.   3
release
4.4.3 Release 4
The   No.   4   release   will   correspond   to   the   commissioning   of   the   global   system   with   the   definitive acceptance:
Network  capabilities. According to the IP Addressing plan provided by  the supplier all comDuter and server networks  will be tested in a point-to-point manner. This  will be checked between the
ABA and the SBOs sites.
Software commissioning and setup. As described in the procurement SDerifinaii™. chapter ‘Software technical document’, all software shall be installedI . wX $a reS
software updates and correctly configured. This will be checked at the ABA and SRCi Th includes connection checks between clients' computers and database servers 
Interface with the teletransmision front-end. For each SBO, the supolier is eyno^a .
front-end to the SQL Database using ODM Streaming Data loader software c t0 connect the station will be pooled, then the storage of the acquired data will be checked taCh automated
A test plan will be established during the commissioning.
Finally, the replication procedures from SBOs to the ABA databases will be installed and check
oetween the
&bUS' This
f terOrtW. ------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ -
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation ol a Basin tntn,m , c
Interim Report
miormation System4. BIS development
49
4.5 Hydrological design aids HDA
Some HDAs  have been developed in an Excel workbook. They  complete those developed under the HIS-BIS platform (data sampling, gap filing tools, hydrograph analysis, charts...) and can be independently used for hydrological assessment.
The main objective is  to provide simple tools  integrated with Excel for use of field engineers  who may  not have high hydrologic  knowledge. The objective is  not to replace specific  software much more complete and sophisticated.
The main advantage of this  workbook  in comparison with other commercial software is  that the workbook  is  stand-alone and very  easy  to use. In addition the workbook  can be combined with other data sampling tools  provided with the HIS-BIS platform: the data sample retrieved from the HIS-BIS database can be easily  introduced into the workbook. For example for maximum rainfall analysis  one can constitute the maximum annual precipitation sample with special tools  provided under HIS-BIS, and the instantly “export" the sample into the workbook.
As agreed with the Client the functions included in the workbook are the following:
►    IDW    (Inverse    distance    weighted    interpolation)    which    can    be    used    for    estimation    of    average precipitation (or another parameter like temperature) over a catchment
►    DDF   (Depth   -   Duration   -   Frequency):   a   macro   command   for   assisting   establishment   of   DDF curves
►     FA    (Frequency    Analysis)    which    are    oriented    for    hydrological    statistics    especially    for    floods analysis.    Several    statistic    distributions    are    coded    as:    Gumbel,    Gauss,    Galton    and    Log-pearson III.
► SED1: solid hydrograph calculation for a river with relatively moderate bed slope
► SED2: solid hydrograph calculation for a mountain stream.
4.6 GIS
Based   on   the   identified   needs   with   the   consultation   of   the   specialists,   the   following   tasks   are   to   be carried out in the implementation phase.
► Interpolation of hydrometeorology point data to grid or raster format.
►     Modeling    in    a    GIS    environment    for    erosion,    degradation    mapping,    land    use,    watershed management,        suitability        analysis,        multi-criteria        evaluation        and        environmental        impact assessment.
► Sub setting global hydrological and other datasets like topography.
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report50
5.   Training
5. TRAINING
5.1 Introduction
As  per the implementation phase, the Consultant support will include training sessions  on all the aspects  of the implemented HIS BIS system, during the whole implementation phase. In fact, training of staff is  essential to build institutional capacity  for a sustainable operation of the Sub Basin Branch Office (SBBO).
Training will be both formal and on-the-job. Especially  the latter type of training is  considered important for both the Field work  and the data entry-, processing-, and quality  control. The data entry, processing and quality  control of historic  data that is  not yet entered in the HYDATA system, is  recommended to start by  SBBO staff as  early  as  possible, within the Hydrology  Section at MoWE.
Capacity  building of staff from ABA, TaSBBO and BeSBBO should be undertaken in parallel with the development and testing of the BIS sub-components. The active involvement of managers  and technical staff is  crucial to ensure (hat the designed system is  highly  relevant to the actual working environment, roles and functions of the staff responsible for the BIS implementation.
Thus, training on the following topics will be organize:
►  IT
► Hydrological Design Aids
►  Hydrology and hydraulic modelling (on HEC-HMS & HEC-RAS software)
►  Hydrology
► Water quality
► Environment
► GIS
5.2 HIS AND BIS SOFTWARE 5.2.1  Release n°1 (done)
5.2.1.1  Introduction
Specific objectives of the release n°1 are the following.
► Mastering the setup of the software.
► Learn the concepts of the HIS Database.
► Overview' of the existing and future monitoring networks.
► Availability of historical data and stakeholders.
►  Mastering the software: Data collection. database management.
► Populating the database with existing data.
import, time series visualization and deletion, HIS
Design, i Development & Suppon in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System5. Training
51
The No. 1 training session was  held from the 15,h of October 2012 to the 18Lh at the ABA headquarters  in Bahir Dar. It has  been conducted by  Xavier Thomas  with the support of Simon Thibault.
5.2.1.2   Training participants
The participants  are listed in the following table. This  training session was  dedicated to trainers  with
some knowledge of databases, who had already used a database as Microsoft Access.
Name
Oraanization
Position
AntenehZewdie
TaSBO
Hydrogeologist
MeleseMeshesha
TaSBO
GIS specialist
TemesgenGetie
TaSBO
Hydrologist
HasenMohabaw
TaSBO
Laboratory Technician
ManalebishAsmare
TaSBO
Laboratory Technician
BirlewAbebe
TaSBO
Chief hydrologist
BawekeTesfaye
TaSBO
M&E specialist
DejenieSahilu
ABA
Basin information head
MengstuSintayehu
ABA
IT expert
MelakuTarekegn
ABA
Water quality expert
BicksegnAsfaw
ABA
GIS expert
HabibMengesh
ABA
Meteorologist
HabtamuAchenif
ABA
Water resources expert
KibretKassie
Bureau of Water Resources
| (Bahir Dar)
Water resource management
5.2.1.3  Contents
Day 1: SQLServer
► SQL Server setup
► SQL Database Management Tool
► Organization of a database: files, groups, tables. Users, Connections
► Save/Restore
► Attach/Detach a database
Day 2: HIS Database
► Introducing HIS Database : CUAHSI Observation model
► Learning basics on Structured Query Language
► Using SQL Editor
► Practice of SQL with ODM Database
Day 3: Software tools for time series management
► ODM Data Loader Setup
► Reference data: Sources, Sites. Variables, Methods
? JrWDtrj.urubdnJHjal.actNlJWJ dir>h Jo Icmw
InQj nitric
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report1
52
5. Training
►  ODM Data Converter Setup
► Stakeholders data import and historical data import (NMA, HYDATA, MoWE, etc.)
► Time seriesvisualization and deletion
►  Field data capture forms - field data import
5.2.1.4   Conclusion
During (his training, the computer pool of personal computers was diverse. Many problems 
occurred during installation and mobilized our time on tasks of lower added va ue.
Originally  planned as  an instructor training, the increased number of participants  did not allow discussion of the allocation of tasks  among staff of the ABA and SBO. Some participants  were trained on features they will not probably conduct.
However, the group was  very  energetic  and highly  motivated. The primary  objective was  to establish a comprehensive database containing all the reference data (stations, variables, methods) and provides  the ability  to appropriate personnel to update the database to track  the evolution of the measurement networks.
Training   was   then   held   al   the   MoWR   in   Addis   Ababa   and   was   led   by   Anteneh   Zewdie   Dejenie Sahilu and Mengstu Sintayehu and Simon Thibault.
5.2.2  Release n°2 (done) 5.2.2. Y Introduction
Specific  objectives  of the release n°2 are to leam learn the tools  used to manage data collected by field operators  and imported with Release No. 1 software or obtained by  automaticdata collection field equipment. This  training will cover all business  processes  needed to produce qualified data from raw data
The  No.  2  training  session  was  held  from  April  22th  2013  to  April  25th  at  the  Blue  Nile  Hotel  in Bahir Dar. It has been conducted by Xavier Thomas with the support of Simon Thibault.
5.2.2.2  Training participants
The participants are listed in the following table. This training session is dedicated to trainers who have already attended the last training session about Release No. 1 software. These trainees have installed SQL Server on their computers, which are fully functional.
Name TesfayeAbebe
Mohamed Hassen
Organization
Position--------------------------------------------------------------------------
MoWE
Waler Ressource Expert---------------------------------------------------
TsegayeDebebe
MoWE
IT Expert
------------------------------------------------
MoWE
Hydrologist
----------------------------------
Mohamed All
AssefaKebede
MoWE
MoWE
Hydrologist
Hydrologist
-------- ----------------------------
DamkewBekele
NigussieAbdisse
MoWE
BeSBBO
Soil. Water and Conservation Expert
MogesBerbew
HabitamuTamir
BeSBBO
ABA
GIS Specialist
------------- -----------------------------
Water Resources Expert ???------------------- -----------------------
------------
P Vdt.UU X1     wTaM'J.UpT. .opt.. i
Sfe*" ‘ SU"P“ “       ‘
Sysl„5. Training
53
Name
Organization
Position
HabibMengesh
ABA
Meteorologist
AnularAssefa
ABA
???
MengistuSintayehu
ABA
IT Expert
AntenehZewdie
TaSBBo
Geo Hydrologist
DejeneSahlu
ABA
Basin Information Head
MeleseMeshesha
TaSBBo
GIS Specialist
BirlewAbebe
TaSBBo
Chief Hydrologist
BegashawMell
TaSBBo
Hydrologist
HabtamAchenif
TaSBBo
Water Resources Expert
5.2.2.3  Contents
Day 1:BACKGROUND
► Quality control levels background: Row, Draft, and quality controlled data
► Installation of data manager software, an updated version of the release 1 software
► Importing existing hydrological and climatological data
Day 2: Main data derivation procedures
► Installation of data expert software
► Interface review of Data Expert
►  Data derivation: Row time series to draft time series
► Gauging and rating interfaces and functionalities to convert stage into flow
► Gap filling of draft time series
Day 3: Quality controls and data export
► Range, variation and velocity controls
► Temporal derivation to produce daily, monthly and yearly time series
► Data derivation: draft time series
► Exporting data to HDA tools
►  Exporting quality controlled time series
► Discussion/Evaluation
5.2.2.4  Conclusion
18   participants   were   involved   in   the   training.   This   large   number   is   considered   as   huge   to   conduct this  kind  of  training.  However,  most  of  the  participants  are  now  able  to  use  the  main  options  of  the software   and   start   to   work   on   it.   The   software   and   training   has   been   considered   useful   by   the participants.   No   important   lag   was   noticed,   but   some   comments   and   improvement   were   observed by the participants and given to BRLi later.
p
jwvurt? .«■*.****’'.>’*« .*C*M.urfOiy*).dw.M\daci
~
'
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report1
54
5. Training
During the training, some problems  occurred with SBO and MoWE computers. 9 peoples  who had been mobilized did not get the prerequisites  (‘This  training session is  dedicated to trainers  who have already  attended the last training session about Release 1 software. These trainees  had installed SOL Server on their computers, which are fully  functional ). As  they  did not have SQL server installed, some of the staff could not work  on the database on their own computers  during the next two days.
5.2.3   Release n°3 (planned after hardware commissioning)
5.2.3.1   Objectives
The training will be lead in close collaboration with the IT expert and the editorial manager of the web site. On one hand, it will transmit the knowledge necessary  for the update, maintenance of the web portal and management of access  rights. On the other hand, a reflection on the organization of the site and its  purpose must be engaged with the editor of the portal. Il will not be to structure the website definitely but plan its future development.
Given   the   software   constraints   applying   to   updating   the   Web   site,   the   session   can   only   take   place with 2 or 3 people maximum.
5.2.3.2 Program
DAY 1:BACKGROUND
Audience: IT Web Expert
► SQL Server requirements and ODM database setup
►  Installation of the existing DotNetNuke project
► Main concepts of DotNetNuke: Page, Module
► Creation of modules and pages, menu management
►  User access rights management
►  Installation of a new module
Day 2 - Business modules
Audience: IT Web Expert
►  Installation of time series portal module
► Setup of time series portal module
►  Installation of the document repository module
► Setup of the document repository module
Day 3: Graphical Chart, ABA web site architecture
Audience: IT Web Expert. Editorial manager
► Graphical chart tuning (image, logo, skins, etc.)
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation ol a fa™ i r
Interim Report
P
3 6as"1 formation System55
5. Training
► Review of site plan, creation of web pages
5.2.4  Release n°4 (planned after all equipment commissioning)
The No. 4 release is dedicated to the commissioning. It will not be a formal training session. This task will be performed in close collaboration with the IT expert. Moreover, the raw data replication procedures from SBO to ABA will be clearly explained.
5.3 Hydrological design aids HDA
5.3.1  Introduction
As  part of the Tana Beles  Integrated Water Resource Development Project, two weeks  training have been organized at Bahar Dar, Blue Nile Hotel for staffs of Ministry of Water & Energy, Abbay basin Authority, Tana Subbassin and Beles  Sub basin. Training has  been held from April 22th, 2013, to May 3rd, 2013. This two weeks training includes 4 topics:
► Observation Database management software
► Hydrological Design Aids
► Hydraulic modelling
► Hydrology modelling
The training for Hydrological design aids has been done by Zhong-xue Fang, Hydrologist Expert of BRLi.
5.3.2  Training participants
The participants are listed in the following table.
Name
Organization
Position
Tesfaye Abebe
MoWE
Water Ressource Expert
Tsegaye Debebe
MoWE
IT Expert
Mohamed Hassen
MoWE
Hydrologist
Mohamed Ali
MoWE
Hydrologist
Assefa Kebede
MoWE
Hydrologist
Damkew Bekele
MoWE
Soil, Water and Conservation Exper
t
Nigussie Abdisse
BeSBBO
GIS Specialist
Moges Berber
BeSBBO
Water Ressource Expert
Habitamu T amir
ABA
Habib Mengesh
ABA
Meteorologist
Anular Assela
ABA
Mengistu Sintayehu
ABA
IT Expert
Anteneh Zewdie
TaSBBo
Geo Hydrologist
Dejene Sahlu
ABA
Basin Information Head
Melese Meshesha
TaSBBo
GIS Specialist
Bi dew Abebe
TaSBBo
Chief hydrologist
Begashaw Mell
TaSBBo
Hydrologist
Habtam Achenif
TaSBBo
Water Ressource Expert
g uxnl«-A001fr»<JcU
.nl.rxMr rvti.vy.ocOOIJtai.dir.UhOoa Ir>«».
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report5. Training
5.3.3    Contents
The following HDAs have been developed:-
>    Frequency Analysis (Gumbel, Galton, Gauss, Log-Pearson III)
>    Estimation of areal precipitation by Inverse Distance Weighted (IDW) algorithm
>    Depth-Duration-Frequency (DDF) Curves for storm rainfall analysis
>    Sediment load estimation by formula Meyer Peter Muller (MPM) or Engelund-Hassen (EH)
>    Sediment transport capacity estimation on steep river bed
The HOA training session allowed the users learning the above tools.
The training sessions on the Excel HDAs were held in two days with the following program:
5.3.3.1 Day 1: Background
► Theoretical background
•     Principle of frequency analysis
•     Methods used for spatial interpolation of precipitation
•     Methods used for temporal interpolation of precipitation
•    Sediment transport estimation and engineering problems
► Presentation of the developed HDAs
•     Demonstration of the tools
•     Examples of application
5.3.3.2 Day 2: Main data derivation procedures
1.   Practice/exercises: at least two exercises for each HAD
2.   Introduction to programming language
3.   Discussion/Evaluation
Eighteen participants have been fully involved in the training courses. Most of the participants are now able to use the main options of the software and start to work on it. Most of the trainees evaluate the software as useful and are satisfied. Some corrections and improvements have been requested by the participants. Trainees request to have a hard copy of the user guide and manual as well. Most of these requests have been integrated in the new version of the Excel tool.5. Training
57
5.4 Hydrometry - “On the job training”
5.4.1 Introduction
5.4.1.1 Background
Consultant has  expressed interest to give on site hydrometric  training on measurement and installation and maintenance for staff of Abay  Basin Authority, Tana and Beles  sub-basins organizations. Accordingly, the Tana and Beles  Integrated Water Resources  Development Project- Tana Sub Basin Organization has  organized the training and the Consultants  provided input of Senior Hydrologist to lead the training. This  section provided activities  done as  part of Phase I training on hydrometric measurements during the period 5-11 November 2012 at Bahr Dar and on gauging sites.
The training has  been conducted by  Ato Gedamu Senior Hydrometrician at the Ministry  of Waler and Energy, Bahar Dar Branch Office and Dr.Yilma, hydrologist & Deputy  Team Leader for the Consultant side.
5.4.1.2 Objectives of the training
The main objective of this training was to build the capacity of hydrometrician in the Abbay Basin Authority, Tana and Beles Sub-basin Organizations through hands on training and field practice on discharge and sediment measurements. Specific objectives were:
► To give awareness that hydrometric measurement has significant impact on societal and
economic aspect,
► On hydrometric gauging site selection.
► On discharge measurement (from bridge, bank operated cable way. wading), and
► On sediment measurement.
5.4.1.3 Participation
Twenty-Four trainees  from five organizations  fully  attended for one-week  from 5-11 November 2012 (two days  in office and 5 days  in the field). Table gives  here below presents  the list of
participants:
No.
Name
Organization
Tel.
Mail
1
Mengistu Sinlayehu
ABA
0918717554
smengie6@yahoo.com
2
Degene Sahlu
ABA
0918705982
degudejene@yahoo.com
3
Habtamu Tamir
ABA
0918781822
habitamutamir@yahoo.com
4
Girma addisu
BeSBO
0911760570
Gerinatil 9@gmail.com
5
Moges Berbero
BeSBO
0911815051
mogesberbero@yahoo.com
6
Demeke Negatu
M.W.E
0911341351
7
Gedamu Chane
M.W.E
0918766074
gedamu.chane@yahoo.com
8
Fantahun worku
Metrology
0918240086
-
9
Tewabech Tesema
Metrology
0924325181
10
Habtu ketele
Metrology
0931519536
p fagaiWdOOl
tel I
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report5. Training
58
No.
Name
Organization
Tel.
Mai
11
Misrak Debebe
Metrotocy
0910872728
12
Aregaw Dirar
Metmtocy
0914013875
Are272@yahoo.com
13
Mukjgeta Tesfaye
Metrolocy
0914786055
14
ZenawTsegay
Merobcj
0925935090
Zenaw T segay@yahoo.com
15
Anteneh Zev.d-c
TaSBO
0918312738
Aza3@comell.edu
16
YircaKsbede
TaSBO
0918459741
yirgukeba@gmafl.com
17
Temescen Gate
TaSBO
0918341568
tgebe@yahoo.com
18
Habtsru Achenef
TaSBO
0912434262
habtache@yahoo.com
19
Becashav, Mola
TaSBO
0918769576
moHabm@yahoo .com
20
FZanaJebsh Asmara
TaSBO
0912164548
manzelkalgyah oo .com
21
Hassert Mdhabav.
TaSBO
0920761405
Ansha9850@yahoo com
22
F/efese Meshesha
TaSBO
0918766350
melesemvz@gmail.com
23
Birie.v Abebe
TaSBO
0918027346
biriewabebe@ymail com
24
Ycrannes mekuriaw
TaSBO
0918236185
yohannesademe@yahoo.com
5.4.2   Field activities
5.4.2.1 Day 1- Monday 5 November 2012
Alo Gedamu Sensor Hydrometrician at the Ministry of Water and Energy, Bahar Dar Branch Office gave basic lectures in an interactive manner on:
► Use of hydrometric station
► Basics of site selection
► Measurement equipment presently used (water level, discharge, sediment)
► Challenges faced field data collection and dissemination
The  trainees  were  acbvely  discussing  on  various  issues  including  field  data  quality,  budget shortage for field work during maintenance period as well as in the rainy period.
Design. Development t Support m Implementation t Operauon of a Basm Interim Report
Information System1
59
5. Training
5.4.2.2 Day 2 - Tuesday 6 November 2012
Dr Yilma has delivered a lecture on:
► Societal and economical importance of hydrometric measurements through an example in various sectors including:
• Flood protection - forecast in flood for Fogera and Dembia plains which saves lives and property
• Reservoir sizing - incorrect estimate of river yield (monthly  inflows  and sediment deposition) will lead under sizing or over sizing of dams (the cost associated with this can range in 10 of millions)
Kico Dam jjrxjerccrtsrjctnn- oom cocv ♦ cthw ne.'jj and srWAvay frxxw
• Spillway sizing - under sizing of spillway could lead to dam failure which damage to life and property is extremely high
► Hydrometric measurement by its nature is very expensive, sites being located at remote areas, and time consuming and requires continues update of river rating curve(s). and there is a need to  convince  decision  makers  to  allocate  sufficient  budget  for  the  hydrometric  measurement (flow, sediment) activities.
p
I           <—a               uwcrlJ .9 rt
i Jw )           tUj ) o—
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report1
60
5. Training
Tuesday 6 November 2012, Training at Bahr Dar
► Detail lectures are given based on the training material provided (Annex II)
•     Streamflow measurement and hydrograph
•     Stream gauging site selection
•     Stage measurement
•     Manual gauge
•     Recording gauge
•     Flow velocity measurement and discharge computation
•     The slope-area method (manning equation)
•     Stage discharge relationship - rating curve
► Measurement of sediment and conversion of samples sediment concentration (ppm) to tons/day and development of sediment rating curve
5.4.2.3 Day 3 to 5 (7 November 2012 - 9 November 2012)
The three days were dedicated for onsite training on:
► Discharge measurement - velocity-area method at Gumara Bridge located on Bahr Dar - Gondar highway (bridge based)
Items of training were
•    Assembling the current meter winch and bridge based roller
•    Checking roughly the performance of the current meter (its smooth rotation)
•     Measurement of stage at the beginning and end of the Q measurement
•     Explanation on the discharge data sheet
•    Setting out of number of vertical for discharge measurements
•     Fixing the horizontal distance for lowering current meter on bridge hand rail
•    Fixing the 0.2 and 0.8 depth for the measurement of velocity
•    Calculation of Q
•    Training on sediment measurement using USBR integrated sampler was also made at Gumara station.
► Discharge measurement -wedding method on Sheni river. This includes!
•    Assembling the current meter (used for wedding)
•     Measurement of stage at the beginning and end of the Q measurement « Explanation on the discharge data sheet (same as above)
. Setting out of number of vertical for discharge measurements (same as above)
. Fixing the 0.2 and 0.8 or only at 0.6 depth for the measurement of velocity
•    Calculation of Q
F kznMX 1 n.tor- C—«'---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --------------------- -
lnSReCpoaPmen> & SUPP°n 'n lmp‘emen,a,i0n 6 °Pe,ation °,a Basin Information System5. Training
► Operation of bank operated cableway station (Abbay River at Bahr Dar)
► Visit of the Overhead Cable Car operated station (Gilegel Abbay at Merawi)
5.4.3  Second training
Onsite training on hydrometric  station establishment (precise site location, surveying, staff gauge installation. BOC installation, maintenance aspect) will be done in Phase II for the same group of trainee after delivery of the equipment.
p Oi-d«WX)I li.Uni bdn.hl bcU.14vutf
v*
I)VJ.dh
K**
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report62
5. Training
5.5   Hydrology and Hydraulics: HEC Software
5.5.1  Introduction
The objective of this training was to introduce trainees to the model setup and use of HEC-HMS and HEC-RAS which are, respectively, hydrologic  and hydraulic  models. The models  are developed by the Hydrologic Engineering Centre of USACE and have got wide applications. The training was interactive in which trainees were provided with data of real catchments from Tana- Beles Basin and/or other basins. The training was organized to enable trainees:
► Acquire basic understanding on hydrologic and hydraulic modeling
► Understand the capabilities, components and elements of the HEC-HMS and HEC-RAS models
► Become skillful in setting-up and parameterizing the models
► Run and calibrate the models
► Analyze the hydrological and hydraulic effects of changing conditions
The HEC-HMS training was delivered by Dr. Agizew Nigussie, Assistant Professor in Hydrology at Addis Ababa University, and the training on HEC-RAS was given by Dr. Yilma Seleshi, Associate Professor in Water Resources Engineering at Addis Ababa University from April 27- May 2, 2013 at Bahr Dar.
5.5.2  List of participants
The participants are listed in the following table.
Name
Organization
Position
Tesfaye Abebe
MoWE
Water Ressource Expert
Tseaaye Debebe
MoWE
IT Expert
Mohamed Hassen
MoWE
Hydrologist
Mohamed Ali
MoWE
Hydrologist
Assefa Kebede
MoWE
Hydrologist
Damkew Bekele
MoWE
Soil, Water and Conservation Expert
Niaussie Abdisse
BeSBBO
GIS Specialist
Moaes Berbew
BeSBBO
Water Ressource Expert
Habitamu Tamir
ABA
Habib Mengesh
ABA
Meteorologist
Anular Assefa
ABA
Mengistu Sintayehu
ABA
IT Expert
Anteneh Zewdie
TaSBBo
Gee Hydroloqist
Deiene Sahlu
ABA
Basin information Head
Melese Meshesha
TaSBBo
GIS Specialist
Biriew Abebe
TaSBBo
Chief hydroloqist
Beqashaw Mell
TaSBBo
Hydroloqist
Habtam Achenif
TaSBBo
Water Ressource Expert
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System
Interim Report5. Training
5.5.3   HEC-HMS
5.5.3.1 Day one: Introduction
The program of the first day was the following:
Purposes, types and constituents of hydrologic models
► Definition and general goals of model
►   Classification   of   hydrologic   models   based   on   different   criteria   that   include   randomness (deterministic  and  stochastic),  spatial  variation  (lumped,  distributed  and  quasi  distributed)  and temporal variability (steady flow and unsteady flow).
► Rainfall-runoff process
► Key constituents of a model: state variables; boundary and initial conditions and parameters.
Steps the selection and application of a hydrologic model
►  How  to  select  an  appropriate  model  that  responds  to  the  problem  at  hand  considering  data availability
► Inputs for hydrologic models
► Calibration, validation and performance assessment of hydrologic models
Introduction to HEC-HMS
►  Watershed  representation:  general  and  typical  representations  of  rainfall-runoff  processes  on  a watershed
► Model components and elements:
•    Basin model which gives the physical description of the watershed in terms of different
hydrologic elements
•    Meteorologic model which describes atmospheric conditions over the watershed land
surface.
•     Control specifications that include the beginning date and lime of a simulation, the ending
date and time, and the time interval for calculations.
►  Steps  in HEC-HMS  application:  an  overview  of  the  model’s  application  starting  from  creating  a new  project  environment  through  development  of  the  different  model  components  to  running and viewing the results of the model.
► Installing the software: a copy of the software was distributed and trainees were guided to install it on their laptops
5.5.3.2 Day two: Developing HEC-HMS Project
Trainees  were made to acquire hands-on experience on the creation of a new project, entenng time-series  data, development of the different components  of the model, running and viewing the results of the model. Data of a watershed supplied with the model and steps indicated in the Quick Start Guide were used to create and execute the rainfall-runoff model. The following topics  were covered in lhe second day.
Design, Development A Support in Implementation A Operation of a Basin Information System
Interim Reporta.
I
64
5. Training
► Creating the project; a new HEC-HMS project that has specific name, description, program
settings, and folders and files was developed.
► Entering time-series data:
•     Manual and HEC-DSS file data entry systems
•     Entering precipitation and discharge time-series
•     Entering paired storage-discharge data series
► Creating the basin model
•      Representing the  test  watershed  with relevant  elements  that include subbasins, reaches and junctions.
•     Entering parameter data for each element
► Creating the meteorologic model
Defining gauges and gauge weights for each subbasin
► Defining control specifications
•     Entering the start date and time, end date and time, and time intervals of the simulation
► Creating and computing a simulation run
5.5.3.3 Day three: Developing HEC-HMS Project (Cont’d)
The third day, the following training has been implemented:
►  Checking the modeling exercise results of Day 2: the simulation results of each trainee were compared against the expected outputs.
► Simulating the effects of urbanization on streamflow hydrograph
•      Trainees  were  then  tried  to  assess  the  effect  of  future  urbanization  on  the  hydrologic response.
•     Future urbanization was represented in the model by changing percent of imperviousness and routing parameters of subbasin elements.
•     Results of the simulated hydrographs of future and existing conditions were compared
► Creating and calibrating model parameters
•     Trainees practised how to determine optimum parameter values by trial and error
► Developing HEC-HMS project for selected catchments in the Tana Basin (See Fig. 1)
•     Purpose: to better understand the development and use of the HEC-HMS
•     Selected catchments: Megetch. Gumero and the whole Lake Tana Basin.
•     Data distributed:
► Shape file of each catchment
► Daily meteorological data series of representative stations
•     Trainees created and run the model following the steps covered on Day 2.
.    HEC-HMS model for Gumero catchment developed and shared by one of the trainees
•    Setting-up HEC-HMS model for the whole Lake Tana Basin
p kxxnMacVtri.Urutefct.hnOc'J
«gDlh,3
------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------
SC" '
‘
Syslem65
5. Training
5.5.4 HEC-RAS
5.5.4.1 Introduction
First HEC-RAS software was  explained by  starting from the general philosophy. HEC-RAS is  an integrated system of software, designed for interactive use in a multi tasking environment. HEC- RAS is comprised of a graphical user interface (GUI), separate analysis components, data storage and management capabilities, graphic  and reporting facilities. HEC_RAS system contains  four one dimensional river analysis  components  for: (1) steady  flow water surface profile computation, (2) unsteady  flow simulations; (3) movable boundary  sediment transport computations; and (4) water quality analysis.
An important feature of HEC-RAS is  that all four components  use a common geometric  data representation and common geometric  and hydraulic  computation routines. Other hydraulic  design features  are also included in HECO-RAS system such as  bridge scouring analysis, flood mapping analysis together with HEC-GEORAS package.
5.5.4.2 Overview of program capabilities
Program capabilities  in areas  of user interface, river analysis  component, data storage and management and graphical and reporting were briefly  explained leading the trainee for detail to refer to HEC-RAS User Manual, Hydraulic  Reference Manual, Application Guide, and installed example projects as part of the software help.
User interface
The user interacts with HEC-RAS through GUI. The interface provides the following functions: File management. Data entry  and editing. River analysis, Tabulation of graphical display  of inputs  and outputs, Reporting facilities, Online helps, River Analysis Component.
River Analysis Component
► Steady .on water surface profile:
This component of the modelling system is intended for calculating water surface profile for steady gradual varied flow in a full network  of channel, a dendrite system, or a single river reach. The steady  flow component is  capable of modelling subcritical, supercritical and mixed flow regime water surface profiles.
Energy  losses  are evaluated by  friction (Manning's  equation) and contraction/expansion (coefficient multiplied by the change in velocity head). The momentum equation is utilised in situations where the water surface profile is  rapidly  varied. These situations  include mixed flow regime calculations (i i. hydraulic  jumps), hydraulics  of bridges, and evaluating profiles  at river confluences  (stream junctions).
► Sediment transport
This  component of the modelling system simulates  one-dimensional sediment transport / movable boundary  calculations  resulting from scour and deposition over moderate time periods  (typically years, although application to single flood events are possible).Water quality analysis
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report1
66
5. Training
This   component   of   the   modelling   system   perform   riverine   water   quality   analyses   including,
temperature analysis and transport of a limited number of water qua ity  ° s 
cn
1 uen $
-e’
Dissolved Oxygen, Carbonaceous Biological Oxygen Demand, Dissove nop ospi e
Dissolved Organic Phosphorus, Dissolved Ammonium Nitrate, Dissolved Nitrite itrogen, isso ve
Nitrate Nitrogen, and Dissolved Organic Nitrogen)
► Unsteady flow simulations
This  component can perform mixed flow regime (subcritical, supercritical, hydraulic  jumps, and draw downs calculations in the unsteady flow computations module). The hydraulic calculations for crossections, bridges  culverts, and other hydraulic  structures  that were developed for steady  flow component were incorporated into the unsteady flow module. Special features of the unsteady flow component include: Dam break  analysisjlevee breaching and overtopping, pumping stations, navigation dam operations, and pressurised pipe systems.
Data storage and management
Data storage is accomplished through the use of "flat" files (ASCII and Binary), as well as the HEC- DSS. User input data are stored in flat files under separate categorise of project, plan, geometry, steady flow, unsteady flow, quasi-steady flow, sediment data, and water quality information. Output data is predominately stored in separate binary files. Data can be transferred between HEC-RAS and other programs by utilizing the HEC-DSS.
Graphics and reporting
Graphics  includes  plots  of the river system schematics, cross-sections, profiles, rating curves, hydrographs, and inundation mapping. A three-dimensional plot of multiple cross-sections  is  also provided. Tabular output is available.
5.5.4.3 Practical exercise
Computer workshop sessions were done on basic hydraulic data entry for assessing hydraulic of rivers, bridges and floodway determination and example model runs were done all along the two days with step by step model building
Hydraulic model constructed by Addis Ababa University to assess depth of inundation on Fogera flood plain based on Gumara and Ribb rivers was also highlighted as application of HEC-RAS model in practice in Ethiopia.
5.5.5  Conclusion
By and large the trainees expressed their satisfaction with the training despite the tight schedule they had. Exercising the model using data of catchments found in the Tana Basin enhanced the training. The modelling software and relevant manuals have been distributed to the trainees so that they can practice them after the training. We hope that the trainees will improve their skills bv themselves and use the models to solve real probiems. If similar trainings'are organized
suggest to invite only those trainees that have relevant backgrounds and to give more time.
p kunMWOI
----------- --------- - -------------- -------------------------------------------------
Son & 5UPP°n >n lmplemcn,a,ion &
01 a Ba5in mior,nation System67
5. Training
5.6 Water quality
5.6.1  First “on the job training”
5.6.1.1   Introduction
The field work  was  done from October 1 to 13, 2012 for two weeks. The main objective of the mission was  to give hands  on training on the selection of precise locations on the ground for the water quality  monitoring stations  designed for Tana and Beles  sub basins  by  applying the criteria set out in the methodological guideline and to describe it by completing the station sheet forms. For (his purpose a set of fourteen primary water quality stations from the two sub-basins were selected to demonstrate the hands  on training on precising location and station description. Seven of these primary water quality stations were chosen from Beles sub-basin and the remaining from Tana sub basin. The list of the stations to be covered and associated field work plan for the hands on training was communicated to the Client well ahead of the commencement of the field activities.
5.6.1.2   Training participants
The  following  participants  attended  the  hands  on  training  and  associated  field  work  carried  during
the two weeks.
Name of participants
Responsibility
Organization
1
Ato Hassen Muhabaw
Water Quality expert
Tana Sub basin
2
Ato Melaku Tarekegn
Water quality expert
Abay Basin Authority
3
Ato Melese Meshesha
GIS specialist
Tana sub basin
4
Ato Habtamu Achenef
Water Resource Management expert
Tana sub basin
5
Ato Temesgen Gete
Hydrologist
Tana sub basin
Whereas the first three participants attended the entire hands on training and associated field work carried throughout the two weeks, the remaining two participated for one day  each. The expected participants  from Beles  sub-basin failed to attend the hands  on training and field work  due to another commitment they  had at that time. Several telephone conversations  were made with the Manger of the Beles  Sub basin Ato Alemayehu to try  and convince him to send his  staff to the training and field work  sessions. But all the attempts  went in vain due to the engagement of his staff in other meetings.
5.6.1.3    Delivery of the hands on training and locating water quality monitoring stations
Overall objectives
During the first three days of the field work, participants of the hands on training were introduced in the field with the criteria to be applied for selecting appropriate site for sampling from the primary, secondary  and tertiary  water quality  monitoring stations. The main criteria for selecting the precise location for the waler quality monitoring stations included the following aspects:
►  a.  Checking  the  representativeness  of  the  sampling  station  from  the  perspectives  of  lateral, vertical  and  cross-sectional  mixing  of  the  water  body.  To  better  comprehend  this  the  common geomorphologic  classification  of  river  channels  into  riffle,  run  and  depositing/pool  sections  was explained and practically exemplified by observation of the river channels on the field.
qY5X] .
v
Jhl.ofc.Oi ito
PjJlm [■gwKfifcrtt
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report68
5. Training
► b. Checking for the presence of disturbing influences around the station such as ex erna discharges from nearby sources or inflows, weir, land-water boundary, unrepresen a ve vegetation e.t.c.
► c. Checking for the presence of stable stream bed and river channel for sampling of sediments.
► d. Checking the accessibility of the water quality sampling stations both during rainy and dry seasons.
► e. Safety and security of the water quality sampling sites. Here it was explained for the need of safety  equipments,  precautionary  briefings  concerning  the  possible  hazards  while  sampling from hazardous sites to prevent the samplers from unnecessary damage.
In addition explanations were given to the participants on the type of data needed to complete the station data sheet.
The fourteen water quality monitoring stations selected for the field work were used as practical demonstrations to apply the principles outlined in the methodological guide, the criteria indicated above and the station data sheet. The training participants were made to participate in the decision making process to precisely locate the water quality stations later in the course of the field work. This has enabled them to learn by doing and grasp the principles for selecting appropriate sites for the stations as in the methodological guideline.
Precisely located water quality monitoring stations
Out of the fourteen primary water quality stations planed to be precisely located during the field work, eleven of them have been successfully located. The station data sheet forms were completed on the field for the successfully located Waler quality stations.
The sites  for many  of the precisely  located stations  during the field work  have been slightly changed from the locations given in the map of the HIS/BIS design report. This is mainly because of the changes observed on the ground and to confirm to the site selection criteria discussed in the preceding sections. Some rivers that enter into Lake Tana have changed their former courses and it was found that their present confluences are located in different places. Among the rivers whose courses and hence its confluence with lake Tana has changed includes the Rib river, Megech river and Gumara Maksegnit rivers. The confluences of these rivers with Lake Tana have changed and the sites of the water quality stations are made to be located along the new courses.
The location of other water quality stations such as the Basin head water of Beles River (BE-Bel-1- 1) has been modified to adjust with the realities on the ground. This station was initially located in the design map at the confluence of Kassen and Beles head Water Rivers. But the earlier river, i.e. Kassen River, is joined upstream by a small nver called Jahanah and a comparatively larger flow of outlet water discharge from the Tana Beles Hydropower Station itself. It was clearly observed on the ground that the outlet discharge water from the hydropower station constitutes  a major disturbance in terms of water quality for the Beles head water river. Thus the site for the water quality monitoring station for the head waters of the basin was changed from the confluence of Kasen with Beles  Rivers  to a site located on the Beles  river alone found upstream of the confluence to avoid the disturbance of the outlet discharge.
Alternative sites for 8E-Bel-1-9 was also proposed as modification to the site indicated on the mao of the design report. Access.ng this site demands a foot walk of about one and half hours from village 26 of the Pawe irrigation settlers. Moreover the footpath could be troublesome to walk on during rainy seasons. However it was observed there is a new road that connects Pawe whh
Jawe town which crosses over the Beles River on a bridge. The bridae was 
washed away by the Hoods of last summer, but the river can be accessed  by carefully rts^ into the gorge. Thus, to make this station accessible both during wet ano d™ season .
u
9
is proposed to replace the one in the design map.
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report
son'he later slle1
69
5. Training
Other water quality stations are located within 500 to 1000 meters distance from the location shown by  the coordinates  of the design map. These minor changes  are made to confirm to the site selection criteria discussed in the preceding sections. The table below summarizes  the new
coordinates of the precisely located water quality stations.
IM
'i ‘IvyvjIwK
1          Beles          BE-Bel-1-1               Basin Head
11.73768957700
36.84995415030
fftedse Latitude 2]
^longitude^;
;:(afterfieldworiQJ
11.74504
036.84783
Station moved from
confluence of Kasen with
Beles to Beles alone
2          Beles          BE-Bel-1-3
After irrigation zone
11.14925344830
- After confluence              36.27021950370
The station was not
accessed b/s of
unavailability of security 
personnel to accompany 
the group to the
confluence.
After Dangur
3 Beles BE-Bel-1-4 planned dam- before
irrigation zone
11.12963461870
11.13672
35.82732477780                 035.82578
Located within 500m of
the design site on the
map
4          Beles          BE-Bel-1-5
Downstream of 10.91824181720 10.92179
Beles                        35.20738985250                 035.20776
Located within 500m of
the design site on the
map
5          Beles          BE-Bel-1-7
In irrigation zone
before confluence
with Beles
10.91441803440
35.21508544270
10.92024
035.21466
Located within 500m of
the design site on the
map
6          Beles          BE-Bel-1-9           In irrigation zone
11.44367660050
36.48944381630
11.36287
11.43856                          036.40826
036.48597              (Alternative station at the Pawe-Jawe road bridae)
7          Beles         BE-Bel-1-16        Before confluence
10.92131992800
35 21426625500
10.92024
035.21466
Located within 500m of
the design site on the
map
8          Tana
LT-Gum-1-
15
Before Tana Lake
11.89220121780
37.50572924260
River channel not directly 
accessible from lake by 
boaL Need to walk on foot
path from Tana cherkose
port
9          Tana          LT-Rib-1-8
Downstream Before
Tana Lake
11.99090864590
37.58338946480
12.04144
037.60085
Newly located al the
confluence of the present
Ribb river channel and
Tana lake
10         Tana         LT-Meg-1-1
Downtream Before
Tana Lake
12.26385421340
37 37045861480
12 28397
037.40364
Newly located at the
confluence of the present
Megech river channel and
Tana lake
11         Tana         LT-Abb-1-17
Exit of the Tana
Lake Before Bahir
Dar
11.61605420780
37.40988307950
11.62151
037.40790
Located within 500m of
the design site on the map
12         Tana         LT-Abb-1-36
After Bahir Dar
11.58733915550
37.41025307630
At the exit mouth of Tana
lake. Bahirdar
13          Tana          LT-Lak-1-5
Downstream Before
Lake T ana
12.24370174900
37.11187715580
.
Station moved a little
downstream of Li jam
Mado village to make it
more accessible by boat
Tana lake infronl ol the
tributary near DeJgi
village
14          Tana          LT-Gil-1-18
Downstream Before
Lake T ana
11.83454504950
37.11991517790
11.86064
037.12688
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report70
5. Training
The remaining three water quality stations were not precisely located during (he field work for the following reasons.
The water quality station located at the confluence of Gumara River with Lake Tana (LT-Gum-1-15) was  found not accessible by  boat when approached from the front side of Tana Cherkose Monastry. This is because the shore of the lake covered by the flood plain becomes unavigable before the Gumara river channel is approached. Therefore, during the next field mission, instead of trying to access the station from the front side of Tana Cherkose monastery, one will have to try to approach it by navigating to Tana Cherkose port at the back side and then walking by foot towards Christos Samra Monastry where the river channel is found.
The water quality station located after the confluence of Gilgel Beles with the main Beles (BE-Bel-
1-3) vcas not accessed due to the unavailability of cooperation by the local kebele administration to provide accompanying security guards and guides to show us the footpath to the confluence. We were informed by the kebele officials that the footpath to the confluence is covered by tall savannah grass and it takes more than two hours of walking. The footpath can be easily missed out without a guide and it presents high security risks inside the jungle.
5.6.2  Second “on the job training”
The folowing table shows  the next step and trainings  that should be done for a complete implementation of the Water quality aspect process. These trainings will be implemented in one single session after delivery of the equipment.
Precise location of
Hater Quality station
Training
No
No
Training
Training
Yes
Yes
Training
Only the Primary
station
(6 stations for Beles
and 8 for Tana)
Training the ABA Staff
on precise location of Waler quality station
Training the ABA staff or, water quality 
sampling and in situ analysis
Training the A8A staff on waler quality 
laboratory analysts
Training the ABA staff on water quality primary process
► Methodological guide of identifying stations,
► Station form sheet
► Methodological guide of identifying stations.
► Station form sheet
► Methodological guide of the sampler
►  WQ sample form sheet
► In situ analysis equipments
► Methodological guide of field analysis.
►  Field equipments [Photometers...)
►Standards, guideline,
Done
Done
►
►
►
Water quality data. Software (Minimum Excel), GIS (II possible)
After
procureme
nt
After
procureme
nt
After
procureme
nt
Yes
►Water quality data.
Training
Training the ABA staff
on water quality 
secondary process
►
►
Hydrological data
Land cover I agrrcuhural I demographic Dr^'
I Industry data
Yes
►
procureme
nt
Statistical software or Excel minimum
►  GIS software
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information <;«,
Interim Report
un Wem5. Training
71
5.7  Environment
Environmental training will be divided in 3 parts:
► Terrestrial Ecology
► Aquatic ecology
► Land resources
5.7.1  Terrestrial ecology
This  training will be manage by  Dr. Zerihun Woldu from the University  of Addis  Abeba. This  first environmental training is  deemed appropriate for the training in concerning the vegetation data collection and analysis.
The  first  phase  (2  days)  will  involve  class  room  discussions  on  the  basic  principles  of  vegetation Ecology such as:
► Brief introduction on vegetation types in Ethiopia
► Growth/Life forms
► Sampling methods for Vegetation type
► Sampling methods for each growth/life form
The second phase (1 day) will involve field work exercise probably at a site designated for future monitoring:
► Use of GPS and other tools to locate / relocate sites.
► Reconnaissance survey to familiarize with the vegetation types encountered.
► Laying quadrats (sampling plots) appropriate for each vegetation type
► Recording vegetation parameters - including cover/abundance
The third phase will involve a return to the classroom (1 day) and the following:
► Constructing vegetation data table using spreadsheet
► Converting the data table into vegetation data frame
► Vegetation data analysis
► Interpretation and report writing
5.7.2  Aquatic ecology
This training will be managed by Dr. Tadese Fetahi from the University of Addis Abeba. Dr Fetahi will provide training for Ecopath. This will be a two days intensive training and will give the trainee an idea how to use and develop ecological model from the scratch.
Ecopath with Ecosim (EwE) is one of the most widely used tool for ecosystem modelling with more than 6000 registered users in 164 countries, and with over 300 publications. The model has been recognized by NOAA (National Oceanic and Atmospheric Agency of USA) as one of the ten most important scientific breakthroughs in the organization’s 200-year history.
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report72
5. Training
ecosystem models.
EwE has three main components: Ecopath - a static, mass-balanced snapshot of the system;
areas.
The Ecopath software package can be used to:
► Address ecological questions;
► Evaluate ecosystem effects of fishing;
► Explore management policy options;
► valuate impact and placement of manne protected areas;
► Evaluate effect of environmental-changes.
5.7.3 Land resources
This training will be managed by Neil Munro, International staff of the Consultant team.
5.7.3.1 Purpose
The purpose to the land resources part of the Tana Beles environmental monitoring is to provide on a regular basis to the basin authorities, updated quantitative and / or qualitative information on soil conditions, land degradation and erosion, land use, agricultural production I inputs, and soil & water conservation (SWC) measures.
Unlike hydrological data measurements  where real-time data can be streamed to users, comparatively  little detailed information can be provided on an instantaneous  basis  from land resources and related issues.
Soil moisture is one field where real-time data streaming could be done but has to be related to detailed baseline data on soil conditions that is at the moment absent, and is perhaps best made by the research community to monitor crop trials for example. Satellite imagery for climate and natural resource monitoring, such as the NDVI data, can provide images that show changes to crop and vegetation growth as the growing season progresses and ends. Various organizations are working on use of NDVI in the Tana Beles basin, including the MoARD to help forecasting of crops.
5.7.3.2  Methods and programs
The training will be in three phases. First a series of presentations to illustrate the ornhiAmc: and
Design. Development & Suppon in Implementation & Operation ol a Basin Informal™ Svstem IInntteprriimmRReepnoorrtt73
5. Training
Training Classroom (1 day at start).
Power point presentations and discussions of:
► methods for soil description;
► soil groups in region;
► catenas and their use;
►  chemical  and  physical  analyses  to  include:  soil  quality  indicators  (pH  and  acidity  trends; Electrical  conductivity  (EC)  and  salinity  changes  and  trends;  fertility  levels  in  soils  (N.  P,  K, organic  matter,  trace  elements);  sodicity  levels  (ESP)  and  any  observed  trends.  pH  data  is collected  by  BoARD  on  a  regular  basis  for  its  acidification  reduction  programme,  but  data points are not geo-referenced;
► soil mapping;
► land suitability analysis and mapping;
► land utilisation types and mapping;
►  erosion,  sedimentation  and  land  degradation;  using  indicators  of  Stocking  and  Mumaghan (2001):
•    Rills, gullies, soil pedestals, armour layers, soil pans, plough pans;
•    Restrictions in rooting depth from past, and structural deterioration of soils;
•    Accumulation of soil on slopes, behind terraces, in reservoirs, and in streams;
•    Accumulation of dust in soils
•    Deflation of sands from river channels onto fields
•    Changes to crop yields, plant diseases, responses to fertilizers, decreased soil fauna.
► soils & crop production;
.► agricultural inputs - fertilisers and other agro-chemicals to control pests & diseases;
► soil assessments by BoARD;
► land use & land cover maps and statistics and forestry & woody biomass assessments (Woody biomass - Tecsuit; FAO 2012 land cover).
► Repeat photography and land use change
► Using the traditional and revised altitudinal agro-ecological belts
► Use of Legacy Data
Field Tours: Day 1. Bahir Dar to Gonder
The group will travel to the Watershed Monitoring and Evaluation (WME) Project (Govt of Finland TA) in Ribb, Gumera and Jema sub-watersheds. It is  proposed to spend ONE day  with the communities and project team of the WME project in the Gumera or Ribb watersheds in the Tana Corridor.
The objective of the Watershed Monitoring and Evaluation (WME) Project is to support and assist the TBIWRDP Nalional Project Coordination Unit and the Bureau of Agriculture and Rural Development (BoARD) in developing and effectively  implementing a comprehensive watershed M&E system through a well-developed management information system. A mid-term review was recently completed (WME Report 59. May 2912). This MTR notes that Community level watershed planning, monitoring and evaluation is the main entry point for the whole system of WM M&E and it mainly  involves  the user communities  and the watershed committees  delegated by  the communities themselves. The MTR concluded that al the community level:
f tuotasM)HIboM.hltaO' J”I i»
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report5. Training
74
► Role of the CF has been decisive;
► The Planning, Monitoring and Reporting System is fully functioning;
► The functioning of the system is well understood by the Community Watershed Planning Team,
► There is an indication that this system will continue functioning after the Project completion,
► Awareness of linkages b/n NRC activities and the impacts on livelihood is variable;
► Project management and leadership skills are low';
► The Planning & Monitoring of the watershed activities has instilled feeling of confidence in the system;
►  Experience sharing visits had a positive role in creating farmers' awareness and vision on rehabilitating their Natural Resources; and in turn creating a positive impact on the functioning of planning and monitoring;
► Regular evaluation meetings have induced competitive working spirits among various working Theggrroouupps.s will move up to Gondar after the WME project and stay overnight in Gondar
Field Tours: Day 2. Gondar to Bahir Dar
Next day proceed to the Megech Irrigation & Drainage project that is under construction and utilising existing information of the study area (Feasibility Study, BRL ESIA report) examine wetlands, heavy clay Vertisols, other soils, land use and vegetation, irrigation and drainage construction that is ongoing. Z day. During the day stops will be made also to examine vegetation
in wetlands and forest areas.
Field Tours: Day 3. Return Journey Half day trip from Bahir Dar
The group will then return to Bahir Dar via one or more monitoring sites of the Belgium Universities and Bahir Dar Lake Tana Project. This project is assessing the water and sediment budgets of Lake Tana for optimisation of land management and water allocation in Ethiopia (http://geoweb.ugent.be/physical-geography/research/wase-tana)
This is a new project that has been initiated in 2011 in the 'Tana Corridor' and is a joint venture between Universities in Belgium and Bahir Dar. The project ‘Water and sediment budgets of Lake Tana for optimisation of land management and water allocation (Ethiopia)’ is funded by Belgium / Flemish Development Cooperation. The Universities  of Gent and Leuven in Belgium with the University of Bahir Dar, and Univ, of Mekelle, will be conducting studies in sub basins increase the understanding of hydrology  and sediment in order to develop tools  and strategies  that would contribute to proper planning and management of land and water resources of the Lake Tana basin; enhance the capacity of Bahir Dar University and local institutions (PhD and MSc training) and to promote integration among stakeholders dealing with land and water issues; and establish three hydrologic stations in July 2011 with initial focus on Gumara River. Partners also include the Bureau of Environmental Protection Land Administration and Use in Amhara National Regional State (Focal person is Ato Sintayehu Deresse ) and the Bureau of Water Resources Development in Amhara National Regional State (focal person is  Ato Zemene Tsehay  ) 1/2 day  - Io be
arranged through Dr Jan Nyssen (Gent Univ.)
Bahir Dar. Day 4. Half day: Analytical Laboratories Visit the various soil analytical laboratories in Bahir Dar.
y
Desxin. Development & Support tn Implementauon & Operation of a Basin Information System
Interim Report
775
5. Training
► BoARD;
► Amhara Design and Supervision Works Enterprise (ADSWE);
► University of Bahir Dar.
The lab tours  will discuss  programmes  at the laboratories; examine equipment; review analytical costs  and tum-around time for work; discuss  their future plans  for work  and their interest to participate. The tour will include a discussion on the MoARD programme that is sampling sails for acidification control in its  Soil Liming Requirements  Programme. The MoARD laboratory  is following National procedures  for soil analysis  (Sahlemedhin Sertsu and Taye Bekele, 2000). Key contacts at the MoARD are: Ato Tehone Fekadu (head of laboratory); Ato Worku Alemnaw (Fertility specialist, lime requirement project, at laboratory).
Bahir Dar. Day 4. Half Day: Roundup
The  group  will  meet  to  discuss  the  field  tour  and  overall  findings  of  the  overall  environmental monitoring training.
5.8 GIS
5.8.1 General
One of the key tasks to be performed in this phase is training. The training will be conducted on the GIS software and Remote sensing tools  for the application in the basin information system. The Contractor will provide related session of training during the installation, commissioning and set up of Hardware and Software in the project office. The targeted beneficiaries  for the training are expected to be the mid-level professionals  and specialists  of GIS recruited in the basin and sub basin authorities.
The training will be on GIS data collection, spatial analysis, hydrologic  analysis  using ArcGIS and image processing and interpretation using ENVl. The topics  and contents  of the training are described below in the table.
Table 5: Training topics to be covered in GIS and Remote Sensing during implementation d
opera tionaliza tion
Software
Topics
Contents
ArcGIS
Getting started
A gentle introduction to GIS
Exploring geographic data in ArcMap
Working with geographic features
Working with attribute data (tables)
Digitizing paper maps
Creating a basic GIS map
Classifying, symbolizing and labelinq map features
Map cosmetics. Visualization process
Creating and managing metadata
Geodatabase
Working with Geodatabase
Creating, Importing and exporting Spatial data
Solving common coordinate system problems
Create and edit metadata
ArcGIS
Spatial analyst
Distance, queries (extraction). Classification. Generalization
Design, Development & Support in Iru^emeiKaiion & Operation old 6asm Information System Interim Report5. Training
76
Software
Topics
Contents
Advanced
Calculating density, slope, aspect, hillshade, contour maps
Interpolations methods to create surfaces from sample data
Hydrologic
analysis
Arc Hydro model
Terrain processing workflow: Stream burning, Fill the sink, Flow direction and flow accumulation, stream segmentation, watershed delineation, hydro network 
generation
GeoSlatistical analysis
Data variability, spatial relationships, unusual data values
Multivariate analysis, prediction errors, quantiles, probabilities
Methods: IDW, Kriging, Spline, polynomial
ENVI
Basic
Managing image display from various data sensors, including ASTER, SPOT, Landsat and USGS DEM
Working with vector and raster data, conversions
Image display concepts
Visual Image Interpretation
Data fusion and color transforms
Advanced
Feature extraction
Regions of interest and classification
Vegetation analysis
The Supplier/ contractor is  expected to offer the most state-of-the art, cutting-edge training available. The comprehensive trainings are in length and include discussions, case studies, and problem-solving exercises. Objective of the training are the following :
► To transfer knowledge of how GIS and Remote Sensing can be used in the analysis of water resources   for   water   development   projects,   water   resource   planning   and   watershed management.
► To make acquaint with the use of professional software like Arc GIS and ENVI for their field of applications.
► Considering the way spatial data of hydrological relevance to be acquired from topographic and thematic maps, point data and data from high resolution earth observation satellites.
►  To enable trainers to work with thematic maps, attribute tables, editing and selecting features, geo-processing and generating GIS and remotely sensed data.
5.8.2  Methodology
Once the demand is received and the software proposed are procured and installed the consultant specialist will organize the training sessions, as well as to the elaboration of the necessary traininq manuals. Before handling the training, the consultant or the service giver will attempt to make a pre-training assessment on the understanding and experience of the trainee professional background, their previous  experience in the use of the GIS and RS technoloov  and their expectation from the training. This will help the organizer to be contented and meet the level and standard of the client whom the service will be delivered. The technical and user manuals whirh
support the training will be developed.
5.8.3  Training outcome
At the end of the training, the trainee will be able to:
manuals which
► Explain the principles of geographic Information System and Rpmnto
components of GIS, representations of geographic objects as vprinr J sens|ng including
data organization and storage and data analysis.
and raster dala sets, GIS
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Interim Report
Information System5. Training
► Be familiar with spatial information and spatial database using ArcGIS.
► Perform various GIS operations on spatial and attribute data.
► Understand the principles of map making and
► Use tools in GIS for Stream and Watershed Delineation
77
Design, Development & Support in implementation & Operation of a Basin information System Interim Report78
Annexes
ANNEXES
> ------- --------------------------------------------- -
XtX"'”"1
1
«»»«» Spa.Tana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
Climatological  characteristics  of  the  site Installation
possibilities
Protected zone
Potential disturbances
Hll
Rainfall site
Near road (<20m)
Climatologically site
Nearby Marsh / River (<200m)
UM
Passage of Human Activities
Presence of obstacles
(wide angle>10°) NO Slope of site (S) (degree) Slope<19°
Height of the obstacles (H) (meter) 1
Distance of obstacles (D) (meter) 10
Quality of site (WMO) 1 : S<19° & D>4H (1-GOOD;5- BAD;6
closed to road) 6
M inistry of Water and Energy Hydrometnc Measurement Training Guideline
Page L yTana and Belcs Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OM EGA
GURAMA station (new location downstream on the bridge)
Location
Latitude North Longitude East Altitude Other (woreda) Code station (client)
TANA GELDA River
II. 83832 37.63636 1802
III,  006
Basin
River
Environmental
constraints
Road accessibility
Good
Distance from main road
0
Vandalism risk
Medium
Nearby activities
Housing
Surrounding relief
Narrow Valley
Surrounding vegetation
Low < 1 m
Electromagnetic
constraints
NO
GSM coverage
3/5
Nature of the flow (for im
merged sensor)
Type of stream
Permanent
Turbidity level
High
Urban effluent
Not relevant
Industrial effluent
Not relevant
Straight Course
... m uptstream
50
... m downstream
100
Confined to 1 channel ?
Yes
Cross section
features
Bank stability 
BRIDGE POLES
Minor bed stability 
MEDIUM (pebbles)
Existence of
infrastructure
Risk of submersion /
Bank overflow
BRIDGE
NO
Flood gauge possibilities 
EASY (Bridge)
Type of flood gauge
SINKER
Water Level Measurement Area
Description of the area 1394 km2
MmisvyorWaiet auj Lncigy
No mixing ->Low waterTana and Belcs Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRIx-OM EGA.
Table 1.2.5. Recommended accuracy (uncertainty levels) expressed
at the 95 per cent confidence Interval
Precipitation (amount and form)
Rainfall intensity
Snow depth (point)
Waler content of snow
Evaporation (point)
Wind speed
Water level
Wave height
Waler depth
Width of waler surface
Velocity of flow
Discharge
Suspended sediment concentration
Suspended sediment transport
Bed-load transport
Waler temperature
Dissolved oxygen (waler temperature Is more than 10*C)
Turbidity
Colour
PH
Electrical conductivity
Ice thickness
Ice coverage
Soil moisture
3-7%
1 mm h * 1 *
1 cm below 20 cm or 10% above 20 cm
2.5-10%
2-5%, 0.5 mm
0.5 m s-’
10-20 mln
10%
0.1 m. 2%
0.5%
2-5%
5%
10%
10%
2S%
0.1-0.5‘C
3%
5-10%
5%
0.0S-0.1  pH  unit
5%
1-2 cm. 5%
5% (or is. 20 kg nrv3
1 kg m 1         20 kq m 1
Noics:
I. When 4 range o( accuracy levels Js recommended, die lover value U applicable to measurements under reiaUvely good ccwJlUons and t*
higher value Is applicable to measurements under difficult situations.
I Obtaining Use recommended accuracy of precipitation measuremenu, J-7 per cent, wW depend on many factors, induing gauge
characteristics. For gauges having their orifice above Use ground, the gauge catch deficiency b strongly determined by wind speed and precipitation type. Tho catch deficiency for l.qht mew failing during strong wind can for example ba SO per cent or more.__________________________
M inistry of Water and Energy Hydrometric Measurement Training Guideline
PageZ /Tana and Bcles Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
Figure 11 (c) Time series of Wabi Shebele annual river flow at Melka Wakana.
Ministry' of Water and Energy
Hydrometric Measurement T^ing Guideline'Tana and Boles Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
Figure 10 (b) Monthly discharge hydrographs for Wabi Shebele river at Melka Wakana, Imi and Gode
Ministry of Water and Energy Hydrometric Measurement Training Guideline
Page ZDTana and Boles Integrated              Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
discharge during a year. Annual, monthly and daily discharge hydrographs for river in the Wabi Shebele basin are shown in Figure 5.11(a) to (c).
----------------- ------------------ ----------- --------------------- 1
Date beginning from Jan 1
Ministry of Water and Energy Hydrometric
Page24Tana and Bclcs Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-O.MECA
equations.
Extrapolation of ratings. Extrapolation of ratings  is  necessary  when a water level is recorded above the highest level and flow gauged level Without considering the cross section geometry and controls, large error may result. Where the cross section is stable, a simple method is  to extend the stage-area and stage velocity curves  and, for given stage values, take the product of velocity  and cross-section area to give discharge values beyond the stage values that have been gauged.
Stage-area and stage velocity curves can easily produced from the data that are used for establishing the rating curve of the same river. The stage-area curve then can be extended above the active channel by  using standard land-surveying methods. Extrapolation of the stage-velocity curve requires understanding of the high stage control. Where there is channel control and where Manning roughness is not varying with stage, the Manning equation may be used to estimate the extrapolated velocity. It is to be noted that an upper bound on velocity  is  normally  imposed by  the Froude number V/(gh)05 knowing that the Froude number rarely exceeds unity in alluvial channels.
Shifting in rating curves. The stage-discharge relationship can vary  with time, in response to degradation, aggradation, or a change in channel shape at the control section. Shifts  in rating curves  are best detected from regular gaugings  and become evident when several gaugings  deviate from the established curve. Sediment accumulation or vegetation growth at the control will cause deviation which increases with time, but a flood can flush away sediment and aquatic weed and cause a sudden reversal of the rating curve shift.
In gravel-bed rivers  a flood may  break  up the armoring of the surface gravel material, leading to general degradation until a new armoring layer becomes  established, and rating tend to shift between states of quasi-equilibrium. It may then be possible to shift the rating curve up or down by  the change in the mean bed level, as indicated by plots of stage and bed level versus  time. Most of the rivers  in Wollo. such as  Mille and Logia exhibit such phenomenon.
In rivers  with gentle slopes, discharge for a given stage when the river is  rising may exceed discharge for the same stage when the river is  falling (flood subsiding). In such cases  adjustment factors  must be applied in calculating discharge for rising and falling stages.
1.7 Hydrograph
Hydrograph  is  the  graphical  representation  of  the  instantaneous  rate  of  discharge  of  a stream plotted with respect to lime. Annual discharge hydrographs show the variation of
M inistry of Water and Energy          Hydrometric Measurement Training Guideline
Page/JTana and Beks Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
The rating curve is described by a rating equation of the form
Q = a(H + Hof
where a. b, and H  are coefficients.
(19)
o
Having  paired  measured  data  of  (H,  Q)  the  coefficients  a  and  b  can  be  estimated  by 
taking a trial value of H  which gives a straight
o
line of the equation:
log O = log a + b logfH + Ho)
(20)
Or  value  of  Ho   adjustment  for  the  low  flow  can  be  estimated  with  the  following  method.
Three  values  of  discharge  (Q   Q ,  Q )
b23
are  selected  from  known  portion  of  the  curve.  One
of  these  should  be  near  the  middle  of  the  curve,  and  the  other  value  should  be  near  the upper end of the curve. Then the third intermediate value:
If H  H . and H
1t     2                 3
represent the gage heights corresponding to Q  Q , and Q  then
b2                 3
Ho is estimated by
,, _ HiHi-H] Ho 
“
(22)
H, + H -2H
i2
A full rating curve can consist of different rating equation, e.g., one for low flows and one for high flows. For low flows b > 2, for high flows b < 2.
Example 4 Developed rating curve for the river Zarema near Zarema a tributary of the Tekeze river having a watershed area of 3259 km2 has the following rating curves:
Q = 4.241(H+ 0.201)'°”
Q = 69.997(H * (-0.345)1690
for low flow upto H <0.43m for high flow upto H > 0.43m
where H is in m and
Ministry of Water and Energy
Q in m’/s. Figure 5.10 shows the graphical form of the above
HydrometricMeasurcmcn!Tana and Bclcs Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
1.6 Stage discharge relationship - rating curve:
The rating curve is constructed by plotting successive measurements of the discharge and gage
height on a graph. Figure 8 shows an example of rating curves in linear and logarithmic scale
for Zarema river a tributary of Tekeze river near the foot of Semen Mountains.
Rating curve of Zarema river at Zarema
Rating curve of Zarema river at Zarema
10
o
cd
Q
” 0.1
0.01
001 °-1 1 10 100 1000 10000
Q (m /s)
3
Figure 8: Rating curves in linear (Top) and logarithmic scaled? ZaremariveTnear Zarema, a tributary of Tekeze river (MWR)..
A  rating  curve  must  be  checked  periodically  to  ensure  that  the  relationship  between  Q  and H   ha   remained   constant,   scouring   of   the   stream   bed   or   deposition   of   sediment   in   the stream   can   cause   the   rating   curve   to   change   so   that   the   same   recorded   gage   height produces different Q.
Ministry of Water and Energy Hydrometric Measurement Training Guideline
PageZ 1Tana and Bclcs Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
Example 3 Use the slope area method to calculate the peak discharge for the following data:         Reach length = 600 m, fall = 0.6 m. Manning n = 0.037.
Upstreamflow area = 1550 m2, upstream wetted perimeter = 450 m, upstream velocity  head coefficient = 1.10. Downstreamflow area = 1450
m,
2     downstream  wetted  perimeter
=  400  m,  downstream  velocity  head
coefficient = 1.12.
Solution: Basic parameters calculations:
Flow
area
(m )
2
Wetted perimeter
Hydraulic radius (m)
Conveyance (m3/s)
Reach
93999.14
conveyance =
(m)
upstream section
1550
450
3.44
95,545.32
First App. of S =
0.001
downstream section 1450 400
Peak discharge computation:
3.63     92,477.97
Energy slope
Peak
Iter. No.
h  (m)
w
hxj(m)
(m/m)
discharge
(m /s)
3
1
0.001
2972.515
2
0.20619
0.2399
0.0009438
2887.815
3
0.19461
0.22642
0.000946
2892.639
4
0.19526
0.22718
0.0009468
2892.368
Hence, the final value converges to Q = 2892.3 m3/s
o
OJ 
qD
CO
o-
M inistry of W  er and Energy Hydrome.nc
alTana and Bclcs Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
Where:              F = fall, and L = reach length IV. Calculate the first approximation to the peak discharge Qj
Qt=KS V. Calculate the velocity heads:
(14)
«„(g /4,)
t
2
/^X)2
(15)
(16)
Where:                           h vu and h vd are the velocity heads at upstream and downstream
sections respectively,
a  vu   and  avd    are  the  velocity  heads  at  upstream  and  downstream  sections respectively, and
g = gravitational acceleration.
VI. Calculate an updated value of energy slope Si:
L
Where: k = loss coefficient, for expanding flow, i.e„ A^ > A , k = 0.5, for contracting
(17)
u
flow that is Aa < A , k = 1.0
u
VII Calculate an updated value of peak discharge
VIII    Compare    the    updated    value    of    peak    discharge    with    previous    estimate,    and continue  the  iteration  until  you  close  the  difference  between  the  newly  estimated peak discharge and the previously estimated peak discharge.
Ministry of Waler and Energy Hydrometric Measurement Training Guideline
Page 19Tana and Bclcs Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
5. bridges, channel bends, waterfalls, and other features causing flow non-uniformity should be avoided. Note that the accuracy of the slope-area method improves as the reach length increases.
A suitable reach should satisfy one or more of the following criteria:
1.
the ratio of reach length to hydraulic depth should be greater than 75,
2.
the fall should be greater than or equal to 0.15 m, and
3.
the fall should be greater than either of the velocity heads computed at the
upstream and downstream cross sections.
The procedure consists of the following steps:
I. Calculate the conveyance K at the upstream and downstream sections:
(10)
(11)
Where: K = conveyance
A = flow x-seclional area
R = hydraulic radius
n = reach Manning coefficient
u and d denotes upstream and downstream, respectively
Calculate the reach conveyance K , equal to the geometric mean of the upstream and downstream conveyances:
* =(W'2
(12)
III. Calculate the first approximation of the energy slope S'
L
(13)
..... .......
Page 18Tana and Bclcs Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
water may be taken as nil.
Solution.       q = 0.01 l/s = 10'5 m3/s, C, = 25 gm/l = 20 000 mg/l = 20 000 ppm = 20 part
per billion
C. -C2
Q= —------- -q
c 2-c,
Q = (20 000/0.005)*1 O’5
Q = 50 m3/s
Example 3 A fluorescent tracer with a concentration of 45 gm/l was  injected into a stream at a constant rate of 8 cm3/s. At a downstream section sufficiently  far away from the point of injection, the concentration was  found to be 0.008 parts per million. Estimate the discharge in the stream. The background concentration of the tracer in the stream is zero.
Solution, using Eq (5.9a) we get
C,-C2 c 2-c
8*10^(45000 —.008)
.008-0
Q = 45 m3/s
1.5 THE SLOPE-AREA METHOD
The high stages  and swift currents  that prevails  during floods  combine to increase the risk of accident and bodily  harm. Therefore, it is  generally  not possible to measure discharge during the passage of a flood. An estimate of peak  discharge can be obtained indirectly  by the use of open channel flow formulas.
The following guidelines are used in selecting a suitable reach.
1.    high-water marks should be readily recognizable.
2.     the reach should be sufficiently long so that fall can be measured accurately.
3.    the cross-sectional shape and channel dimensions should be relatively constant.
4.     the reach should be relatively straight, although a contracting reach is preferred to an expanding reach, and
Ministry of Water and Energy Hydrometric Measurement Training Guideline
Page 1 /Tana and Boles Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
1.4.2 Continuous and constant rate injection method
In this method a tracer of known concentration Ci is injected continuously at a rate q at a sampling station situated downstream of injection point. The mass  rate M at which the tracer enters the test reach is
Assuming that satisfactory mixing of tracer has taken place with the entire flow across the
}               0                                                                                                     (7) cross-section with the measured concentration C2  (reaching equilibrium concentration), we have
M =■ qC  + QC
qC^QC =(Q^q)C
Q2
(8)
Solving for Q we get
Q=
C,-C2 c -c
20
(9a)
The dilution method is  particularly  useful for very  turbulent flows, which can provide complete mixing within a relatively  short distance. It is  also applicable when the cross section is so rough that alternative methods are unfeasible.
It  is  to  be  noted  that  a  highly  turbulent  and  narrow  reach  is  desirable.  In  this  regard minimum required mixing length can be estimated by
2
0.13B C (0.7Cd-2jg)
£ =--------------- -------------— 
gy
Where: L = mixing length
B = average width of the stream
y = average depth of the stream
C = Chezy's coefficient of roughness, varying from 15 to 50 for smooth to rough bed conditions
g = 9.81 m/s?
Example 2 25 g/l solution of a chemical tracer was discharged into a stream al 0.01 l/s.
(9b)
At sufficiently far downstream observation point, the chemical was found to ^0 reach an equilibrium concentration of 5 parts per billion. Estimate the stream discharge. The background concentration of the tracer chemical in stream Sf
Ministry of Waler and Energy Hydrometric Measurement Training GuidelineTana and Bclcs Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
Figure  7:  Dilution  gauging:  constant  rate injection and gulp injection After Greqorv
and Walling, 1973)
7
M inistry of Waler and Energy Hydrometric Measurement Training GuidelineTana and Bcles Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
Using principle of conservation of mass we may estimate the streamflow Q:
(6b)
(5.6b)
TC2
Ministry of Waler and Energy
Hydrometric
Page 14Tana and Bcles Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
1.4.1 Sudden Injection method
In this method a quantity of tracer volume V! and concentration Ci is added to the river by suddenly emptying a flask of tracer solution that is gulp injection. At the sampling station downstream the entire tracer cloud is monitored to find the relation between concentration
and time. The quantity of tracer or mass of tracer M is then equal
to C V
nv
If ti is the time
before  the  leading  edge  of  the  tracer  cloud  arrives  at  the  sampling  station  and  t2   is  the time after all the tracer has passed this station the quantity of tracer is given by Where:             C2 = sustained final (equilibrium) concentration of the chemical in the well
(5)
mixed flow (mg/l)
C = the base value concentration, already present
o
in the river (mg/l)
(6a)
M inistry of Water and Energy Hydrometric Measurement Training Guideline
Page IDTana and Beks Integrated Water Resources
Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
in which the integral is approximated by summing the incremental discharges calculated from
»-/
each measurement i, i = 1, 2,.... n of velocity Vj and depth di.
The measurements represent average values over width Aw, of the stream.
Example 1: Given the following stream gauging data, calculate the discharge.
Vertical No.
1
2
3
45
6
7
8
9
10
11
Distance to reference
15.0
20.0
25.0
30.0  35.0
40.0
45.0
50.0
55.0
60.0
65.0
point (m)
Sounding depth (m)
0.0
0.5
0.8
1.2       1.5
2.5
3.0
2.0
1.2
2.7
2.9
Velocity at 0.2 m (m/s)
0.0
0.5
0.7
0.9       1.2
1.4
1.7
1.3
0.9
1.7
1.8
Velocity at 0.8 m (m/s)
0.0
0.4
0.6
0.7       0.8
1.1
1.3
1.0
0.7
1.3
1.4
Solution: To use Eq. (5.3) first the average velocity at each sounding depth is calculated, then the partial width which is constant in this example is calculated.
Vertical No.
Distance to reference point (m)
Sounding depth (m) Velocity at 0.2 m (m's)
Velocity at 0.8 m (m/s)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9       10
15.0      20.0    25.0     30.0     35.0  40.0     45.0      50.0      55.0      60.0
11
65.0
Average Velocity (m/s)
0
0.45
0.65
0.8
1   1.25
1.5
1.15
partial area Ai (m )
2
0.0 0.5 0.8 1.2 1.5 2.5 3.0 2.0 1.2 2.7 2.9 0.0 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.2 1.4 1.7 1.3 0.9 1.7 1.8 0.0 0.4 0.6 0.7 0.8 1.1 1.3 1.0 0.7 1.3 1.4
0.8      1.47         1.59 6      13.3           4.8
4.8      19.5        7.63
0
2.5
4
6
7.5   12.5
15
10
Partial discharge (m /s)
3
0
1.13
2.6
4.8
7.5   15.6     22
.5
11.5
Total
97.6
Total A =
81.6 m2
3
Q = (m /s)
Average velocity (m/s) = Q/ A = 1.2 m/s
1.4  Dilution gauging
Dilution gauging method of measuring the discharge in a stream is 
made  by adding a
chemical solution or tracer of known concentration to the flow and
then  measuring  the
dilution of the solution downstream where the chemical is  completely  mixed with the stream water. A tracer is a substance that is not normally present in the stream and that is not likely to be lost by chemical reaction with other substances. Salt, fluorescein dye, and radioactive materials are commonly used as tracers. In general there are two methods of dilution gauging, sudden-injection methods and constant rate injection method. The two methods are described as follows.
M inistry of Water andTana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
special cable drum can be used to obtain accurate readings of depth and spacing of verticals. The mean section and mid-section methods are commonly used to compute the discharge of the individual segments (after Gregory, and Walling 1973).
Minisiry of Waler and Energy Hydrometric Measurement Training Guideline
Page 11Tann and Bclcs Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
manufacturer. With time the values of a and b are changing and regular recalibration is essential. This may be done by lowing the current meter through still water in a tank at a series of known velocities.
The current meter can be hand-held in the flow in a small stream (measurement by wading), suspended from a bridge or cable way across a large stream, or lowered from the bow of a boat (Figure 5).
Velocity distribution: The flow velocity varies with depth in a stream . Over the cross section of an open channel, the velocity distribution depends on the character of the river banks and of the bed and on the shape of the channel. The maximum velocities tend to be found just below the water surface and away from the retarding friction of the banks.
The average velocity occurs say about 0.6 of the depth. It is standard practice to measure velocity at 0.2 and 0.8 of the depth when the depth is more than 60 cm and to average the two velocities to determine the average velocity for the vertical section. For shallow rivers and near the banks on deeper rivers where the depths are less than 0.6 m, velocity measurements are made at 0.6 of depth of flow.
Discharge computation.
The discharge computation of a stream is calculated from measurements of velocity and depth. A marked line is stretched across the stream. At regular intervals along the line, the depth of the water is measured with a graduated rod or by lowering a weighted line from the surface to the stream bed, and the velocity is measured using a current meter. The discharge O at a cross-section of area A is found by
0 = jKA
Where V = streamflow velocity
A = cross sectional area of the flow
(1.2)
Ministry of Waler and Energy
—-—------- --------------------Tana and Bclcs Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
The relation between measured revolution per second of the meter cups N and water velocity V is given by
(1-1)
where:
V=a+bN
a = the starting velocity or velocity required to overcome mechanical friction, b = the constant of proportionality, and
Figure 5: Top: current meter mounted on a measuring rod, (bottom) suspended on a cable from the bow of a jet-boat (Maidrnent, 1993). Wide rivers flow (usually greater than 100 m) are often measured using a boat- the Baro river near Sudan border is the case in Ethiopia.
Initial values of a and b can be found from the calibration tables provided by the Ministry of Waler and Energy Hydrometric Measurement Training Guideline
&Tana and Boles Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
1.3  Flow velocity measurement and discharge computation
Flow velocity. The velocity  of flow in a stream can be measured with a current meter. Current meters are propeller devices (Figure 4) placed in the flow, the speed with which the propeller rotates being proportional to the flow velocity.
Figure  4:  Vertical  and  horizontal  axis  current suspension mounting of the meter body
meters and wading rod and cable
co
&>
00
rt o-
Ministry of Water and Energy
----------------- - -----------------------------------------------Tana and Bclcs Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
VERTICAL DRUM CHART
Figure 3: A typical chart from vertical float recorder.
Crest stage gage. This is used to obtain a record of flood crest at sites where recording gages arc not installed. A crest stage gage consists of a wooden staff gage scale, situated inside a pipe that has small holes for the entry of water. A small amount of cork is placed in the pipe, floats as the water rises, and adheres to the staff or scale at the highest water level.
Telemetric  gages. Gages  with automatic  data transmittal capabilities  are called self reporting gages, or stage sensors. Self-reporting gauges  are of the float-actuated or pressure actuated type. These instruments  use telemeters  to broadcast stage measurement in real time, from a stream gauging location to a central site. This type of gauge is ideally suited for applications where speed of processing is of utmost important, e.g., for operational hydrology or real-time flood forecasting.
CJ d
Ministry of Water and Energy Hydrometric Measurement Training GuidelineTana and Beles Integrated Water     Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
MANUAL METHODS
GAUGE BOARDS
Stopped Instnllntion
CREST STAGE GAUGER
I nd
Rod
Slopinn
Installation
Stool ')
Tobe i
1
Porlot atfid
Cop
RECORDING INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL FLOAT
RECORDER
STILLING WELL
INSTALLATION
HORIZONTAL FLOAT
RECORDER
of Stylui
Ch.i'i
Cuunlur wu'id’t
PRESSURE BULB
RECORDER
BUBBLE GAUGE APPARATUS
<1
Z</Z'Z
Figure 2: The measurement of stage through manual methods and recording instruments (after Gregory and Walling, 1973)
n DO CC
P-
Ministry of Water and Energy Hydrometric Measurement Training GuidelineTana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BR.L-OMEGA
surface.
Manual gages  are used where stages  do not vary  greatly  form one measurement to another measurement. They  are impractical in small or flashy  streams, where substantial changes in stages may occur between readings.
1.2.1 Recording gauge
A  recording  gage  measures  stages  continuously  and  records  them  on  a  strip  chart.  The mechanism  of  a  recording  gauge  is  either  float  actuated  or  pressure  actuated.  In  a  float actuated recorder, a pen recording the water level on a strip chart is actuated by a float on the surface of the water. The recorder and float is housed on suitable enclosure on the top of a stilling well connected to the  stream by two intake pipes (two intake pipes are used incase  one  of  them  become  clogged)  (Figure  2).  The  stilling  well  protects  the  float  from debris  and  ice  and  dampens  the  effect  of  wave  action.  This  type  of  gage  is  commonly used for continuous measurements of water levels in rivers and lakes.
The pressured actuated recorder or the bubble gage senses the water level by bubbling a continuous  stream of gas  (usually  CO2) into the water. The bubble gauge consists  of a specially  designed servomanometer, gas-purge system, and recorder. Nitrogen fed through a tube bubble freely  into the stream through an orifice positioned at a fixed location below the water surface. The pressure in the tube, equal to that of the piezometeric  head above the orifice, is  transmitted to the servomanometer, which converts  changes  in pressure in the gas-purge system into pen movements  on a strip chart recorder. Bubble-type water level sensors  are used in applications  where a stilling well is either impractical or too expensive and where the stream carries a heavy sediment load. The Awash river at Awash town is equipped with pressured actuated recorder.
un
o
tx n
Ministr)' of Waler and Energy Hydrometric Measurement Training GuidelineTana and Bclcs Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
Figure 1: Typical streamflow gauging station installed in the Wabi river near Dodola town upstream of the Melkawakana reservoir (February 2002).
1.2  Stage measurement
Basically  there are two modes  of stage measurements. The first is  discrete stage measurements using manual gauges, and the second is continuous stage measurements using recorders. For the measurement of stage, uncertainties should not be worse than ± 10 mm or 0.1 % of the range.
1.2.1 Manual gauge
The simplest way to measure river stage is by means of a staff gage. A staff gauge is vertically attached to a fixed feature such as a bridge pier or a pile (Figure 2). The scale is positioned so that all possible water levels can be read promptly and accurately.
Another type of manual gauge is the wire gauge. Wire gauge consists of a reel holding a length of light cable with a weight affixed to the end of the cable. The reel is mounted in affixed  position  -  for  instance,  on  a  bridge  span  -  and  the  water level is measured by unreeling the cable until the weight touches the water surface. Each revolution of the reel unwinds a specific length of cable, permitting the calculation of the distance to the water Ministry of Water and Energy Hydrometric Measurement Training Guideline'Tana and Bclcs Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGz\
stages;  the  elevation  of  the  stage  recorder itself should be above any floods lively to occur during the life of the station.
7.         The gauge site is far enough upstream from the confluence with another stream.
8.           A   satisfactory   reach   for   measuring   discharge   at  all  stage  is  available  within reasonable proximity of the gauge site. It is not necessary that low and high flows be measured at the same cross-section.
9.          The  site  is  readily  accessible  for  ease  in  installation  and  operation  of  the  gauging station.
10.       Facilities for telemetry can be made available, if required.
Typical  streamflow  gauging  station  installed  in  the  Wabi  Shebele  river  at  upstream  fo Melka Wakana Dam is shown in Figure 1.
In practice rarely will an ideal site be found for a gauging station and judgement must be exercised in choosing between possible sites. A gauging site should be located at a point along the stream where there is a high correlation between stage and discharge, featuring a one to one correspondence between stage and discharge. Either section or channel control is necessary for the rating to be single-valued.
A  rapid  or  fall  located  immediately  downstream  of  gauging  site  forces  critical  flow  through it,  providing  a  section  control.  In  the  absence  of  a  natural  section  control,  an  artificial control  -  for  instance,  a  concrete  weir  -  can  be  built  to  force  the  rating  being  single valued. This type of control is very stable under low and average flow conditions.
A  long  downstream  channel  of  relatively  uniform  cross-sectional  shape,  constant  slope, and  bottom  friction  provides  a  channel  control.  However,  a  gauging  site  relying  on  channel control  requires  periodic  re-calibration  to  check  its  stability.  To  improve  channel  control, the  gauging  site  should  be  located  far  from  downstream  backwater  effects  caused  by reservoirs and large river confluence.
Ministry of Water and Energy Hydrometric Measurement Training GuidelineTana and Bcles Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
Table 1: Recommended minimum density of hydrometric stations (Maidment, 1993)
Range of provisional norms 
Type of region
Range of norms  for minimum network, area, km2
per station
tolerated in difficult conditions  area, km2 per station
Flat
regions 
of
tropical,
temperate
and
1000-25000
3000- 10000
Mediterranean zones
Mountainous     regions
of
tropical,     temperate
and
300 -100
1000-5000
Mediterranean zones
Small  mountainous  isl
ands 
with  very  irregular  rai
nfall,
very dense stream netw
ork
140-300
Arid zone
5000 - 20000
Selection of gauging site
The selection of a particular site for the gauging station on a given stream should be guided by the following criteria for an ideal gauge site (WMO 1981):
1.         The general course of the stream is straight for about 100 meters upstream and downstream from the gauging site.
2.         The total flow is confined to into the channel at all stages and no flow bypasses the site as sub-surface flow.
3 The streambed is not subject to scour and fill and is free of aquatic growth.
4.           Banks are permanent, high enough to contain floods, and are free of brush.
5.
Unchanging natural controls are present in the form of a bedrock outcrop or other
stable  riffle  for  low  flow,  and  a  channel  constriction  for  high  flow,  or  a  fall  or
cascade that is un-submerged at all stages to provide a stable relation between
stage and discharge. If no satisfactory natural low-water control exists, a suitable
site is available for installing an artificial control.
6.
A site is available, just
where the potential for
upstream from the control, for housing the stage recorder amage by water-borne debris is minimal during flood
cN
cn
Ministry of Water and EnergyDISCHARGE AND SEDIMENT MEASUREMENT GUIDELINE
1 STREAMFLOW MEASUREMENTS AND HYDROGRAPH
Continuous  streamflow records  are necessary  in the design of water supply  systems, in designing hydraulic  structures, in the operation of water management systems, and in estimating the sediment or chemical loads of streams. To do these, systematic records of stage and discharge are essential. This  chapter elaborates  common methods  practiced in Ethiopia to measure streamflow discharge. The concept of hydrograph is also discussed.
River stage is  the elevation above some arbitrary  zero datum of the water surface at a streamflow gauging station. The datum is  sometimes  taken as  mean sea level but more often is slightly below the point of zero flow at the gauging station. The elevation datum is set with reference to at least three permanent reference marks  or benchmarks  located in stable ground separate from the recorder structure.
Il is difficult to make a direct, continuous measurement of the rate of flow in a stream or river but relatively  simple to obtain a continuous  record of stage. Thus  measurements  of river stage provides  the best alternative. Before we discuss  some methods  of measuring river stage, first we discuss criteria fort selecting a stream gauging station.
1.1 Stream gauging site selection
The principles  of network  design and the proposed use of data should govern the selection of streams  to be gauged. Dense network  of gauging station is  required for research works  related to runoff estimation, soil erosion estimation, and water balance calculation at different watershed sizes. Whereas  the goal is  to construct a dam to impound water, light network  of stream gauging stations  is  sufficient - one station at or near the dam site can be adequate. A general-purpose network  must, however, provide the ability  to estimate hydrological parameters  over a wide area using for example a regional regression model.
Despite the development of a variety  of objectives  and statistically  based methods  for streamflow and rainfall network  design, judgment and experience are still indispensable. The WMO Guide to Hydrological Practice recommendations  for network  density  as  a staring point for network design is given in Table 2Annex 1.                 Discharge and sediment measurement guideline
Annex 1.
Discharge and sediment measurement
guideline
ReponPmenl &
' mplen,en'alion 6 °Peralion 0,3 B™n Information SystemTana and Bcles Integrated Water Resources Development Project - BRL-OMEGA
Equipment recommendations Static indicators
Staff gauge (1 rst serie) ""
Staff gauge (2nde serie)
Crest gauge "" Rain gauge ""
Illi
Illi
Nil
Sensors
INI
INI
INI
Illi
INI
Water level To Install
Radar
Range 0..20m
INI
Flowmeter To Define
+ BOC + Turbidity
sensor + FEWS             Installation on mast Rating curve H/Q          mi
Data acquisition equipment
Data Collecting
Equipment WITH
Platform To Install
mi
Telecommunication
Principal
New Equipment
transmission support To Install
GPRS/UMTS
Requested
Backup transmission
support To Install Power Supply 
(Public network) NOT Necessary Autonomous power
supply Solar Panel Electric battery To Install
Electrical cabinet To Install Shelter ""
GSM
mi
INI
INI
Outdoor Cabinet
Illi
Ministry of Water and Energy Hydrometric Measurement Training GuidelineTBIWRDP - User Manual Release N1 v1.0
Annex 2.
TBIWRDP - User Manual Release N°1
vl.O
5 <cnrMO>in
>,3 n,
------------------------ --------------------- -------- --------------
S Re^T6™ & SUPPOT " lm"emen^n * Ope,ahon 3             Sysren.TBIWRDP
User Manual version 1.0 Software Release N°2
TBIWRDr User Manual S< v/are Release N' IREVISION HISTORY
Revision
Version
Description of Change
Changed By
Effective Date
1
1.0
Initialization of the document
Xavier Thomas
7/9/2013
o
nj (U
<L‘
05
O t/) To
c co 
Ze
a.
O
C£ CO
H■ M B B
TBIWRDP User Manual S' ware Release N*Table of Content
1      Introduction7
1.1       Purpose of the document7
1.2       Tutorial ancillary files7
1.3       Additional documents®
2      Data Expert Installation and setup
2.1       Install DataExpert..................................................................................................................... $
2.2       Setup DataExpert10
3      Manage gauging and ratings13
3.1       Launch "Gaugings and ratings" dialog window13
3.2       What you should know about gauging and gauging values13
3.3       Gauging: Create, Update, Delete14
3.4       Rating values: Create, Update, Delete16
3.5       Import gauging values from tabular CSV File17
3.6       Import gauging values from Hydata18
3.7       Create report19
3.8       What you should know about rating21
3.9       Create a rating curve22
3.10     Create several rating curves for one gauging26
3.11     Import existing rating curves27
4      Derive times series29
4.1       What you should know firstly29
4.2       Create a draft copy of a time series 
4.3       Update an existing draft series 
4.4       What you should know about temporal aggregation
4.5       Above all, know the frequency or the time series we want to aggregate 37
4.6       Create a temporal aggregated time series 
4.74.9.2 Plot tNhoeDsoatuarVcealtuimes e msearnieas geamndetnhterualegs. gr.e..gated time series 4.8       Create a time series using from a rating curve
4.9       Derivation management rules 4.9.1 Derive Series capabilities
31
35
37
3g
40
43
I'BIXVRDP User Manual So-ware Release N C15      Gap Filling
5.1       Terminology
5.2       Single Interpolation
5.2.1
Linear single interpolation
47
47
47
47
47
5.2.2!
Monotone spline single interpolation
.....48
5.2.3I
Akima single interpolation
...48
5.2.4I
Cubic single interpolation
.48
5.3       Mean proportionality
5.3.1        Mean         proportionality         using         long-term         averages 5.3.2        Mean      proportionality      with      monthly      moving      average 5.3.3        Using threshold effect correction
5.4       Linear regression
5.5       How to use interface software to detect and estimate missing data
5.5.1
Overview of the user interface
5.5.2        The way of filling gaps
5.5.3        Set-up the gap filling methods and its options 5.5.4        Detect and estimate missing data
5.5.5
Insert estimated data values in the database
5.5.6 Remarks 
5.6     Tutorials56
5.6.1        A Single interpolation56
5.6.2        Linear regression of discharge time series60
6 Range constraint validation63
6.1 What you should know63
6.2 Apply range constraints validation test
7 Variation constraints validation test
7.1       What you should know,......................................................................................................................
7.2       Apply variation constraint test
8      Velocity constraints validation test
8.1       What you should know
8.2       Apply variation constraint test
9      Double mass
9.1       What you should know about double mass
9.2       Apply double mass and cumulative residuals tests
48
49
50 _50
51 51
53
53
54
55
55
68
69
73
73
75
78
78
80
TBIWRDr User Manual ware Release N°1TBIWRDF User Manual So? ware Release N°11   Introduction
1.1  Purpose of the document
This document is the user's guide dedicated to the software release NQ2. As explained in the inception report, this release is mainly dedicated to the second level of the Information System Management.. This user's manual contains both tutorials and references information. It can be used as a training support.
1.2 Tutorial ancillary files
In order to practice the tutorials found in this document, some complementary files and folders are
provided:
Folder
File name
comment
Software\SQL Server 2008
WindowsXP-KB942288-V3-x86- ENU.exe
Windows Installer 4.5
dotnetfx35.exe
.Net Framework 3.5 SP1 ENU
WindowsXP-KB926139-V2- ENU.msi
Microsoft PowerShell 1.0
SQLEXPR WT _X86_EN U .exe
SQL Server Express Edition ENU setup
ODM 1.1 updated
LittleBearll.mdf
SQL Server Database file LittleBear example
LittleBearllJog.ldf
SQL Server Database Log file LittleBear example
OD.mdf
Empty SQL Server Database file
OD.Idf
Empty SQL Server Database Log file
| Software\DataExpert
| DataExpertSetup.exe
DataManager setup1.3  Additional documents
Further information can be found from the following documentation:
CUAHSI Community http://his.cuahsi.org/documents/ODMl.lDesignSpecifications.pdf Observations Data
Model (ODM) Version 1.1 Design specifications 
__________ ________
ODM     Data     Loader     http://his.cuahsi.org/documents/ODMDataLoaderFunctionalSpecifications.pdf Functional
Specifications
Project SRS Release TBIWRDP System Requirement Specifications vl.l N°1
TBIWRDP User Manual Sol: .vare Release N°12   Data Expert Installation and setup
Objectives
This tutorial shows how install Data Expert on your computer and to
connect it to the ODM Database.
Audience
IT Specialist
Hydrologist
Prerequisites
SQL Server database is installed on the user's computer (see User Manual
Release N°l)
the user's computer is in the network local area and connected to a SQL
Server database server (operational phase)
The framework .Net 4.0 should be installed on the user's computer. If not,
use the setup (DotNetFx40_Full_x86_x64.exe) found in
Software\DataExpert folder before DataExpert installation.
2.1  Install DataExpert
□ Launch installation setup Setup.exe found in Software\DataExpert.
Welcome to the Data Expert Setup Wizard
The rHefcs nd ^ade yCM <hcwgh llw Uetw requicd to ir»Ul Dola Eipet on you ccrrpusei
□ Click on "Next >" button
TBIWRDP User Manual Sc avare Release N*1□ Click on "Next >" button
2.2  Setup DataExpert
Q Launch Data Expert from the start menu: All Programs>WRIS.
□ The first time you use DataExpert, you must give your SQL Server connection information as defined in training Release N’l. In server type, type "localhost\SQLEXPRESS", in Database Name, enter "OD", then enter the login "sa" and the password "vyz9qgoUXE" and click on the button "Save changes".
TBIWRDP User Manual So’ ware ReleaseQ Data Expert asks for connection information: The first time you use it, type "admin" as Login and "admin" as Password.
II
u
k
□ When login and password are correct, "OK" button becomes enabled. You can use the "Show password" check box to see what you have typed.
0 Check Remember password" to avoid password typing the next time you will use Data expert.
Enter login and password^
Login:             admin
Paoflwond: admin
1^1 Show password
(vj Remember password ' Change pa_asw^d~] [~ OK ] | _ Canod [
v
□ Click on "OK" button, now you can use the software :
p User Manual S* iware Release N°1TBIWRDP User Manual So'- vare Release N°13   Manage gauging and ratings
3.1 Launch "Gaugings and ratings” dialog window
□ In the main window, select the "Processing" ribbon bar
' Sertw Catalog 'Map’" | Proceasing | ' Export Data' • ’
:
I II0
Gauging Double
& rating mass
Misc
0
.G
filling
•’
Variation Velocity
Constraint Constraint Constraint
' ■ '.Data values vai&tibn V' - i
?* 7
□ In the ribbon bar, click on “Gauging & rating'" button to show "gauging and ratings" dialog window:
3.2    What you should know about gauging and gauging values
A gauging is a relationship between two variables measured on the same site. A gauging contains:
❖   The site code and the site name where the measurements are made
❖   The input variable code and its name
❖   The output variable code and its name
And a list of gauging value which are measurements of input and output variables, made the same time on the site.
A gauging value contains:
❖   An input value : corresponding to the measurement of the input variable ❖   An output value xorresponding to the measurement of the output variable ❖   The date of the measurements
TBIWRDP User Manual S< tware ReleaseThe "Gauging & rating" window is divided in two data grids:
❖   The top grid is dedicated to the gauging data management (Create, Update, Delete). ❖   The bottom grid is dedicated to gauging values data management (Create, Update and
Delete) of the selected gauging. Each gauging owns a list of gauging values.
3.3 Gauging: Create, Update, Delete
Objectives___________How to manage gauging, i.e. how to create, update and delete a gauging
Audience
Hydrologist
P re req u isitesThe database contains ABA sites and variables
□ In the first row of gauging grid, select the site 111001. The list of sites is ordered by code.
»—t?—r-?—
Giugingi 'tnd rat
Exit Gauging         Gtuginc values Eatings
. u&Xj                              &                  S *2                            S       i
Show          Import              Expert        Create           import        • Set current |GtugingjJ         ng*, rcting curves nting curves report           gauging values    • function
Sic Calc
Sle Name
< |iHIM
•1
Site Cale
Sle Name
*
LT-Meg-l-l       Ck’AnL/eirr, d Mz^ech before Tana Lake
LT.Mcv-?-1C    Megocn alter ptennod dam before irrigation zone ILT-Meg-4-2      Mcpech Basin Heed
LT-Rib-Vfi        Do*re|reem of Ribb Before Tone Lake
LT-Rib-2-11      Ribb alter penned dam
LT-Rib-2-49      Ribb irrigation zone
LT-Rib-3-32   Ribb Tributary after Addit Zemcn
LT-Rib-3-7     Ribb Before irrigation zone
LT-RIM-31    Ribb Tributary Basin Head
LT-Rit>-4-€    Ribb Basin Head
LT-Tm-VU    Lake lane
i
i"l
6
1
liTI*111001 - -
Lake Tana || Bahir Oar
—’111062 Gilpd Abbey near
!11100;              Kogs near Merer/:
L
...
Q The site name is automatically set to the corresponding name "Lake Tana at Bahir Dar". You can also select the site code instead of the name. In this case, the site code will be automatically set depending on the name you choose.
Q Proceed in the same way for variables: select "GH" as input variable and "FLOW" as output variable.
, — ” r~- -
TBIWRDP User Manual So ware Release N°1□ You can see a pencil in the column header of the current row, which means that the current gauging is being created or updated.
’ Input Variable Code
Input Variable Name
- GH
- Gage height
[] To validate, press "Enter" on your keyboard. The gauging is inserted in the database and a new row is added on the top of the grid.
Site Code
Site Name
' I,pul Variable Code
Input Variable Name
►111001*^^^
< 4 | Lake Tana hl Bahir Par
□ Enter a new gauging with :
o Site name : Beles before confluence
o Input variable: TURB, Turbidity
o Output variable :TSS, Solids, Total suspended
'
•111301_________________ - LtufouitUSrOo
SlaNvM
? tntMVfiitUCcri* .____________ ____ hpU                 Nm
-~GH
Itt-M I IC
(
-
• luflt
. Twfefar
~• Kotf” 
- 7SS
[ OutU VarutU CaW j
- Dwctis*
-
,
; Tips and tricks:
❖   To cancel creating or updating a row, use "Escape" key
•** To close the choice list of sites or variables without selection, use "Escape" key <• If you entered a bad or a null value, use "Escape" to cancel editing
❖   When selecting a gauging row, avoid to click on the down arrow of a list of choice
□ Enter a new gauging with the same information entered in the first example: o Site name: Lake Tana at Bahir Dar
o Input variable: GH
o Output variable: FLOW 0 You should get this message.
□ Use "Escape" key to abort creation of the new gauging
Q Select the second gauging (Beles before confluence) by clicking on the right arrow in the column header of the corresponding gauging
SleCode
Site Name
Input VaribNo Code
Input Variable Name
0
EM-
Lako 1 ana al Bahir Da'
QH
B£BckV16
Gage height0 Press "Del" key. The following message appears, click "No" to keep the selected gauging :
3.4   Rating values: Create, Update, Delete
Objectives
How to manage gauging values, i.e. how to create, update and delete a
gauging value
Audience Prerequisites
Hydrologist
The database contains ABA sites and variables 
At least on gauging is inserted in the database
Q Check that the targeted gauging is selected (here, Lake Tana at Bahir Dar), if not, use the right arrow on the column header to select it.
SleCode
SteNcme
j Input Variable Code |
hpul Variable N*me
| Output Venable C
Q In the gauging value grid enter the measurement of Gage Height in meter:
Gauging 2 of2
I Af HlfSl J
; GH Gage height (m) i FLOW Discharge (m3/s)
/|
315|
0 4/16/2013 12.00:66 AM
□ Enter 2.99 m3/s for discharge
Q The date is automatically set to the current day. Change it to the date of the measurement to 1/10/1990
[] Press enter to validate
Q Keep on with the following gauging values:
1 GH Gage height (m) | FLOW Discharge (mi's) I
213
186
31.5
101
4.385  ^1990 12:00.00 AM
3.705 7/29/1995* 12:00:00 AM
2.99 1/10/1990 12:00.00 AM
3.705 4/24/1990 12:00.00 AM
□ To delete multiple rows, click on the left arrow in the column header of first row and drag down the mouse to the last row, then press "Del" Key.
TBIWRDF User Manual Sot-ware Release N°1corresponding to a
Audience Prerequisites
3.5  ImporI gauging values from tabular CSV File
Hydrologist
At least one gauging is inserted in the database.
The user has a CSV formatted file containing gauging values
Objectives 
In this example, you have to add a new gauging with the following information:
How to import gauging values from a CSV formatted file given site, input and output variables_____________________ _______
o Site name: 111011 - Lake Tana at Kunzila o Input variable: GH
o Output variable: FLOW
Select the newly created gauging as show below:
Ste Code |
Site Name
| Input Variable Code [
Input Vahafale Nsna
* ______________ -___________________________________
BE-Bel-1-IS - Beies Before confluence
i (111001
- Lake Tana at Ba hi r Oar
- TUR9
-    GH
Turtiity
Gape ha'cH
TSS
FLOW
lau/Tf
In the toolbar, click on "Import gauging values" button, select "From tabular file" menu option:
In the open file dialog box, select the file "TabularGaugingValuesSample.csv" from folder "Data\Gaugings and ratings" and click on "Open" button.
0 When import completed, you should have the same message:
TBIWRDf User Manual So’ ware Release N*1! Example of Gauging values tabular file:
• y,m,d,q,stage
’ 1990,1,10,31.5,2.991 i 1990,4,24,101,3.705 : 1990,7,29, 186,4.225
• 1990,8,30,213,4.385 : : 1990,10,2,60.8,3.383
• 1990,11,28,48.9,3.172 ’! 1991, 3,20, 17.9,2.664 i
<• The file must contains the first row header y,m,d, q, stage
3.6  Import gauging values from Hydata
Objectives
How to import the Hydata gauging values in the ODM Database
Audience Prerequisites
Hydrologist
At least one gauging is inserted in the database.
Hydata software is installed on the user computer. If not, the Hydata
exported file can be found in the folder "Data\Gaugings and Ratings"
[] In this tutorial, you will use the existing gauging: o Site name: 111011 - Lake Tana at Kunzila o Input variable: GH
o Output variable: FLOW
[] Select the existing gauging. If not present, create it
□ Delete all existing gauging values
Q Now you should have a window as shown below:
TBIWRDF User Manual So: .vare Release N°1□ In the toolbar, click on "Import gauging values" button, select "From HYDATA 4.2 file" menu option:
lUtin-;:
□    In the open file dialog box, select the file "GaugingValuesFromHydata.csv" from folder "Data\Gaugings and ratings" and click on "Open" button.
□    When import completed, you should have the same message:
3.7 Create report
Objectives
Create report containing information about a gauging : gauging values,
rating values and chart
Audience Prerequisites
Hydrologist
At least one gauging is inserted in the database.
Microsoft Excel must installer on the user computer
Q Select the existing gauging ;
o Site name: Lake Tana at Bahir Dar o Input variable: GH
o Output variable: FLOW
Q In the toolbar, click on "Create report" button:
.. ... .
Gaugings and ratings
Exit Gaugings
HShow,-.          Show
‘ Gaugings I Ratings
Silo Coda
Gauging values
§
Import
rating curves
Ratings
Slo Name
*
TBIWRDP User Manual Si ware Release N°10 The following dialog box appears, keep it unchanged and click on "Create button:
CMjin, .rd M«ik9 report
Range
X mntrrjr.
X maxjmurri xhterva)
£ x dedma>' dges
< y dedma! dgta
|0.3€
|l.CK)
i“<”       11
L_ & ;
■
Ou'pj'.
i E Open report wih Exod
I E Create PDF
!
I -Create     J l-.Crx*’ „ .]
----- —--------- J
Q You have to save the report in an Excel file. Click on "Save" button
Q The report is automatically opened under Excel: The gauging values appear in the tab sheet named "Gauging". A chart is available in the second tab sheet named "Chart".
A PDF file is also created; you open it by clicking on "Yes" button:
Remarks:
•> The PDF file does not contain gauging values chart
❖ If you don't need a PDF report, uncheck "Create report" option in the "Gauging and rating report" dialog box.
❖ The created report does not contain information about ratings. We will see that in the
TE1WRDP User Manual So! •.are Release N°11
following chapters.
3.8 What you should know about rating
A rating is a mathematical relationship established from gauging values of a selected gauging:
Relation
Function /(*) where
Q * : input variable measurement
Q y : output variable measurement
Q /fc): output variable expected value
Power
/W=a(x + c)b
are estimated using :
a linear model between log(y) and logfc “ CStart) where
and a nonlinear least squares fitting of + P ‘ — y)~ where
=a
a = 10 ,b = 0,c = -y
a
For  more  information,  see  "Fitting  a  power-law  relation  between  stream discharge and stage" from:
http://www.geog.ubc.ca/~rdmoore/Rcode.htm
Polynomial
f(x) = a 4- a^-x + a • r
03
J
• x* 4- cl+-x4
a , a  a . a  , a  are estimated using a polynomial interpolation to 4  degree.
0      lt    2      2       4
th
User Defined
The rating function is given by the user as a Ctt expression using x as the input variable:
Example: 20 * Math.Pow((x - 0.2), 4.99)
Ctt operators documentation:
□    http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/librarv/6a71f45d(v=vs.80).asox Ctt mathematical functions:
□    http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/librarv/4zfefwz9.aspx
A rating can apply to:
❖   A temporal range (defined by a begin date time and an end date time)
❖   An input variable measurements range (The rating only applies inside a range defined by a minimum and a maximum)
TBIWRDI User Manual So* ware Release N*13.9 Create a rating curve
Objectives
Audience Prerequisites
Starting from an existing gauging and its gauging values, we will create a rating without temporal range neither measurement range
Hydrologist
A gauging and its gauging values are available in the database coming from the previous walkthroughs
□ In this tutorial, you will use the existing gauging:
o Site name: 111011 - Lake Tana at Bahir Dar
o Input variable: GH
o Output variable: FLOW
0 Select the existing gauging and click on the "Show ratings" button in the menu bar:
The rating window is divided in several parts as described below:
K                                KaQ
Sontteu ■ LmDvu <
-------------------------- X..
fwinitl <r*rtrT‘1
inu-r D-cU. | UcMM , U. iMa
i Ctt
»«w«
A(vw<
Ratings data grid
■M| .
Ui
Rating values data grid
Current rating
function
informations
TBIWRDP User Manual Sol .ware Release N°1[] In the first row, click on the bottom arrow in the "Start Date" cell, then select the current day:
Q The other cells of the current row are automatically valued :
o End Date is set to the greater date,
o Start Day and Start Month are set to the first day of year
o End Day and End Month are set to the last day of year
0 Press "Enter" key to validate our first rating
□ Now you can see that all gauging values appear in the rating values grid, as shown below:
0 Update the "Start Date" to 1/1/1900. In the rating grid:
o All check boxes in the "Use value" column are checked. It means all rating values are used to compute the rating function
o The "current f(x)" column is valued for every gauging values 
o The chart is updated and plots a scatter series and a curve series 
o The current function information are updated : the used current function is "Power"
TBIWRDP User Manual Soilware Release N’lI
era
Hiina
ttC
OC-IMC
err
inuin
tra
:t-4-s*.
era
ici’ve
tor
tco^c
tri
it.'t’M.'
*
iX'iniKS’v
n'
tu<
row
4
|-4)W)UCCXK<
04’
ov
»eimr
4
0*
ir
ecnuN
*
urs’WJ uecr *»
»>i
ilk
lui-ni
f
U111) Ultr*
IK
cm
tenuM
*
UWlHMt*
tt
tou
eecur
*
IltnoJ l.'KW *>
Cl
t«
tcvwr
*
1l31IUU0SK«u
91'
CAT
«>•»>
*
ii'tiuuram
eu
ok
int'U
*
HUMJUKW*
Hl
cat
er»'V
/
wcwittc*
ir
C4>
tHWO
4
n-XNUKKHi
IM
<W1
tUtlll
*
l.i'MJUtr.TM
CU
til
tlRVP
4     itoncuocrrv
it
ere tjuwM
A-a"’’*'AT1 ~ i » 1
□ Take a look to the Rating Function cell of our rating row. Currently the value is "Not Set".
Rating Function Start Date
End Date
Start Day
Sta
*
►
■ |W19D0 /
^[12/31/2100:
~}T
|Jarx|
In the menu bar, click on "Set rating function" and confirm.
□ Now the rating function cell is set to "Power". All values of "Rating f(x)"column are calculated.
0 Click right in the chart, a contextual menu bar appears then click on the first button
TBIWRDP User Manual Sol'ware Release N°1Q Click on "Show legend "menu option. The rating function equals the current function that why you see only one curve.
0 Use alternatively "Show current f(x) series" and "Show rating f(x) series" menu options to distinctly plot the both curves.
□ To complete this tutorial, using the "Set current function" button update the function to
"Polynomial". Now you can see that the rating function curve and current function curve are quite different:
• ■
l U I
* 
• 
klMMI lIXCBHl
Id
f
<U>M1 OECtarw
• 
IWuaKdhi
•«’
’♦
nimuccosHi
t*t
• 
mmuKotM
on
• 
11LlUlUME«KI
III
• 
ISntl'IaaM
OH
•
hmhunon
cjj
• 
ryiwuxaiu
niHiuocxm
u:
• 
• 
IHXlWUMMM
m
Ou
• 
UUlHI UttU'M
OU
• 
II
• 
IMlHIUUNM
>i
• 
nsimuMw
on
<
iv>»iwu3»Nn>
ou
• 
IWHlIIMSM
III
r
txmuuainrw
op
• 
UxitUllKMlM
OU
• 
TAiniiiUKru
on
• 
lUlWllKUhl
II
• 
it
>
IVIWJlIWMru
Crl
TBIWRDF User Manual So ware Release N°13.10 Create several rating curves for one gauging
Objectives
Audience Prerequisites
How to create ratings for different periods and gage heights for a gauging previoulsy created_____________ ______________________________________ Hydrologist
A gauging and its gauging values are available in the database
□     In this tutorial, you will use the existing gauging:
o Site name: 111011 - Lake Tana at Kunzila
o Input variable: GH
o Output variable: FLOW
0 Select the existing gauging. You should have 61 gauging values attached to this gauging.
0 Switch to rating management window
□    Create a first rating defined by
o Start Date : 1/1/1900
o End Date : 12/31/1999
o Start Day/Month : 1/1 (keep unchanged)
o End Day/Month : 12/31 (keep unchanged)
□     Create a second rating defined by
o Start Date : 1/1/2000
o End Date : 12/31/2100 (keep unchanged)
o Start Day/Month : 1/1 (keep unchanged)
o End Day/Month : 12/31 (keep unchanged)
□     Now we have 2 rating curves which apply at different period. Remark that exclude rating values are outside the temporal range of the selected rating
According to the cross section of the station, will add two new ratings to get different curve from 0 to 3 meters and 3 meter to more (<3 and >=3)
Q Update the existing ratings and set xMax to 3.
□     Create two ratings with the same characteristics and set xMin to 3 0 Don't forget to set rating function for every rating row
□     Now you should have:
End Dtk               SiMlOa/ | SunMd«h             Ciiy       End Utwwh x r<ta      X UiM
binwo -
12-jinw -
1
• Jt’VHY
n
1'1'XCO '
12/3I01C* •
1
• J|r w,
u
3
3
b4,7to%62J4&«J72£. C-24W41W7WW61
31
Decent -
1) •
1. •
1•
l-i iweoaixwy
31
l/l/JOO •
1201*2100 •
1
• Ji'W
31
*-UUW747GyXrX    b«/Uj|UlzxCl?U    c-l    frWJfcWJl    lUt
• 3
••l&47t<25C37«4Z L-Zr«16tt7(Wl&. c*|.J776aJ7l3MI«s
TBIWRDr User Manual Sot'ware Release N &1Using the following controls in the menu bar, calculate the discharge for different gage heights:
Dite/Time:           1/ 1/2005 12.00AM □* ’
2
~       —■ Compute
Value:            '2.50 v*fue
Input Date
Input GH Value
Computed value
4/17/1994
2.50
5.38
4/17/1994
4
148.56
1/1/2005
2.50
6.88
1/1/2005
4
148.30
! Do it yourself:
❖ Create a new report of the update gauging: Tana Lake at Kunzila - GH - FLOW. New tab sheets are added, one per rating
You can export in an Excel file the rating function information of a gauging, if you : o Select the gauging
o Use the "export rating function" button
3.11 Import existing rating curves
ObjectivesHow to import the existing rating curve given by the MoWR
Audience
Hydrologist
Prerequisites                  The database should not contain any gauging
By using "Del" key, remove all gauging from the database (we need to start from a clean database)
i Tip :                                                                                 ....... .................... ................. *     ....... .
❖ With SQL Server Management Studio, perform differential database backup to be able to restore later the cleaned database
Rating curves have been given in the Hydata report format, without any gauging values. The files are available in the "Data\GaugingsAnd Ratings\HYDATA Rating Curves".
0 The HYDATA format is not easy and reliable for import process. These data can’t be inserted in the database as is. Accordingly, the files have been transformed in a unique Excel file "ratings.xlsx" which is located in folder "Data\GaugingsAnd Ratings".
0 Before continuing, it's important to check:
o site code in the excel file with site name in the Hydata file
o A, B, C coefficients of the power equation,
o Min and Max, for each excel row.
Some (Mm, Max) range have been changed, find and explain (you can propose another solution).T ‘P ♦ During training N°l, we raw how to exportSite t^l. of .the database into an Excel
□ Now we are able to import a clean Excel file containing existing rating curves in the menu bar of “Gaugings and ratings" dialog window, click on “Import rating curves button.
□    Select the file “ratings.xls" and click on open button. When import completed, we have 18
gauging.
.        , ri
□     Perform a quick check between the database and the imported excel tile
TB1WRDP User Manual Sol ware Release N°14 Derive times series
4.1 What you should know firstly
Times series represent a collection of observations defined by the same.
□    Variable (What is observed)
Q Site (Where are they observed)
Q Method (How are they measured)
□    Source (Organization or measurement network which collect data)
□ Quality controlled level of the time series. It can be one of the following definition:
Explanation
Unknown
The quality control level is unknown
Code ■
9999
Raw data
Raw and unprocessed data and data products that have not undergone quality control. Depending on the variable, data type, and data transmission system, raw data may be available within seconds or minutes after the measurements have been made. Examples include real time precipitation, stream flow and water quality measurements.
0
Draft
Quality level for editing time series
10
Qualitycontrolled data
Quality controlled data that have passed quality assurance procedures such as routine estimation of timing and sensor calibration or visual inspection and removal of obvious errors. An example is USGS published stream flow records following parsing through USGS quality control procedures.
1
Derivedproducts           Derived products that require scientific and technical interpretation and may include multiple-sensor data. An example is basin average precipitation derived from rain gages using an interpolation procedure.
2
Inlerpretedproducts     Interpreted products that require researcher driven analysis and interpretation, model-based interpretation using other data and/or strong prior assumptions. An example is basin average precipitation derived from the combination of rain gages and radar return data.
3
Knowledgeproducts Knowledge products that require researcher driven scientific interpretation and multidisciplinary data integration and include model-based interpretation using other data and/or strong prior assumptions. An example is percentages of old or new water in a hydrograph inferred from an isotope analysis
4
Quality   controlled   level   is   the   most   important   concept   for   understanding   the   data   workflow   starting from data collection until its dissemination.
TBIWRDP User Manual So' ware Release N JUnknown,
qualitycontrolled
Interpreted Data
Derived Product
Knowledge product
Read onlydata set
_______ __________ V
X
Data validation
- Qualitycontrol
led
Read only data set
To protect the incoming data sets, time series  with Unknown, Raw data, Derived product, Interpreted product and knowledge product quality  control status  are read only  data. Theycan't be updated. At the beginning of the validation process, experts  make a draft copy  of the data set. The draft copy  is  then verified and probably  updated during the validation process. When completed, the draft series  is  copied into a new time series  with a quality  controlled status. This  resulting series  can be disseminated.
In conclusion,
/Qflaiit^controlledstatus^^WisCanije^li
Unknown
Raw data
©
©
Draft
Qualitycontrolled data
Derivedproducts
©
Interpretedproducts
©
Knowledgeproducts
.. ©
RDP User Manual SoP ware Release N°14.2 Create a draft copy of a time series
Objectives
How  to  create  a  draft  copy  of  a  time  series  and  delete  it  from  the  database. It will be done with and without No Data Value.
Audience Prerequisites
Hydrologist, WQ Expert
Hydrological time series have been imported in the database using the ODM Data Loader. This tutorial will use "Gage Height from site Abbay at Bahir Dar" time series
0 In the Series Catalog, find the following time series
0 Site Code: 12003, Site-Name: Abbay at Bahir Dar
□ Variable Code: GH, Variable Name: Gage Height
0 Source Description: MOWE Hydrology and WQ Directorate Q Method: Water level observation from observer
0 Quality Control: Unknown
Q Select the corresponding row
0 In the "Series Catalog" ribbon bar, click on "Derive series" button:
Refresh
catalog
& Group area
Y Filer
Delete
selection
Last month
Last year
Selection
1/ 1/1973'
12/31/2009 -
Time series
□ The following window appears. Several options are available. The selected option is "Create or update a draft time series for editing". To create a draft copy, click on the "Create data series" button.
When completed, the time series has been created but it is not probably visible. Then activate the filter and select "Abbay at Bahir Dar'7.Delete
electron
ITT-1
E©
Derive
’ o Last rr
. O Last y< © Sdecti
Site Code
__ Site Name
•   AWray al BahiiVsr
112003            (/) )
112003
112003 Amen>. ■r^ia
/
Var
GH
f*
FLO!
l=
GH
Angareb near Gonder
Dma near Kola Diba
Fegoda near A/bgebeya
Gamo nea- hfranz
Gdda near Ambesaame
Gemero near Makaeonft
GQgd Abba)' near Merawl
Gilgel Belen near Mandura
01<J Time serie           cf3
[] Now, the series catalog should looks like to:
1 ID - J Sle Code
SvNa™
AL-tay il K’hir Da'
| X'z.-iabie Cow | Venable Kame Value Court , Uni!   1 Sample Meditrr. | Reader             Time Support J Time Unit    | Quality *■
-
-
•
-
•
1 11700?
Abbey ilBehi Der
GH
Ge j* heijrt
13514 m
Surfew
Yes
0 min
Unknpmr
j V 11200)
Abbey 3t6lHf (hr
FLOW
Diicher&e
13514 mVe
Surface Weler
Yes
0 min
Urtcrov.7
64 112003
Abbe-, at Eehii Ds-
GH
Gsjcbeip-H
13514 rr.
Surface Weler
Yes
0 min
Dofi
< | Time sene      d3
©®*
*L
,w
•
Q The first row corresponds to the "source" time series. The third row corresponds to the newly created time series. Take a look to the "Quality control" column, the first time series has an Unknown status, the third is a Draft time series.
[] Also note that the number of measurement is strictly equals (column "Value count")
[] Select the Draft series and load its data values by clicking on "Load data values" button:
, L« st month
C» Lett year
• 5 cl ecu on
W 1/157312.00 FM Q
12/31/20*1200 PM C
D« VfcUtt C4^XX.
k£
I Clear ill
~ \ -d»ti vtlue; yauviiue
verticil hcrdonul
! Vt2
eW e
.
J V&:ue Cx*jnl I V«t I Sarnie Mc^jm | R^Jer | Time Sypp
□ In the data values window, you can see that the first data values time are "No Data Values" (the first data value is the most recent data):
TBIWRDP User Manual Sot ware Release N°1:gic^ valucs^it i
^ts^22S
■ |M)x [_____________________ _____________ ____ ______ ____________________________
Date Tire
Va'ue Qualifier i Dflsef Value ]
Offset b -
n
*
12/362CO9 12.00.00 PM
• 9999
-
• 12/2&2009 12.00 00 PM                       ■9999                  ■
' 12,71,2009 12.00.00 PM
•9999
; 12/27/2009 12.00 00 PM                        9999
' 122W20C9 12.00 00 PM
112/25/2009 12.0000 PM
12/24/2009 12.0000 PM
112/212009 12.00 DO PM
' 12/22/2009 12 00.00 PM
_l t.inirv** i VrvMv\ chi
[la J < 1 Oats value 1 d 13514
-9999
•9999
•99*9
•9999
•9999
•
•
*
•
•
•
•
»
Q Click right in the chart area, a menu bar appears. Click on the first button and select the Show NoData values menu option.
Q Now, you can see tree time periods with No Data values.
□       Unload data values by clicking on close button in the data values tab page:
Wtrt | QuililUr ' Ofljot Value ’
»E
OihuTy •
Fl
HQQCS UXMKO PMv -»~ ><j j
TV I'.-.
1 irjaTwa 1200.00 pm
1 Ml 2009 12 CO 00 PM                   9999
' 11'2e/»» 12 «« PM
httl/MMUOMOPU
pMMOtt 12.««PM
•9995
•999';
•9999
•9999
12/24/XV912 00 CO PH                  •9999
linrao* u co oo pm
•99t9
’ 1121X09 12 CO CO PM                  •9999
wSa. • .c. .. ?.
□ Select the Draft time series (if not selected), click on “Delete selection" button in the "series catalog" ribbon bar, then confirm deletion.0 Repeat this tutorial by checking the "Ignore NoDataValues" but don't delete the resulting time series, we will use it in the next chapter.
□ Complete the table below.
With NoData values
Without NoData values
Numberof data values
13514
TBIVVRDP User Manual So! ware Release N°14.3 Update an existing draft series______________________________________________
Objectives
Understand how a time series is updated during a derive time series operation
Audience Prerequisites
Hydrologist, WQ Expert
Hydrological time series have been imported in the database using the ODM Data Loader.
A draft time series without NoData values created in the previous tutorial.
Q In the Series Catalog, select the following time series:
□     Site Code: 12003, Site Name: Abbay at Bahir Dar
□     Variable Code: GH, Variable Name: Gage Height
Q Source Description: MOWE Hydrology and WQ. Directorate
□     Method: Water level observation from observer
□     Quality Control: Unknown
□     In the Data Values selection ribbon panel, update the start date to 1/1/1991 BqjortData
)erive
;eries
O Last year
@ Selection
12/31 I
data values
Data Values'seledion
u
□ Set up the "Derive series'* window:
o Select Create or update a draft time series for editing" option o Uncheck "Ignore NoData values" check box.[] Note that the title button has changed. In the previous tutorial, we had "Create data
series", now it is "Update data series". This is because the targeted draft series exists in the database.
□     Click on "Update data series" button.
□     Now plot the new series in the chart and make the NoData values visible. Yet we have two NoData periods in the series, why?
TBIWRDP User Manual So!’ware Release N°14.4     What you should know about temporal aggregation
You  can  derive  aggregated  time  series  starting  from  a  source  time  series status. The parameters used to aggregate the source time series are:
□    Temporal aggregation:
o Daily,
o Monthly,
o Yearly.
Q Function applied on each sampled groups of data: o Maximum,
o Minimum, o Average, o Sum.
whatever its quality control
□    As the draft copy derivation, the temporal aggregation uses beginning and end dates that you have entered in the following interface controls:                            -
Export Data .’../i*
-•
pm        ! © Last month ! 1/ i      f/fFETl 12-0  DPM              *
'-- V
)erive ;eries
I O Last year         *12/31/2009 1Z05 PM (UH              Load
3
I
® Selection        ■
--- ---------- --- 1   data values
Data Values selection
4.5  Above all, know the frequency or the time series we want to aggregate
Objectives
Audience Prerequisites
In order to aggregate a time series, we have to determine its actual
frequency of observations
Hydrologist, WQ Expert “
Hydrological   time   series   have   been   imported   in   the   database   using   the   ODM   . Data Loader.
□    In the Series Catalog, find and select the following time series
o Site Code: 12003, Site Name: Abbay at Bahir Dar
o Variable Code: FLOW, Variable Name: Discharge
o Source Description: MOWE Hydrology and WQ Directorate
o Method: Water level observation from observer
o Quality Control: Unknown
□    Take a look to the time support and the time unit of the selected time series. We have 0 min. it means that we don’t really know the frequency of measurement. In general don’t trust this information, preferably use time series statistics. That’s we are going to do...
TBIWRDI User Manual So- ware Release N*l.~v^.r7<rA
-~. >u.
- -w t k'te .1 ?. ...<.^
-
G*. Ste Code
•
Str Name
- Abbey *1 Bahr Dir
' VanableCode 1 Variable Nme . V»)ur Court ’ Wl j S^e
1 117002          Abbey MBaMr tea
U514 rn SrfeceVftter Yes
1753S m Sudsee Water Yes
i««. 5rLA~rX>lV -Va lAvj^-.
--------- ---------- ----------------------- •----------------
RepJar T.^ Sapper- Trme Unil | Quility
•Jnkncr/.T
> ft JUr iViftyfrH; 7 ,v.~j
t£ 112003              Aiisy al Eslur Dr
(
(
(mXJ) W( ? ot 3
r»i>         r
n
»
□ Now, load the time series using the "Load data values" button:
□ In the "Statistics" windows, select the "Statistics" tab page:
r>^a S t3tj sti
FtumoJc/ j
j < DM2s (Uler
Use certoorad d£a
| < Frwaoency
-/
| EcvV/niat  /£j| SfKKUcs J \
I         False            1
IAtX» frttJerrCy                                   1
i'
Trrn u-U frosjencv
Mean pence
Mean pertd um iz*
] Mi»rrkrT. tm* por.-jc
Mrwrxzn        perod
| 4 Slrtkatca
| Cars
JArtmjrr.
Ma/jmzn
I        P'r day            I
1/
\ DSV /
\ ' te; /
v dr' /
12m
0 1<1
7^555
- 1. n 1
■
J 1
-uf
JAs«-
\ii 177223
Variance
15«r2 B575
Sktwnw
i Siem
Kziows
Hr*-/,
------- r.--__
U*o ouwxixj data
f true. gjUArct wC be computed wth dee value* whdfi co-iocr code equ«t to ‘prewthan*. Twa tnon‘. ‘ny. ccr,jc*od'. 'nor, detocC. “proton! bu not Quart
0Se9ingi @Sudftk«|
Q The following information are available:
o Mean frequency: 1 day
o Maximum time period: 1 day
o Minimum time period: 1 day
□ It means that the frequency is exactly equals to 1 day and we don't have any data gap.
TBIWRDP User Manual Sohware Release N°1Objectives
How to create a mo
nthly aggregat
ed seri
es derived
fro
mad
aily one
Audience Prerequisites
Hydrologist, WQ Ex
pert
Hydrological  time
series  have
been
imported
in
the
database
using
the  ODM
4.6   Create a temporal aggregated time series
Data Loader.
In the Series Catalog, find and select the following time series
Site Code: 12003, Site Name: Abbay at Bahir Dar
Variable Code: FLOW, Variable Name: Discharge
Source Description: MOWE Hydrology and WQ Directorate
Method: Water level observation from observer
Quality Control: Unknown
Following the last tutorial, we know that its frequency is 1-day
Show the "Derive series" window and select "Using a temporal aggregation" option
Set "Period" combo box to "Monthly"
0 Set "Function" combo box "Maximum"
Note that the targeted Variable FLOW-M-MAX variable is automatically set in the "Variable" combo box. This variable doesn't exist in the database; it will be created during the derivation process.
Der.vn^an metnod
I
O Uaing a Cfl eonsdor
’W” 
1
[ Q Valdai ecwestort [
Pl
Dau mho MVixiet
Variable:
Qualy Ccrtnji level.
:
[Date Serteecmatedumg the
Mawn>]
S«o:
|n2005AaxyM ?]
Click on "Create data series" button
TBIWRDf User Manual So’ ware Release N°1A
4.7    Plot the source time series and the aggregated time series
Objectives
In this tutorial we will differently plot the both time series
Audience Prerequisites
Hydrologist, WQ Expert
Hydrological time series have been imported in the database using the ODM Data Loader.
Follow the previous tutorial.
□ If one or several time series are loaded in the chart, unload them using the "Clear All data values" button in the "Series Catalog" ribbon bar.
leta__________________________________________________ OUst month V 1/1973 1 2 00 AM 0’
( jUrtyeir
1/2008 1230 AM 0’ ; Load
1 Selection r
___________ _____ _Dele Vekiea
) data values
oe-ed'ori  _
:
__
_
tt! i ~fr~*
'Mt 71* ~
-t t
Q Load the following time series:
o Site Code: 12003, Site Name: Abbay at Bahir Dar
o Variable Code: FLOW, Variable Name: Discharge
o Source Description: MOWE Hydrology and WQ Directorate o Method: Water level observation from observer
o Quality Control: Unknown
Q Load the monthly aggregated time series
□ In the "Data values" window, select the monthly aggregated time series (if not selected)
jfe’PdU value*
ElWl-FUftdorv/ C|G7|X
D>k>TX<^
IVIOOtt 12 to to AM
r'; - •'■ -7
|            V*bc                 OuBvfit* 1
OfoclVllN !
Type *
lO l'/DOe l2G0to’AM |                  106.A44WW31824 6-1/20611Z0M6 AM                       260 £0lH$74«fjj
f1/20W12K.D0AM                       W3.17$$';2£7$76l 7/1/2004 12 00 00 AM            •       577J16W9W6459
: £1/2008 12 <0.00 AM 137.U20M371M4 i'WGOe 12 60 00 AM 1$5J71«2197266
41/2004 12 to 06 AM
l72UOtol83lto$
yb-KOi 12 to to AM                       162.432$$&W7727
(kJ <, Die valve cX 42$                  ..EXS!£!
*
TBIWRDF User .Manual So? ware Release N°1!
RemaricThe number ID of the time series (here" [67]) can be different from your computer. This is because this number is given automatically by the database. And during this training we don t share the same database.
[] In the "Settings" window, change representation from "Line" to Step Area
□ Now you should have a slightly update chart, like this one:
I
UWMi 17.00 CM
1/1/2610
□ Click right in the chart area and select the horizontal zoom button:
□ Zoom in chart for focus on a hydrological year:
"---------- n*----------- ---------------- -i----------------------- \__________________________ w»4i —=------------ —■-------------------------------------- - —------------------------- ------- -——___________ _:________ i:_
f: ".*411.0 .4— - —7
'.ll
.. . ' '
£ --------------------------- - --------------------------------- —------------------------ ---------- — ---- --------- ;------------------------- .------------------------------------------------------ --
------- ----------- T----------- ----------------------------------- ;------------- -----------------------------------------
-
TBIWRDP User Manual So ware Release N°10 You can use the left and right arrows to move in the chart:
I
TBIWRDP User Manual Soli4.8   Create a time series using from a rating curve
Objectives
How to deriv
e a time series using an ex
isting rating
curve
Audience Prerequisites
Hydrologist Hydrological
time  series  have  been
imported
in  the
database
using
the  ODM
Data Loader
.
Rating  curv
es  have  been  imported
in  the  OD
M  Data
base  or  a
rating
curves 
have been c
reated using the "Gauging
and rating "
window
□     In the Series Catalog, find and select the following time series
o Site Code: 12003, Site Name: Abbay at Bahir Dar
o Variable Code: GH, Variable Name: Gage height
o Source Description: MOWE Hydrology and WQ Directorate
o Method: Water level observation from observer
o Quality Control: Unknown
□      In  the  "'Derive  Series"  window,  select  "Using  a  rating  curve  method"  option.  The  combo  box is  update  with  FLOW  Discharge  (m3/s)".  It  means  that  a  gauging  exists  between  GH  as  input variable and FLOW as output variable for the site Abbay at Bahir Dar.
0 Click on the "Create data series" button.
Q Note that you have now two FLOW times series for the site Abbay at Bahir Dar"
o FLOW with quality control equals to Unknown was given by the MoWR.
o FLOWwith quality control equals to Dratf is derived from GH time series given by the MoWR.
Q Load the both time series in the chart and zoom in year 2007. There is a data gap (or a NoData period) from April to May 2007.□     Open the Excel files given by the MoWR to check the data gap.
Do it yourself:
□     Delete all series we created in this chapter
0 Starting from the following time series, derive a new draft time series without NoDataValue and a Source (network) equals to "Tana hydrological monitoring network -TaSBO":
o Site Code: 12003, Site Name: Abbay at Bahir Dar
o Variable Code: GH, Variable Name: Gage height
o Source Description: MOWE Hydrology and WQ Directorate
o Method: Water level observation from observer
o Quality Control: Unknown
□     Starting from the last produced time series (GH, Draft); derive a new Quality controlled time series.
El Starting from the same time series (GH, Draft); derive a quality controlled time series using the rating curve method
Ste Nome
* Variable Code
Qual'ty Control
; Variable Name
Source Description
Value Count .
Abbey at Bnhu Da»
•
•
Abbey al Beta Dar
GH
UnknoAr.
Gage height
Stale organisaucn in charge cf hydrology and waler quality
12514
Afcb«) at Eah«» D«»
FLOW
UnknOAH
Discharge
State organisatiCfj in charge of hydrology anc water oua'ity
13514
Abts, at Bahir Oer
GH
Draft
Gape height
Tana hydrolog<cal momlonng network
12938
Abbey at B«h<r Dir
GH
Quality conir erf ltd data
Gajt height
Tant h/d'olofl>cel monitoring network
12938
Abtay at Bahir Da'
FLOW
Quality controlled data
Dochargc
Tana hyd'olog*cel monitoring network
12938
TBIWRDP User Manual So”. .vare Release N c'l4.9 Derivation management rules
4.9.1 Derive Series ca
Source Time
series
Target Time series
Derivation
method
Quality
Control Level
Quality
Control
Level
Site
Variable
Method
Source
(network)
Create or update a draft Time Series for
editing
Raw
Draft
Identical
Identical
Identical
Identical
Unknown Derived products Interpreted products Knowledge products
Draft
Identical
Identical
Any method
Any 
source
Create or update a
Quality Controlled Time series
Draft
Quality Controlled
Identical
Identical
Identical
Identical
Using a
temporal aggregation
Raw
Draft
Identical
Identical
Draft
Draft
Identical
Draft
Quality Controlled
Identical
Quality Controlled
Quality Controlled
Identical
If not exists, a new variable is created V_P_F where :
V:code of the source variable P : Temporal aggregation (Y = yearly, M = monthly, D =
daily)
F : function aggregation
If not exists, a new method is created :
"Data Series created using the P F
aggregation function"
Using an arithmetic expression
Row
Draft
Any site
Any variable
Identical
Draft
Draft
Any variable excepted source variable
Draft
Quality Controlled
Any variable
Quality Controlled
Quality Controlled
Any variable excepted source variable
If not exist, a new method is creates 
"Data Series created using an expression : E (V)"
Using a rating Curve method
1
Row
Draft
Identical
Draft
Draft
Draft
Quality Controlled
A variable from the gauging
table
"Data series using a rating curve"
Identical
PBIWROP User Manual S< :ware Release N*14.9.2 NoData Values management rules
Source Time series
Target Time series
Derivation method
Exclude
NoDataValues
value given to NoData values
Create or update a Quality Controlled Time
series
Set by user
NoData value defined in the target variable
Createor update a draft
Time Series for editing
Using a temporal
aggregation
Yes, always
The target time series doesn't contain NoData values. Therefore the created variable is defined with a NoData value equals to the variable of the source time series.
Using an arithmetic 
expression
No, never
Each NoData values produces a NoData value in the target time series
Using a rating curve
method
Yes, always
When the computation failed, the target data value is set to the NoData value of the variable of the target time series5 Gap Filling
5.1    Terminology
□    Missing data can be estimated using observations made on the station for the same vanable. The missing data of a time series are estimated with its own observed data values: it is a single interpolation.
Q Missing data can also be estimated using observations on different sites and variables. In this case the used times series are called referencetimes series. Two gap filling methods can be used: mean proportionality or linear regression.
5.2   Single Interpolation
Usingan spline linear model can be done with different interpolation model.
□    Linear
□    Monotone spline
□    Akima spline
□    Cubic spline
5.2.1 Linear single interpolation
5.2.2 Monotone spline single interpolation
TEIWRDP User Manual Sftware Release N°J5.2.4 Cubic single interpolation
5.3    Mean proportionality
5.3.1   Mean proportionality using long-term averages
The missing values are estimated by the pondered long-term average of the time series, using the above formula:
Where:
□    Px : Missing data to estimate
□    n : Number of reference time series
□    Pi : Observations belonging to a reference time series
□    P( : Long-term average of a reference time series
□    P : Long-term average of the time series to estimate
r
BIW’RDP user Manual So' warc Release N’l5.3.2   Mean proportionality with monthly moving average
The missing value is estimated:
1.   by the pondered monthly moving average of the times series if exists, 2.   otherwise, by the pondered long-term average of the time series
The formula presented above can be interpreted as:
□    Px : Missing data to estimate
0 n : Number of reference time series
Q Pi : Observations belonging to a reference time series
□    Pi : Monthly moving average or else long-term average of a reference time series
□ Pt : Monthly moving average or else long-term average of the time series to estimate5.3.3 Using threshold effect correction
Mean proportionality gap filling methods (with or without monthly moving average) can be used with threshold effect correction option:
I
I Without threshold effect correction
I
|
With threshold effect correction
5.4   Linear regression
A missing value can be estimated using a multiple linear regression, in the form:
y -=
r
Where
+
an
Q yt ; Missing data to estimate
0 Xt'Xi
: n observations made in the same time coming from n reference time series
TEIWRDP User Manual Sol;ware Release N C15.5  How to use interface software to detect and estimate missing data
5.5.1 Overview of the user interface
In the "Processing'7 ribbon tool bar, click on "Gap Filing" button:
Series
X
>9
'9
Serie
Sampling
sampling
& distance
Series S
ampling
Range Variation Velocity
Constraint Constraint Constraint
Data values vafcdabon
The gap filling floating window appears, as shown below:
TBIV.’KDP Ijscr Manual Software Release N- ]:@Gap filling
Time value :                      0
X
1020 missng data values ready to be inserted
Insert data values
The 'Time value" and 'Time period" is automatically adjusted to the selected time series in the "Data Values" window. In the following example, the data values aimed to be gap filled belong to the numbered time series [81):
Quarts- Ccrtrd HaDaO Value
182006’.2 00 00 PM
372006 12 00 00 F>v
142006 12 00 00 PM
142006 12 00 00 PM
00 00 PM
20000 PM
•Jn
Un
1!^   1200   00   PM
11.2006 12 00 00 PM
2292006 120000 PM
2242008 120000 PM
Ur i
Ur I
227.2008 12 0000 PM
2242006 12 0000 PM.
2252006 120000 PM
224 2006 12 00 00 PM
til
Ur* ■
UrinoAT
Ur*.no*r
Ufl.rxMn
2212006 120000 PM
■9999 C«T/C<aa.I Wtie/ level
•9999 Corn»r<x>»_-.>7»Ur level
•9999 Continuous   WMerlc.el
2222006 120000 PM
221/2008 120000 PM
2 202006 12 0000 PM
Value                Qudtiee
0699999988079071 i2
0 709999978542328 i1
0 720000028610229
0 740000009536743
0 759999990463257
0769999980926514
0 779999971389771
0 790000021457672
0800000011920929
0619999992647443
0650000023841858
0 839999973773956
0850000023841B56
0 860000014305115
0 650000023841856
0 870000004 768372
0£7000000476^372
0 899999576158142
The non-selected data values are considered as references data. They will be used if the gap filling method is "Mean proportionality" or "Linear regression". In the above screenshot:
Q Time series numbered [82] is considered as a reference time series Q Time series numbered [81] is aimed to be gap filled: gData Values
[821 ' [811 x | [591 1_______
d from
Date Time
d from
d from
3/8/2008 12:00:00 PM
d from
3/7/2008 12 00:00 PM
d from
3'6/2008 12:00:00 PM
d from
3/5/2008 12:00:00 PM
4 4rzxrv>
The availability of the gap filling options depends on the selected gap filling method:
Gap filling
method
Number of
required
reference
time series
Interpolate
reference
data values 
option
Select
Interpolation
Method
Monthy 
moving
average
Correct
threshold
effect
Single interpolation
0
Non available
(always used)
Selected by user
Non available
Non available
Mean proportionality
>=1
Selected by 
user
Selected by 
useronly if
Interpolate
Selected by 
user
Selected by 
user
Linear
regression
>= 1
Selected by 
user
reference data values option is set to on
No
Selected by 
| user
5.5.2      The way of filling gaps 
Gap filling is a 5-steps process:
Q  Step  1:  Select  reference  times  series  if  a  "Mean  proportionality"  or  "linear  regression" method is planned and load their data values.
0  Step  2:  Select  the  time  series  to  be  gap  filled  (the  time  series  to  estimate)  and  load  their  data values - Check this one is selected in the "Data Values" window.
□    Step 3: Set-up the gap filling methods and its options.
□    Step 4: Detect and estimate missing data.
Q Step 5: Insert estimated data values in the database.
5.5.3 Set-up the gap filling methods and its options
Gap filling
Method
Time Value
Time period
Interpolate
value
Interpolation method
Single
estimation
Always 
true
• 
Correct
threshold
effect
Monthly
Moving average
Interpolation method used to estimate data values (apply on data values of the estimated tjpieseries.
Not
available
Not
available .
Mean proportionality
Time step between
two
detected  * > •• missing data
Yes/No
Interpolation   method   used   to estimate reference data
Yes/No
Yes/No
Linear
Yes/No
values if time support is
Yes/No
Not5.5.4    Detect and estimate missing data
By clicking on "Preview" button, missing data values detection starts:
The gap filling can be released in several "preview" operations. The estimated missing data are kept excepted:
Q If the selected time series changed in the "Data Values" window
0 By using the "clear" button, which suppress all estimated missing data value in the range of the chart visible area
Gap filling can be realized piece by piece, using different gap filling strategies.
Only chart visible range of data is used in the detection. It means that the detection begins from the timestamp at the left of the chart and ends at the timestamp at the right of the chart, as shown below:
In this example, missing data are detected from 1/23/1990 to 3/7/1994
a
TB1VVRDP User Manual Software Release N°1It means also that if detection is done inside a data gap, no missing data will be detected, as shown below:
Beginning and end of the data gap are outside the visible range of the chart.
5.5.5     Insert estimated data values in the database
Once all missing data are estimated, use the "Insert data values" button to import them in the database:
1020 missing data values ready to
jnXt data val jes
5.5.6     Remarks
□    During a preview operation, the number of detected missing data is limited to 10000.
□    Inserting estimated data values in a time series with a quality controlled level which is different to "Draft" is not allowed.
TBIWRDI User Manual So!’ware Release N°15.6    Tutorials
5.6.1 A Single interpolation
Objectives
Audience Prerequisites
This  tutorial  will  explain  how  to  use  tree  different  interpolation  methods within the single interpolation gap filling method.
Hydrologist
Hydrological time series have been imported in the database using the ODM Data Loader.
The time series to process is defined by:
Site
code
Site name
Variable
code
Quality Control
Level
Method
Source
Organization
112003
Abbay at Bahir Dar
FLOW
Unknown
Derived for rating curve equation
MOWE Hydrology and WQ
Directorate
□ If a draft series with the same characteristics exists (excepted Quality Controlled Level), delete it from the database.
□
Make a Draft copy of the time series using the "Derive series" window. Don't forget to check "Ignore NoData values" option; to copy all the data values except those equals to NoData value.
□ Unload all the time series from the chart (and "data values" window), if any.
□    Load the newly created draft series: the chart should looks like this one:
TBIWRDP User Manual Software Release N°1□ In the "Statistics" tab from the "Statistics" window, you can read that the mean period between to data values is equals to 1 day. You can see also that the maximum time period between two successive data values is equals to 2 months. It means that some gaps exist in the time series.
:^Statistics ,,            ........
ProbabiUy | Histogram | Bax/Whbkera Statistics
* Data filter
Use censored data
a Frequency
False
Mean frequency *
29.52781173594132
Time unit frequency 
per month
Mean penod
Mean period time uni
1
Day
Maximum lime penod
2 months
Minimum lime period
1 day
□    Show the "Gap Filling" window using the "Processing "ribbon toolbar.
□    Select "Single interpolation" and click on the "Preview" button.
Tree missing data gaps are found, as shown below:
<
TBIWRDP User Manual Software Release N°1Q Use the chart zoom tool to focus on the first gap :
Q The linear interpolation appears to be good, leave it such as and now focus on the second gap (you probably need use the chart's full extent tool)
□ In the "Gap filling" window, change "Linear spline" to "Monotone spline" in the
"Interpolation method" combo box. Click on the "Preview" button. When interpolation done, you can see the results:
□ Now, focus on the third gap, and use the "Akima spline" interpolation method.
VW
TBIWRDP User Manual Software Release N°1Q In the "Gap filling" window, you can read that 206 missing data values have been estimated and are ready to be added in then database. So, click on "Insert data values" button.
Finally, we are going to check in the above steps if the work has been done.
□ First at all, unload the time series from the chart (and from the "data values" window). Then reload it and check in the "statistics" windows that the maximum time period is now equals to 1 day.
: '*Ui:Statistics
Probabilty | Hiatopram ] Bax/Whhkera , Statistics
a Data filter
Use censored data
a Frequency
Mean frequency Time unit frequency Mean pen ad
Mean period time unit Maximum time penod Mmmum time period
1
per day
n
1
□ Secondly, zoom in the first gap (from October 1982 to December 1982). When done, use the "Filter data values" button in the "Series  Catalog" ribbon toolbar to limit the number of data values to the range of the chart visible area.
1651 X ]
♦
Oat* Time
’  I  innm  12.66'qo   pm
104/194212 DO 00 PM
1MZ1W2 12 00.00 PM
106/1962 12 0000 PM
107/1912 12 00 CO PM
101/1962 12 00 W PM
1O11H2 12 0000 FM
10101932 12 CO 00 PM
10IV19W 12 CO 20 PM
10121962 120030 PM
11O'13> IN? 12.00 00 PM
1014/1912 12 0000 PM
1015.1932 12 0000 PM
10)6/1992 12 0000 PM
K ’ Oiu'CeU ’ Vw
Val« I QvehCw j OflaatValue |
IM 69299907227
1BG 642991667227
1M    69299USnr
190.3 IX© JS4KO9
193 9*39935)027)
19399099363027?
190)1X03941039
199 06
ir?H2P|»;)M
IK
IIS 23)47161?*
164 026MKJ34U rrd
112 7647(6662116 amj
1*1511322670795 wrsj
III
If you walk through the data value grid, you can see some data values with a qualifier equals to "emd" (Estimated Missing Data)
TBIV/RDF User Manual Software Release N°1Objectives 
5.6.2 Linear regression of discharge time series behavior.
In this tutorial, we will use 2 reference time series to fill the gaps of a third
times series. We assume that all stations have the same hydrological
Audience
Hydrologist
Prerequisites                   Hydrological time series have been imported in the database using the ODM Data Loader.
The time series to be gap filled is defined by:
Site
code
Site name
Variable
code
Quality Control
Level
Method
Source
Organization
112003
Lake Tana at
Kunzila
GH
Unknown
Derived for rating curve equation
MOWE Hydrology and WQ
Directorate
The reference time series used is defined by
Site
code
Site name
Variable
code
Quality Control
Level
Method
Source
Organization
112003
Lake Tana at Bahir
Dar
GH
Unknown
Derived for rating curve equation
MOWE Hydrology and WQ
Directorate
□ Make a Draft copy of the time series to be gap filled using the "Derive series" window. Don't forget to check "Ignore NoData values" option; to copy all the data values except those equals to NoData value.
Q Load firstly the reference data series and secondly the draft copy of the series to be gap filled. You can see that there is at least one data gap:
i
i
i
i        —r-
i
——-
□ Check that the time series to be gap filled is selected in the "Data Values" window:i^Data Values/^"^
H [47] ■ Read arZ ■ |33 X 1
♦
1^2003   120000   PM
17/2008 12.00.00 PM
1&2003 120000 PM
1S2003 1200 CO PM
IBOZ
-><011 • Lake Tana < ICru-ta
ROW - Dwchaoe
Draft
Derved from nstioQ cxrre ea^aUn
State cnisiMt-on r> charae c/ hydrjiogy and watc
-        U. JuUA-.ro ■
. 0740000009536743
0 Hide the "Derive series" window (if visible), we don't need it. 0 In the "Processing" ribbon bar, click on the "Gap Filling" button. Q Set up the "Gap Filling" window as show below:
TCWROF User Manual Sr» ware Release NJ□ Make a zoom on the larger data gap, and use check/uncheck the "Use interpolation checkbox to preview the result. It is slightly different, why?
I
I
0 Finally, insert the previewed missing data values in the database.
TBIWRDP User Manual Software Release N°16 Range constraint validation
6.1 What you should know
Range constraint validation is  a very  simple test, mainly  used in water quality  data management organizations. Unlike meteorology  or hydrology, data are transmitted several times  from the sampler to the laboratory, and then to the laboratory  to the data manager, and sometimes  from a data manager to another. Data are often digitized several times  before being added in a database. Performing a range validation check is the best way to find and correct entry errors.
For example a PH can't be upper than 14 and lower than 0. Outside values are impossible values. We also know that in a river a PH measurement is very rarely upper than 12 and lower than 4. Measurements between ranges [0...4] and [12...14] are improbable values.
6.2 Apply range constraints validation test
Objectives
This tutorial shows how apply a range constraint to a
given time series
Audience Prerequisites
Water quality expert, hydrologist
Hydrological  time  series  have  been  imported  in
the  database  using  the
ODM
Data Loader.
At  this  stage,  we  don't  have  any  water  quality 
data.  We  will  apply  the
tutorial
on discharge time series (educational interest)
Calibration ranges will be later established by water
quality project experts
□ Find and load the reference time series:
o Site name: Abbay at Bahir Dar
o Variable Code: Flow
o Source : MOWE Hydrology and WQ directorate
o Quality Control status: Unknown
□    Derive a draft time series without NoData values
□ Unload all the time series from the chart using the "Clear all data values" button.
□    Click on the "Range constraint" button in the "Processing" ribbon bar.
ft
•n
Gauging
& rating
Mlac
______
.
Serteo Catalog _Map > Processing j Export Data
11            0            0
(| Double
mass
Gap
filling
i
i
I Range
Xonstrai
Variation
Velocity
Constraint Constraint
Data valueo validation
□ The" range constraint" window is shown:
TBIWRDP User Manual Software Release N°1□
□
□
Note that the "Apply" button is disabled. We have to load a time series to execute the test. Load the derived draft time series you created above.
Enter 690 in the "Impossible high value" text box and click on the "Add" to create a new constraint:
U Now the "Apply" button is enabled, click on
0 The "Validation results" window appears (if not visible). It contains 5 error messages.
TBIWRDP User Manual Software Release N°1;,^ValldaU<>nreqjlt5 ,;
I
SI
Message
Date Time
•*• I Value
0 RC 9/17/1993 1200.00 PM
0 RC 9/1^1993 12:00 00 PM
0 RC
0 RC
9/21/1993 12.00:00 PM
9/12/2006 12:00.00 PM
i< I’< Message 1 of 5                                  ®®* '
□ If you click on the first message row, a symbol appears in the chart to highlight the impossible value:
782.49
697.21
611.92
526.64
441.35
356.07
270.78
185.5
100.21
14.93
A
Aj.
l/l7ft?8 12:00-AM
1/1/1980 12:00 PM
1/1/1990 12:00 AM —1/1/2000 12:00 PM
1/1/2010 1
0 If you select one by one all the message rows, you can see that the bad values in the same time range.
□    We will decrease the value of this highest measurement. As it's not easy to find a row to be updated in the "Data values" grid, we will use the chart zoom tool.
□    Click right in the chart area and select the horizontal zoom:
Q Zoom very closely to the values to be updated
1/1/1990 12:00 AM□ Repeat until you have a chart like this one:
Chart Map
762.49
~ 697.21
QI
*2 526.64
3 441.35
° ICG
■ g rr***
-4—
t x T
<J> J3D.U/
•O               z/u./o
JO        1 PG «c
*    100.21
°      14.93
■ 7&&
■1
invalidation results
-1
1998                      9/7/j
L998                    9/12/
1
1998 9/17/
1998                    9/22/
1998                     9/27/
_•
r
MUM                          MBMMMH1
? ■ ...... . ■
-4X
Date Time
Value
Message
[VIRC J!5nGH99812Wa)PMv,v^ J? 697J2059609J75iThrvaligw Npher than the impoMiHeNgh limit
0  RC   9,17/1995   12:00.00   PM
697.02099609375 The value is higher than the impossible high limit: 690
0  RC   9/19H   998   1200.00   PM
697.02099809375 The value is higher than the impossible high limit: 690
0  RC   9/21/1996   12:00.00   PM
704.258934375 The value is higher than the impossible high limit: 690
0 RC 9/12/2000 12 00.00 PM
697.02099609375 The value is higher than the impossible high limit: 690
i< < Message 1 of 5
Q In the "series catalog" ribbon bar, click on the "Filter data values" button:
tela
Last month
1/ 1/1973 12-00 PM O
'3 Lest year
11/ 1/2006 12.00 PM L>
Load
Clear all
Q
Zoom
Zoom”'
Zoom Pan
9 Selection
data values
data values
vertical
horizontal
D«a Veb« aeeehon
Chart tools
□ Now you should have a smaller number of rows in the "Data values" grid:
□ To find more easily the values to be change, you can sort the "Value" column by clicking on its header.
[] Find the values higher than 690 and update them to 680, as show below
TBIWRDP User Manual Software Release N°1nf75)x
Date Time |         1       u.w.w i in
Value
-! Qualifier , Offset Value
▼
J
Offset Typ *
*
▼
u/
___ .. _
9/11/1998 12:00:00 PM            ▼                       681.307006835938                    ▼
' 9/15/1998 12:00:00 PM
9/18/1998 12:00:00 PM
681.307006835938
681.307006835938 ▼
9/20/1998 12:00:00 PM            ▼                      681.307006835938
9.-221998 12:00:00 PM            V                       681.307006835938
9/23/1998 12:00:00 PM ▼ 681.307006835938 ▼
—
9/24/1998 12:00:00 PM
9/160 998 12:00:00 PM ▼ 9/17/1998 12:00:00 PM ▼ 9/19/1998 12:00:00 PM
689.137023925781 ▼ 680 e ▼ 680 e ▼ 680 e ▼
• 1
►j 901/199812:00:00
t'\, c              j’.j   • ' V - • 
• 
•         -•
I
1
■V
kJE Data value 25 of 25                     ECEBJ < I'—....................... -I
0 Note that the qualifier is set to "e", which means that the value has been updated by a user
Exercise: Apply the following range constraint on the current time series ❖   Impossible high value : 980
❖   Improbable high value : 670
❖   Impossible low value : 0.15
❖   Improbable low value : 0.30
Which hydrological years get some errors and warnings?
TBIVVRDP User Manual So ware Release N°17    Variation constraints validation test
7.1   What you should know
Variation constraint validation applies on a single time series. It checks if the variation in a given time range does not exceed a maximum percentage and/or a minimum percentage.
Case N°1
____________ -—1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------j
C4«li<c<<’r  < 'ar ac» r
m   A      A        C  <l
,A
------------- -----------------------1--------------------------------
-------------------- --------------------- !
•••
•^a
i«<cc<<e<<<<<<<c <««< c••t•c•----------------------------------------------------- j
• ?
I.............-
r
<-------------- >
Time window
Lower data value in
the time window
Data value to
bechecked
Considering Pl and P2 as:
□     Pl: Data value to be checked
□    P2: lower data value in the time window
The validation constraint is defined by
valueCPl) — value(P2)
rniYiwvu.'M <---------------- 7—77777--------- x 100 < rrtaxirnutfi
value (Pl)
Case N°2
Time window
Higher data value in
the time window
Data value to
bechecked
In this case, the validation constraint is defined by by
TBIWRDP User Manual Software Release N°1valueffl) - vctlue(P2)
minimum <------------------- :—;~t---------------X 100 £ maximum
valueCPl)
7.2 Apply variation constraint test
Objectives___________This tutorial shows how apply a validation constraint to a given time series
Audience
Hydrologist
Prerequisites                 Hydrological time series have been imported in the database using the ODM Data Loader.
____________________ Calibration variation will be later established by the hydrologists experts
o Find and load the reference time series:
o Site name: Abbay at Bahir Dar
o Variable Code: Flow
o Source : MOWE Hydrology and WQ directorate
o Quality Control status: Unknown
0 Derive a draft time series without NoData values (if not done)
□    Unload all the time series from the chart using the "Clear all data values" button.
□    Click on the "Variation constraint" button in the "Processing" ribbon bar: ries Catalog       Map | Processing |   Export Data
Double      Gap
0
Range    I Variation ,
s
1 IS)
Velocity
Validatio
®
n
mass       filling        Constraint  yonstrairy ______________________ Data values validation
i Constraint
Results
Q The" range constraint" window is shown:
0 Enter the following information:o Minimum : 0
o Maximum: 1
□ Select "Day" instead of "Minutes"
□ Click on the "Preview" button to view the probability chart of the variation percentage:
0 If you move your mouse hover the chart area, you can determine that:
o 1% of data values have a variation percentage lower than -26.26% and, o 99% of data values have a percentage variation higher than 31.44%
TB1WRDP User Manual Sol* ware Release N el[] Enter these values, in the "% variation range panel.
7. Variation range
Minimum : -26.16 Maximum :
□ Click in the "Add" button to create a new constraint and add it to the constraint list:
Minimum; |-26.16 j Maximum: |31.44_
|
4 Add
Remove j
Start             End      | Offset max | Offset min
I 7. max |
^>Znin
01/01         ‘ 1231                           1440                       0           31.44
-26.16
I Important remark:
ii
o In the list the time offset maximum and minimum are automatically converted in minutes.
Which hydrological years get some errors or warnings?
0 Click on the “Apply" button to apply the variation range to entire of data values. The
validation window is being updated
□    Find a high value of variation (for example, higher than 70%) in the "Validation" results list.
□    Use the "Full extent" button to plot all the data in chart and located the data values as shown below:
Olla I I'M
OV?
OVP
O'r?
o VP
1QIIW612COWPM
1M22X4i2»WPv
IbliXM I2XWW
iMirtlllXWPM
U44U5MM24 VnuV'Z
|i2 00U)ti ».;'</ iUa
JMCCVIjTJ
2JMOWHCJ2JH Vniikc* wivHm Ml >1X| i» Itxw in*a
I-24.MX)
(^imv Ifrl&XCI 120000 PM
tiUdvHlMV iMllOC* 120000 Pw ■ IM OilfrrlW
IJiiJfcHMfrM V4iubc«'
i
>»»•« th*/» «v.rvrUM (X MX) w-r u.»
21 ni'XOJlUP) Vimuwi w'Ct'iKa (42.4)1,) Il h.x« <■« wivnkw (JI 44X)
I517JOC* 12.XC0 fM rpk* 24 UJWJCer
<»\« (kt*;u.to 15242004 120CCO PM -ikKa
------------------ —--------- ' r naEOTrrji ■ a i n.  ■■■
ii         1
•-awin’i^v.Ar^n
Q vP 1MI/20MMCOKPM
Gfl'jl «•»»»>» !♦’ U2U
__ 2i IHXOltHD
(-K >2 *1
■nnsxT l<*| (-24 MX)          proven viM (pr««Grr« I5K7W4 126000 fH . v*=v« M
Q Use the horizontal zoom to see clearly the data value:
TBIVv'RDP User Manual Sr/'.warc Release N"1□ Update the value in the "Data values" window (for example 50 m3/s). Use the "Filter data values" in the ribbon bar, its' useful.
TBIWRDP User Manual Software Release N°l8   Velocity constraints validation test
8.1 What you should know
Velocity  constraint validation test is  an extension of the variation constraint test but it apphes  on o time series. Generally  an upstream station (the reference station) is  used to compare the delayed variation velocity against the station to be checked.
Step  1:  Compute  the  variation  vl  between  the  highest  and  the  lowest  values  in  the  times  series  to be checked:
value(P2) - valuelP!)
Vl  ” valueCPi)
Step  2.  Determine  the  variation  between  the  highest  and  the  lowest  values  in  the  reference  time series
Delayed time
window
Pl: Higher data
value in the time
window
P2: lower data value
in the time window
Ul IL 1 I '
TBP.VRDP User Manual Sort wan* Release N°1valueCPi) - valuefPl)
v2 = ---------------- :----7—r----------
va/ueCPl)
The velocity constraint defined as: minimum < vl — v2 < maximum
fBlWRDP User Manual Software Release N°18.2 Apply variation constraint test
Objectives
Audience Prerequisites
This tutorial shows how to apply a validation constraint to a given time
series
Hydrologist
Hydrological time series have been imported in the database using the
ODM
Data Loader.
Calibration variations will be later established by the hydrologist experts
o Firstly, find and load the reference time series from 1/1/2001 to 31/12/2005
o Site Code: 111005
o Site name: Ribb near Addis Zemen
o Variable Code: Flow
o Source : MOWE Hydrology and WQ directorate
o Quality Control status: Unknown
Find and select the time series to be checked
o Site Code: 111009
o Site name: Upper Ribb near Debre Tabor
o Variable Code: Flow
o Source : MOWE Hydrology and WQ directorate
o Quality Control status: Unknown
Create a draft series from the previous one starting from 1/1/2001 to 31/12/2005 without NoData values
Q Load the created time series
■ >|« »
VMM •
*
SOMXDWUIMM
0-1
OlMCNQMttM
i.'r»7O4 ucvocrw
iittxru
;
I              QCv'XFM
IIO4XA4 UO&MfV
ID*XC4     QCOXrw
icnxi4i)»:vfe
IMJCC* oocwrw
tMMtmnm
ousxaixonw
ixwmxaui
UMMNICl<
I »*) W;t; ~****i>
r
»
TBIWRDP User .Manual Software Release N &1Q Check that the series to validate is selected in the data "values window". Otherwise select it.
: f^Data Values
12 |54J - Read only
Date T
*•
1231/2005 12.00.VO PM
12302005 12:00.
i moflMC i T.nn nn oi
r
111009 • Upper Rbb Debre Taber
FLOW - Disdxarpe
Derived from rating rve equation
State orQanlsaliffi^i cha ge^o(jT>-dro!ogy and water quality
□ In the "Processing" ribbon bar, click on the "Velocity constraint" button:
Ma?      Processing 1     Export Data
0 0 0 /'[§j\ l!Br □
Gap Range Variation 1 Velocity 1 Validation Show
filling           Constraint         Constraint^.Constraint?         Results Data values validation
_____ ____
J_
window >
Q The "Velocity constraint" window is shown:
□ In the series catalog list, select the reference time series (it have to be the same in the "data values" window
TBIWRDP User Manual Sob. vare Release N°1(
r
I ] ID | Site Code
5le Name
Variable Code 1 V
ariable Na-ne V. *
i 52111007
Megech neat Aie^o
53 113033
Quashin* near A. Kidarne
FLOW
FLOW
Discharge
Discharge
:^tData Values
•- —T-*
55 111015 Ribb neer Gasai TO0 Time serie 40 c<5l
► EE^nFoB__________              ^rp»b w Aldi a Zemn4^.^ 1 ^-fFLPW ~
FLOW
I
BlMJxn Date Time
CD® 4 I * I !!!«J
□    Enter the following information to set up the delayed time window: o Minimum : 1
o Maximum: 2
□    Select "Da/' instead of "Minutes"
□    Click on the "Preview" button to compute the statistics:
□ If you move your mouse hover the chart area, you can determine that: o 1% of data values have a velocity lower than -112.24% and, o 99% of data values have a velocity higher than 100.65%
D Type these values in the velocity minimum and maximum text box 0 Click on the Add button to create a new constraint*
fBlWRDP User Manual Sol w-  are Release N°1□ Click on the "Apply" button to apply the constraint
9   Double mass
9.1 What you should know about double mass1
The principle of double mass method is to check the proportionality of the values measured at two stations. One of the stations (station X) is the reference station, and considered to be correct. The other station (station Y) is the station to be checked. For a selected time step (Yearly, Monthly, Daily) the cumulative value is comparing rather than the actual measured values:
r
W = 2\g) and Y(t) = £y(i)
(=1
r
t=i
In the following double mass comparison, the graph shows a clear disruption in the slope for the year 1964. This method is able to detect an anomaly (in this example, the construction of a dam).
1 Extracted from Predictive Hydrology - A.Musy - CRC Press - 2012
TBIWRDP User Manual Sot- .vare Release N®1Cumulative discharge for the reference station [m7s]
Example of a practical application of the double mass method
Although  this  method  can  detect  them,  it  cannot  correct  them,  at  least  not  directly.  However  if  this method revels a critical situation, a correction can be made following a more in-depth analysis.
The cumulative residual method (credited to Philippe bois) is an extension of the idea of the double mass method, with the addition of statistical content allowing the application of a true homogeneity test - an important advance. The basic idea is study the cumulative of the residuals resulting from a linear regression between y and * :
y f =         +          + £r
£« = -(a» + a * ) = y  - 9,
tf          t
According to classical regression theory, the sum of the residuals is by definition null with a normal distribution and standard deviation:
a = a Vl-r  where r is the Pearson linear correlation coefficient between X and Y.
a
fz
E/=
 Z  < > = U,_,n
2
£r v
The graphic report of the cumulative residuals 
(on the ordinate) should
for a proven correlation between X and Y give a line starting at 0, oscillating randomly around zero between 0 and n . The presence of a lack of homogeneity is shown by non-random deviations around the zero value. Bois demonstrated for a selected level of confidence 1 — a , the graph of must be inside an ellipse with the major axis n and minor axis equals to:
n
Z. _ • CJg • .                        z a 1 3 vn —lwhere is the
(*-?)'
f*
' quantile of the standard distribution.
TBIWRDP User Manual Software Release N*1Result of Bois test as applied to the annual discharge between two stations with a confidence ellipse at 95%. We can see a change in the behavior around the year 1964.
These developments provide a true test of homogeneity between two stations.
9.2    Apply double mass and cumulative residuals tests
Objectives
This tutorial shows how apply double mass and residuals test to two selected time series
Audience Prerequisites
Hydrologist
Hydrological time series have been imported in the database using the ODM Data Loader.
□ Unload all the time series from the chart using the "Clear all data values" button.
□    Click on the "Double mass" button in the "Processing" ribbon bar:
Data Expert
Senet Catalog Map
Proceccmg j Export Data
!>!
Gauging & rating
Mlec
Gap
filling
0 0
Range Variation Velocity Validation Constraint Constraint Constraint Results
Data valueo validation
□ The Double mass window is shown. Note that the "Compute" button is disabled. We have to load two time series to execute the test.
WRDP User Manual Sot: ware Release N°1(y)Double mass
Period :
Function :
Length PecenUe :
Find and load the reference time series:
o Site name: Lake Tana at Kunzila
o Variable Code: Flow
o Quality Control status: Unknown Find and load the time series to be checked:
o Site name: Lake Tana at Bahir Dar o Variable Code: Flow
o Quality Control status: Unknown
*1i ~~
------ ■------------■
i
’~1
________
I
IBM                    B
w
-
i-------- I--------
LUSI'J             l>M
—1——
am
Note that the common time period begins in year 1981 and end in year 2008. The test will executed for this period.
The "Compute" button is now available, click on.
Use the tab page titles to switch between double mass and cumulative residuals charts[] You can switch between the refernce station and the station to be checked by changing the selection in the "Data values'' tab page:
Cf49)-£adoni X B(47]-
R
eadonly j
Time
“*■
Value Qualifier | Offset Value
Offset Type
1231/2010 12.00:00 PM
-9999
-
o
12302010 12 00:00 PM                    -9999
12232010 12 0000 PM
•9999
12232010 12 00.00 PM                   -9999
1227/2010 12 0000 PM                   -9999
12232010 12.00:00 PM                   •9999
12232010 12 00:00 PM                    •9999
1224 201012 03.00 PM                    ■9999
1223201012.00:00 PM 1222/2010 12.00:00 PM
< Data value of 10557
-9999
*
Q Don't forget to click on "Compute" button to update charts:
j^tkxjblc
Prv:             |Ymt____ •]   LtnflCh           1
Knax»>
Fnr
T«
IhjST*
1/ 1/lHl 12.00 * ,
,1101/201012 CO -
R Um c«»
-------- ,
[•ZC           |
8*1 op Iron    |l
j Ywr
kncton [Mcanjm
T».
[it
-1
•'
Fo-
Io
1/1/IM11200 • i
12/31/20101200 •
Unpin;          J
•] FrtMMfc: 1WG [
Surtr? Irom; ||
To:
[it *]Poc—. »|
•/COT^Annex 3.              TBIWRDP - User Manual Release N 2 v1.0
Annex 3.
TBIWRDP - User Manual Release N°2
vl.O
p
_M0l.acQOUWL4f.tfi
~
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim Report------------------------------- --------------
TBIWRDP
User Manual version 1.0 Software Release N°1
TBIXVKDP User Manual oft ware Release N'lREVISION HISTORY
Revision
Version
Description of Change
Changed By
Effective Date
1
1.0
Initialization of the document
Xavier Thomas
9/16/2012
THIV KDr* User Mar.u. Software Release N°1I1      Introduction7
Ta1bl.1e of CPuront  poseent of the document?
1.2      Tutorial ancillary files?
1.3       Additional documents8
2      Database installation and basic management operations9
2.1       Install SQL Server Express 2008 ENU-............................................................................................ 9
2.1.1        Step 1 (Prerequisites setup - only for Windows XP)9
2.1.2        Step 2 (SQL Server Installation Center)9
2.2       Attach ODM Database sample LittleBear14
2.2.1        Step 1 - Copy database files14
2.2.2        Step 2 - Connect to database15
2.2.3        Step 3 - Attach database File15
2.3       Backup and restore database18
2.3.1        Step 1 - Full backup of a database18
2.3.2        Step 2 - Modify the content of the database21
2.3.3        Step 3 - Full restore of a database22
2.4       Shrink database23
3  Main concepts and structure of the observation database24
3.1      Description of fields and tables25
3.1.1        ISO Metadata26
3.1.2        Sources26
3.1.3        Sites28
3.1.4        Units28
3.1.5        Methods29
3.1.6        Variables29
3.1.7        Data Values
3.2       References tables
3.2.1        OffsetType
3.2.2        CensorCodeCV
3.2.3        QualityControlLevels
3.3       Using SQL Server Management Studio to manage data34 3.3.1        How to visualize table structure
3.3.2        How to visualize table content3.3.3 Querying data
3.3.4 How to insert data
4 Initializing an empty database to store the data collected by monitoring networks and from     35
stakeholders..-
4.1       Initialize the OD Database~
4.1.1
Step 1 - Attach Database OD —
4.1.2
Step 2 - Complete the table sbo.OffsetType
4.1.3
Step 3 - Save the empty updated database
4.2
Install
ODM
Data
Loader
5 Initializing Sites, Sources, Methods and Variables used by ABA and SBOs
5.1 Loading Sites, Methods and Sources-...........................................................................................
5.2      Loading Variables in the database-..........................................................................................45
5.2.1        Step 1 - Update dbo.VariableNameCV table45
5.2.2        Step 2 - Update dbo5peciation table45
5.2.3        Step 3 - Loading Variable in the database46
6     Importing data values--..................................................................................................................... 47
6.1       Install DataManager in Water Resource Expert Mode47
6.2       Importing data values from NMA49
6.2.1
Step 1 - Opening file, setting parameters and correcting errors49
6.2.2
Step 2 - Importing file with the Data Loader54
6.2.3
Step 3 - Visualizing the created time series55
6.2.4
Step 4 - Complete the series57
6.2.5 Step 5 - Import a new series57
6.3 Importing data values from HYDATA
6.3.1        Step 1 - Exporting data from HYDATA
6.3.2
Step 2 - Importing HYDATA observations into database59
6.3.3
Step 3 - Delete data values
6.3.4
Step 4 - Remove a time series
7      Entering Data Values measurement.
7.1       Step 1 - Using data capture form to digitized water quality field measurements 
7.2       Step 2 - Using data capture form to digitized water quality laboratory analysis 
7.3       Step 3 - Importing data collected with data capture form 8 DataManager user interface reference
8.1 Data Capture pane commands and tools 
62
62
64
65
67
671
8.2       Data Converter pane command and tools.......................................................................................69
8.3       Data Loader pane command and tools........................................................................................ -• 71
8.4       Series Catalog pane command and tools........................................................................................73
8)7                  Manut S'>A-«<ie Release N'l1 Introduction
1.1   Purpose of the document
This  document is  the user's  guide dedicated to the software release N°l. As  explained in the inception report, this  release is  mainly  dedicated to the first level of the Information System Management. It covers  different functionalities  like Initializing and populating database, executing basic  database queries, importing data from stakeholders  and managing the stored time series  and observations. The software tools  used are SQL Server, ODM Data Loader and Data Manager. This user's  manual contains  both tutorials  and references  information. It can be used as  a training support.
1.2   Tutorial ancillary files
In order to practice the tutorials found in this document, some complementary files and folders are
provided:
Folder
File name
comment
Software\SQL Server 2008
WindowsXP-KB942288-V3-x86- ENU.exe
Windows Installer 4.5
dotnetfx35.exe
.Net Framework 3.5 SP1 ENU
WindowsXP-KB926139-V2-
ENU.msi
Microsoft PowerShell 1.0
SQLEXPRWT_X86_ENU.exe
SQL Server Express Edition ENU setup
ODM 1.1 updated
LittleBearll.mdf
SQL Server Database file LittleBear example
LittleBearlllog.ldf
SQL Server Database Log file LittleBear example
OD.mdf
Empty SQL Server Database file
OD.Idf
Empty SQL Server Database Log
file
Software\ODM Data Loader
OMD_DL_l_l_3_setup.exe
ODM Data Loader setup
Data Loader files
SiteHydro.csv
SitesWQ.csv 
Sources.csv 
MethodsHydro.csv MethodsHydro.csv 
Add missing Speciation.sql Add missing variables.sql VariablesHydro.csv Variable WQ. csv
Tana Beles Database Initialization files
Software\DataManager
DataManagerSetup.exe
Data\Meteorology\
DataManager setup
♦.xls
Data\HYDATA\
Precipitation files coming from
NMA
lndaga.txt
Data\Data Manager
*.dcf
Data Capture Form samples1
1.3   Additional documents
Further information can be found from the following documentation:
CUAHSI Community http://his.cuahsi.org/documents/ODMl.lDesignSpecifications.pdf Observations Data
Model (ODM)
Version 1.1 Design
specifications
ODM Data Loader http://his.cuahsi.org/documents/ODMDataLoaderFunctionalSpecifications.pdf Functional
Specifications
Project SRS Release TBIWRDP System Requirement Specifications vl.l N°12 Database installation and basic management operations
Objectives 
How to install an existing database. In this tutorial; the used database comes from CUAHSI software distribution and concerns a watershed In
____________________ USA._______________________________________
Audience
IT specialist
Hydrologist
Prerequisites                 Recommended OS Version: Windows 7
The user Is connected as an Administrator
An Internet connection is requirement if the Net framework 3.5 is not
installed on the user's computer
2.1   Install SQL Server Express 2008 ENU
This tutorial is given only for training purpose. It is recommended that all trainees must install SQL Server express on their own computer. In operational phase of the system, there will be one SQL Server Standard Edition database per SBO and two SQL Server Standard & Web Edition databases installed at ABA. 7o simplify installation during the training, the recommend OS version on trainee's computer is Window 7. Each trainee must be logged as an Administrator of his Windows system.
2.1.1     Step 1 (Prerequisitessetup - only for Windows XP)
On Windows XP, if these components are missing.
•     Windows Installer 4.5 . WindowsXP-KB942288-V3-x86-ENU.exe (Automatic restart)
•     .Net Framework 3.5 SP1 ENU (dotnetfx35.exe)
•     Microsoft PowerShell 1.0 : WindowsXP-KB926139-V2-ENU.msi
They should be installed prior to SQL Server. To achieve this, launch the following setups:
•     WindowsXP-KB942288-V3-x86-ENU.exe (Automatic restart)
•     dotnetfx35.exe
•     WindowsXP-KB926139-V2-ENU
2.1.2     Step 2 (SQL Server Installation Center)
•
Launch installation setup SQLEXPRWT_X86_ENU.exe.
.71
•
In SQL Server Installation Center, select "Installation"
o
z
in
J?
ij
£
c u.
■y' j
Zi-
a ~r‘.
□a•     Then select "New SQL Server stand-alone installation..."
•     In "Setup Support rules" wizard page, click on "OK" button.
•     In "Product Key" wizard page, click on "Next >" button.
•     In "License Terms" wizard page, check "I accept the license terms" and click on "Next >" button.
•     In "Setup Support Files" wizard page, click on "Install" button.
•     If no error detected, you can click on "Next>" button, so do it• In "Feature Selection" wizard page,
o Check "Database Engine Services", o Check "Management Tools - Basic", o Click on "Next >" button.
• In the "Instance Configuration" wizard page, keep the default options, dick on "Next >" button.•     In "Disk Space requirements", click on "Next >" button.
•     In "Server Configuration" wizard page,
o In "service account" tab, select "NT AUTHORITY\SYSTEM" in the" Account Name list box.
o Click on "Next >" button.
• In "Database Engine Configuration", in "Account Provisioning" tab,
o Select Mixed Mode (SQL Server Authentication and Windows authentication
o Below "Built-in SQL Server system administrator account", type "vyz9qgoUXE" in "Enter password" text edit box.
o Repeat in "Confirm password" text edit box. o Click on "Add current User’*.
o Click on "Next >" button.
RD? Cser'-'.ant- joftv.are Release M  1:In ‘"Error and Usage Reporting' wizard page, click on “Next >" button.
In “Installation rules" wizard page, click on “Next >" button.
In “Ready to install" wizard page, click on “Install" button, then wait...
When process is completed, in "Installation Progress" wizard page, click on “Next >“ button. In "Complete" wizard page, click on “Close" button.
Close "SQL Server Installation Center" application.
W RD P U i- M a nil j o fhva re R el ease N* 12.2 Attach ODM Database sample LittleBear
Objectives
Using an existing sample database which contains observations data
Audience
IT specialist
Hydrologist
Prerequisites
The user's computer is connected to a SQL Database Server. SQL Server
Management studio is installed on the user's computer.
2.2.1    Step 1 - Copy database Tiles
From the folder "Trainings\Software\ODM 1.1 updated", copy  LittleBearll.mdf and LittleBearllJog.ldf to the folder containing SQL Server data on your computer, usually: C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL_10_50.SQLEXPRESS\MSSQL\DATA.
P.DP V-** Van? .y/rware P dense fcM2.2.2     Step 2 - Connect to database
•     Launch SQL Server Management Studio from the start menu :
All Programs>Microsoft SQL Server 2008>SQL Server Management Studio
•     Fill the required information as follow :
•     Click on ''Connect" button.
■> vyz9qgoUXE
s
2.2.3    Step 3 - Attach database File
• Expand the tree in the left window.
Ffc Edf Vew joob
jj
Conned - g ■-
Lj Lb J /
Qaruiy Ha.,
;
' 7) J
3 [(J bftwflSQLDPSfSS (SQL Server 10X.16&!
e-. ■' J System ZttfJiMV. n .J n-afta
£ j modri
i- jf rmcfc
i J tr-xxt.
= _t Seorty
£ ,_J LOQrr.
«.      1 Server Rdei
i : j Qedertuti
c. i_J Server Objects
i 7 i Backup Oevt«
tt Cj Lr£ed Server j
£ CJ Irtwwi
«x ■ j Repkitw.
i <_j LocaJSdMacjbore
- i Mana2emer<
t Ptik>
x _J SQl Savor Lao;
*♦ _j leQKY
■»
Click-right on "Databases" node. In the popup menu, select "Attach" In the "Attach Database" dialog window, click on "Add" button
‘.‘.mi.! ofrv.are Release N‘In the "Locate Database Files" dialog window, select UttleBearll.mdf in the folder
C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL_10_50.SQLEXPRESS\MSSQL\DATA.
•     Click on "Ok" button to close the window.
•     In the "Attach Database" dialog window, click on "Add" button. A message about full-text catalog can appears, click on "OK" button if needed.
Now, the node LittleBearll is added to the "Databases" parent node:• To quickly check the new database, expand the node "LittleBearll', then the sub node "Tables":
& Microsoft SQL Servpr.Mjnagement Si...
He E<* Y«W took Window Qommuniy tfcb
“J New Query Lu 
Corn-rt* 37 33 :: Y 7]
£ ! j terpdb
i-5
z
is
J Litlefccarll
& [ 4 Database Diaq’eTtf
S‘
ffi Cd System Tables
5    ZD dbo.Calegones
6    ZZi dbo.CensorCodeCV
E Zj cbo.DataTypeCV
E> Cl djo.DataVakxis
61 C dbo.Denvesfron.
(♦■ C cbo.GeoerelZaletjoryCV
5    “ dbo.GraupDescnptions
6    C dbo. Groups
& Zj cfoo.ISOMetadata
6, C dxj.labf Methods
£ Zu dbo.Mcbods
E Zj cbc.ODNV er son
£  cbo.OffsetTypes
& ZD dbo.Quaifiers
& ZD dbc.Oua^yConlroleveE
£ ZD cbc.SampteMeckrnCV
5    ZD doo.Sampies
£ ZD dbo.SampleTypeCV
E ZD dbo.SenesCacaiog
6    ZD dbo.Sces
E ZD dbo.Sources
& C dbo.SpabaRef'erences
S n rtn SrvrWimTV
*Z ■
1 >-
Rtadz
The database LittleBearll is correctly attached.
A -WP User Mane-• olTware Release N '2.3 Backup and restore database
Objectives
How to process full backup and full restore of a database
Audience
IT specialist
Hydrologist
Prerequisites
LittleBear ODM Database is attached to the SQL Server database
SQL Server Management studio is launched; the user is logged (if not, see
chapter 2.2.2 Step 3 - Attach database File).
2.3.1 Step 1 - Full backup of a database
• In the "object explorer" pane of SQL Server Management Studio, expand the "Databases" node:
File Edit View Debug Tools Window Cor
; XL .New Query Uj ’S S , Lj
I Otijetf Explorer’A: -j S'<
>6 ’^21Off-: X ■ ■
Connect’ £8 ..
'.j g] Cg
j
Tpfo(SQVSetveflO.5M617£M).
0 FTi Databases 
lE Ld System Databases £ Cd Database Snapshots S Qj LittleBearll
a  OD
® Li ^..Configuration
f£5 ,j Tfs_DefaultCollection ffl O Security 
ffi LJ Server Objects E Q Replication
l+J ‘Gl Management SI SQL Server Agent
iClick on LittleBearll with your right button and select the menu option "Tasks/Back up../
Tilt Un View Debug leek Window Community Hcip
J NewQutrj ri EU ui
Object f*pMw<'
Conned* Jr •;
- id l6SH5Qi$*^r.W«JUl M]
~ I OatalMiet
•   I Syttent DaUbatei
•      J Dataharc Snapthott
tiry™
1 00                New Daubair.. I W.C          New Qutc,
J W.D           Script Dalabatc ar. »
•  Ll
•  -J Rcpkcai* PoVitt
latki
■ J \ ■ - V                       ■ •7“ C
• • • ,-iF ,r
» 1           Detach-
»
J.
Marugen
SQkServt
1
facett
$Ud PowtrShel
Report*
Rename
Delete
(rfrrth
Properties
Take Offline
fling fink-u
Stvsni
»
•
Rack Up..
■'t
Jfi'
Rettc>e
Merer-
launch Daubtie M-rronng Mon'Ror-
Ship Tranuction Log*-
Generake Scriptt_
Extract DaU*t«r Application—
Regitter at Dau-kitr Applrcatien-
Impon Olla-
Upon Data-
Copy Dalabtie-
Manage Databate (ncrypkioru.
>
$
1
In the" Back Up Database" dialog form, consider the "Destination" file, usually located in C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\ MSSQL_1O_5O.SQLEXPRESS\MSSQL\BACKUP.
The content of the database will be saved in the file "LittleBearll.bak". The extension ".bak" is used by SQL Server to store database backup.
! bi A DP UsvrM-m. -.1 oft ware Release N*1Click on the button "OK" to start the database backup2.3.2 Step 2 - Modify the content of the database
In order to restore the backup file, we will modify the content of a table in the database.
fObject Explorer
Connect*
[<5 TOSH (SQL Server 1030.1617 • <*)
I W U Databases
t* i‘»* System Databcses
a LJ Database Snapshots
▼PX)
I
IJ LtttleBearll
a ; A Database Diagrams
n ■ -^Ff^
P a System Tables
ii! 3 dbo.Categories
u 3 dbo.CeasorCodeCV
a 3 dbo.DataTypeCV
'.r 3 dbo.OalaValues
H. 3 dbo.DerivedFrom
d 3 dbo.Gauging
ffi 3 dbo.GaugingValues
I
Ij
jI
:1
•     Expand the node "LittleBearll\Tables" and find the table called "dbo.Sources"
•     Click on the node "dbo.Sources" with the right button and select the menu option "Edit Top 200 rows". The list of sources data appears in the center pane (a source is equivalent to a monitoring network):
• Modify the field "Organization" of the first row , delete the word "Laboratory" :
1OSHXlU«eBeirll     ■ dboAource. TOSH-UtleBcadulboCcnwCrtdcCVlOSKlmtcBun] • dbc.Utc
SouuX)
Sou«
t
ui*i Suu
Utah v.uto
C’alU'c
Utah SuU Ot'nu'.iUU1
. VUtei F.4\<±i0, Itbczatoi
Ctrlfaa.
i
Utan Suu Wir^u(> uu
h water Kctcwdilaixrtlw
v.aur.
Utah S U u Urk.atpw
Deturtnaotv.aurUud xjovn
Waur.
U«ud SlcUC
Ouvet
Mai bi
AUU
AGU
Close the grid using the close button located in the right-top of the grid.*Oearl...dbaCeniorCodeCV
'a'er Rtf c* arch
/flier Research Lflixxator y
GxiOnuous wat... Mop:/Arww.bca [.?-
Conbnuoos mort... httpVyfller.us,
, !*• <
•flier Research Laboa tor
y
Water chemrttry... http:/>«ter.us
f|
rnenl of Watershed Sconces
Water cherS s try... http:/A»ater.irt
q
*y
Real hme stream... http://w«terdat
The field has been updated in the database, now we are going to restore the database.
2.3.3   Step 3 - Full restore of a database
•      In the "Object explorer" pane, select the node corresponding to the LittleBearll Database.
•      Click on with the right button and select the option menu "Task\Restore\Database".
•      In the "Restore database" dialog form, click on the "OK" button.
»•
-■
J
2
Once the database restored, follow the first instructions of the step 2 to check if the word "laboratory" is still missing.2.4 Shrink database
Objectives
Shrink database operation reduce the size of data and log files in a database
Audience
IT specialist
Prerequisites
LittleBear ODM Database is attached to the SQL Server database
SQL Server Management studio is launched, the trainee is logged.
Remarks
Shrink database optimize the performance of the database. It is recommended to process this operation frequently: Every week is an
acceptable frequency.
•      In the "object explorer" pane of SQL Server Management Studio, expand the "Databases" node.
•      Click on LittleBearll with your right button and select the menu option "Shrink\Database"
•     The "Shrink Database" dialog form shows the available free space in percentage. Click on the OK button to reduce the database size.3 Main concepts and structure of the observation database
The database used in the project is  the implementation of the Observation Database Mode! developed by  David G. Tarboton, Jeffery  S. Horsburgh from the Texas  Center for Research in Water resources  and David R. Maidment from the Utah Water Research Laboratory. ODM is  intended to allow for comprehensive analysis  of information collected by  multiple investigators  for varying purposes. It is  intended to expand the ability  for data analysis  by  providing a standard format to share data among investigators  and to facilitate analysis  of information from disparate sources  both within a single study area or hydrologic observatory and across hydrologic observatories and regions.
Although designed specifically for hydrologic purpose, this data model has a simple and general
structure that will also accommodate with a wide range of other data, such as from other
environmental monitoring networks.
ODM is  designed to store observations  with sufficient information about the data values  to provide traceable heritage from raw measurements  to usable information allowing them to be unambiguously  interpreted and used. Introducing a data values  in the database needs  ancillary information in order to respond to the following questions:
•     Who is the producer of the data?
•     Where the data has been collected?
•     What is the observed phenomenon? Which is its temporal range and how to quantify his measurement?
•     What is the method used to measure and collect the data?
To satisfy these requirements the database model is organized as the following:3.1 Description of fields and tables
Objectives
ODM uses a relational database format to allow for ease in querying and
data retrieval. The physical data model can be viewed under SQL Server
Management Studio. It is particularly Important to know how the database
is organized what is the meaning of each held.
Audience
IT specialist
Hydrologist
Prerequisites
Little Bea r ODM Database is attached to the SQL Server database
SQL Server Management studio is launched, the user is logged to the
database.
•  In the "Object explorer" pane, expand the node "Database/UttleBearll/DatabaseDiagram"
•  Click on node "dbo.ODDiagram" with the right button and select the menu option "Modify"
£ti (M
trnf»ei
feMUu CUfna
ft*'**'.      £r»«*z-*l H«U
Jlth-Q-’r Ji rddiu u\ J J el .
• You can move over the diagram using the cross icon in the bottom-right of the pane center
You can also adjust the zoom percentage to enlarge the diagram :□ New Table...
Add Table...
___ I
ah*
I
1 /U
I
New Tert Annotahon
Select All
Show Relationthip Label!
Arrange Tablet
Zoom
View Page Breaks
r) Recalculate Page Break!
Copy Diagram to Clipboard
-------------t •unit*--------------
Such as a data dictionary, the main tables are described below using the following notation:
o M: Mandatory,
o 0: Optional,
o FK: Foreign Key,
o Ul: Unique Index.
3.1.1   ISO Metadata
The ISOMetadata Table contains dataset and project level metadata required for compliance with standards such as ISO 19115 or ISO 8601.
■
MetadatalD
Integer
Identity
Unique integer ID for each metadata record.
M, PK
i
TopicCategory          Text(255)         Topic category keyword that gives the broad ISO19115 metadata topic category for data from this source.
M                "Unknown"
Title
Text(255)         Title of data from a specific data source.
M               "Unknown"
Abstract
Text
Abstract of data from a specific data source.
■b
Profileversion            Text(250)         Name of metadata profile used by the data source.
M                "Unknown"
M               "Unknown"
1
i
Metadatalink             Text(500)         Link to additional                                                          0 metadata     reference
material.
3.1.2   Sources
The sources table lists the original sources of the data, providing information to identify the monitoring networks which produces the data.
"Unknown"
JUfils fag
| SourcelD
Integer
Identity
Unique identifier that identifies each data source.
5                          M, PK
Organization               Text(255)       Name of the organization that collected the data. This should be the agency or organization that collected or created the data, even if it came out of a database consolidated from many sources organization.
Beles Sub Basin Organization
M
SourceDescription      Text
Contains a more detailed description of where the data was actually collected.
M
SourceLink
Text(500)       Link that can be pointed at the original data file and/or associated metadata stored in the digital library or URL of data source.
0            NULL
ContactName              Text(255)       Name of the contact person for the data source.
M           "Unknown"
Phone
Text(255)       Phone number for the contact person.
M           "Unknown"
Email
Text(255)       Email address for the contact person.
M           "Unknown"
Address
Text(255)       Street address for the contact person.
M            "Unknown"
City
Text(255) City in which the contact person is located.
M           "Unknown"
State
Text(255) State in which the contact person is located.
M            "Unknown"
ZipCode
Citation
______
Text(255)        US Zip Code or country postal code.
Text
Text string that gives the citation to be used when the data from each source are referenced.
Data collected by Beles SBBO as part of the ABBAY Basin water quality
M            "Unknown"
i
M            "Unknown"
TBI’.VRDP User Manual oftv-are Release N z'lmonitoring network 
MetadatalD
Integer
Integer identifier referencing the record in the ISOMetadata table for this source.
Unknown
metadata
3.1.3 Sites
The Sites tabic provides information giving the spatial location at which observations have been collected.
MFIeld ^WDescriptlorieW^>®Exam*Cpleon>Sstralr
SitelD
integer
Identity
Unique’idehtifier for each sampling location.
37
' m;pk
SiteCode                Text(SO)       Code used by the organization that collects the data to identify the site.
114013                 M, Ul
SiteName               Text(255)      Full name of the sample site.
Dabana near Bedelle
M
Latitude
Real
Longitude               Real
Latitude in decimal degrees.
Longitude in decimal degrees East positive, West negative.
LatLongDatumID   Integer          Identifier that
references the Spatial Reference System of the latitude and longitude coordinates.
1
----------------------- 1
M
M
M           3 = WGS84 j
Elevation_m          Real
Elevation of sampling location (in m).
1432
Vertical Datum      Text(255)     Vertical datum of the elevation.
PosAccuracy_m    Real             Value giving the accuracy, with which the positional information is specified in meters.
Comments            Text              Comments related to the site.
25
0 NULL
0 NULL
0 NULL
0            NULL
3.1.4 Units
The Units table gives the Unit and UnitsType associated with variables, time support and observation offsetsUnitName
Text(255)     Full text name of the            "Milligrams
M
units.
Per liter"
UnitsType
< '—^*^Text(255)
Text
value
that
spSeifies-
"Length"
the dimensions of
the
"Time"
1
units.
"Mass"
UnitsAbbreviat
ion Text(255)
Text abbreviation
for
"mg/L"
M
i
the units.
____ _ _______________
3.1.5    Methods
The Methods table list the methods used to collect the data and any additional information about
the method.
Constraint, ;: , D(
MethodID                      Integer           Unique integer ID for      5                             M, PK Identity          each method.
MethodDescription       Text               Text  description  of           "Specific 
M
each method.
conductance
measured
using a
"hydrolab"
or
"streamflow"
measured
using a V
notch weir
with
dimension
xxx".
•
Method Link
Text(500) Link to additional
reference material on
the method.
0            NULL
3.1.6     Variables
The Variables table lists the full descriptive information about what variables have been measured.
VariablelD
integer Unique identifier for 6 Identity each variable.
VariableCode Text(50) Text code used by the
organization that collects the data to identify the variable.
VariableName              Text(2S5)        Full text name of the variable that was measured, observed, modeled, etc.
M, PK
M, Ul
"Discharge"              M
Speciation
Text(255)        Text code used to               P", "N",
------ --------- - --------- -.............. —
_ identify how the data           "NO3"
M         "Not Applicable"value is expressed
(i.e., total phosphorus concentration expressed as P). Integer identifier that 4 references the record in the Units table giving the units of the data values associated with the variable.
t
*
<
VariableUnitsID Integer
M, FK
SampleMedium              Text(255)         The medium in which             "Surface
M
the sample or
7
water *,
observation was taken
"sediment",
or made.
"Fish tissue"
ValueType
Text(255)         Text value indicating what type of data value is being recorded.
"Field observation", "Laboratory observation", "Model simulation results"
M
IsRegular
Boolean Value that indicates 
». i whether the data values are from a
i
regularly sampled
time series.
M
M
indicates the time
support (or temporal
footprint) of the data
values. 0 is used to
indicate data values 
that are
instantaneous. Other
values indicate the
time over which the
data values are
implicitly or explicitly 
averaged or
aggregated.
TimeUnitsID
Integer
Integer identifier that references the record in the Units table giving the Units of the time support. If TimeSupport is 0, indicating an instantaneous observation, a unit needs to still*be*given for completeness,
0, 24
M, FK 0 = Assumes 
-■
instantaneous samples where no other information is available
*>although it is 
some
what a
rbitrar
y.
i
1 DataType                    ^4e*t(255)
Text
value
that
.-■*»~Mf&Gontinuous”,
M
1
GeneralCategory 1
1
identifies the data values as one of several types.
"Sporadic",
"Cumulative", "Incremental, " "Average"
!
1
Text(255)        General category of          "Climate",
M
the variable
"Water Quality", "Ground water Quality"
I
1
i
NoDataValue              Real
Numeric value used to encode no data values for this variable.
M         -9999
3.1.7    Data Values
The Data Values table contains the actual data values.
■v'fDefautt’
ValuelD
DataValue ValueAccuracy
Integer
Unique integer ID for
Identity 
each Data Value.
Real
The numeric value of
the observation.
Real
Numeric value that
describes the
measurement
accuracy of the data.
Local DateTime
Date/Time
Local date time at 9/4/2003
M
which the Data Value 7:00:00 PM
was observed.
UTCOffset
Real
Offset in hours from 3
M
i
|________
UTC time of the
corresponding
LocalDateTime value.
DateTimeUTC
DateTime Universal UTC date and time at which the Data Value was observed.
9/4/2003 4:00:00 PM
M
SitelD
Integer
M, FK
VariablelD
Integer
Integer Identifier 3
that references the
site at which the observation was measured. This links Data Values to their locations in the Sites table.
Integer        Identifier        5
that references the
M, FK
TBIWRDP User M.jiui j' Software Release N’variable that was measured. This links Data Values to their variable in the Variables table.
Offsetvalue
Integer
Integer identifier that references the measurement offset type in the Offset Types Table.
2.1
0              NULL = No Offset
OffsetTypelD
Integer
Integer identifier that references the measurement offset type in the OffsetType Table.
3
0, FK          NULL = No Offset
CensorCode
Text(50)          Text indication of whether the data is censored from the CensorCodeCV.
"nc"
M,-FK          "nc" =
"Not Censored"
QualifierlD
Integer
Integer identifier that references the Qualifiers table. If Null, the Data Value is inferred to be not qualified.
4
O, FK          NULL
MethodlD
Integer
Integer identifier that references method used to generate the Data Value in the Methods table.
3
M, FK          0 = no method specified
SourcelD
Integer
Integer identifier
that references the record in the Sources table giving the source of the Data Value.
5
M, FK
Qu alityCon trolLevel 1D     Integer            Integer identifier giving the level of quality control that the value has been subjected to. The references the QualityControlLevels table.
1
M, FK         -9999 = Unknown
Comment
Text(250)       Comment
"unreadable              0
gage"3.2 References tables
3.2.1 OffsetType
The OffsetType reference table must contain the following information:
r
I L
Distance above ground level.
52 (corresponds to "meter" in the dbo.Units table)
I
3.2.2    CensorCodeCV
The CensorCodeCV reference table must contain the following information:
gt
greater than
It
less than
nc
not censored
nd
non-detect
pnq
present but not quantified
3.2.3   QualityControl Levels
The QualityControlLevels reference table must contain the following information:
-9999
Unknown               The quality control level is unknown.
0
i
Raw data                Raw and unprocessed data and data products that have not undergone quality control. Depending on the variable, data type, and data transmission system, raw data may be available within seconds or minutes after the measurements have been made. Examples include real time precipitation, streamflow and water quality measurements.
1
Quality controlled data
Quality controlled data that have passed quality assurance procedures such as routine estimation of timing and sensor calibration or visual inspection and removal of obvious errors.
2
Derived
products
Derived products that require scientific and technical interpretation and may include multiple-sensor data. An example is basin average precipitation derived from rain gages using an interpolation procedure.
3
Interpreted products
Interpreted products that require researcher driven analysis and interpretation, model-based interpretation using other data
and/or strong prior assumptions. An example is basin average precipitation derived from the combination of rain gages and radar return data.
Knowledge Knowledge products that require researcher driven scientific 
products                 interpretation and multidisciplinary data integration and include
model   based   interpretation   using   other   data   and/or   strong   prior assumptions.
L'.DI- Mint’ j| ultv.-are Release bT 1Objectives
3.3 Using SQL Server Man     ment St  dio to man      data
View the structure of the Data Values table
Audience
IT specialist
age             u
age
3.3.1 How to visualize Htaydbrleolostgrist ucture
Prerequisites
LittleBear ODM Database is attached to the SQL Server database SQL Server Management studio is launched; the user is logged.
•      In the "Object Explorer'* * pane, expand the node
"Databases/LittleBearll/Tables/dbo.DataValues".
•      Expand the node "Columns".
•  Check that the column names correspond with the specification described above.
• dta.Ccn*crCorfc<V
v ZJ dbolkUTypcCY
^ClBSSI
•? V.kj.D PK, in, nc<
3 OtuVkhM (OoH, nd r»-«)
3 VakrtAccxKy (Float, nuf)
3 Lc-ciDtteTimt (dalctmc, nc< r*X)
3 LfiCOHm Pott, net rt«S)
3 DttfTantUK (dttcGmc. nd rvX)
f Sn«O pK, in, nd nu>]
f V«rttM<© (FK, Mt n«f)
3
(flOM. rxiX)
f   Mi<sTyp«D   (FK,   W.   nuff)
f Cmcr<edc PK mrwchdOOL nd nuB)
T <^«ST<O PK, int. ruX)
f   hVihcdEJ   (K   im,   nd   ivX)
T UuxdD (HQ id, nd dX}
j UmpidDtfK, fax. ndQ
3 Oezmdf rtmJD («. nu«)
f Q^uk,< fX/etLev«(£) (><_ nd ruX)
O
3    Comment    (n«-*/chir(m*4   <v.X)
—------------ _______________________________________________
3.3.2   How to visualize table content
Objectives____________ View quality controls levels items available in the database
Audience Prerequisites 
IT specialist
Hydrologist
LittleBear ODM Database is attached to the SQL Server database
SQL Server Management studio is launched; the user Is logged.
•      In the "Object Explorer" pane, expand the node "Databases/LittleBearll/Tables".
. Click on the node "dbo.QualityControlLevels" with the right button and select the menu option "Select top 100 rows".
•     Check that the content corresponds with the description made above.
• H/H’ •'
Kdcase bPli
t
3.3.3 Querying data
t
Objectives
Perform SQL Queries to retrieve data
Audience Prerequisites
Remark
IT specialist
Hydrologist
LittleBear ODM Database is attached to the SQLServer database
SQL Server Management studio is launched, the user is connected
With SQL Server Management Studio, there are several ways to execute a
query, sometimes with SQL syntax language and sometimes using the
"Design Query Editor". The following chapter presents different techniques.
After having performed these examples, the trainees are invited to develop
their own strategies.
3.3.3 A List the sites stored in the database
• 
In the "Object Explorer" pane, right click on the node "Databases/LittleBearll".
• 
Select the menu option "New Query"
• 
In the blank center pane of SQL Server Management Studio, right click and select "Design
I
query in Editor..."
t
to to to
■
i
o o
■
to to E o o
■
■
t
I
I
IIn the "Query Designer\Add Table", select the "Sites" table and click on the "Add" button
Click on the "Close" button.
In the "Query Designer" dialog form, check the "All Columns" row of the "Sites" table.
Click on "OK" button.
The text of the SQL query appears in the center pane.
• Execute .L v
*3;
Si
* xj. SQLQueryl7.iq| - T.JeBearll (sa (57))i <
’• fl SELECT
Sices.*
j
j 1 FROM                              si tea]Click on the "Execute" button
The result of the query appears in the center pane.
j j a.
r*i o’c-.o x -            ‘A.
, i u* • i. tot.Mii u. n m. jQiQv<y <m/ . rm
jilt;:
3.3.3.2     List the Site code, site name and coordinates of all sites
• Starting with the previous query, select the text of the SQL Query.
j Execute k                    £3 =? H  s’” u'i ©|&]<
<r g X                     SQLQueryl7.sql - LJeBearll (sa
0 ktxr./Mfo
•  Right click in the selected text and select the option menu "Design query in editor7'.
•     Uncheck all rows in the "Sites" table except "SiteCode", "SiteName", "Latitude" and "Longitude".
-O Sites 
l_ I* (A! CoLmns) StHD
SiteCode
✓ StteUame
I * I La u tude
* Lon^tude
'LatLc/wDatumlD
EJevatiyijn
<1 Ve< GczDakm
' Iloc/A
IjLocatr
1  w LocoJVoje'UonlC Q Pot Acor acyjn
, State
' County I (Comments
— 1 i f
I
I•  Close the "Query Designer" with the "OK" button.
•      Execute the query.
i _j Menaces |
S<eCo<fe__________
SCoHmtm
LatXude 41.718473
lonpsude
1
2
3
[~US~U LBR Menden
] Lille Beer Aver at Mendon Road near Mendon. Hah
•111 S4B4Q2
USUlBR    Parade
Life Bear Ayer « McMurdy Hoflow near Paradie. ...
41.575552
•111.855217
USULBR ErpFa^n
Utah Stalo UWver*4y E^enmenta! Fa«n near Well...
41.668993
-111  890567
4
USULBRSF Lower
Scab Forte Utile Bear Aver be/ow Davenport Creek...
41.506518
•111.115079
USU LBR EFlower
USU LBR-EFWeahcr
EaM Fork Udo Bear Aver M Pera £50 Carul Olvenl...
UtJa Bear Avar Lfcprr Weather Slabon near Avon. _.
<1.529212
41.535543
•111 799324
• 111.805946
7
USU LBR-SFUpper
South Fork ImIo Bear Arer above Davenport Cree..
41.495409
41.556736
•111.817993
I
fl
USU lBRParaA»eRepealer
F^4o Repealer near Paradsc. Uah
>111.854455
|
9
USULBREFRepeator
Eael Fork Ubla Bear Aver Radio Repeater near Av_.
41536
-111.806
10 U
SULBR-Wdhvfe
Udo Bear Avar near Welrrfle. Heir
41 645457
•111317649
|
11
USU LBRCorAjence
Ude Bear Aver befov Corikxnce o< South and Ea...
41.53  wee
•111330455
.
12
10105900
Ulk Bear Aver at Paradise. Utah
41.5756
•111.8544
•      Find a Site Code equals to "10105900"
•      Starting from the last query, add the following text at the end of the query : SELECT              SiteCode, Sit:eName, Lacitude, Longitude
____________ ____________________
WHERE SiteCode = ’101059|90’
The WHERE clause filters the sites with a code equals to 10105900
3.3.3.3     Find a Site Code beginning by “USU"
• Update the text of the previous query as shown below
SELECT             SiteCode. SiteName, Latitude, Longitude
FROM                      Sitea
WHERE SiteCode Like ’OSU%'|
% means "any character".
3.3,3.4     List all units
Following the previous instructions, the result must be:
SQlQueryl7.tql • -cOeirll (u (57|)' ^.SQtQvtrylfi.lsHju^ccnncttce: 1,jpS>t^i/bj>,0Hic<1 p« j
>
C SELECT UnicjJD. llnliiHu'^. UmoTyp-e. UnlcaX&brcvx*cian
•ffcOX                   Unit*
• ;
»«. ...______________
■
■
tjj UdiL^w
UhUlD
UnuflMt
U<l1rM
1
nzzi
P*CAt
X
‘2
J
i
i
>»1
4
<
'***'
■
»
r»>lh
O*j'<
I
4
»ozn
7
7
r^zr-t we
*<*•
4c)W
•
1
»t'. e*«
0*3 £
»
»
atxinjw
10
xsecn-j
I II
11
MjM
•r
IJ
13
Mu
*c
n
IJ
hMIfr*
*u
ha
• ii
Ii
cow<to
Mi
CM?
••
..
**3.3.3.5      Export the list of units to Excel file
•     Starting from the previous query, click on the top left corner of the "Results grid.
•     Somewhere in the grid, right click and select the option menu "Copy with headers .
CD jpj Messages
LUelD      Ur<«Name
UKeTjpe                 Un«»Abbrcv»alio<)
1
EZ]
percent
Oraendonles,
*
2
2
degree
Angle
deg
3
3
grad
A->gic
grad
1t
4
rad an
Angie
rad
5
5
deyea north
Angie
degN
6
6
degree oxjth
Angle
degS
i 7 7 degree wed
€        8              degree east
Angie                      degW
A-tgie
degE
9
9
BnwxXe
10
10
arcseoond
11
11
deradar,
12
12
acre
Angie Angle Angie Area
13
13
hectare
Atm
14
14
tq-jare certimdef
Acea
« C - . C---------------------------- t. ___ ____
Query executed successfully.
•     Open Excel 2010, click on the first cell
•     In ribbon bar select "Paste"
3.3.4   How to insert data
It is not recommended to insert and delete data with SQL Server Studio. Some data must be loaded with the ODM Data Loader, the others with the Data Converter.4 Initializing an empty database to store the data collected by monitoring networks and from stakeholders
4.1 Initialize the OD Database
ObjectivesAttach and complete an empty database____________________________________________
Audience
IT specialist
Hydrologist
Prerequisites                   SQL Server Management studio is launched, the user is logged to the
4.1.1 Step 1 - Attach Database OD
database
•     Follow the instructions given in chapter 2.2 Attach ODM Database sample LittleBear using
the file OD.mdf and OD.Idf instead of LittleBearll.mdf and LittleBearll.ldf.
•     Check that a new database node has been created:
a fa Databases
B lJ System Databases
It] La Database Snapshots
0 (p-Ttnrrtearll
El J OD
i l cS ■Database Diagrams
0 LJ Tables
® Views
hi Svnnnvms
•     Using the menu option "Select Top 1000 rows", check that the main tables dbo.Sources,
dbo.Sites, dbo.Variables, dbo.Methods, dbo.DataValues and dbo.SeriesCatalog are empty.
•     Check that the table dbo.Units contains more than 300 items.
•     Check that the table dbo.QualityControlsLevels corresponds to the list presented in chapter
3.2.3.
•     Check that the table dbo.CensorCodeCV corresponds to the list presented in chapter 3.2.2.
•     Check that the table dbo.OffsetType corresponds to the list presented in chapter3.2.1.
4.1.2 Step 2 - Complete the table sbo.OffsetType
The  offsetType  corresponding  to  the  distance  from  ground  level  expresses  in  meter  is  missing  in  the database. We are going to insert a new record in the database.
•     Retrieve the UnitsID correspond to into "meter" in the database
. In the "Object explorer pane, click on the node "dbo.OffsetType", select the menu option "Script Table as\INSERT T0\New Query Editor Window".
•     A new SQL script appears in the center pane :
INSERT INTO (0D).(dbo).(OffafccTypetf)
(Off aecUmtalDJ
• (OffsctDescripcion]j
VALUES
•^OfCaecUniualD. inc._
^OffjetDAacripcion nyafCMr rax .
GO•      Replace <OffsetUnitslD,int> by the number you found in the table dbo.Units
•      Replace <OffsetDescription> by the following text: 'Distance from ground level (don t forget the two single quotes at the beginning and at the end. Of the text
Now, the updated query is similar to:
INSERT INTO (OD).(dbo).[OffsecTypes)
l[OffsecUnlcsID)
.(OffsecDescripcion)i
VALUES
(1
,'Distance froc, ground level
GO
Be careful, 1 is probably not the correct UnitsID I
•     Execute the query by clicking on the "Execute" button in the menu toolbar:
U U3 c-/                                1        ,
• f Execute k « -•
SQLQu
•     Check that the offsetType has been inserted in the database following the instructions given in chapter 3.2.1.
I.
v 
1
1
„
I
____________________ •
OtltdlfftcO 06*elXilD
1I1
[ 52
Duttrce E»9ve to
11
4.1.3    Step 3 - Save die empty updated database
•     Following the instructions given in chapter 2.3.1, backup the database
•     In the Back Up Database" Dialog form, in the "Backup set/Name" text box, replace "OD_Full Database Backup" by "OD Full Empty Database Backup ", and click on OK button :
UP User Ma mid • oftwarc- Release N''l4.2   Install ODM Data Loader
Objectives
Install Data Loader
Audience Prerequisites
Hydrologist
SQL Server database is installed on the user's computer (training) or the user's computer is In the network local area and connected to a SQL Server database server (operational phase)
•  Launch installation setup OMD_DL_l_l_3_setup.exe
•     Click on "Next >" button
• Check the radio box "I agree" and click on "Next >" button
Uconso Agroomont
JE
i....................................
CcvnuW (<) .'007. Una k*.
Al iMtatKKrved
Rt-Wu..: tej uk m W( a>d brury fcmu, cc wbSa.
m*MkMien. «r< penne^l prmklrd e»c
.,
ascoj-nf 'ij*'
*i -PRClick on "Next >" button
• Click on "Next >" button
• At the end of the setup, Click on "Close" button
Bl’A W User Manu blv./are Release N '15 Initializing Sites, Sources, Methods and Variables used by ABA and SBOs
Objectives
Sites, sources, methods and variables have been defined or reviewed by experts. Following these inputs the database should be initialized in order to later store observations and measurements
Audience Prerequisites
Hydrologist
The data loader in installed on the user's computer and connected to a SQL Database Server
5.1 Loading Sites, Methods and Sources
•     Launch ODM DL 1.1.3 from the start menu : All Programs>Cuahsi His
•     In the "New Database Connection", enter the SQL Server username "sa" and the password "vyz9qgoUXE" :
•  Check the connection information by clicking on the button "Test Connection"
•     The, click on the button "Save Changes"
. In the menu bar select the option "File\Open', open the file named “SitesH dro.cs
Y
which contains the list of hydrological sites :
•     Click on the button "Commit File"
. At the end of the import process, ODM Data Loader informs that the update was completed.
•      Repeat the same operation for the following files :
V‘
nuU'';
.f.Important  remarks:  if  the  loading  process  fails  due  to  an  erroneous  row  found  in  the  source  file,  no data will be loaded in the database.
5.2    Loading Variables in the database
5.2.1    Step 1 - Update dbo.VariableNameCV table
In SQL Server Management Studio, select the node OD in the "Object explorer" pane.
r~~j Storage
5j Ha Security
B Ul OD
ft) fal Database Diagrams
;♦) Tables
i_J Views
til O Synonyms
cl U Programmability
In the menu bar, select the menu option File/Open/File and open the file named Add missing variables.sql.
«— o--. r— • 
-w ti -ft G i u w t a .
■ u—
• J
•      Execute the INSERT queries by clicking on the "Execute" button in the menu toolbar.
•      Each INSERT query must produce the following message : 1 row(s) affected
5.2.2        Step 2 - Update dbo.Speciation table
In SQL Server Management Studio, select the node OD in the "Object explorer" pane.
I Ei’A RiJF L'sei Manu. ofr.vnre Release N' 11
tf ."J Storage
♦ i Security
9 U 00
•  LJ Database Diagrams
rj Tables
.♦> . -1 Views
t. **'i Synonyms
t- i_J Programmability
In  the  menu  bar,  select  the  menu  option  "File/Open/File"  and  open  the  file  named  Add  missing speciation.sql.
•  Execute the INSERT queries by clicking on the "Execute" button in the menu toolbar.
•     Each INSERT query must produce the following message: 1 row(s) affected
. -_;=i - j u i a ,
. « S.k
5,2.3     Step 3 - Loading Variable in the database
Follow the instructions given in chapter S.l with the following Gies:6 Importing data values
Objectives
This tutorial shows how to Import data coming from stakeholders. Two examples are given; data from NMA and data stored in HYDATA software.
Audience Prerequisites
Hydrologist
SQL Server database is installed on the user's computer (training) or the user's computer is in the network local area and connected to a SQL Server database server (operational phase)
The framework .Net 4.0 should be installed on the user's computer. If not ,use the setup found in Software\DataManager folder, prior to DataManager setup.
6.1 Install DalaManager in Water Resource Expert Mode
• Launch installation setup Setup.exe found in Software\DataManager.
• Click on "Next >" button
what hnd of usor arc you ?
a                lodric—r.Check the radio button ''Water Resource Expert" and click on "Next >" button.
• Click on "Next >" button.
• Click on "Close" button to complete the setup
Installation Comploto
^n>B<ten^t>» ttoourf Information Sytfm
0*IaM«mx< h*l been luccetVu^ r^.Oe.1
Ock'Cbic'looC
f^ti« n«Wid>i
kj            Ij> *yvtvai4»)Mi U*w X£ 1 r. ,-, .J<k
'c"i1
As you can see, DataManager setup comes in two flavors:
afttt xj/tv/a•       For  "field  operator  and  laboratory  technician";  in  the  mode  only  data  capture  functionality  is enabled. The computer doesn't need to be connected to the SQL Server database in the local area network.
•       For "water  resource  expert  mode";  DataManager  needs  a  connection  to the  database, all functionalities are enabled.
6.2     Importing data values from NMA
6.2.1 Step 1 - Opening file, setting parameters and correcting errors
•     Launch Data Manager from the start menu :
All Programs>WRIS
•      The first time you use DataManager, you must give your SQL Server connection information. In  server  type,  type  "localhost",  in  Database  Name,  enter  "OD",  then  enter  the  login  "sa"and the password "vyz9qgoUXE" and click on the button "Save changes".
The DataManager shows four main tab pages: "Data Capture", "Data Converter", "Data Loader" and "Series Catalog". Click on the tab "Data Converter".
In the ribbon bar "Data Provider", select ‘ NMA Hourly Rainfall data values" in the list and click on the button "Open File" :
j BIVVHDP User Manual .-oft ware Release N'ln- 6
r
Dala Ca^vfO Data Converter Data Loadv Serf*
Data Capture Form file
Data Capture Form file
NMA Dail/ Rainfall data yjlues__________ I
ijhlaTTxfatai
HYDATA 4.1 export file
_ LT set i ype---------------
QuaUy Control Level
UTCOff»et
4
’£|f
Setting„
----------
■
i
•     From the folder Data\Meteorology\Bahir Dar TBMET105 , open the file RIB BHD 1(1959,60,62,71,72,73,74,75,76).xIs. This file contains hourly precipitations from 1959 to 1976. It has transmitted by NMA during the inception phase.
•     After importing the file, its contents is shown in the "Source Data" pane :
• In the ribbon bar "Data Provider", click on the button "Settings" :
. Click in the first rows corresponding to the variable, a button with an ellipsis appears, click on it:
In the "Select a variable" dialog form, find the variable coded by PRECIP. You can sort the data by clicking on columns header.
TEJV EDP Cser .MariUv. Software Release N'l• Select the corresponding row and click on the "Select" button.
i Bi V. HDF ‘Js-r Manuai                Release N' 1• In the same way, select the following items : Unknownl9 - Bahir Dar
Site
Unknownl9 is a temporary code. The codification must be given by NMA and the Site table must be updated in the database
Method
[13]   Precipitation   observation   by observer
We don't exactly what is the method used to collect this dataset. It's the nearest value available in the database.
[4]NMA  -  State  organization  in charge of climatology
The source is NMA under its own monitoring networks
[1] 1 - Quality controlled data                      We consider that NMA has validated this dataset. It has been delivered with an acceptable level of quality.
UTCOffset                       2
Default value corresponding the UTC offset in Ethiopia
• When the settings are up to date, click on the button 'Convert' in the 'Conversion' ribbon bar. The data are converted to the ODM Data values format ready to be imported in the database. The converted data are shown in the "ODM Data" pane :
• Two buttons "Next error" and 'Previous Error" are now available, which means that the dataset contains some errors :
I
Next Error Previous Error S]
Coiwvxi
Click on the "Next error" button to move the current row to the next erroneous data :•     Move the mouse over the error icon in the first column. A message appears and indicates the data is time stamped to the 31th of November in the source file, which is impossible.
•     Select the erroneous row by dragging your mouse from the first to the last erroneous column and press <del> key.
iaft2r-
WK:
as:
iit
s _
r4
•«
■tarSnc
ciiZiZSEl
•I.-.
■
«
•»
•I
•
»■ i 'f t
i>«< # i
». • imjmi
u • w | » i
>r«.
t»
<H t,
□
•     The erroneous rows are deleted. Use the 'Next error' button to move to the next ones.
•     The cause of the next errors is identical; delete the rows in the same way.
•      Click on the "Next error" button to move to the next error. Here, the value of precipitation given in the source file is equals to "o.l" where V is the alphabetical character and not a digit number. We deduce the right value is probably "0.1"
a.
9
35•      Double click in the cell corresponding to the data value, fill it up with *'0.1 and press <enter>. Now, the error icon has disappeared.
•     Take a look at the ribbon bar, the two buttons "Next error" and "Previous error' have also disappeared
6.2.2     Step 2 - Importing file with the Data Loader
•     Click on the "Data Loader" tab page :
’’ DcU P. •. .v; r .
Dea                   Seize
Connect Open OOM File JODMDaU load Om Shew Re lull i
____ ______________ - !•?»«,•
>
iflCod!
Dau Value         Uc*DjU*rne Oik* Code
UTCOffad
PREOP
PREC1P
U'»3Y0wnlJ
0
12/1/19992- nc
2
n
4
1
PREClP
UfiruwilJ
0
12/1/19593- rvc
2
ii
4
1
PREOP
0
12/V1S59 4 . nc
2
13
4
1
PREClP
0
12/1/1959 5 - nc
2
13
4
1
PnfcOP
Unknown 19
0
12/1/1559 €_ «
2
13
4
1
I
!
i
PREClP               lbkn>wnl9        0
PRECP                 Uta»»nl9         0
PREOF                LHowwnB        0
PREOP                Utow«n19        0
PREOF               Uhtoownl J       0
PRECP                  UtaMnU          0
PREOP                U*n>wnl9        0
PRECiP              Uukn>»n19       0
PREOP               Lhkn»itnl9        0
12/1/1959 7_ nc 2 13 1
12/1/1951B. nc 2 13 1
12/1/195*9..   ne                        2
,13
I
12/1/1959 1_ nc 2 11 1
12/1/1959 l„ nc 2 11 1
PREOr
Utknownll        0
12/1/1959 U   nc                       2                           13
12/1/1959 1,_  nc                        2                           11
12/1/1959 2.    nc                       2                           13
12/1/1951 3_  nc                       2                           13
12/VH59 4 .   nc                       2                          13
PRCCP                UtaovmlS        0
PREDP                tNaiownl9        0
p) OOM Dau ieid/        U be loaded
12/1/1959 5.    ns                        2
I)
12/1/1953 E._  nc                        2                          13
I
1
1
1
I
1
1
•  The previous converted data are shown in the ODM Data Pane, Click on "Load Data" button.
•     Wait until the end of the loading process...
•     When done, loading result are shown in the "How results" pane.
r—■o A message indicates the number of loaded data values: 33048 rows committed to Data
Values.
o Another message means that the corresponding time series has been create or updated in
the database: 1 row committed to SeriesCatolog.
It the operation fails, a message indicates that update has failed!
Another  message  gives  the  reason:  for  example:  One  (or  more)  rows  in  DataValues  already  exist  in the database.
• Try to load the data again to cause failure load :
6.2.3      Step 3 • Visualizing the created time series Click on the ''Series catalog" tab pane:
Dal* Ceptire
She* p'oup 5h»whtl<« Delete
Tn*:
Dcj Le.*2v
Dtlrlc fvli Crtcnt Zoom P.tn
Sic N*m« . VariiMoCoOc , VcfiaUc Nwnc V»ve County U.i ,
Dx» VaUee
Me
1 Url.nc’MOS Bet.» D»» PHCClP
PfaCipleHtt
Uv»liiy Cor.vd
C0*4'0tied oa.aSelect  the  only  one  row  corresponding  to  the  loaded  data.  Click  on  the  Load  All  button  in the "'Data Values" ribbon bar.
Most  of  the  data  are  equals  to  0  and  missing  data  have  been  valued  to  -9999.9  (which  is  the  No  data value").
We will focus on a particular temporal range.
• In the "Data values" ribbon bar, enter 7/10/1971 in the "Begin date" calendar text box and 6/30/1973 in the "End date" calendar text box and click on the "Load button".
• In the "Chart" ribbon bar, click on "Zoom" button and draw a caret in the chart:
-----------• Move your mouse over the markers to view the corresponding date time and value.
6.2.4      Step 4 - Complete the series
• Load the all files located in the Data\Meteorology\Bahir Dar TBMET105 directory, o RIB-BHD 2 (1977-1978).xIs
o RIB-BHD 3 (1979-1981J.xls
o RIB_BHD 4 (1982, 19995, 1996j.xls
o RIB-BHD 5 (1997, 1999J.xls
o RIB-BHD 6 (2006 2007).xIs
Now, the time series contains 109008 data values from 6/1/1959 to 2/28/2007.
6.2.5      Step 5 - Import a new series
• Load the all files located in the Data\Meteorology\Debre Tabor TBMET116 director/ with
the following settings.
o DEBT (1988,89,90).xls
o DEBT (1991,92,93).xls
z;
£
o     DEBT (1995, 96J.xls
o     DEBT (1997,99,2007).xIs
6
7-.
[4] PRECIP Precipitation - mm (-
9999)
Site
Unknown21 - Debre Tabor
Unknown21 is a temporary code. The
codification must be given by NMA andthe dbo.Site table must be updated
Method
(13) Precipitation observation by        We don't exactly what is the method
observer
used to collect this dataset. It's the nearest value available in the database.
[4]NMA-State  organization  in charge of climatology
The source is NMA under its own monitoring networks
[111 - Quality controlled data               We consider that NMA has validated this dataset. It has been delivered with an acceptable level of quality.
UTCOffset                   2
Default value corresponding the UTC offset in Ethiopia
Now, a second series has been created and updated containing 58296 data values from 2/1/1988 to 3/31/2007:6.3 Importing data values from HYDATA
Objectives
HYDATA provides a unique way to safely export data. The DataManager
embeds a functionality to import HYDATA Text File. In this tutorial, we will
also learn how to remove imported data values and to remove a time
series from the database.
Audience
Prerequisites
Hydrologist
HYDATA and DataManager are installed on the user computer
6.3.1      Step 1 - Exporting data from HYDATA
•      Launch HYDATA version 4.1 or version 4.2
•      Select the menu option File/Export/Text File...
•     Select the station and the target time series
•      Click on OK button
•     Save the file
6.3.2      Step 2 - Importing HYDATA observations into database
• Launch DataManager
•     Select the "Data Capture" tab page
•      In the "Data Provider" ribbon bar, select "HYDATA 4.1 export file" in the combo box.
•     Click on "Open File" button and select the saved file (an example file indaga.txt is also available in the Data\HYDATA\ folder)
•     Click on the "Settings " button and enter the following information:
ft1-
Variable
Site Method
[[3] GWLEV - Water Level - cm (-
9999)
111006 - Gumara near Bahir Par For example [15] Water level observation from Forexample observer
[3] MOWE Hydrology and WQ Directorate - State organization in charge of hydrology and water quality
.-3
.> !/!
1_- Quality controlled data
We consider that NMA has validatedUTCOffset                         2
this   dataset.   It   has   been   delivered   with an acceptable level of quality.______________ Default value corresponding the UTC
offset in Ethiopia
•     Click on "Convert" Button.
•      No error found, click on "Data Loader" ribbon bar.
•     Click on "Load Data" button
1098 data values are inserted in the database, a new time series appears in the series catalog:
ruiu.*-
CnilVMl
Ck»i .
• 
Ci*
J                    £-*•« t
nij
-ntf
6.3.3      Step 3 - Delete data values
Sometimes,   it   happens   that   data   values   are   syntactically   correct,   but   their   values   are   wrong   or aberrant. This step will show how to select and delete data values.
•      Click on the "Series Catalog" tab page.
•     Select the time series catalog corresponding to the imported data from HYDATA; i.e. Water level at Gumara near Bahir Dar.
•     Click on the first row and scroll down to the last data value (with a value equals to 9999.0, line N’ 93)
•      Press the <shift> key and click on the row N*93.
Hocord J o(3
> >j t » I,.
I-VWI4 1 CG CO PM
ZlHil     7     X«     PM
2MW     f     X.COAM
2*2'lK4        I        PM
linWilXCOAM
z-vuh vw.ooph
l2!JllLB£S°£ L?
,
3 .°I
PJ - 1IIC«-U.-.ILV-
In the "Data Values" ribbon bar, click on the "Delete" button and confirm.
The  first  93  Data  values  are  removed;  the  column  "Value  count"  of  the  time  series  row  indicates  1005 values and the chart is updated.
-j
-v:
inu-i
v Release6.3.4     Step 4 - Remove a time series
•     To entirely remove the time series and its data values, select time series in the series catalog and click on the "Delete Series" button in the "Time Series" ribbon bar.
•     In the confirmation dialog box, click on "Yes".
User Manual ofty/are Release7 Entering Data Values measurement
Objectives
Audience Prerequisites
Store   observations   and   measurements   in   the   database   which   have   been collected from the field and analyzed in the laboratory
Water quality field operator (step 1),
Then,   Water   quality   laboratory   technician   (step   2)
Then, Water quality expert (step 3)
The DataManager is Installed on the user's computer
•     Data Capture mode is sufficient and recommended for water quality field operator and laboratory technician
•     Water quality expert needs a full setup of DataManager
7.1    Step 1 - Using data capture form to digitized water quality field measurements
•      Launch DataManager.
•     Select the "Data Capture" tab page.
•     In the "Data capture form" ribbon bar, select "Water Quality Beles Basin measurements".
03ta CaplLFre   Dsla Converter Oats Loader Ssrtea CaU'og
Water   Quality   Beles   Basin   measurements   fr’
•t
i
r
Bed load measurements
Gage Height measurements
- Groundwater Water level measurements
J Precipitation measurements
Sus^nde j^ol^ds^easu^ement^
New Ferm Open Form Save Form !
tom
Name
Date Tin:
I 1
- Water Quality Lake Tana Basin measurements I__________
•     Click on the "New Form" button.
•  In the first row, click on the "Site Code" cell.
_ SuCoda
SilaNama
"be-Bci'i’i
Belas Baun Head
BEBel-bUi
, Betas after irrigation acne t*k<e con(K*<o
BL6elbis
BEBtibf
j Beks Belwo confluence
Beles after Inlgalcn sene after ccnflvence
BE-W-H
! Bdes alter Danger danced dan> belwa Irdg
avon sene
BE-Bdi-!-
' Wvniiresm oi Belea
BEUll-7  .
1 Beks t'lbutarr uuQiton sex* UFx«
«mi. Bde:
BE-fel-bB*■ tries Before Danger da<v>ea Dan'
Bdes imgat'in sena I
teles after urr^i Betas cij.vea cam
BE Bel 2-2
i Bek* Tutvia/y Basin Head
BE-Bel-24
BE'fldMO | Baks irrigation £q*h 2
BE-Bd-JU      Wes Tutwran' wngatioi* jc*-e
BE-G'l-bl) CtamVew d'j ’gei Bales Wi*« cc*flve» ce
(
w y. Wet
t•      Select "Beles Basin Head" in the list
•      The "date time" cell is automatically set to the current date and time. Change the value to 10/4/2012 12:00:00 corresponding to beginning of the sampling operation
•      Press <Enter> key, the list of field measurement and laboratory analysis is created.
The   variables   prefixed   by   "Field"   are   associated   to   field   observations   and   field   measurements.   The variable prefixed by "Lab" should be valued by a laboratory technician.
• Enter values as shown below :
| i Variable Code
i IO4SILL                   J Field-Sill
Variable Name
Value
Upstream of sill
Unknown
Unit
• [ENSAM                    i Field - Sample type
|     | ENBANK
j Field • Appearance of banks,
i Dirty
•
•
•
! EH5CUM                 j Field- Surface scum
IEHCARB I Field • Hydrocarbons Uace
(ENLEA
[Field - Leaves of aquatic plants
! ENMUD                   | Field • Floating mud
iENOTK
ENASP
j Field • Other bodies
i Field • Waler aspect
Yes
Ho
Yes
No
Yes
Slightly coloured •
1 e'mcolo          i Field - Waler colour
ENLIMP
IENODO
1 Field • Limpidity
[Field-Odour
1EHSHAD                  1 Field • Snade
enmeteo •Field ■ Meteorological conrfit»ons
•
•
•
-
•
'enhydr
[Field • Hydrological observedsituation
White
Slightly cloudy
Faint
Slight
Humid
Loa* level
1AJRTEMP                ■ Field - Ait Temperature                              24
SWTEMP
! Field - Water lenrperaiure
IS
T.
•C
1
i'PH
I Field • pH
l.ft
PH Unit
'COND
I Field • Electrical conductivity
200
f uS'cm
■02
1 Field • Oxygen, dissolved
125
' t"
rngKO)
02SAT
(► CLAR
Field • Oxygen, dissolved percent of c i IC
■ Field • Visibiiii,
/•
-‘1
1mHide the list of measurements by clicking on the "collapse icon.
Data caj
1 Sample:
Site Code
———•'
-
q Bl:-Bel-1-1
!1•
- Beles Basin Head
, I Variable Code
|
Var
1 ’ IENSILL
| Field -Sill
I
I
I
I
I
I
| ► . ENSAM
( Field • Sample 1
:EHBANK                  j Field - Appearai
I jENSCUM Field ■ Surface
[ , ENCARB
| |ENLEA
Field - Hydroca
Field - Leaves c
i j’ENMUD
Field • FloatingI
1 Jenoth
Field - Other bo
i jENASP
Field - Water as
In operational phase, the field technician will probably create more than on sample on different sites
•      Click on "Save Form" button and enter a valid file name.
In operational phase, the file should be given to the laboratory technician as well as the water samples.
7.2  Step 2 - Using data capture form to digitized water quality laboratorj'
analysis
• 
Launch DataManager.
I
I
• 
Select the "Data Capture" tab page.
• 
Click on "Open File" button and open the file named DataMeasurementsFieldOnly.dcf
located in Data\DataManager folder (a previous file is maybe loaded in DataManager, it will
be saved automatically).
• 
Expand the measurements list of the sample and complete with analysis values (in this 
example, all analysis are valued to 1):I
I
t
t
o
o
•     Click on "Save Form" button and enter a valid file name.
t
Note that the laboratory technician can specify the censor code as described in the chapter 3.2.2.
t
In  operational  phase,  the  file  should  be  given  to  the  water  quality  expert.  He  will  import  the  collected data as described in the next step.
7.3 Step 3 - Importing data collected with data capture form
•     Launch DataManager.
•     Select the "Data Converter" tab page.
•     In the "Data Provider" ribbon bar, select "Data Capture Form file".
•     Click on the "Settings" button and enter the following information:
Source
[2] BeSBO - Beles water quality monitoring network
Offset Type
[1] Distance from ground level - m            Keep this default value - unused in water quality surface monitoring
Quality Control Level
[[0] 0- Raw data
Keep this default value
UTCOffset                        2
Default value corresponding the UTC offset in Ethiopia
•  Click on "Open File" button and select the file named DataMeasurementscomplete.dcf
located in Data\DataManager folder.
• 
In the "Conversion" ribbon bar, click on the "Convert" button.
• 
Select the "Data Loader" Tab pages, click on the "Load Data" button.
• 
Use the series catalog pane to check the imported new time series:
I
I
■ o o
to to to to
■ a
I B
BOpen File
Source Data button
£)
The user visualizes the content of the source observation file.
Source Data
Convert button
The user starts conversion of the observation file into an ODM Data Values table.
Convert
ODM Data button
ODM Data
Next Error button
Next Error
Previous Error button
Previous Error
Cell Editing
[./ t=TT vt
I
The user visualizes the Data Values in a table. Erroneous data are highlighted with an error icon.
The row selection moves to the next erroneous row. This component is disabled when the table contains no error.
The row selection moves to the previous erroneous row. This component is disabled when the table contains no error.
The user can edit a value cell when using double click in the cell
Multiple selection
The user can select multiple rows using <Ctrl> and <shift> keys.
<Del> key
Error messsage
_ [_inoi on ituiti i
!ftiu'4y) | {TMlONlMtir Ql'H VU
Save ODM Data button
H
The user can delete a selected row from the Data Values table using this key.
When a converted data file contains error, the user can mouse over error icons:
• The first error icon in the left columns shows the source data.
• The second icon focus on the cell containing erroneous value.
The user can save the Data Values table in a ODM format file.
Save OOM Data
V.
r?
Software                     n*18.3  Data Loader pane command and tools
K1
■KJ
J , Q • 
,«*«>•<[u<ro
<5
Ribbon bars
t-j.? k «?-*/? »~*iu in>Zj2-ZGS ;
:
I
i
:
i-1 •
I* it
:
:
I
• ODM data pane :
)
!
i
I
t
*
3
3
5
ri
t
table of converted
observations
J
i
.’
i I I
I I
-■
t
<•x
»
J
J
i
i
i
T
►k'«.
>
»
J
I
j
<
Connect button
J
Connect
Open ODM File button
y
Open ODM File
ODM Data button
£)
Through a database connection dialog box, the user enters required information (server name, database name, username, and password). Connection information is persistent.
The user opens an ODM format file containing observations previously converted.
The user visualizes the Data Values in a table. Erroneous 
data are highlighted with an error icon. If a conversion
If the ODM file contains no errors, the user can load its
has been done previously, the Data Values table is
ODM Data
populated using the conversion output.
Load Data buttoncontents in the database
Load Data
Show Results button
The  user  visualizes  the  result  of  the  loading  transaction with the database.
Show Results
Save ODM Data button
The  user  can  save  the  Data  Values  table  in  a  ODM format file.
Save ODM Data
Cell Editing in ODM Data table
The user can edit a value cell when using double click in
SZ]hZki
E the cell
Multiple selection in ODM Data table
The  user  can  select  multiple  rows  using  <Ctrl>  and <shift> keys
<Del> key
Error message
The user can delete a selected row from the Data Values
table using this key.
When  a  converted  data  file  contains  error,  the  user  can mouse over error icons :
• The first error icon in the left columns shows the source data
• The second icon focus on the cell containing erroneous value
‘r’.Ul’ U:>.r
'ioftwart Ww: N’"l8.4   Series Catalog pane command and tools       Ribbon bars
<• 
1   itfiHH   M4.1V
i.
!>
J
4
J•
Ji
$ CjU vfc*
• >
T iAul**4W«v
t Uiv Htww
* vtu
11* ~ Pccorf t'o< IS)
cmi«m ______
urinHirKM'
Time series catalog
wtlW<
>’-*
!<.?£< u net rw MJ!
liTSUKEfM
Loaded data values     I
£',j F«ort 4 d *itn
Refresh button
Refresh
Show group button
Show group
Show filter button
Show Filter
Delete Series button
Delete Serie
Last month radio button ' Last month
The  user  can  reload  Time  Series  from  the  database. It is useful in a multiuser mode.
The user can group Time Series by attribute. It allows grouping data by site, variable, begin date of collection, etc.
The user can filter data by column, like in Excel.
The  user  deletes  the  selected  Time  Series  and  its Data Values (confirmation required).
When the user selects a time series row, the
interface automatically sets the begin date and the
end date to the last month range available in the
time serie.
When the user selects a time series row, The
interface automatically sets the begin date and the
end date to the last year range available in the time serie.
When the user selects a time series row, The
interface automatically sets the begin date and the
. d_date_ava Hable in the time serie.
en
Allows  the  user  to  select  a  temporal  range  of  Data Values. Begin date is set to the first date of the
r; _£i Z?
X t*.
Last year radio button Last year
Selection radio button o Selection
Begin date time picker
Begin date : 2/ 1/1988 12:00 AM Q-
.*o
-* ■» y»
■X V
.4End date time picker End date: 3/31/2007 11:00 PM Q-
Load button
Loads 
the  data  values  of  the  selected  time  serie  in
Load
Load All button
Load Delete button
Delete
Full extent button
Full Extent
Zoom button
selected Time Series.______________________________ Allows the user to select a temporal range of Data
Values. End date is set to the last date of the
the range of selected Begin date/End date.
selected Time Series.
Loads  all  the  data  values  of  the  selected  time  series in the range of the selected Begin date/End date.
Delete   the   selected   Data   Values.   (Confirmation required).
Plot the selected range of Data Values in the chart.
Zooms  in  on  a  range  of  values  by  drawing  a  caret  in the chart.
Zoom
Pan button
Enables  moving
the
Data  Values  in
the
chart
with
the
mouse movement.
Pan
Chart scrolls
Enables  moving
the
Data  Values  in
the
chart
with
the
thumb movement.
Chart un-zoom buttons
Zooms out following the X or Y axis.
Multiple selection in Data Values table
The  user  can  select  multiple  rows  using  <Ctrl>  and <shift> keys
Header column buttons Date Time T7 Value J
The  user  can  sort  data  in  ascending  or  descending order.Annex 4.               TBIWRDP -HDAs user manual
Annex 4.
TBIWRDP -HDAs user manual
p ta’iMKOI I9.UM
Rpon.ocOOl JWJjJw.Whifca /c*. M
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation ol a Basin Information System Interim ReportMinistry of Water & Energy
Tana and Beles Integrated Water Resources
Development Project
Design, Development & Support in
Implementation & Operation of a
Basin Information System
HDA User Guideline
December 2012
I n g e n i e r i e                 HalcrowMinistry of Water & Energy - Tana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development Project
TABLE OF CONTENT
1.INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................... ’        ’
1.1   Objective
1.2 General rules
- 3 -
“  3 “
2.  MEAN AREAL PRECIPITATION ESTIMATION...................................................... - 4 -
2.1   Procedure
2.2   Exercise IDW 1
2.3   Exercise 2
2.4   Exercise 3
2.5 Comments
- 4 -
- 5 -
- 7 -
- 8 -
-8-
3.   DEPTH-DURATION-FREQUENCY (DDF) CURVES..............................................- 8 -
3.1   Procedure
3.2 Exercise 1: define DDF curves at Bole Airport
3.3 Exercise 2: transform the DDF into IDF curves
3.4   Exercise 3:      estimate peak discharge
3.5 Exercise 4: test a different concentration time
3.6   Exercise 5:      pipe sizing
3.7    Exercise 6:      build a hyetograph
-9-
- 10 -
- 11 -
- 11 -
- 11 -
- 11 -
- 11 -
4.   FREQUENCY ANALYSIS (FA)............................................................................- 11 -
4.1
Procedure
- 12 -
4.2
Exercise 1:
FA of the 24h maximum rainfall at Bole
- 14 -
4.3
Exercise 2:
comparison of different distributions
- 14 -
4.4
Exercise 3:
using sampling tools integrated in the        HIS-BIS
- 14 -
5.SEDIMENT TRANSPORT PREDICTING BY FORMULE MEYER
PETER MULLER (MPM) OR ENGELUND-HASSEN (EH) ................................. - 14 -
5.1
Procedure
- 14 -
5.2
Exercise       1: Calculate a solid     hydrograph
- 16 -
5.3
Exercise       2: sensitivity tests
- 17 -
5.4
Exercise       3: calculate annual solid inflow to the dam
- 17 -
Design. Development & Support in impiemenie.on & Operation 0, InlormeUon System - Design ReportMinistry of Water & Energy - Tana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development Project
6.SEDIMENT TRANSPORT PREDICTING BY THE SMART-JAEGGI
FORMULA................................ . .............. . .......................................................... - 17 -
6.1 Procedure
6.2 Exercises
- 17 -
- 19 -
Design, Development & Support in Implementation i Operation of Basin Information System - Design ReportMinistry of Water & Energy - Tana and Boles Integrated Water Resources Development Project
3
1.1 Objective
The HDAs  are contained in an Excel workbook. They  complete those developed under the HIS-BIS platform (data sampling, gap filing tools, hydrograph analysis, charts...) and can be independently used Tor hydrological assessment.
The main objective is  to provide simple tools  integrated with Excel for use of field engineers  who may  not have high hydrologic  knowledge. The objective is  not to replace specific  software much more complete and sophisticated.
The main advantage of this  workbook  in comparison with other commercial software is  that the workbook  is  stand-alone and very  easy  to use. In addition the workbook  can be combined with other data sampling tools  provided with the HIS-BIS platform: the data sample retrieved from the HIS-BIS database can be easily  introduced into the workbook. For example for maximum rainfall analysis  one can constitute the maximum annual precipitation sample with special tools  provided under HIS-BIS, and the instantly "export" the sample into the workbook.
As agreed with the Client the functions included in the workbook are the following:
1.      IDW   (Inverse   distance   weighted   interpolation)   which   can   be   used   for   estimation   of   average precipitation (or another parameter like temperature) over a catchment
2.    2) DDF (Depth - Duration - Frequency): a macro command for assisting establishment of DDF
curves
3.      3)  FA  (Frequency  Analysis)  which  are  oriented  for  hydrological  statistics  especially  for  floods analysis.   Several   statistic   distributions   are   coded   as:   Gumbel,   Gauss,  Galton  and   Log-pearson III.
4.    4) SED1: solid hydrograph calculation for a river with relatively moderate bed slope
5.    5) SED2: solid hydrograph calculation for a mountain stream.
1.2 General rules
Each module is composed of three parts:
>    A data sheet for data entering,
>    A macro command which is activated by pressing a button on the data sheet,
>    A result sheet presenting the data calculated by the macro command.
Some cells on the data sheet are protected from modification. The protection can be removed without password.
Normally only colored cells can be modified.
In general the data sheet, which contains user's data, will not be modified by the macro command. If you want to save the result two ways are possible:
>    Copy the result from this workbook, >    Save in another Excel file.
Doslgn, Development & Support In Implementation & Opetalion of Basin Information
System - Design Report-4-
Ministry of Waler & Energy - Tana and Boles Integrated Water Resources Development Project
It's   not   recommended   to   save   the   result   in   the   workbook   HDAs_HYDR.XLS   which   contains   the macro commands and application examples.
The   objective   is   to   estimate   areal   precipitation   of  a   catchment  by   Inverse  Distance  Weighted  (IDW) algorithm.
The macro command IDW can be used for a simplified estimation of precipitation at the centre of the basin or that of a sub-basin. For more strict calculation of average areal precipitation it is recommended to use a GIS tool based on the same IDW principle.
2.1 Procedure
Open the Excel file "HDAs__Hydro.xls" and the data sheet "datalDW": 1) Fill in the data sheet (cells in blue)
Estimation of areal precipitation by Inverse Distance Weighted (IDW) algorithm
Humber cf nations:                                                                     3
Sample size:                                                                              10
Coordinate X at the center of the cotchmonl
50
Coordinalc Y at the center of lhe catchment:                      150
Mesauremenl slations:
llama of lhe station
Station 1         Station 2           Station 3
Coordinate X of lhe station 55 60 90 Coordinate Y of lhe station 155 300 250
Measurod samples
Dale or order (optional)
Station 1 Station 2
Station 3
Value 1                                                                                         1                      2                       2
Value 2                                                                                         2                       3                       4
Value 3                                                                                         3                       5                       6
Value 4                                                                                         4                     15                       8
Value 5                                                                                         5                    50                     10
Valuo 6                                                                                                                80                     20
Value 7                                                                                         7                    20                     14
Value 8
Value 9                                                                                         9                       5                     18
Valuo 10                                                                                     10                      8                     20
Value 11
Value  12
Value  13
Value 14
Value  15
Value 16
Data  sheet  is  divided  in  two  parts:  Catchment  data  and  Station  data.
Catchment data needed are:
> Number of stations
>    sample size treated for this calculation (or number of rainy events treated)
>    Coordinate X,Y of the catchment.
Station data to be filled in are:
> Coordinate X,Y of each station
Measured  samples  (or   rainfall   quantity)   in  mm   of   each  stations.   For  the  same  samnlP
the station must refers to the same rainy events.
p
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of Basin Information System - Design Report
allMinistry of Water & Energy - Tana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development Project
2) Click on the button
3) Visualize the result on the result sheet "resIDW": Inverse Distance Weighted (IDW) precipitation
Number of stations:
EXE IDW
3
Size of each sample:
Coordinate X  at the center of the catchment:
Coordinate Y at the center of the catchment:
10
50
150
Mesaurement stations:
Name of the station:
Coordinate X of the station:
Coordinate Y of the station: Distance  to  the  catchment  center.
Affected weight:
Weighted precipitation: Value 1
Value 2
Station 1          Station 2          Station 3
55                    60                    90
155                  300                  250
7                  150                  108 0.90                 0,04                 0,06
’I
1.1
2 '2I
Value 3
Value 4
3.3
4.7
■
Value 5
Value 6
Value 7
7.2
49,5
6.0
i
Value 8
Value 9
Value 10
Result sheet is divided in   three   parts:   Summary   of   catchment   data,   measurement   station   and   weighted   precipitation Station data.
>    Summary of catchment data is a remaining of the data sheet.
> Measurement data allow the user to observe the spatial weight of each station on the catchment. For example, we can observe that the station 1 weight 90% of the catchment by IDW measurement.
> Weighted precipitation allow the user to observe the average precipitation on the catchment for each sample taking in consideration the rainfall and the affected weight of each station. For example, for the sample one, the average precipitation is 1,1 mm.
2.2 Exercise IDW 1
Objective: estimation of annual precipitation at point Pl in the sub-catchment 1
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of Basin Information System - Design Report-6-
Ministry of Water & Energy - Tana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development Project
Estimation of areal precipitation by Inverse Distance Weighted (IDW) algorithm
Number of stations:
Sample size:
Coordinate X at Vie center of the catchment. Coordinate Y althe center of the catchment
Mesaurement stations: Name of the station'
Coordinate X of the station:
Coordinate Y of the station:
Measured samples Date or order (optional) Value 1
Value 2
Stabon 2
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of Basin Information System - Design ReportMinistry of Water & Energy - Tana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development Project
Inverse Distance Weighted (IDW) precipitation
-7
Number of stations:
Size o( each sample:
Coordinate X at Die center of the catchment:
Coordinate Y at the center of the catchment:
Mesaurement stations:
Name of the station:
2
1
110
90
Station 1 Station 2 Station 3
Coordinate X of the station:
175
150
90
Coordinate Y of the station:
77
50
250
Distance to the catchment center:
66
57
101
Affected weight;
0.46
0.54
0.00
Weighted precipitation:
Value 1
1071.7
2.3 Exercise 2
Objective:   estimation   of   maximum   daily   precipitation   for   each   year   from   199a   to   2012   at   the   point Pl corresponding to the center of the sub-basin 1.
Data to be entered:
EsfmaSon of areal precipilaSon by Inverse Difiancc Weighted (IDW) algorithm Kmuc. of soiots:                                                                               2
Sample size
CoortSnatc X al the center o< the catchment
Coordmaie Y al tic center of rv. catchment
htsaj.'emenl slabans.
Wants of tie sU’jc*3.
23
110
90
Staton 1 Staton 2
r
EXE.IDW
CoortSnate X of tw stalon:                                                         175                   150 Coortf nate Y of Fie staton                                                            77                   50
Measured sample.
Dale o> order (opecnaf)
Slaton 1 Staton 2
1990
85
94
1991
72
85
1992
125
91
1953
110
113
1994
3d
57
1905
85
94
1996
65
78
1997
89
96
199c
S3
100
1999
45
62
2000
68
81
2001
84
94
2002
105
110
2003
63
80
2004
69
81
2005
58
72
2006
43
60
2007
4-1
61
200d
Bo
95
200-J
74
8o
2010
91
100
2011
136
115
2012
101
97
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of Basin Information
System - Design Report-8-
Ministry of Water & Energy - Tana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development Project
RESULT TO BE RETRIEVED:
inverse Dstence Weighted (IDW) procipitoticn
Hjnfxy of stoions.
Size cf cx-h sample:
QoorcSnjte x al Mo center of the cathmcnt
Coordnate Y ol the center of the catchment
Mes.iutemcnt strtons
flame of rc rjlon
Station 1 .SLrtan 2 SUSon 3
Cocxcinate X of the stator
175
150
90
Coordnatc Y of ■« Staton
77
50
250
Distance to the cattvnenl center
66
57
101
Affected weight
0.46
0 54
000
Weighted preciptaJon.
1990
1991
1992
1993
19W
1995
1996
1997
1930
1999
2000
2001
2002
2OC3
899
790
106.7
111.6
<6.3
899
779
93.9
96.3
54.2
75 0
2OG1
2005
2006
2007
2006
2009
2010
2011
2012
894
107.7
74.5
75.5
65.6
fv  2
53-2
BO 9
80.5
959
124.7
96.3
2.4 Exercise 3
Objective:   estimation   of   annual   precipitation   at   the   point   P2   corresponding   to   the   center   of   the whole basin by using the same data as for the exercise 1.
2.5  Comments
The principle of strict IDW method integrated in GIS tools is the following:
>    Define a regular grid;
>    Estimate precipitation at each cell of the grid;
>    Calculate the average of all the cells.
If   important   relief   exists  in  the  region,   the   relationship   between  altitude  and   precipitation  should   be analyzed.
The    objective    of    the    rainfall    intensity    duration    frequency    curves    is    to    estimate    the    maximum intensity of rainfall for any duration and return period.
The Excel macro command integrates  the two step approach for building DDF curves. In first step, Gumbel probability  distribution is  fitted to each duration sample in order to estimate the precipitation of the duration (d) for several return periods  (T=5, 10, 20, 50 and 100 years). In second step the IDF curves  are determined by  fitting a parametric  equation for each return period, using Montana formula
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of Basin Information System - Design ReportMinistry of Water & Energy - Tana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development Project
The input data are the observed maximum rainfall samples for different durations; and the outputs are the DDF curves.
3.1 Procedure
1) Fill in the data sheet (cells in blue)
Depth-Duration-Frequency (DDF) Curves
Number of observ'd samples (<-9):                                      4
PrecipitaEon in mm
Duration (h)                                                                    0 25 Gven averages (optional)
EXE.DDF ]
2
6                    12
Given SD (optional)
Observed sanples  of precipitation in mm (if averages and SD given, the sa mples won’t be sused)
Year 1
16
32
48
100
Year 2
20
42
60
105
Year 3
32
64
96
112
Year 4
30
60
90
150
Year 5
30
60
90
106
YearG
36
75
108
135
Year 7
28
56
84
170
Year 8
25
50
75
150
Year 9
24
48
72
140
Data sheet (dalaDDGF) needs 3 kinds of data:
>     Number of observed samples. Number shall not exceed 9.
>     Duration of the precipitation in hours.
> Rainfall data in mm. Two choices:
>     Enter the average rainfall for each duration
>     Enter different values (different values for different precipitation) for each duration.
EXE DDF
2)    Click on the button
3) Visualize the result (resDDF sheet):
Duration-Frequency - Depth (DFD) Curves
Precipitation in mm (using Gumbel Distribution)
5 yr
10 yr
20 yr
50 yr
100 yr
Montana a
Montana b
42.8
48.3
53.5
60.4
65.5
0.451
0 443
0.437
0.430
0.426
15 mn
0.25
22.9
26.1
29.2
33.3
36.3
30 mn
0.5
31.3
35.5
39.5
44.8
48.8
45 mn
0.75
37.6
42.5
47.2
53.4
58.0
1 hr
1
42.8
48.3
53.5
60.4
65.5
3 hr
3
70.2
78.5
86.5
96.9
104.7
6 hr
6
96.0
106.8
117.1
1306
140.6
9 hr
9
115.2
127.8
139.8
155.5
167.2
12 hr
12
131.2
145.1
158.6
176.0
189.0
24 hr
24
179.3
197.3
214.7
237.1
253.9
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of Basin Information System - Design Report-10                        Ministry of Water & Energy - Tana and Bclcs Integrated Water Resources Development Project
o5
10                    „15
Durfa| tion (hr)
I            20
25                    30
3.2 Exercise 1: define DDF curves at Bole Airport
The   observed   maximum   rainfall   data   are   presented   in   the   following   table   (the   digital   file   will   be provided for the exercise):
DjU observed at Sole Airport
3
Prcctptilun In mm
Ouralon(ri)                                     0 5                       1
auraqcs (opbonal)
G*n SO (opftona!)
OjscrMJd samples o( prcctptaSon a< Bole Airpol (mm)
1970
224
22.9
1971
25.8
26 9
1977
39.7
38.1
1973
35 3
42.6
1974
19.6
19.8
1975
26.7
27.9
1976
20.3
24.9
1977
32.3
50
1978
25
27.9
1979
233
27.4
1980
21 4
21.4
1901
8.8
27.7
13
200
1983
23.4
31.1
1984
62.4
37
1107
48.4
27.1
297
383
642
505
413
203
412
19.5
31.1
33
249
43 4
1985
20.8
158
1986
19.5
18
1987
21
21
1988
24.3
24.3
1989
353
363
1990
268
268
1991
16
22
24.5
24.3
353
MB
205
27.4
27 4
1992
23 1
48.8
W8
1993
19 3
41.9
1991
41 9
10
23.9
1995
523!
62.1
1396
30
369
1997
198
37.9
1998
339
48.4
1999
256
38.4
2000
19.9
505
2001
12.5
223
2002
20.7
262
.■003
23.9
62.1
36.9
37.9
484
33.4
505
48
262
20 G
40
2004
157
23.8
2005
10 4
70.6
2006
33
49.1
2007
9.9
32
<3
238
70.6
50.6
32
Steps to follow:
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of Basin Information System - Design ReportMinistry of Water & Energy - Tana and Boles Integrated Water Resources Development Project
>     Open the data file,
>     Copy the data to the data sheet (dataDDF),
>     Execute DDF macro command,
y Visualize the curves (resDDF sheet).
3.3 Exercise 2: transform the DDF into IDF curves
Transform the DDF curves at Bole Airport into IDF (Intensity - Duration - Frequency).
3.4  Exercise 3: estimate peak discharge
This exercise shows how to use the DDF (or IDF) curves for estimation of peak How.
Calculate the peak flow at outlet of a catchment by using the Rational Formula with:
>     Catchment surface: A=10 km2
>    Concentration time (t): 1 hour,
>     Runoff coefficient: C=0.7,
>     Rational formula: Q = 1/3.6 CIA; where I is the rainfall intensity during t for 10-year flood;
2   I in mm/h and Q in m3/s.
where A is in km ,
3.5  Exercise 4: test a different concentration time
The exercise shows importance of the concentration time.
Calculate the peak discharge at outlet of a catchment with the same characteristics as above but with a different time concentration (t= 2h instead of lh).
3.6  Exercise 5: pipe sizing
With the data given for exercise 4 and a water velocity limited to 3 m/s, what is minimum diameter of the pipe for the designed discharge?
3.7  Exercise 6: build a hyetograph
The exercise shows how to build a hyetograph with the DDF curves. Build a 24-hour hyetograph at Bole Airport with a time step of 3 hours.
The macro commands developed here allow probability fitting with four statistical distributions: Gauss, Gallon, Gumbel and Pearson III.
The input data are a observed sample such as maximum annual flows or rainfalls. The procedure is the same for all distributions.
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation ol Basin Information System - Design Report12                       Ministry of Water & Energy - Tana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development Project
4.1   Procedure
1)   Fill in the data sheet "dataFA" (cells in blue) Data sheet needs 3 kinds of data:
>    Station name (eg. Addis)
>    Number of Sample (max 243)
>    Rainfall values
Station:                                                            Addis
Sample size (number of values. 243 maw):
24
value 1
value 2
value 3
1.661
1.688
1.765
value 4
value 5
1.819
Z156
value 6
2.335
value 7
value 8
value 9
2.761
2.872
3.003
value 10
va:ue 11
value 12
3.037
3.047
3.198
value 13
value 14
value 15
value 16
value 17
3.684
3.684
3.95
4.17
4.237
value 18
value 19
value 20
value 21
value 22
value 23
value 24
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
In the above table the size of sample (24 years) is specified in cell B2, and the rainfall sample in cells B3 to B26.
2)    Click on one of the four buttons, for example:            [ EXE-GUMBEL 3) Visualise the result on the sheet "Gumbel" (or Gauss or Galton or Pearson)
Design, Development & Suppat in Implementation & Operation of Basin Information System - Design ReportMinistry of Water & Energy - Tana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development Project
Probability Plotting with Gumbcl Distribution (EVI) To modify only the colored cells
Observations at Addis
Sample size (number of observed values)
Mean value:
Standard deviation:
Return periode
(years)
Frequency
(F)
Reduced vana:e (Jn(ln(1/F)]
Theoretical
magnitude
Sample
(sorted)
1.002
0.0020
-1.8272
0.60
2
0 5000
0 3665
3.59
2 33
0 5705
0 5786
3.88
3
0 6667
0.9027
4.33
5
0 8000
1.4999
5 14
7
0 8571
1.8698
5.64
10
0 9000
2.2504
6.16
20
0 9500                           2 9702
7.14
30
09667
3 3843
7.71
40
0.9750
36762
8.11
50
0 9300
3.9019
8.41
60
0 9333
4 0860
8 66
70l
0.9357
4 2413
8.88
80
0.9875
4 3757
9.06
90
0.93S9
4.4942
9.22
100
0 9900                          4.6001
9.37
200
0 9950                           5 2958
10.31
500
0 9980                           6 2136
11.56
1000                           0 9990                           69073
12 51
ComputinQ coordinates for a required frequency
E
5000                           0 9993                          8 5171
14.70
•1.66
1.69
1 77
1.82
’.2.16
'2.34
2.76
2 87
•3.00
•3.04
3.05
’      '3.20.
'            ,3 68
'      -3.68
t .3-95
■\         :.4.17:
424
.6 00
G.10'
’ 6-20'
6.30
In   the   table   the   Gumbel   quantiles   are   provided   for   different   return   periods   (from   1.002   to   1000
years).   User   can   modify   the   return   period   in   the   last   row   of   the   table   for   calculating   a   required quantile, for example T=25 years:
1000I
0.9990]
6.9073]
12.51
Computing coordinates for a required frequency:
25I
0.9600]
3.1985]
7.45
Tip: for drought or water resource availability  analysis  we need to estimate the quantiles  for dry years, i.e. frequency  less  than 0.5. In this  case the "return period" in the first column of the table can be given as foHows: _
___________
Value  to  be  entered  in  the  1st column
_______________________________
Corresponding Frequency (2nd
column)
________________________________
Corresponding return period
for dry year
1.2500
0.2
5 years
1.1111
0.1
10 years
1.0526
0.05
20 years
Tlie mean and standard deviation are calculated in B6 and B7.
The frequency  factor KT values  are given in column C corresponding to the return periods  specified in column A. The theoretical storm rainfall magnitude is  calculated in column E for different return periods.
In the graph the rainfall magnitude is  plotted against a reduced variate (-ln(lnl/F)), so that the data to be fitted are expected to appear dose to a straight line. The purpose of using special plotting scale is  to linearize the probability  relationship so that the plotted data can be easily  used for interpolation, extrapolation, or comparison purpose. In case of extrapolation, however, the effect of various  errors  is  often magnified; therefore, hydrologist should be warned against such practice if no consideration is given to this effect.
The   probability   plotting   allows   as   well   appreciating   the   goodness   of   fit   of   the   probability   distribution by visual inspection.
The plotting graph is automatically updated after data modification.
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of Basin Inlormation System ■ Design Report- 14 Ministry of Water & Energy - Tana and Beles Integrated Waler Resources Development Project
Probability Plotting with Gumbcl Distribution (EVI)
100
9.0
8.0
7.0
■§      6.0
□
g 5.0
o>
*        4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
0.0
-2.0
0.0
2.0
4.0
6.0
Reduced variate [-In(ln1/F)]
|       - Theoretical distribution
■ Observations at Addis
4.2  Exercise 1: FA of the 24h maximum rainfall at Bole
Given observed maximum 24h annual rainfalls  at Bole from 1970 to 2007, carry  out a frequency analysis  with Gumbel Distribution, and compare the results  with those determined with the above DDF.
4.3  Exercise 2: comparison of different distributions
Given   observed   maximum   24h   annual   rainfalls   at   Bole   from   1970   to   2007,   compare   10-   and   100- year quantiles calculated with the four distributions.
4.4  Exercise 3: using sampling tools integrated in the HIS-BIS
Abstract   a   maximum   annual   rainfall   (or   river   discharge)   sample   from   the   HIS-BIS   database,   then perform a FA with Gumbel distribution.
5.1 Procedure
1) Fill in data sheet « Sedl_data »
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of Basin Information System"- Design ReportMinistry of Waler & Energy - Tana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development Project
- 75-
Sediment load estimation by formula Meyer Peter Muller (MPM) or Engelund-Hassen (EH)
Valid lor moderate slope rivers
River name:                                              Arc
20
0.00094
0.033
z*.‘       .—T<
Channel width (m)
Stream slope (m/m)
EXElSEDl
l' ' * I'-.'"- ■'
i
Roughness (Manning coefficient,
if -O.n win be calcated by Engelund)
Sediment density (rho in t/m3)
d30 in mm (grain diameter for which
30% weight is finer)
d50 or dm (mm)
2.6
0.1
0.2
d90 (mm)
0.5
Formula Io be used
(Meyer peter Muller: MPM or
Engelund- Hansen:EH)
Bank angle for trapezoidal section
(0 to 90’, reclangle=> 90°)
EH
45
Temperature ("C)
Discharge contributing to bed load
(ratio CFO total)
Critic shear stress for MPM formula
(dimensionless. 0.047 default)
15
1
0047
Apply rating curve for estimation of
water depth (y/n)
n
Rating curve - optional
Waler depth (m) in increasing order
1
2
3
4
Discharge (m3/s) in increasing order
0.01
1
10
500
Strickers of the sand dunes (don’t modify (weak A => flat bed; Medium A => Dunes, High A => suspension)
0.06 1
0.07
0.92
0.08
0.86
Temperature (*C)
0
10
20
30
Kinematic viscosity in 10^-6) nf/s
1.89
Shear stress: A-HJ/((s-1).d) 0
Kfond/ Kg-ain-(0.06/A«0.41.A)*(15/16) Ramed 1
Correspondence Temperature - Viscosity (don't modify)
Hydrograph (given) and sediment transport (calculated)
1.33
1.03
0.83
Time (h)
Discharge (m3/s) Sediment transport capacity (m3/s)
1                         0.39
2                        1.25
3                        2.47 5                        4.02 9                        5.88
12                        8.02
■ - .20     ’... .           10.44
- 22
13.14
24                        16.1
■! 26
EXE_SED1
: 19.32
2) Press the button
3) Visualize the result on the sheet "Sedl_res"
Des/gn. De.eiopment & Support in Imptementai.on & Operation of Basin lnformalion Syslem .
Repoff-16
Ministry of Waler & Energy - Tana and Beles Integrated Waler Resources Development Project
Sediment transport capacity estimation
Nfelhco
EH
River or zone
Arc
Stream slope
0.00094
Channel width (m)
20
Bank Roughness (n)
0.033
d30 (mm)
0.1
d50 (mm) d90 (mm)
lime
0.2
0.5
0.0002
87.3'
Water discharge    Waler depth      Strickler          sed discharge
Concentration
(g/m3 or mg/l Shear stress
apparent
sed volume
(h)
(m3/s)
(m)
(K)
(m3/s)
or PPM)
(dimensionless)
(m3/s)
1
0.39
0.1
30.0
0
145
0.29
0.000
2
1.25
0.2
30.0
0
328
0 59
0.000
3
2.47
0.3
30.0
0001
529
0.88
0.001
5
4.02
0.4
30.0
0.001
746
1.18
0.002
9
5.88
0.51
30 0
0 002
974
1.49
0.003
12
8.02
061
30.0
0.004
1212
1.79
0.005
20
10.44.
0.71
30 0
0006
1459
2.1
0.008
22
13.14
0 82
30.0
0.009
1716
2.41
0.011
24
16.1
093
30.0
0012
1979
2.72
0.016
26
19.32
1 03
30.0
0.017
2245
3 04
0.022
Volume ol water: 0 8 Mm3 Volume of sediments: 434 m3 Sediment weight: 1128 Ions
5.2 Exercise 1: Calculate a solid hydrograph
Given the Q100 flood hydrograph innowing to the Dire Dam (a dam near Addis Ababa providino water for Addis Ababa city), calculate solid hydrograph inflowing to the dam.
Inflow to the Hire Dam
1
'Aw-'J t ?) Ti-j
diqobofmys^
0.0
0.0
0.0
00
0.0
0.0
1.0
950
47.5
23.8
17.1
48
20
167.5
838
41.9
.30.2
8.4
10
2750
137.5
68.8
49 5
13.8
4.0
455.0
227.5
113.8
81.9
228
5.0
5500
2750
137.5
99.0
275
56
570 0
-285.0
142.5
1026
285
6.0
565.0
2825
141.3
101.7
28.3
7.0
537.5
268 6
: - 134.4
96.8
26 9
8.0
487.5
243.8
121.9
87.8
.
24.4
9.0
427.5
213 8
106.9
77.0
21.4
10 0
370.0
1850
92 5
666
18.5
11.0
317.5
158 8
. 79.4
572
159
120
267.5
133.8
669
43.2
13.4
130
222.5
1113
55.6
40.1
11 1
14 0
175.0
879
43.8
319
. 86
150
1350
67.5
. 338
24 3
68
16.0
900
45.0
225
162
45
17.0
45 0
22.5
113
8.1
2.3
18.0
75
38
1.9
1.4
04
18 3
00
0.0
00
0.0
00
Design, Development 4 Support in Implementation & Operation of Basin Information System - Design ReportMinistry of Water & Energy - Tana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development Project
- 17-
5.3  Exercise 2: sensitivity tests
Given    the    Q100    flood    hydrograph    inflowing    to    the   Dire   Dam,   calculate    solid   inflows    with    different channel slopes or different sediment sizes, then analyze the sensitivity.
5.4   Exercise 3: calculate annual solid inflow to the dam
Assuming that in 10 years there are:
One Q10 flood,
Three Q5 floods,
Six Q2 floods
Calculate total solid inflow in 10 years into the Dire Dam.
6.1 Procedure
1) Fill in the data sheet "SED2_data"
The most important parameters are the following:
>
>
Channel characteristics,
Sediment characteristics,
>   Liquid hydrograph.
2)    Press the button ------------------ i------- -J
3) Visualize the result on the sheet "SED2_res*.
EXE SED2 •
Design. Development & Support in Implementation fi Operation of Basin Inlorn,alien System - Design Report-18
Ministry of Waler & Energy — Tana and Betas Integrated Water Resources Development Project
Sediment load estinvrflon by formjfe Sfi'ART-JA£GGI (valid for Stoep channels)
name or zono
CbiTtvH vJdlh (rr)
Bonk ang^o fex fropezoidol secSan
(0 to 90*. rec‘ujng'o«> 90*)
Stream stope (nVm)
Ora
10
60
02
(*EXE_SE(i>2~]
Ktobi’a charnel bed (M) or
fi«d bed(r). defaut^M M
FtouTmess (Minn ng coefficient,
if =0,n vwl be calcated by
Engelund)
0.05
Sediment density (rba in !/m3.
dofau^2.6)
2.6
d30 in rm (grain <f amrter for
*hich 30% weight is finer)
100
d50or dm(rrm)
200
d90(rTrn)
750
Angfe of repose (35 to 50,
de/auJMO)
35
Critic shear stress
(dmensioriess, 0.05 defauflj
0 05
HyC'ograoh (fjven) and sedirrent tan sport (cafcviatod)
Time
(N
5 - ?• c’i
Discharge
(rrOfs)
. 1 0 012
’ . 2 ■ ,;;-;po.i4
Sccfcmcrt farspert capacity (mi’s)
'■                                               3
-0384
■•
•>-
4    7       '0.757
*■                          5
1 2C9
• .V V ’ 6 1928
a                 2.737
9
3.701
. (, ■
10     ... ’ .4*821
y -.    ’ *i         ’ 11
6.1
,12
13
7.538
9 137
lj. ...
-.14
10 909
15
,12.847
. ..
•16
14.949
< ’»
17
17.216
. v. . .
18
19.648
-
19
22.246
■
•
• 20
25.008
21
100
The results are presented as follows:
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of Basin Information System - Design ReportMinistry of Water & Energy - Tana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development Project
Sediment transport capacity estinwtlon
Method
River ex zone
Channel width (m)
Smart Jaeggi
Dire
10
Bank ang'<
GO
Stream slope
02
Bank Roughness (n)
0 050
d30(mm)
too
d50 (mm)
200
090 (mm)
750
Angle of reposo
35
Waler
discharge Waler dopJi
sed
Concentrator)
Time
(h)
discharge
Water
(g/m3 o m
g/| or Shear stress
volume
(nil's)
(m)
(m3<s)
vofoc-ly (nVs) P
PM)
(dimensioo'e
ss) (m3fs)
1
0012
01
0002
001
125951
0.063
2
0.14
0 IS
0.025
009
179292
0.094
3
C 384
0.2
0079
0 19
205776
0.126
4
0 757
025
0.167
0.3
221666
0.158
5
1.269
0.3
0 294
0 42
232258
0.19
6
1.928
0.35
0 46
0.54
239323
0.222
e
2.737
04
0 667
067
245478
0.253
9
3.701
045
0916
o8
249868
0.285
apparent sed  Total
discharge
(m3/s)
0                    0.01   cut of application doma n
0.03                      0.17   out of application donxjin
0.1                     0.46   out of application domain
0.22                      0.92   out of application domain
0.38                      1.56   out of application domain
0.6                    2.39   out of application domain
0.87                       3.4   out of application domain
1.2                   4.G2
10
4 821
05
1.206
094
253364
0.317
1.57
6.03
11
61
0.55
1.53S
1.08
256216
0.348
2.01
7.64
12
7 538
06
1.911
1.22
258585
0.38
2.49
9.45
13
9.137
0.65
2.325
1.36
260583
0.411
3.04
11.46
14
10.909
07
2.782
1.51
2G2300
0.443
3.63
13.69
15
12.847
0 75
3.279
1.65
263783
0.474
4.28
16.13
16
14.949
0.79
3.815
1.8
265075
0.505
4.98
18.76
17
17.216
084
4,389
1.94
266210
0.535
5.73
21.61
18
19G48
c 89
5
2. OS
26721G
0.566
6.53
24.65
19
22.246
i. 94
5C46
2.24
268112
0 596
7.37
27.89
20
25 008
0.99
6.327
2.38
268015
0 626
8.26*
31.33
21
100
1.86
22.481
4 87
2758G2
1.111
29 35
122.48
Vokjme of waler: 0.77 Mm3
VoIutv? of sediment: 1894 72.6 m3
Serf men', weight: 492628.7 tons
6.2 Exercises
The   exercises   can   be   done   with   the   same   input   data   as   in   the   previous   chapter.   Additional exercises could be done by increasing the stream slope.
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of Basin Information System - Design ReportAnnex 5.              TBIWRDP - HEC Software procedure
Annex 5.
TBIWRDP - HEC Software procedure
v taMU<JCJ01ll.lwi
IJba.dM.uhiua
‘---------------------------------------------------------------
Design. Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim ReportTANA BELES INTEGRATED WATER RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT PROJECT
Annex 5: HEC Software Procedure1 Typical procedure for setting up and running of HEC-HMS model - an example
Schedule
• Day 1: General & Introduction to HEC-HMS
•  Day 2: HEC-HMS
•  Day 3: HEC-HMS
•  Day4:HEC-RAS
•  Day 5: HEC-S
Conceptual Model for Watershed Modeling
What is a Model?
ip
'
•.
/* ,rt« • r
•  It is a representation of a system
• Generally, it is a simplified representation of a
complex system
•  Why simplified and complex?
•  Often used to answer “what if V
•  Used for prediction and assessment
•Topography \
• Soil Ctarartcrlitki
r
Mtttorolofkal cfiu
’• StrtamfloW ’
• Siibiurfite flow
X
• Depth (o v/ik» t«b|e
Accurate & Quality controlled Inputs are requiredHydrologic Models
•     4fV*CQ                  USM
• Moj-h Conrn/c^l r Lflt
a    NjnrnKM  MotfMi  Himinw  6*vc-ir<*0  cv?  t*i  c( matnenwicii eouMOM
HGC-HM3 h a njtnercal model
Hydrologic Models
• 4rta»O7 Uf»1 flfKFfCHS
•    f*n}S»ztJ M-»-b Conrtvcte! n Lit
• KjntfKjt fto&it PnffwrvKio* OMCir*1 ?j« tnatrenaiC3i mount
HEC*HM3 «» a nixmtr c->! modelConstituents of a Model
• State variables
• Parameters
• Boundary Conditions
• Initial ConditionsHEC-1 & HEC-HMS
HEC-HMS Representation of Watershed
•  Both models are developed by US Army Corps
of Engineers, Hydrologic Engineering Center
(HEC)
•  HEC-HMS is the advanced version of HEC -1
model
•  HEC-1 is a tumped parameter hydrologic
model
•  HEC-HMS is lumped * quasi-distributed model
?.Srr/rt
IJVTTT',*
Typical HEC-HMS Representation5
HEC-IHMS Model Components
Steps in HEC-HMS Application
•   3^in rnodd ©v*s tfw phfjiai descriptive of the v/atarsherf.
— Scbbasir vratershed caerhmertsv/fier* ran fats.
— Reach: rivers irri stream*.
— Rcsen/o'r : dams amd UcetS-
— JcrctkK-j cordl jence.
— Dfveriion; b'furcaoions and wrthdrawfc.
— Source: springs and ocher modd links.
- Sinh cnrtJea acd Cerrnirul bfcw.
•    iMeteordcgk nocSd describes atmospSenr conditions over the yocenhed lard surface.
— Precfpi LaC-on-
— Pctertfd evapotranspiration.
— Snowmefc.
- Control specifications Tree control during a simulation run.
•  Create a new project
•   Enter time-series, paired data, and grid data.
•   Create a basin model
•   Create a meteorological model.
•   Create con vol specifications.
•   Create and compute a simulation run.
•   View results.
•   Create other alternatives, compute, and compare results.
•   Save the project and exit.
Hydrologic Elements
1
-JC
E
> >«
L->wrav Irr/mrmrt
>*I /irt/r/t/rwr*
KHvllW •*
t 'z—t'lzt ’Vlf^vr
MI»W Hrc^m
.JLlSubbasin Infiltration
Subbasin Surface Runoff
• toss rate method,:
— >■*
-    G’-er'Arnrt
-    GHd5*J csrxtwr.
-    GddfedSCS.
-    <5>-H5-d5VA
-     wiKlil trrrfctn*
-    jCSatVf»rrb*r
— SmfhF»rtir<»
-   $C’ r-rhftir?
L l» jJBm; tx Ittftr (ir*r>< Orm
U*>«vwN«tp .
v
FWr«^wt»«ir
W4UWft) <
C3
ier-m T
'xrltM'H?*) <’•>
c:
• Unit hydroflrapb methods:
-    CUrV
-    S43
— S-fftfiK
-   S*vd*r
•   Other methods:
— Cn«—e/c «r»^r
A, SttfiH lx« f«ntai I Of.:*
^whR«rr;Mr*»
r>rwrt^*?t:Dm(r
9rddl»j(IO) 4*
M*lCa^«: C 3
Subbasin Baseflow
Reach
• Raseflow methods:
- E-c*jn«5ed recession. — Linear reservoir.
— Monthly constant.
— Nor/rnear Botrsscnesq. — Recession.
L$xh» In -
!*<*:• tar,
MlMeMOn
n*R(r
**!& BTiTPJlttJ
iHbHrJMZA-ri >?
rwttnjr.
>« i1
• RotXmg methods;
- LneniCcwrr
- La«
-
*uk
7
7|.
-    IZusVrTCjrr.
- Mushn^rr-C-^nj*
- 5tr>ddie stutter
£,»»rr -•'-  iprne
Im* •*"* •Mt rum
Rvwe $e*j k”
ir^»M mi:
*IMI
r«ir<«r  ■»i*:
Hatae-m
• Loss/g*’" methods:                                  SMm  ilXCSC
is: ~
- COT5t»<—
- Pe*a>lic*iH.
s-x-y^p*!
•n
*L5
Jkp»tn+if)Reservoir
Precipitation
•      ><xXirg rrc^thodsi
-                    Carre
-    Outten strictures
-
• 'ossfbl* structures:
-    G*2d TpilieirOo&l^-
•    Historical methods:
-    G»ce v.'dfhts.
-    Irr/ene dwtance.
— Uier<p*ofed.
-    Graded.
• Hypothetical methods:
-    Frequency storm
-
i |V.Fit3jCBa
•            hvxi
t.ry> •/Wyti
'
i ^Df*G
« r»
r
-
-
Or-rfbw»Ct3 i£l
Ouri~ X3te izx
— SCSstoem.
fpfchtxi
-
Stinivrf ptujedl stem.
-
JlXTp P j' zs 37?
• _■* (ckrcu
u
-
!>rmtO»Tor 1)
-'
fjr^):zrJ'^n
Ok
mrUjCoTST | fO
O/3
Evapotranspiration
S
imul
ation
Run
CctnhLt
of
one
basin
iro^d,
nviteorUc^c
rrede’.   ard
oo-rtrol
XoaJatk methods:
speafleations
’^rneo-rn
-    FttCptocncx ojifov ffioootion.
-    Cddd^FrtessJrr"-*/^-
wrr
Mtln/UQI' Ir CHbXt |*
-    Sort cates opt cn
-   U.-jwVj*y)r
>«>
U
e;i*
-    5e#< Ceres opr on
- Prester te/cr
!Z
41
View results hr toe current smulMion run ushg menu or toolbar
-    CktN< surrwy utfe.
<D
$1 .
Vm»r
reiAs
fc<
cm   ckrrewt
In   the   cxrrer<
limuleCcr
run   utirv   the
1
-1
47
menu,
too bar cr toon rnrp.
<v
;a
si.
-    '■
‘W. SK-nury rj&e, tme-ier^i uoe.
>•
tr
!Arw
gr»ph$ end time-serin tabkj hr eterr
^ts tn cUhr-n
t
>
smtoe
fon ruas vsng toe Woferzhed Lighter.
Ur
51
MM
ts
cil*Global Summary Table
Element Graph
• s
XMjFirc iWwilVJ.OMO
t-rlc'pjl
f >r •
ftMbMxlri
Cm'joI
>V»"
LM»:/rr    Tri    nv>.~r?    tt    O!C2    <anrd    x«'A-.*vm     jjtjtj
v<wi>»
{
il’H 0KX1
llfltirj- |
brMn«>.*7'
&FWC              eoj           !       (€FJ)
At-i»-Tv~            rvaci
wiuw         :*>!»•:«qx iui*;
IK
u m; »
'■*«-
: *mIh
'.mco
:.exo
•xrr*           i'w.:sn tx'7
n«’
~Mdi:                   :.c’co
»$!•«
|m^9
'JrftUiK
nj
C*;77).li£3                     OS’
.115                tis-w
•ir:wxu:v.
. 1!
•
IJijtO
l.’I.V
••A-..IO !.•■                    0 ',
Element Summary Table
C Sumwmy Rj-tuMifw Rr«eh •&acliT~ □ZES
Element Time-Series Table
? :wi :ces?o irJKrrr.r.:Qrrrt Pwl»
Sa'JFhr: IQnlTT?, 01 £0
E-cyCtn t£k>t'7V2S
F"rJt»Tr**IlfirVn?;, 01-71^7
ioah 1'crH. Cct-o |
Cafry \3»-fr*‘rr< • )r-.7!
'MnelnU; ®JI OXTC
F«r oa* : :u j?(rr;
TcW»A^; OMfre
IlJWnibtS
M^meifreAOUtftan: IMsUFX 11Continuous Simulation
•    "Sre-rtf ■ainjiitKyr ttortyaTncemeSwsti tvdrafajv^rrrerrrf
•r^'redotelf tft^r • -ttann.
-    ‘Csrattnicusf i'rruieciv*' incUdes everts rrd the cr-e between don. ic Or. severs I decrees n a tJr-r
-    Lrsz.riftt rrrC¥ccfc_
Gridded Simulation
-
_£FI, :»TC
-   Scl'rosier wxaLrrtrc
•    M+vbeneed-itoMtrrfysarrestu^preis.
-   A-roaic->*^q*eecf cjr/e.
-   /wn—tuftrce ■ej»r<me'.
-   fl&trtaszcr>5lms befordinxr^Jreoj5p«fc.
•    Precipitation, evapotranspiration, and snowmelt are defined on a grid cell basis.
•    Infiltration and ercess precipitation is computed separately for each cell.
•    ModClark transform method is used to process excess precipitation into runoff at the subbadn outlet
•    8etter definition of subbasin response:
— StoTn ts sm»Fl ccmoo’ed to tfre scttevn >te — Sto-mis very heterogeneous
Advanced Reservoir Features
•    n^rfcr flood p’ooscUcnpro/ec Is.
-   »esr->rrc a po'd on the "dry* Sdte of -»tevee ar ftovarrall wbtre
Parameter Estimation
’ko’ <r.strict wits' xajriiAatez.
-
kdoPe xulre-ts x c«se wate? tfroi<h the levee into the river when
Sfit river 5t>j- n bw.
-
kd’Xk tfUTC^ 63 rwt * ttsf o«er*h-|eoe diHn<ftv»±
•     >*e» br>?A r-vataatiom
-  SinUliBt T*e dm refeave fverr< tfcint w owt%cir< fo'Lres.
•    Axo-uted 1>’J tor estlrracirg paror-elers when cbse.-ved five is
•nibble
•    "ObjecS/e f-jnctcn' measures now w=* the cc«npjted ord observed flow I’ryd'C^irapFi n<itt+<
•    "Search netted" uses the abjective Ajndbn «s iryut to at ar^r<(h<n that determines how to adjust parwneter vetoes to frd the opilnum rr<Uh.
•    Can pr tz/kk txt j' 'i estimates for sorre pa'arrrters:
-    hWmrroi nro»< cxrdnjrs r»d jrrrtr:
-   Ur'lCtod*:tra?hMrarTeters.
-   t«seflpwr*alardf>9>nndpram&efs
-   Seme noy pttrtdn.Depth-Area Analysis
GIS Preprocessor
•   Req’„*ncy storm h often used lor e^timxi<x R'o*« du* to th*
100-yr Corm or other retrjm ir-*rv^4s.
•    L.r-g* w^ersheds often haw* many locations vrh*r* ?<m esrjrrwtesare resjwred.
•   rt cant b* tedious to d*ve’'opstorms v/".h (he correct area for each </ th* locations.
•    ArraFfvs tool'         a $-ir>JL» tic* run and a»/tomat»ca*f adjust s th* storm je^a frr each $*Te<t*d location.
•   HEC-G*oHMS ran b* used to create basin models i«r*g terrain data.
•   Start vXth a digit al elevation model.
•   Select a watershed outlet and th*n GeoHMS automatican? delineates th* watershed border and prefimlnary subbasins out Roes.
•   Adjust subbasin outlets.
•   GeoHMS creates a basin model that can he imported into HEC-HMS and also creates database table o< parameters that car l>* estimated from terrain and other supplemental data layers.2; Typical procedure for setting up and running of HEC-RAS model — an example
HEC-RAS
Organizational Structure
A Tutorial
(Model Development of a Small Flume)
Open a new projed
•      Open project -creates (-prj file)
•      Includes:
1  Unit system (SI/US customary)
2.    Geometry' (XS. bridges, weirs, etc.) (.g file)
3.    Flow Data (steady, iinsteadyr) (.f file)
4. Plan data(what combination of flow/geometry to
use for the analysis) (,p file)
Name the project (.pij file)
Ifa
riak»i«
[UN M/1
n4-t>l
c.-uiiZu»«ua\
A- .
»«
«(<l
•□i-'
i. ■ • /»
tr—-t
riw
UlUatlU*
hMO
L   £*<• I            HO I CjmmO.mm, ]
j|
iMirw                4«adii«»*a
After you have entered the above, click O.K. mid O.K. again12
Select SI units
38 HCGXA9.4 Rire* Afti’r
Tile C'!i’ K»r View               OrbetfE              5»P
IgEtgE^EB rro^r/m 3<"L*r
Geometry Files (.g)
FSorrt
FA-i
Geme*y
Sk-al/FY..
f
A JTTT*^—T|2 y"
Ccw»crl rtoject U»rt» ...
• Create a reach- single or dendritic
Click here
Unr*vacS Tex r
r
US C-x-cm-vy
■'• Sy:l^r. txfewvfrjrv#          Sy-«e<< f~ S*«e: <5d».A lo<n*»»(*nrcJJ
1
O’ _____ Ctrr.ri
|      [__
Draw ibe tench upstream to dcnvnsfreao
Name the river attd reach
»• .
1 **—' \
Ur»
•
Cw»
iwi
jgggggjggil
n». n-<                         _J
*<
nr | twtf ■
ik4p
3Tir.
(X
mt*
v—
_l
r
t hc rn<Flume example
•   Width-7.57 cm (0 0757 m)
•   Wall height- 12 cm( 0,12 in)
•   Flume Length- 182 cm (1.82 m)
•   Slope-none, horizontal ;
•  Roughness-Plexiglass (n^-0.0085)
3
•   Discharge- 1.5 Vs ( 0.0015 m /s)
•   Cross section spacing—10 cm (0.1 m)
•   Downstream boundary condition (critical depth at outlet, free overfall)
Start at downstream river station 0.00 m
(HEC RAS ESTABLISHES TILE DOWN STREAM END AS ZERO
FOR A STARTING DISTANCE AN PROGRESSIVELY WORKS UP
STRE AM IN CHAINAGE)14
Enter and trpph' data assuming an arbitrary datum of 100.00 in. notice five downstream reach length is zero since we are at tire furthest downstream extent of tire
tnocH Croivtectlanal dam
- Entncd from left to right looking down siicriu
Click  on  “Apply  Data”  to  add  (lie  cross-section to the model and to view the section
Llilev drtlrrd
ilcrn Iptlnii of the
rrott tcrtlon
If lherr « err fhwxl
plains this b«x
drftnrs the horizon tai
rizhf and left Hmh*
of fb? chainajrs
of th? main channel
(ve?  par?  a fl ft n?xt for
evamplr)
.Mniinlngs n vnlucs
LOB &• ROB wnnlil lie tlir left mill Heli' Hood plains t c\|icctlvcly
Alain Channel Cbainagc Definition
Add a new cross section at the upstream end river station 1.82 m
(Since we have the same geometry we are going to make nse of the
1Enter the station chainage at the upstream end of the flume (for the flume the upstream end will be located at 1.82m)
Otherwise, if the geometry was different, you would Click - options / add a new cross section /:
Rrtnrfflbrr to
click “apply data**
after »®a have eaferrd llie geometry
The vtalfoa Mratifier ’<m ja«f catered
The LOB. Chaeorl A ROB dlvfancrv
wet km < weed to be answered
the <*<fk>a< are paraflrt. lhea all
three dhlaace are (be tame (l_S2m)
s'
3n
•♦ o' ruc.Acu
ZJJLI
Pr-»>crtj<
13) 12
F ID) I)
■lj  jqjt  "ri  r.  m
r
o
X                pew
TO
*
ILT
i i ■.
□•lion nr!
P.nfrV-
Now il*M lime to interpolate cro« tection<...ln flic ninin
pruttidry menu click on toolvXS ttilerpdation and select
between two cross-sections16
New    is    a    coed    lime    to    we    geometry data. remember the ,g file? Name and we it
Lei’s look nt the profile for our model, click on the
If yxxr pier           tkx look lilre aim:
- go  to  “opSon*.- on the Crm\ «rt»n
djta n-rndorr
- go to
- ebrare y axis rmn to ’00.0
- chntyc y ixrv max io 100.14
- dtmyc y axis iocrcner: to 0 02
- dfck'oi.
- pc to “cpSons vrrixbks ’
-
Flow data (.f files)
•    Steady (constant with time)
•    Unsteady (varies with time)
•  Regimes( supercritical, subcritical, mixed)
•    Boundary conditions:
-  dick on cSr Etm  hro tbit arc vu checked (left rcain ckmncl bank elevation
•k right main coxrzxri book devackja). cGck OJC
-  ebek “options 'prkr aoJ nuke son? that “thick border, major a ad minor tick rrkk~ arc all on.
1.      Supercritical-upstream
2.  Subcritical-down stream
3.      Mixed-both.17
Flow data continued
• Boundary condition types:
1.   Known water surface elevation
2.   Critical depth- free overfall or weir
3.   Normal depth- downstream energy slope required
4 Rating curve (WSE as a function of discharge)
No'* t»c arc joint k> ckrozc the profile tumes (from PF 1. PF2. PF J) -On the "WeAdy flow data window"
- Chou opiiom / edit profile turnet
IKxdde click tufa Son on du njirt of (he nuxkrx In m|u| yon tec in the !IEC-RA$ box. aiaJ then click O.K.18
I
Ncrr o**nJ io specify the boaodar/ condrtemk !<i’< asvsne urhcmic.it fknv acd critical depth jr
fbe <ner(jrj| therefore a Anmtfre?su ciyutJifron and a H2 pro Ek
Select R<r*di
Bc»mdjry
cwndkiccn
f'rrm rfx
Ve?dy tkrr
r=>rrrn
Your main HEC-RAS interface should show the following now
MAKE SURE THAT ALL OF YOUR FILES ARE STORED IN THE SAME DIRECTORY (nlint ri er that directory  tnny be) OR, THE SIMULATION WILL NOT WORK
Pretf
fVn
G«rvw*ry S'*y^nr»v Deso {Am
I
hrw e>Ai
fc\MX D*4lAS^r>-*i^r<i
iCrDU^rSva.WIVCC.hASJ-rt
OOI
ICSCOUnSLfcrjFl W EC.PAS .RtJ»4SV<Arwrt'Arw».  ci
1
r
I
1 151 U*I
L»" Ml- £>*
4rt» v trrx itcrtMA
a { SV socr tn » dir fnv trsy vr-.»f ±r iVx-
tSr SA\T FLOW
DATA AS O7<>~a
One last step Wore wc nni the simulation, we must couple the geometry and flow with the plan (,p file)
On the main Hec-Ras interface select Run
and steady flow analysis
ISIS1W
n»«
fW-
A*
C,
Ae
s«.»> ru fo- UA«u»>rvwf *<wi            r~ c mito- 1
Now we can go ahead and save a pho with die
existing geometry and flow dataWhen fbeTollc-.voig screens are visible the
sinmlalioo Ens been ran
Let’s look St the wafer surface profile generated for fbe 5.0 LA
flow.click on the new profile* Mb on the ma io interface
i
A series of variables can be plotted oo Ibe profile. Lets add rbe critical fknv depth....
Navi«s:e to options I saixab!e> on the Profile Plot Window
ri ■- ■H.TUTJgL T
" R" *' ** <
J : Make Mire that the folkyrnng are checked oar -I eft rturo channel tank clmitoiM
- Rigid mam clcmnel task ckvx’iotH
-    - C Fi r l r lSed   ca tl o dewptateh retlteirvfaatci eon
i20
Click on tlx*
of the main menu interface.Select click lf»e O.K. button.
TV «cu»br<< ovptr o( KEC (LAS Ink t xriMr* -ttrti w-. er>l <T<fEercnr In cfc o( ptorfitwv
•’Std* i< dqictvktrt nj*n the partknlw nrt/Rt? Since -Sr flnmr n ■ very
reptevenoom of ■ Trier reach", wr need te men »*« tSr krel ft preci wm on the onrj-X tn fwnpcify ceprtue the «ak of Cne (l'tsre
On rf* “PROFILE OUTPUT TABLE-, dkk on OPTIONS STANDARD TABLE A DEC. PIECES
V|
Double click any parameter (m the Available Variables) to add it Io yonr table.
Now  that  we  have  selected  all  three  flows,  we  can  go  back  to  the main menu and die plot profile tab to compare the three flows.
SIbIvI-P>l<fZ1?rlfe|g.|n)|cf^
k xttCO^rJUXV^— c»i
R l"vrFM
R*t S» i
:
i.—<* OT»
suv; m
SuV/3 Rtf
StdlUOr
I rr< */ An fh «i21
One last step let s go ahead and save the .prj or
project file we have been working on.
H
J
(M»wvnwl r«nd  I 15Z</SfVwr
f 1,*2m k^j ■ 0.7$7m wxk Biw)
rrte BJit R»« Vw»
Help
£Vtf£ D«4’JuSMK*w su^pi
FV                  Krw
t’CDURSES^L_38TVf£C_»US_RV»rAkA»**Aww_i*j^
3 —
Oacwy           K*-*
C \LJUF«4S\CE_»1va£.fU5.flWrAto^rA™!_<«u<> 0(
7
DOT 1
5*eadi Ft- 5^-".“-*
ttfou«£$va jmv<tcJus.Huws'*A«i*Mu ^ tai
w
OndMfrftwl
1
<^r<i
.-------------
OnoitXan. '
□ [HUSAnnexG.               TBIWRDP - Water Quality user manuals
Annex 6.
TBIWRDP - Water Quality user
manuals
Design. Development & Support in Implementebon i Operation of a Basm Information System Interim RepoaEthiopian Ministry Of Water Resources
Tana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development Project
WORK ON THE HYDROLOGICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM (HIS) PART: WATER QUALITY
Annexel
Methodological Guide of the Sampler
June 20112 Introduction
3     Characterization of stations_____________________
3.1.1Charaterization of stations of the network 
3.1.1.1     Sites of action______________________
3.13.2.1.1.2 StSateiolenctpiounrpcroseiter_ia_______________________— 
3.1.2.1     General knowledge purpose station
3.1.2.2 Knowledge of an impact purpose station
3.1.2.2.1    Assessment of maximum impact
3.1.2.2.2     Knowledge of the spatial scope of impact,
3.1.2.3 Knowledge of aptitude to use purpose station
4     Organization of sampling__________________ __________________________________ _____________ 8
4.1       REPRESENTATIVE OF SAMPLING 8
4.2       ORGANIZATION OF SAMPLING________________________________________________ ________ 8
4.2.1        General knowledge purpose measurement network:8
4.2.2        Impact network:____________ 8
4.2.3        Knowledge of the aptitude for use purpose network_______________________________________ 9
4.2.4        Period of the day to take samples:9
4.3       DESCRIPTION OF THE SAMPLING STATION 9
4.4       SAFETY AND HYGIENE IN SAMPLING9
4.4.1        Sampling from the water or bank9
4.4.2        Sampling from a bridge9
4.4.3        Sampling from a boat10
4.5       QUALITY ASSURANCE.. 10
4.6       CONCLUSION 10
5     WATER SAMPLING11
5.1       FIELD CONDITIONS 11
5.1.1        Location of sa mp 11 ng11
5.1.2        Date and time of sampling11
5.1.3        Climatology.11
5.1.4        Hydrology 11
5.1.5        Conditions of sampling____________________________________________ ________ _______ 12
5.1.6        Sampling method12
5.1.6.1     Description of the environment12
5.1.6.2     Comments_______________________________________________ __ __________________ 13
5.1.6.3     Sampler identity_______________________________________________________________ 13
5.2       EQUIPMENT AND TECHNIQUE13
5.2.1        Type of sampling_________________________________________________________________ 13
5.2.2        Materials and methods of manual sampling14
5.2.2.1 Sampling taking the bottle in hand15
5.2.2.2     Sampling with siphon mounting:                                                                                                       15
2
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
75.2.23 Sampling with bucket
5.23 Sampling for specific analyses
5.23.1     Sampling for determination of substances in suspension----------------- ---------------------------------- 5.23.2     Sampling for bacteriological analysis16
5.2.33 Sampling for analysis of pesticides residue and other organic micropollutants --------------------------- 16
5.3      PACKAGING OF SAMPLES17
53.1
Sample preparation---------------------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------- 17
53.2
Bottles________________________________________________________________________ 17
53.3
LabellingI7
5.3.4      Storage of samples_____________________________________________________________  1® 53.5       Transport of samples ______________________________ _______________________________ 15
6     Deposit sampling________________________________ _________ _____________________________ 19
6.1      NATURE AND LOCATION OF SAMPLING 19
6.2      FIELD CONDITIONS 19
6.3      EQUIPMENT AND TECHNIQUE 20
6.4      PACKAGING AND TRANSPORT OF SAMPLES 20
6.4.1
Packaging20
6.4.2
Labelling______________________________________________________________________ 20
6.4.3
Conservation20
32 INTRODUCTION
Current  management  of  freshwater  requires  a  good  knowledge  of  their  condition  and  their  evolution  over time.
A  measurement  network  is  being  developed.  The  network's  main  objective  is  to  enable  monitoring  of  water quality  in  the  Abbay  Basin  and  some  of  the  main  tributaries  throughout  Its  course  and  to  compare  the  data collected to international (WHO) or national standards.
This document is for organizations, which in this context, will operate in the field and take appropriate samples for analysis. It provides, in addition, pragmatic  answers  to key  questions  that the "samplers” will face before and during a sampling campaign.
It  contains  information  on  the  different  stages  of  the  sampling  in  order  to  ascertain  the  quality  of  rivers, especially in regard to:
•            the choice of the sampling site,
•            observations of field conditions during    the sampling,
■           measurements in the field,
•             collecting the sample,
•             transport to the laboratory for analysis.
Good sampling practice will determine in large part the validity  of analysis  and the interpretation that we can do. The operator must make every effort to achieve a representative sample consistent with the purpose of the observed station
While some practices  may  be extended systematically  whatever the situation, a number of them will require the operator to adapi to current conditions. Therefore, this  paper attempts  to more specifically  address problems that may occur during field operations.
The  water  quality  of  a  river  may  improve,  according  to  the  problems  encountered  through  different  media, water, deposits, which are discussed in turn in this document.
4The  station  on  the  quality  of  surface  water  is  a  volume  of  water  mass  of  which  samples  are  taken  and measurements made to ascertain the quality of the watercourse in a definite place.
If the sampling methodologies  in this  guide are the same on all stations, we will differentiate two types  of sampling stations determined according to whether they belong to the surveillance network which has been established and the purpose of measures to be undertaken and which may be different:
•     General knowledge within the general monitoring network,
•     Impact of a discharge identified in the framework of impact monitoring,
•     Monitoring capability of use in the context of a specific use.
3.1.1       CHARATERIZATION OF STATIONS OF THE NETWORK
As in a network analysis, the stations of analysis have been pre-located using global data (geology, orography, land use, uses, etc.). The stations were then validated in the field and fully described in the schedules attached to this document.
Each station must be characterized by.
• 
Its administrative location {belonging to a country),
• 
Its geographical location (geographical coordinates),
• 
Its position on the river (hydrographic section code ),
•     Its membership of any measurement network,
•     The manager who created it or who uses it.
The measuring station has a characteristic that is intended to symbolize it on a map.
| 3.1.1.1SITES OF ACTION
The "measurement sites* are sub-volumes consistent and representative of the station where measurements are performed and samples taken to assess environmental conditions at the site of the station.
To assess the quality of water, several sites may exist on the same station and are divided into:
•     One or more sites to take water samples, if there are several, they will be sites in the width and exceptionally in the depth or length,
One or more sites of deposit sampling. Emphasis will be on sites where fine-grained deposits are possible.
| 3.1.1.2 SELECTION CRITERIA
The criteria for selecting a sampling station depend on various factors including the objectives of the study, the purpose of the station (which can be distinguished from that of the measurement network including through monitoring of impacts such as downstream of large towns like Bamako and Niamey), the nature and extent of investigations have priority.
The  first  step  in  locating  a  station  is  through  sectorization  of  the  river  that  allows  defining  homogeneous sections based on natural (geomorphology and hydrology) and / or anthropic (disturbance of the water
5chemistry  and  the  physical  environment)  criteria.  Within  these  sections,  we  choose,  after  recognition  and  on site investigations, representative sampling stations without taking into account any anthropic impact.
The study  station chosen will be based on criteria representative of conditions  that we want to study  (see below) and on practical aspects  such as  ease of access  and sampling. We also seek, where possible, the proximity of a gaging station.
Within a sampling station, the measurement sites  may  change location to take into account the variability  of environmental conditions  (hydrology, access) or the phenomenon that we want to study  (size and distribution of a contaminant plume).
For example, in the first case presented below, one site for water sampling could be established in the river during low water (sampling upstream of a bridge) and on a bridge during high water (sample downstream of the bridge). In the second case, the sampling site can be located either at the center of the mean water channel in summer, or from the bank in winter.
| 3.1.2 STATION PURPOSE
The overall purpose of the station indicates the goal for which it was created:
•     General knowledge of chemical functioning of the River,
•      Impact of an identified discharge, urban, industrial or hand made,
•      Monitoring capability of use as drinking water and watering livestock.
| 3.1.2.1 GENERAL KNOWLEDGE PURPOSE STATION
The selection of such a station is:
•     On general geological and geochemical characteristics of the drainage basin,
•     On the characterization and location of disturbance sources in the drainage basin.
This  requires  a preliminary  phase of literature review and surveys. This  phase of work  must be validated by field reconnaissance to help judge the adequacy  of the station relative to the objectives  of the study, its standing in relation to the section of watercourse concerned, good conditions of mixing of discharge (especially downstream of major confluences or downstream of known disturbances upstream. Other criteria must also be taken into account like the ease of access and of sampling or the distance to the laboratory of analysis.
It seems  essential that these stations  should be installed near gaging stations  so we can interpret the data either as a merger, but also as a stream. Failing that a staff gage may be used to place each sample in a hydrological known or estimated context. These stations  are located throughout the drainage basin in areas known to be the most distant points  from possible pollution or sectors  most strongly  affected by  anthropic activities.
3.1.2.2 KNOWLEDGE OF AN IMPACT PURPOSE STATION
These  stations  will  be  established  to  characterize  the  impact  of  the  main  disrupting  entities  in  the  drainage basin such as large towns or any major industrial activities. They complement the general monitoring stations.
These stations  must be carefully  positioned spatially  with the aim of optimal representativity  given the characteristics of the disturbance under study (industrial, domestic, agricultural, etc.), its physical setting (good mixing of water) and study goals. We can consider two cases:
63.1.2.2.1   ASSESSMENT OF MAXIMUM IMPACT
The search for the optimal distance downstream from the discharge is very important. One for which the water / substance(s) mixture is made will differ depending on the type of pollutant (particulate or dissolved state), its dispersal ability  in the river, the flow facies  present on the station and the output of the watercourse. This distance can be measured after calibration tests  carried out in the field using simple tools  such as  field spectrophotometers.
It should be sufficient to enable one to judge the actual impact of pollution on the entire body of water under consideration but not be too large that the phenomena of self-elimination of pollutants be minimum (dilution, assimilation, settling, extinction or chemical modification, etc.).
3.1.2.2.2   KNOWLEDGE OF THE SPATIAL SCOPE OF IMPACT
If you want to know the spatial extent of the impact for a better perspective, several stations (minimum two) spaced longitudinally should be taken into account.
For this, a station must be placed at the peak  of incidence (see above), the others  further downstream, avoiding possible interference with other sources  of disturbances  if they  are not taken into account (other discharge, tributary). The sampling strategy will be set according to the observed activity.
3.1.2.3   KNOWLEDGE OF APTITUDE TO USE PURPOSE STATION
This  station  must  be  positioned  upstream of  the  use  in  question. These  parameters  and  thus  the  sampling techniques implemented obviously depend on the type of use involved.
74.1 REPRESFNTATIVITY OF SAMPLING
In some cases it may be that we are not sure of the homogeneous distribution throughout the water body of elements to analyze. It is best if possible to avoid such sampling stations. Otherwise, we must carry out testing (tracer, conductivity  meter, field spectrophotometric  analysis, test strips) on the nature and significance of heterogeneity.
If the tests show a homogeneous distribution, a single measurement site will be sufficient
If the tests show a heterogeneous distribution, there are three possibilities:
•     two points are sampled and are analyzed separately (e.g. right bank and left bank),
•      Either a single site representative of average conditions of the quality of the station is sampled at multiple  sampling  points  that  are  combined  into  a  single  one  which  is  analyzed.  However,  this characterization  of  a  mid-point  is  sensitive  to  the  extent  that  local  hydrological  conditions  can significantly skew the average estimate obtained,
•     A too large heterogeneity imposes the choice of another sampling station.
4.2     ORGANIZATION OF SAMPLING
Usually, several stations are subject to sampling during a single day. The organization of this day of sampling may depend on the objectives.
4.2.1     GENERAL KNOWLEDGE PURPOSE MEASUREMENT NETWORK:
It emphasizes the randomness of sampling, the quality of a station is then evaluated on a large number of measures and the statistical interpretation of measurements. By sampling a station always at the same time or same day of the month, you cannot record certain events such as point source discharges. The chronicle recorded can not reflect the "average" quality of the station analyzed.
For example, some processing units of polluted water do not return their waste until certain times of their cycle. Therefore, it is essential to vary the terms of sampling time (change the day of the week or the week of the month, etc.)
4.2.2     IMPACT NETWORK:
Analysis of an impact cannot be monitored unless a synchronic monitoring of two stations is made. It should be taken from the stations from upstream to downstream while trying to respect the time of transfer of water masses between the stations sampled. This enables analysis of the same body of water during its displacement, which is essential to interpreting each analysis as a flow and not as a concentration that may depend on changes in flow between the two stations. The transfer time will be determined by the average velocity of flow which can be either estimated visually or measured using various devices (see analysis of flows and velocities).
If the sampling strategy  described above can be implemented for cases  where potential pollution are numerous and varied, another strategy to characterize a specific discharge may be established. The dates and times  of sampling are then determined according to the dates  and times  of discharge to obtain optimal representativity of the discharge studied.
84.2.3  KNOWLEDGE OF THE APTITUDE FOR USE PURPOSE NETWORK
In the case of the aptitude to use, the sampling period is chosen to obtain maximum representativity. For example, for drinking water use, it should take account of climatic conditions. Heavy rainfall on a drainage basin area can dramatically alter the physical chemistry and / or bacteriological quality of river water. In some cases  it may  be as  essential to target conjoined uses  such as  livestock  watering periods  that may  effect periodically and temporarily the bacteriological quality of water.
| 4.2.4 PERIOD OF THE DAY TO TAKE SAMPLES:
As we have seen in the preceding paragraphs the time of day can be seen to be variable depending on the type of station analyzed and the problem monitored. In general, samples  will be taken during daylight hours. However nocturnal samples could be made to take into account certain discharges or to study diel variations of some physical chemistry parameters (pH, oxygen, temperature, etc.).
4.3      DESCRIPTION OF THE SAMPLING STATION
Once the sampling station is described in detail it is immutable. For this purpose the form presented in Annex xx will be completed. It must be accompanied by:
•     an aerial photography extract (or a sufficiently precise map if it exists) specifying the location of the
station,
•     or a situation diagram to locate the various sites or different measurement and sampling points,
•     a general photographic report of the places.
4.4       SAFETY AND HYGIENE IN SAMPLING
For safety reasons, we must avoid sampling in hazardous areas such as unstable banks, irregular and deep beds, narrow and busy bridges, etc. Generally, the operation should preferably be conducted by a team of two people, rather than a single person. It is important and sometimes necessary, especially for stations that are the subject of routine frequent sampling to select sampling sites which have a minimum of danger. The first precaution is to alert ones entourage of the circuit that will be done in the day, with times at the various study sites. The samplers must also be able to swim.
For hygiene, wearing protective gloves is highly recommended. Bacterial soaps and products will be available to sampling officers and used after taking each sample. The samplers' vaccinations must also be up to date (tetanus, polio, hepatitis, cholera, leptospirosis, etc.).
4.4.1   SAMPLING FROM THE WATER OR BANK
Sampling shall be performed only on a stable and non-slippery bank if no other access to water is possible In cases that prove dangerous, the sampler can be equipped with a rope tied to the bank and a life jacket
4.4.2   SAMPLING FROM A BRIDGE
Bridges are a great way to take samples for physical chemistry on streams because they allow easy access and the opportunity to safely sample the whole water mass, including at flood periods.
94.4.3    SAMPLING FROM A BOAT
This  type of sampling is  to be considered only  in areas  where there are no bridges  and where sampling from the banks  is  not possible. The craft must be in perfect working condition and have all the necessary  safety equipment.
4.5      QUALITY ASSURANCE
Sampling is the action that determines the validity and representativity of all the analyses to be conducted later on the sample. In the measuring of the quality of surface water, the sampling step is that which introduces the largest error. It is therefore essential to operate with the utmost care.
To do this sampling should be carried out strictly by personnel qualified both in respect of the sampling itself as in taking measurements on site (non-conservative parameters), and in respecting safety and hygiene practices. Such personnel must provide proof of training and sufficient experience in this  field. They  must know and respect scrupulously the sampling sites, materials and techniques used and the instructions for sampling.
Specific  material will be made available to sampling staff (sampler, measuring equipment, bottles, etc.). This material should be adapted to the characteristics of the environment, the type of analysis to be conducted and should be in good working condition. This  equipment must be serviced, calibrated. The calibration and different procedures will be documented in a report to be forwarded to the head of analysis.
It is  important for the subsequent interpretation of analysis  results  and to ensure the validity  of the sample that the traceability of operations is complete. The operator must check this on a set of record sheets (Annex XX) that provide this  traceability  (record sheets: study  station; field conditions;field measurements; reception of samples).
4.6      CONCLUSION
A station for measuring the quality of surface water defines a geographic area where part of the water mass or deposits is sampled to make measurements to determine the quality of the watercourse in this location.
The location of study  sites  and sites  of measurement is  defined in advance according to specific  criteria including the conditions  that characterize the environment studied and the objective for which sites  were selected.
Given the changing conditions of a watercourse the sampling point may be unusually modified to obtain results for the conditions  representative of the situation of the watercourse on the day  of collection. The sampler will then seek to:
•     Keep the same quality of information of the usual place given the current conditions,
•      Keep if possible the methods and techniques used for the usual place, otherwise use the methods and techniques that are most appropriate given the characteristics of the moment.
The  location  of  the  new  sample  point  will  be  accurately  described  and  justified  in  the  field  sheet  provided  for this purpose and provided by the client. A diagram of the site will be made.
The sampling tour will be organized according to objectives set by the client for the measurement network.
105.1 FIELD CONDITIONS
The river is  a highly  changing environment as  a result of natural or anthropic  factors. The conditions  that characterize the river and its  environment on the day  of sampling can significantly  influence test results. Climate and hydrological characteristics, some unusual disturbing activities  closer upstream (works  in the watercourse, accidental discharge, etc.), the presence of plants in excess, the presence of dead fish or oil slicks on surface water, etc., can explain certain "anomalies” in the data and their interpretation. It is  therefore necessary to record all observations on a record sheet, even if they seem trivial at first sight.
This form will indicate precisely the information on the following:
5.1.1      LOCATION OF SAMPLING
The recording of the location of the sampling site is one of the most important steps of the filling in the record sheet phase. Indeed, whatever the information recorded, it is usable and has value only if we can link itto a sampling point.
While the "Field conditions" sheet follows the "Description of the study station” sheet it should refer only to the location of sampling.
If for any reason related to specific conditions of the terrain, sampling at the usual point can not be performed, another nearby  point in the station having the same information value will be found. Its  location will be specified
5.1.2    DATE AND TIME OF SAMPLING
This element (local time) must be strictly noted as it allows firstly to locate the sampling conducted relative to a set of data, and secondly to facilitate the interpretation of some results such as concentration of pH or of dissolved oxygen which can vary during the season and the day. As the entire network is on several time zones, this information will be processed in hours GMT thereafter.
15.1.3    CLIMATOLOGY
The climatic information recorded on the field sheet should indicate both the times and trends on the day and the day before sampling, and secondly, whenever possible, the main climatic characteristics of the days that preceded sampling (approximately one week).
These items on climatology will be mentioned based on their availability or information collected locally from the riverside population.
5.1.4   HYDROLOGY
It will be necessary to place the sample in relation to hydrological conditions in the days before sampling. One can, for example, easily conceive that the same turbidity value will not have the same meaning if sampling was conducted during floods or during periods of undisturbed hydrology.
11
***With  regard  to  flow  and  /  or  velocities  at  the  sampling  station,  knowledge  of  them  is  important  to  allow,  on one hand interpretation of analysis results and on the other calculations of the flux of pollution.
The elements of hydrology will be mentioned according to their availability.
| 5.1.5 CONDITIONS OF SAMPUNG
This  field is  intended to specify  the conditions  under which sampling was  conducted and thereby  justify  the methods used in particular in the case where difficult conditions can lead to changes in the position of sampling point or in technique (bucket, pole, etc.).
This  information may  lead to an adaptation of the sampling protocol in the case of a significant and lasting change that may  affect the accessibility  of the site or the representativity  of a monitoring station (pluriannuel, etc.).
fs.1.6 SAMPLING METHOD
This field will give information on the sampling techniques used.
If a change in the normal sampling protocol is carried out by the sampling officer, he should also indicate how and why.
[Tl.6.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
The  description  of  the  environment  is  to  allow  better  interpretation  of  analysis  results  of  water  but  also  and especially to drive the sampling officer to reflect on:
•       Representativity  of  the  sample,  given  by  visually  estimated  sample  homogeneity  of  the  water  mass sampled ( veins of different coloured water, discharges upstream, run-off into the river.
•       The  validity  of  measurements  made  in  the  field  such  as  the  concentration  of  dissolved  oxygen  and turbidity.
Information to give on the quantitative parameters are defined below:
•      Uniformity of water.
•       Appearance  of  approaches:  subjective  impression  of  cleanliness  of  banks  and  banks  upstream  and downstream  near  that  site.  The  presence  or  absence  of  objects  or  materials  which  may  affect  the water quality is taken into account.
•       Irisation  on  water  (hydrocarbons):  the  presence  of  hydrocarbons  is  indicated  by  the  iridescent  surface of the water.
•      Foam (detergents): presence of tight clusters of bubbles on the surface of rough water.
•      Supernatant sludge: organic sludge floating on the water surface.
•       Plant debris: presence of woody or herbaceous plants, from outside the sampling area that swim in or float on the surface of water or rest at the bottom.
•       Other  bodies:  any  natural  or  manufactured  body  or  exogenous  product,  which  floats  on  water,  bathes in water or is deposited on the bottom at the sampling station.
•      Colour: must be appreciated within a white bucket or bottle, never directly into the stream.
•     Clarity: it must be appreciated within a white bucket or bottle, never directly into the stream.
•      Odour, assessment of absence or presence of more or less strong fumes from the aqueous medium, causing sensations perceived by the olfactory organ.
125.1.6.2   COMMENTS
This field should allow the sampling officer to note any additional comments that can allow interpretation of
the results and also validate the measurements made in situ. The following may be considered:
•      Observations on wildlife, with for example the presence of dead fish, or abnormal behavior of certain species (abundance of dead fish, fish rising to breathe at the surface, etc.).
•      Observations  of  aquatic  vegetation  that  allow  detection  of  dystrophy  problems  of  a  watercourse because  overabundant  aquatic  vegetation  is  linked  to  an  environment  rich  in  mineral  fertilizers (nitrogen, phosphorus) and / or organic mud.
•       Development  of  filamentous  bacteria  (whitish  gray  filament  bundles)  which  often  indicates  high organic pollution upstream (discharges from slaughterhouses, dairies, etc.).
•     Comments on uses of the watercourse such as a large pasture near the watercourse or Works in the river upstream of the sampling point, which may possibly be an explanatory cause of high levels of TSS,
•     The state of upstream discharges as some discharges can be intermittent or their characteristics may vary during the day.
5.1.6.3  SAMPLER IDENTITY
Identification of the sampling officer should not be considered by him as a coercive approach from a water analysis laboratory or of the body responsible for operation of monitoring the water quality.
This identification can facilitate communication and provides additional information necessary for the analysis laboratory or the person responsible for the interpretation of results.
5.2       EQUIPMENT AND TECHNIQUE
5.2.1    TYPE OF SAMPLING
Sampling errors  are generally  larger than those attributable to laboratory  analysis. The taking of a water sample which is impossible to repeat, is a delicate operation because it determines the analytical results and the interpretation that will be given.
It is therefore essential that samples are homogeneous and as representative as possible of the environment to be analyzed. On the other hand, every precaution must be taken to ensure that the water sampled suffers the minimum of change between the time of sampling and of analysis. We must therefore take care to eliminate or minimize any variation in parameters to be analysed which can be related to the sampling technique. In the case of analysis by means of field-type spectrophotometer, the sample analysis must be conducted as soon as possible after taking the sample in the watercourse.
There are two types of water sample:
•     The grab sample, taken at a given point, depth and time,
•     The composite sample, which is obtained by mixing several different samples, of equal volumes or weight. An integrated sample inay consist of a mixture of grab samples taken from several points of the  volume  of  water  to  be  studied,  (in  a  series  of  samplings  made  by  a  cross  section  of  the watercourse especially in the context of the impact monitoring network, or if you are not sure the
13right  mix  of  the  entire  water  mass)  or  a  mixture  of  samples  taken  over  time  or  in  proportion  to  the discharge.
There are two methods of sampling water:
•      A manual method with a suitable container.
•     An automatic method with a programmed device.
The water sampling sites can be diverse and are in order of preference:
•       from  a  bridge,  putting  oneself  on  the  downstream  side  and  far  enough  away  from  obstacles  (bridge piers);
•       in  the  middle  of  the  stream.  If  the  sampling  officer  advances  into  the  water,  he  must  be  careful  to avoid the resuspension of deposits, and wait until the end of disturbances and sample upstream from himself;
•      from the bank, (at least 2 m from the bank) as well as from natural or artificial obstacles, being careful not to take samples in the dead zones, using a pole;
•      from  a  boat,  being  careful  to  collect  upstream  and  outside  the  zone  of  influence  of  the  boat.  This prevents  the  possible  contamination  of  the  sample  by  boat-based  pollution  particularly  in  the  case  of search for hydrocarbons or micropollutants.
When you can plunge a hand right into the water or reach it from the bank with a pole, it is best to dip sample bottles  straight into the river, with certain precautions, except for bottles  containing a preservative (acid for example). In principle, sample collection must be conducted at a depth of about 30 cm below the surface and about 50 cm above the bottom, if not at mid-depth.
When working from a bridge it is necessary to use special equipment for remote sampling. We use primarily a water bottle holder or in default a bucket made of a material that does not present risk of contamination of the sample. The minimum amount of water required is  equal to the sum of the volumes  needed for analysis  of each of the parameters sought increased by 20%. The contents of the sampling vessel is then poured into the appropriate sample bottles.
In all cases, the flow characteristics must be taken into account. Ideally the samples are from thoroughly mixed turbulent liquid. Whenever possible, the turbulence must occur within a natural discharge (downstream of an apron for example).
5.2.2    MATERIALS AND METHODS OF MANUAL SAMPLING
Manual water sampling can be achieved:
•     either by immersing the hand and the sampling container directly in the water (preferred method)
•     or using a support for sampling at a distance.
We can use a pole (which may be telescopic), a bottle holder, a sampler, a bucket or weighted container. The device known as  bottle holder shall be composed of material that does  not risk  contamination of the water sampled.
The sampling method and the precautions to take should be tailored according to the parameters to analyze. In any event, it should avoid collecting non-homogeneous large particles such as leaves, trash, etc.
/.e The easiest equipment to collect samples of water in the river or from the bank consists of a hand-held wide- necked bottle plunged into the water body and lifted out when full.
145.2.2.1   SAMPLING TAKING THE BOTTLE IN HAND The sampling technique is as follows:
•      rinse three times (energetically) the bottle and its cap (unless it contains a conservation agent). The rinse water can be collected without any special care, but never on the surface. When water flows into the bottle,
•     drain the bottle, shaking the neck downwards,
•     plunge the bottle into the water with the neck downwards,
•     turn over the bottle to an angle of about 45 ’, neck in upper position, facing the current,
•     fill the bottle slowly without bubbling,
•      by the end of the operation, when the bottle is full, it must be raised and all air bubbles found in contact with the walls chased out,
•      rinse the cap by swirling it in river water, and close the bottle carefully but quickly so as to avoid trapping air bubbles.
After sampling the bottle must be completely filled. The volume of air trapped in the bottle must be as low as possible.
5.2.2.2SAMPLING WITH SIPHON MOUNTING:
The sample bottle can also be equipped with a "siphon mounting *. This technique has the advantage of
allowing entry of water regularly and free of bubbles.
The operative technique is as follows:
•     rinse the bottle and siphon three times unless it contains a conservation agent,
•     drain the bottle and siphon by shaking,
•     fix the siphon mounting on the bottle and immerse the whole in the river at the desired depth, neck downwards. Keep the rubber hose out of the water,
•     turn over the bottle completely under water with the filling tube facing upstream,
•     if filling does not start naturally, slight suction can be applied to the mouth of the rubber hose,
•     wait until the bottle is completely full (except for bottles containing a conservation agent) and
complete the sampling as before.
5.2.2.3SAMPLING WITH BUCKET
This method is rarely used, especially if one must engage in analysis of organic micropollutants. If the water sampling is made with a bucket from up on a bridge, for example, the sampler must first ensure that the depth of the river is  sufficient, that no boat could pass  during the operation, then that the sampling equipment (bucket, rope, etc.) is scrupulously clean. It is necessary to rinse the sampling equipment at least three times to avoid contamination of the sample.
The  sampling  officer  will  avoid,  wherever  possible,  sampling  only  surface  water  and  putting  deposits  in suspension (do not touch the bottom).
From a bridge and for convenience,-sampling should be downstream to avoid obstacles such as piers and if possible in line with the stronger current or In the best possible location to avoid any disruption. Also ensure
the rope clears the bridge deck so as not to pollute the water collected.
15Once the bucket fills, the sampler will homogenize the water sample (for the resuspcnsion of 1SS) and immerse the sample bottles, rinsed in advance, as if it were a manual sampling.
5.2.3 SAMPLING FOR SPECIFIC ANALYSES
5.2.3.1 SAMPLING FOR DETERMINATION OF SUBSTANCES IN SUSPENSION
Sampling of water containing suspended solids  (TSS) or immiscible liquids  may  present particular difficulties. Solids  can be heterogeneously  distributed in the liquid. A satisfactory  mixing must be done, if possible, by maintaining turbulent conditions. Ideally  when the linear velocity  is  sufficient to produce the turbulence the samples are collected using techniques that maintain that velocity.
Whenever possible, a series of samples must be collected in a whole cross section. It must be remembered that the size distribution of suspended solids can vary over the time necessary to fully perform sampling.
Avoid   the   sorting   of   particles   caused   by   bubbling   (air   output)   and   the   turbulent   admission   of   water. Among the various procedures, it is preferable (when possible) to collect samples in:
•     a bottle with a siphon mounting,
•     a container.
| 5.2.3.2 SAMPLING FOR BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS
In the case of samples for bacteriological analysis, the sampling officer should always require and follow the directions  of the laboratory  responsible for analysis  Most often, analytical laboratories  provide sterile plastic bottles.
To the extent that micro-organisms are present everywhere in the air, on the ground, the sampling equipment and the sampling officer himself, it is  essential to avoid the introduction of germs  from outside the water for analysis. During the entire sampling, avoid all contamination of the bottle and cap (do not put your fingers in the bottle or on the inside of the cap, etc.). The bottle may be held with metal clamps that will be disinfected by flame before being immersed in water.
Because of the relative heterogeneity in the distribution of micro-organisms in water, it seems desirable, as for TSS, to collect several water samples along a transect.
5.2.3.3       SAMPLING    FOR    ANALYSIS    OF    PESTICIDES    RESIDUE    AND    OTHER    ORGANIC MICROPOLLUTANTS
Besides the careful selection of sampling points because the assay is expensive and long, the conditions for achieving good sampling make special attention necessary in the case of this type of sampling.
One of the characteristics of trace organic micropollutants is great variability in concentration over time (day) and their distribution in surface waters. One can see a large heterogeneity from one bank to another or with depth (e g. sampling of surface film may lead to concentration factors of 5 000 to 10 000).
It is therefore desirable to achieve a series of samples along a cross section and avoid sampling the surface film.
r Hi
1653 PACKAGING OF SAMPLES
Surface water is  susceptible to more or less pronounced changes under the influence of different physical chemistry  (temperature, pressure, absorption, adsorption, evaporation, precipitation, degassing of dissolved gas) and biological (assimilation, photosynthesis, etc.) phenomenal between the time of sampling and analysis. A number of rules should be observed to block or minimize these phenomena.
These rules, which contribute to proper preservation of samples before analysis, consist mainly of possible sample preparation, proper bottles and conservation in the dark at an appropriate temperature.
| 5.3.1 SAMPLE PREPARATION
Required for some elements, it consists  mainly  of acidification to pH <2 (metals, ammonium, nitrate, total phosphorus, arsenic, etc.) with a suitable acid or alkalination at pH> 11 (cyanides, sulfides). The attached tables summarize mode per parameter. Typically  the analysis  laboratory  provides  the bottles  containing the appropriate conservative and indicating any sampling precautions.
For some items that you want to distinguish the dissolved form of the content from the total content (major metals, phosphorus, etc.), before acidification, the samples should be filtered to 0.45 pm. For this, there are quite effective hand pumps as long as the water is not too loaded with non dissolved elements.
15.3.2    BOTTLES
The container designed to keep the water sample must preserve the composition of the latter. It will of course be clean (rinse with water several times to sample if you are not sure it is perfectly clean), composed of a material inert enough not to interfere with the constituents of water (a borosilicate glass jar can modify the content of water in silica and fluoride) and to prevent adsorption or absorption on its surface (dissolved metals may adsorb on glass walls, hydrocarbons can be absorbed by a polyethylene container).
Usually, bottles adapted to different chemicals to be tested, both by their nature and their capacity and their possible preparation, are provided by  the laboratory. The common practice is  to use containers  made of polyethylene or borosilicate glass. The attached tables summarize the type of container suitable for different parameters to study.
As a rule, be sure to completely fill the bottles and close them so that there is no air above the sample to avoid possible interactions with the gas phase (oxidation by dissolved oxygen, absorbtion of carbon dioxide, vapor phase passage, etc.). However, bottles for bacteriological examination and analysis of volatile materials will not be filled to the brim for practical reasons.
The number and type of containers used for sampling will be listed for example in the "field measurements' form and the "receipt of samples" form.
| 5.3.3 LABELLING
The designation of specimens is to be conducted with great care. It is translated into practice by labeling or marking the water sample bottles. It is essential to identify all sample containers in a clear and durable way to allow their unambiguous identification in the laboratory.
The most sensible solution is to operate in accordance with the laboratory(s) concerned.
A complete labeling of samples will include information on the following:
17•      Station Name:
•      Station Code:
•      Date and Time of sampling:
•      Nature of the water sampled:
•      Name of sampler-
•     Analyses to perform:
•      Presence and nature of the conservative:
These fields must be filled as follows:
•       The  designation  of  the  station  and  the  site  sampled  are  essential  to  enable  identification  of  the sample.  The  sampling  officer  must  necessarily  carry  over  to  the  label  the  same  information  that  was recorded  on  the  "Station  Description';  "Field  Conditions"  and  "Field  measurements"  forms.  The  code No. is not mandatory, but it allows faster identification of the sample.
•      The  date,  time  are  understandable.  This  information  is  very  important  because  it  constitutes  a  key entry to retrieve the sample.
•      The origin of water, on the one hand the type of water sampled (surface water, discharge, etc.) and on the other the environment (river, canal, etc.).
•      The name of the sampler is the signature of the sampling officer and the possibility of identification in case of any problem requiring the provision of additional information.
•      The analysis or analyses to be performed may be, if they are not too many, noted on the label. In the event  that  the  number  of  parameters  to  be  analyzed  is  too  large,  this  field  will  be  left  blank.  The sampling officer will simply refer to the analysis form provided by the laboratory.
•      The field "conservative" should give information if such a product has been introduced by the sampler himself.  If  the  conservative  is  introduced  directly  by  the  analytical  laboratory  providing  bottles  the laboratory' must indicate that addition on the bottles.
To reduce the risk of information loss due to the loss of labels during transportation or handling of bottles, the designation may be doubled, by:
•     attaching a label on the bottle with protective transparent adhesive,
•     attaching a label to the neck of the bottle (label in transparent bag for example),
•     indelible marking on each label ( even special felt pens are unreliable and it is preferable to use biros ).
As  the bonding adhesive and marking will fail on wet bottles  or bottles  covered with condensation, it is necessary  to fill in this  information on the bottle before sampling and to verify  the integrity  of the label after collection and during hand-over of samples.
5.3.4     STORAGE OF SAMPLES
It is recommended to maintain the sample at a temperature lower than that on filling. Refrigeration at 5 ° C + /
- 3 * C and storage in darkness is sufficient in most cases to preserve the sample during a relatively brief period before  analysis  by  reducing  physical,  chemical  and  biological  processes  that  can  take  place.  As  this  low temperature  can  be  obtained  only  by  immersing  the  containers  in  melting  ice  the  bottles  should  be  perfectly sealed or by use of a refrigerated chamber. The use of artificial ice packs alone does not, in general, achieve such low temperatures.
Travel time to the laboratory should be minimized (maximum 24 hours).
185.3.5   TRANSPORT OF SAMPLES
Much attention should be paid to the transport of empty containers to the sampling site and the return of such filled containers to the analysis laboratory.
To avoid ambiguity when submitting samples to the analysis laboratory due to the loss of a designation of a bottle, it is strongly recommended to collect samples from the same study station in the same packaging box.
Deposits have the ability to integrate and concentrate certain elements present in the water. Some pollutants present in very low concentrations in water such as organic and metallic micropollutants are therefore more easily detectable in deposits.
Among the various steps for the sampling of deposits in order to ascertain the quality of a watercourse, several are common to dealing with the sampling of water.
6.1      NATURE AND LOCATION OF SAMPLING
The characteristics  of deposits  induce a particular practice in the sampling technique. First, the physical chemistry analysis of deposits being carried out on the fine fraction, less than 2 mm, more able to fix elements, we should seek this type of substrate. The areas of watercourses where the flow velocity exceeds 10 cm / s will, therefore, be avoided in favor of the convex bank edge sector or areas rich in aquatic plants, that reducing the rate of flow, promote sedimentation.
Moreover, substrates  being usually  heterogeneous  in nature as  related to hydraulic  conditions  during their deposition, ensure a sufficient number of samples so that we can obtain a representative assessment of the sampling. The number of samples per site must be determined case by case particularly on the basis of the extent of the study site, its conformation, the distribution and nature of substrates, the location of discharges upstream and mixing of them, etc. The sampler will then move over the entire site to find the most suitable spots.
It is recommended to achieve at least three samples per site each spaced a few meters apart, and only the top layer of the deposit will be collected (2 to 5 cm). The samples collected that will have an equivalent volume will be collected in a container in which they are properly mixed. This mixture is then packaged.
The sheet of the description of the study station and measurement sites will be identical to that used for
Water. A map will show the location of the measuring and sampling site(s).
6.2   FIELD CONDITIONS
As for water analysis, deposit analysis has value only if it is accompanied by information on the sample. It is essential to accurately describe the conditions under which sampling was done.
Sampling must be done at the end of low water of the stream as  this  period allows  a better rate of sedimentation and greater deposit concentration (at constant flow). Do not, under any  circumstances intervene after an increase in flow rate, recent deposits being mixed after velocities of around 50 cm / s In case of flood, however small, it is preferable to postpone the operation.
1963 EQUIPMENT AND TECHNIQUE
The  choice  of  deposit  sampling  devices  for  physical  chemistry  analysis  should  be  based  on  the  accessibility  of the test site, the thickness of the water and deposit to be sampled.
In the framework of measurement networks, only buckets or bailer-type related equipment are
recommended.
We seek to avoid self-contamination of samples by using clean equipment unsoiled by contaminants.
6.4 PACKAGING AND TRANSPORT OF SAMPLES
|c.4.1 PACKAGING
For  each  sampling  the  overlying  water  and  atypical  elements  (organisms,  plant  debris,  gravel)  must  be removed.
The  samples  will  then  be  homogenized  in  a  non-contaminating  container  vis-^-vis  the  pollutants  to  search  for using:
•     containers of stainless steel or porcelain for organic micropollutants,
•      plastic containers, preferably uncoloured, for metals,
•     glass containers for the detection of mercury.
After  obtaining  a  homogeneous  mixture,  the  deposits  are  placed  in  glass  (preferably  colored)  or  polyethylene jars, capped excluding air.
16.4.2     LABELLING
The same recommendations as for water samples are recommended for deposits.
16.4.3     CONSERVATION
Indications  relating to conservation of water samples  also apply  to deposit samples. The samples  are stored and transported in a refrigerated (5 * C + / - 3 ‘ C) environment to the laboratory for analysis within a maximum of 4 days
20Annex 1.               Procurement: Contract technical specifications
Annex 7.
Procurement: Contract technical
specifications
q>d.
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation or a Basin Information System Interim ReportBIDDING DOCUMENTS
For
Procurement of
SUPPL Y AND INSTALLATION OF HYDROLOGIC NETWORK
INSTRUMENTATION, DATA ACQUISITION AND PROCESSING
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE
ICB No: MoWE/G-05/10
Project: Tana & Beles Integrated Water Resources
Development Project
IDA- Credit 44570-ET
Employer: Ministry of Water and Energy Country: Ethiopia
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSContent
1               General
2 
Basin Information System
2.1 
Component 1 Meteorological, hydrometric and ground water network and data
acquisition system............................................................................................................... ®
2.2 
Component 2 Air and Water quality sensors, water quality laboratory equipment
and tcrrcstrial/aquatic ecology kits1 i
2.3 
Component 3 Information system Hardware and Software11
3 
Supply and Installation of Hydrologic Network Instrumentation
and Data Acquisition and Processing Hardware and Software15
3.1       Objectives15
3.2       General Approach.............................................................................. ..............................16
3.3       Plan of the project development17
3.3.1    Design Principles17
3.3.2    Supply and Installation18
3.3.3    Acceptance.............................................................. ......................................................... 18
3.3.4    Training, Maintenance and guarantee79
4 
5 
Scope of Works19
General Requirements21
5.1 
Codes and standards
5.2 
Local Conditions
5.3 
General requirements for the technical proposal
22
6 
Technical Specifications: Component 1 Meteorological,
hydrometric and ground water network and data acquisition system24
6.1       Classification of Local Stations
6.1.1    Category I- Automated Rain gauge Stations with Telemetry
6.1.2    Category II- Class I Met stations (Automated Weather Stations) with Telemetry
6.1.3 Category Ill-Class III Met stations
6.1.4    Category IV-Class IV Met stations
6.1.5    Category V-Automated River gauging stations with Telemetry
6.1.6 Category Vl-Upgrading existing Ground Water stations
27
27
y7 7
-> 7 2 76.1.7      Category VII- New Ground Water stations............................................................................ 37
6.2         Telemetry.............................................................................................................................. 27
6.2.1      Featu res specifications......................................................................................................... 2 7
6.2.2     Ethio Telecom proposal..........................................................................................................39
6.2.3     Satellite telemetry.................................................................................................................. 41
6.3        Data Acquisition System.......................................................................................................41
6.4        Installation and commissioning............................................................................................ 42
6.5        Maintenance.......................................................................................................................... 44
6.6        Training.................................................................................................................................44
6.7        Equipment Specifications..................................................................................................... 45
6.7.1    General requirements.............................................................................................................45
6.7.2    Data Collection Equipment.................................................................................................... 45
6.7.3    GSM/GPRS Telemetry............................................................................................................52
6.7.4    Satellite telemetry................................................................................................................... 52
6.7.5    Meteorological Local Stations............................................................................................... 52
6.7.6    Automated Class I Stations.................................................................................................... 52
6.7.7    Class III Stations.................................................................................................................... 55
6.7.8    Class TV Stations................................................................................................................... 56
6.7.9    Automated rain gauge for FEWS only................................................................................... 56
6.7.10     Staff gauge price LT1 004................................................................................................... 57
6.7.11     Radar sensor for surface water-level measurement price LT1 005................................... 57
6.7.12     Pressure transducer........................................................................................................... 58
6.7.13     For groundwater level measurement price LT1 007..........................................................60
6.7.14     Turbidity sensor..................................................................................................................61
6.7.15     Current meter......................................................................................................................61
6.7.16     Sediment samplers...............................................................................................................64
6.7.17     Bank Operated Cableways..................................................................................................66
6.7.18     Portable trolley................................................................................................................... 67
6.7.19     Portable deep meter........................................................................................................... 67
6. 7.20     Existing wells rehabilitation price LT1        024.............................................................. 68
6.7.21     Logistics price LTI 025 .....................................................................................................  68
6.7.22     Central and secondary stations equipment- hardware, software,
communication front-end................................................................................................................... 68
6.7.23    Ancillary Equipments and    Tools......................................................................................75
6.7.24     Cabling and Connecting.....................................................................................................76
6.7.25     Construction Requirements       & Workmanship............................................................... 77
6.8        Bid Price and Contract Price..............................................................................  g3
6.9        Site Preparation and Installation Clause............................................................................. 846.10  Incidental Services Clause
6.11    Warranty Clause
6.12    Prices clarification
84
85
86
7              Technical Specifications-Component 2 Air and Water quality sensors, water quality laboratory equipment and terrestrial/aquatic ecology kits          93
7.1       Air quality station
7.2       Water quality Equipments^5
7.2.7      Water Quality monitoring equipment95
7.3       Water quality laboratory analytical equipment97
7.3.1   Spectrophotometers price LT2 004-—• 97
7.3.2    Fridge price LT2 010— 95
7.3.3    Washing facilities price LT2 Oil98
7.3.4    Bench work in ceramic or glass price LI 2 01299
7.3.5    Generator price LT2 013 
7.3.6   Set of Desk and chairs price LT2 01499
7.3.7   Air conditioner for laboratory and storage reagent room price LT2 01699
7.3.8    Other equipments price LT2 018.. 99
7.4       Water quality laboratory computer hardware/software99
7.4.1   Laptops... 
7.4.2    Printer price L T2 017100
7.5       Terrestrial and aquatic ecology kits100
7.5.1   Aquatic ecology set100
7.5.2    Terrestrial Ecology Fauna set price LT2 020 100
7.5.3   Soils and Land Degradation set price LT2 021jo}
7.5.4    Microscope price LT2 022
7.5.5   Binoculars, price LT2 023
7.5.6    Cameras price LT2 024................................................................................................ 7.5.7    Cameras with infra-red triggering price LT2 025
7.5.8    Plant presses: price LT2 026
7.6 Ancillary goods (furniture, vehicles, etc)......................................................................  IQ3
7.6.1    Motorized Boat price L T2 008j q j 7.7 P  7.6.2 ric4 w es chelareilf dr icaitvione car price LT2 009 jqj
93
99
99
8               Technical Specifications-Component 3 Information system Hardware and Software
8.1         Classification of Data Centres8.1.1    Category /- Sub-basin data Centres (central stations)............................................. 106
8.1.2     Category 11- Basin Data Centre (secondary station) ......................................... 106
8.1.3 Category Ill-Mo WE Data Centre (secondary station)................................................106
8.2       Installation, integration and commissioning........................................................... 106
8.3       Maintenance............................................................................................................ 106
8.4       Training...................................................................................................................106
8.5       Hardware and Software Specifications................................................................... 107
8.5.1  Software technical specifications.............................................................................. 10 7
8.5.2   Hardware tech n ical specifications.......................................................................... 113
8.5.3   Communication and Nctwoking................................................................................ 116
8.5.4    Cabling and Connecting..................................................................................... 117
8.6       Bid Price and Contract Price................................................................................... 117
8.7       Installation and integration Clause.......................................................................... 119
8.8       Incidental Services Clause.......................................................................................119
8.9       Warranty Clause...................................................................................................... 119
8.10     Prices clarification................................................................................................... 1211  General
The rational water resources planning  and  management in  Tana and  Boles sub-basins,  as well as the Abbay  Basin  as a whole,  calls for a sound  River Basin  Information  System (BIS), covering  all water-related  data with  respect to  characteristics,  quality,  availability  and  existing and  projected  demand  and  mitigations.  A key  clement of the BIS will be an  upgraded Hydrological Information  System (HIS),  which  will include the collection  of field  data at the required  intensity  and  frequency  from an  upgraded  network,  time-effective transmission,  data processing and analysis, and data storage.
The Ministry  of Water and  Energy  of Ethiopia (MOWE) invites proposals to  provide goods and  services for the implementation  of the Tana and  Beles Basin  Information  System (BIS). After completion,  the system will be managed  by  the Abbay  Basin  Authority  (ABA) in  Bahir Dar, with its two sub basin branch offices: one for Lake Tana: Tana sub basin branch office: TaSBBO in  Bahir Dar and  the other for the Beles: Beles sub  basin  branch  office: BcSBBO in Assosa.
2  Basin Information System
The project consists in  the realisation  of the Basin  information  system (BIS) based  on  the Hydrological information  system (HIS).  The concerned  basins are the Lake Tana basin  and Beles river basin.
The procurement for Supply and installation of a hydrologic network Instrumentation, and 
data acquisition and processing Hardware and Software would cover three components: first
covering meteorological, hydrometric and ground water network and data acquisition system, 
second component covering air and water quality and terrestrial and aquatic ecology 
instrumentation and third covering Information system Hardware and Software. The first
component includes sensors, telemetry, data receiving equipment, and data processing 
hardware and software, while the second component includes air and water quality measuring 
kits and sensors, water quality laboratory equipment and environment situation analysis kits. 
The third component includes hardware and software for the BIS. All components would 
involve supply, installation, calibration, testing and acceptance, maintenance, training, tools
and spares, and ancillary equipment and services.
The Bidder shall bid for three components.
2.1 Component 1 Meteorological, hydrometric and ground water network and data acquisition system
Component 1 includes:
a) IIIS climatological local stations (class 1, 3 and 4: see below)
b)  HIS  43  Hydrological  local  stations  with  sensors  (water  level,  turbidity  )  and  data collection  platforms.  Some  of  these  stations  (5)  are  dedicated  to  the  floods  earlv warning  system  (JEWS).  The  FEWS  system  is  equipped  with  a  dedicated  rainfall network composed of 19 automatic rain gauges (5 of these are jointed with the related hydrological  station).  All  of  these  43  local  stations  are  included  in  a  Teletransniission network (see table here below and figure n° 1).
Hydrological local stations equipment: PZR: piezo resistive water level sensor, HOC: bank operated cable,
DCP: data collection platform,Local stations (LS)
Equipment
Location
Price N°
Station name
Lat
Long
Remark
PZR
Radar
FEWS
DCP
Automatic Rain 
gauge
(deg)
(deg)
o
o CO
LTl
101
Lake Tana at B. Oar
11.6
37.39
existing  staff gauge to  be replaced
1
1
1
LTl
102
Lake Tana at Gorgora
12.2402
37.3016
existing  staff gauge to  be replaced
1
1
1
LTl
103
Lake Tana at Kunzila
11.9
37
AWLR not needed  if data EEPCO made available
0
LTl
104
Gondar reservoir
1
1
1
LTl
105
Koga
reservoir
1
1
1
LTl
106
Ribb 
reservoir
1
1
1
LTl
107
Koga         nr. Meraxvi
11.3718
37.0437
1
1
LTl
108
Angareb nr. Gondor
12.6453
37.4821
BOC      to      be repaired
1
1
1
LTl
109
Kerari        nr. Addis
Zemen
12.1197
37.8399
1
1
Staff gauge turbidity BOC new
repair
r--------- rLTl
110
Gelda        nr. Ainbessame
11.709
37.6379
1
1
LTl
111
Ribb         nr. Gasai
11.8
3S.15
1
1
LTl
1 12
Gcmcro
nr.Maksegnit
12.3905
37.551
1
1
I
LTl
113
Fegoda      nr Arbgcbeva
11.6287
37.7577
1
1
LTl
114
Garno       nr. Infranz
12.2365
37.6283
1
1
1
LTl
1)5
Killittie nr. Durbete
11.4771
36.9559
good profile/safe place for PZR
1
1
LTl
116
Amen         at Dangila
11.26
36.85
good profile/safc place for PZR
1
1
LTl
117
Quashini nr. A. Kidame
11.2
36.87
good profile/safe place for PZR
1
1
LTl
118
G. Abbay nr. Mcrawi
11.3642
37.035
serious repairs needed for cable car system
1
1
1
I
1
1
LTl
119
Ribb         nr. Addis
Zemen
11.9939
37.711
No  need  FEWS in  view u/s reservoir
1
1
1
LTl
120
Gumara nr.. B. Dar
11.8383
37.6364
1
1
1
1
1
1
LTl
121
Mcgecli    nr. Azezo
12.4872
37.4473
1
1
1
1
1
1
LTl
122
Upper     Rib nr. D.Tabor
12.04
37.99
DCP to  be adapted  to  the existing  water level recorder
1
LTl
123
G. Abbay at Shimba
11.7062
37.1684
1
1
1
1
1
ILTI
124
Dirma         at Kola Diba
12.4271
37.3262
1
1
1
1
LTI
125
Abbay        at Bahr Dar
11.59
37.41
Teletransmission of    Q    data    to TaSBo
1
1
LTI
126
G.  Beles  nr. Mandura
11.1658
36.3383
DCP to  be adapted  to  the existing  water level recorder
LTI
127
Main     Beles at Bridge
11.1997
36.3265
1
1
LTI
128
Beles          at Dangur
11.14
35.83
site investigation needed  u/s coordinates
given
1
1
1
1
1
LTI
130
Lower Beles
u/s
Renaissance reservoir 2
11.1327
35.4708
temporary site
1
1
1
LTI
131
Upper Beles d/s tailrace HP
Teletransmission ofQ      data      to TaSBo
1
I
1
LTI
132
Enjcbara Pal
10.98
36.92
1
1
LTI
133
Merawi
11.41
37.15
1
1
LTI
134
Sekcla
11.00
37.22
1
1
LTI
135
Arb Gebeya
11.63
37.74
1
1
LTI
136
Addis
Zemen
12.13
37.78
1
1I
LT1
137
Hanwsit
11.78
37.55
l
1
I
LTI
138
Mekane
Yesus
11.60
38.06
1
1
LTI
139
Woreta
11.92
37.68
1
1
LTI
140
Amba
Giogis
12.77
37.60
1
1
LTI
141
Gonder
12.55
37.42
1
1
LTI
142
Bahar Dar
11.60
37.42
1
1
LTI
143
Gassaie
11.79
38.14
1
1
LTI
144
Dcbre Tabor
11.85
38.01
1
1
LTI
145
Dangeta
11.25
36.83
1
1
13
14
5
10
8
5
2
43
19c) HIS ground  water monitoring  system composed  of 14  existing  wells to  be rehabilited, and  6  new wells (under construction  in  the frame of another contract) will be installed. This system will be composed  of water level sensor and  data loggers.  These stations arc out of the teletransmission network.
d)      HIS   Communication   network:   the   local   stations   (LS),   i.e.   all   the   43   hydrological stations    (b),    FEWS    and    related    rainfall    network    included,    are    connected    to    a teletransmission   network   by   means   of   local   data   collection   platforms.   Through   this communication   network,   information   from   local   stations   will   be   transferred   to   the Central   stations   (CS)   of   TaSBBO   and   BcSBBO.   Some   processed   information   will   be transmitted   from   these   CS   to   Secondary   stations   (SS)   (ABA,   MOWE   ...),   see   the related  map  here  below.  The  Contractor  will  include,  in  the  frame  of  this  component the front end supervisor equipment in each CS (hardware and software).
This IHS network  (gprs type and  satellite for FEWS) will be provided  by  Ethio  telecom (El'). For this reason,  the Contractor will contract with  ET  since the installation  of the equipment, till the end  of the warranty  period.  After this period,  this contract will be surrender to  the Operator / end user (ABA) of the project.
2.2   Component  2  Air  and  Water  quality  sensors,  water quality    laboratory    equipment    and    terrestrial/aquatic ecology lots
Component 2 includes:
a)   HIS   qualitative   measurements:   a   water   quality   monitoring   system   will   be   installed, composed   of   portative   and   field   laboratories   equipment.   It   will   include   some   kits   for environment monitoring in Tana and Belcs basins.
2.3 Component 3 Information system Hardware and Software
Component 3 includes:
a)  BIS  Hardware  and  basic  Software  at  Central  and  Secondary  stations.  Specific  software for data processing is provided in the frame of another contract.
Links between technical specifications and prices
The technical specifications related  to  each  kind  of equipment or services to  be provided  by the contractor arc linked  with  one or several prices as specified  in  the text.  The wording  of the prices is: LT  n  YYY with  LT  n  = COMPONENT number from n=l to  n=3  and  YYY = the price number inside the component.  Consequently  the technical specifications must be read  as prices definitions.12 3C N
•jrcrot
□7W£
3WE
»WE
Figure n°l: Stations network and Data Centres
HOU^I
MOC.HUpdated Meteorological stations
Class 1
• Class 3
< Class 4
Updated Hydrometric stations
- Staff Gauge
Roads
----------- All-weather roads (asphalt)
-------- All-weather roads (g-avel)
--------- Dry-weather roads
----------- Motorable tracks (status uncertain)
New meteorological stations
o       Class 1
o       Class 3
o       Class 4
Groundwater wells
♦ Existing Grouixlwaler wells
-• New Groundwater wells
Tana & Beles Subbasins
j Bales
Tana
| j Lakes
• Towns
3     Supply    and    Installation    of    Hydrologic    Network Instrumentation  and  Data  Acquisition  and  Processing Hardware and Software
3.1  Objectives
The main objectives are as follows:
(a)    Upgrade  existing  field  stations  and  implement  new  stations  and  procure  equipment  for improved   monitoring   of   basin   status   (rainfall   and   weather,   river   flow,   ground   water level,   air   and   water   quality   and   terrestrial   and   aquatic   ecology   data)   with   sensors capable    of    providing    measurements    and    transmission    at    specified    accuracy    and frequency;    and    ii)    procure    information    system    hardware    and    software    for    data processing, storage and dissemination
(b)   Installation  of  required  civil  works  to  house  the  proposed  instrumentation  at  the  field station level.
(c)    Reliable  telemetry  system  for  the  transmission  of  data  from  the  field  stations  to  the data acquisition and storage centra! stations, and data offset to secondaiy stations
(d)  Install and commission water quality laboratory equipment.
?e) Supply ancillary' equipment to suppon effective field data collection.
(f)    Utilize  GSM/GPRS  communications  and  /  or  satellite  data  relay  service  (for  FEWS network  only)  to  transmit  data  in  real  lime  from  remote  stations  to  the  central  data receiving centres (central stations).
(g)    Contract   station   maintenance   to   support   operational   data   acquisition   during   warranty and post-warranty periods
(h)   Contract  appropriate  training  for  staff  of  MoWE,  ABA/SBBOs  to  fully  understand  the operation ot the installation to ensure effective take-over of data acquisition system.
(i)     Establish   data   receiving   centers   for   acquisition,   primary   validation   and   archival   of real-time data from remote stations (central stations).
/Data communication  will be GSM/GPRS as primary  channel for all local stations,  and satellite as secondary  channel for FEWS local stations only,  based  on  the crucial nature of the data and/or availability  of GSM/GPRS.  The Mo  WE  will facilitate all the arrangements with the Ethio  Telecom,  satellite operator,  and  other government entities involved  in  these communications.  The Contractor will be responsible for making  all arrangements for local area networking and WAN.
The Bidder must provide a detailed  methodological report including  detailed  descriptions of the essential technical performance or other relevant characteristics of all key  hardware, software,  and  other goods and  services offered  in  the bid  (e.g.,  version,  release and  model numbers).  Without sufficient clear detail,  the bids run  the risk  of being  declared  non- rcsponsive.  The Bidder must provide an  item-by-item commentary  on  the Purchaser s Technical Specifications,  demonstrating  the substantial responsiveness of the overall design of the System and  the individual software,  goods and  services offered  to  those Technical Specifications.  The Bid  shall provide an  overview of the Quality  Assurance Protocol (QAP) that will be in  place during  the development and  implementation  of the systems as described. The Quality  Assurance Protocol shall also  define the Acceptance Protocol that shall be executed  during  the delivery  of the project.  The primary  goals of the Acceptance Protocol are (i) to  ascertain  the delivery  and  completeness of all ordered  products and  related  services and documents,  and  (ii) to  check  the functioning of the whole system in  a formal way  against the specifications by  application  of Acceptance Tests.  The tests will also  verify  the stability, performance,  velocity,  capacity,  compatibility  and  correctness of the systems and  results. 
The Bidder must provide details of the expected annual operating cost for each element of the automatic measurement and communication systems and for the total system.
The Technical Specifications consist of the installation  of the data acquisition  system for the two  sub-basins of Abhay  river basin.  This shall include the design,  manufacture,  factory testing,  deliver to  site,  installation  (including  the associated  interface wiring/termination), commissioning  and  site acceptance testing,  supply  of mandatory  spares,  training  and documentation.  Data Collection  Platforms (DCP),  monitoring  system hardware and  software shall interface and be fully integrated and tested with the Earth Receiving Station (ERS) to be provided  and  established  at Bahir Dar central station  for FEWS data receiving  The requirements are given  below in  respect of each  major component of the system.  The Contractor shall ensure that the fundamental requirements slated  in  this document arc not compromised. Further details are also provided in Inspections and Tests.
Concerning  computers (Component 3),  Specific Software are excluded  of the present procurement.  Free softwares will be installed  by  the Client.  VPN/intemet connectivity  and services are under the responsibility  of the Contractor.  The Contractor’s responsibility  is to supply,  install and  commission  all specified  computer hardware and  software and  provide communication and networking within and between systems.
3.3 Plan of the project development
3.3.1 Design Principles
As an  extension  of the methodological report carried  out during  the Bidding  procedure the Contractor will start with lire esiablisliment of the design of the project. This design will have to receive the approval of the Client before starting the supply.
It consists in the establishment for each site of the design of the equipment concerned by the contract, in accordance with the general dispositions defined in lire present specifications * 
The contractor will indicate the methods that he employs to guarantee the quality of his
services.
At the least,  he will meet the requirements described  in  the following  sections,  considering 
point by point each element in his leclurical proposal. 
’'(j)  Supply, install, and commission Hardware and related Software in the Central and Secondary stations for BIS operations.
(k)  Supply ancilliary equipment to support effective operation of computer systems
(l)   Connect different computer systems within and at different locations
(m) Contract maintenance support for operations of computer systems during warranty and post-warranty periods
(n) Contract appropriate training for staff of MoWE, ABA/SBBOs to fully understand the operation of the installation to ensure effective take-over of computer systems.
3.2   General Approach
The  concept  of  implementation  on  which  the  present  technical  specifications  and  special conditions  arc  based  intends  to  combine  the  advantages  of  modem  data  measurement,  data storage,  processing  and  data  communication  technologies  with  the  requirements  of  high availability  and  sustainability  required  for  sound  basin  management.  Considering  current capacity  constraints  in  regard  to  budget,  staff,  skills,  and  in-country  maintenance  support  a combination of traditional manual stations and automated stations with real-time telemetry is proposed.  Preference  will  be  given  to  robust,  reliable  and  currently  operational  technology. Some  data  collection  sites  arc  located  in  very  remote  areas and  may  be  accessible  only  for occasional maintenance, and so the selection of equipment and civil design will consider this aspect.  The  cost  of  servicing  a  real  time  hydrologic  network  will  exceed  the  cost  of  the purchase several times over the life of the network. It is, therefore, of central importance that the  network  has  the  greatest  possible  reliability,  thus  minimizing  the  maintenance  to  the extent  possible.  Special  protection  against  environmental  factors  such  as  climate,  natural hazards, vandalism, etc) is often justified, even at high initial costs.
Wherever  possible,  the  Contractor  should  combine  data  from  stations  or  sensors  in  close proximity  using  wireless,  unlicensed  radio  transmissions  to  a  single  point,  then  employing GSM/GPRS data communications from a  single  location.  Satellite data relay  service may be used  as  a  back  up  of  the  FEWS  part  of  the  network.  For  instance,  there  are  numerous locations  where  a  rain  gauge  will  be  located  within  the  proximity  of  a  rivcr/rcservoir  water level  sensor.  These  sensors  should  be combined  within  a  single  station  which  will  eliminate the  costs  of  GSM/GPRS  transmitters  and  the  recurring  costs  associated  with  these  devices. Central  data  receiving  stations  at  Bahir  Dar  and  Asosa  shall  accept  both  SMS  and  data communication  from  remote  stations.  Data  transfer  from  central  to  higher-level  data  centres (secondary' stations) are covered in the bid as it is a BIS function (software and hardware are covered in Component 3). Unlicensed wireless communication devices may be required to be certified for use in Ethiopia by the competent authority.
Maintenance  is  an  integral  part  of  any  system  and  a  system  that  has  the  challenges  of unattended  operation  in  remote,  exposed  areas  stresses  the  need  for  a  well  thought-out approach  to  maintenance.  The  corrective  maintenance  will  be  required  for  data  collection issues, whether they may be component failures or due to environmental issues. To minimize corrective  maintenance  and  to  increase  the  performance  of  the  monitoring  network,  a  well- organized    preventative    maintenance    plan    is    highly    recommended.    The    preventive maintenance  is  required  for  all  system  components  as  well  as  the  infrastructure  in  place  to house  the  electronic  data  collection  components.  It  is  recognized  that  the  maintenance  of  a monitoring  network  is  often  grossly  underestimated  as  well  as  underperformed  task.  This leads  to  reduced  life  expectancy  of  the  equipment  and  possibly  the  collection  of  misleading data  during  the  period  of  operation.  A  strong  maintenance  plan  will  be  the  foundation  for sustaining  the  monitoring  network  operation  over  the  expected  lifetime  of  the  technology, which is considered to be 10-15 years.• as-built drawings.
The whole of these documents shall be supplied, correctly updated. 3.3.4 Training, Maintenance and guarantee
Sec chapters below of the present technical specifications document.
4  Scope of Works
An overview of the tasks and responsibilities arc given here below:
a)   Technical design and configuration of the system (see above),
b)   Supply measuring and associated equipment as per technical specifications,
c)    Supply  of  all  hardware  and  software  components,  All  Servers,  Windows  Clients,  Disk Storage    System,    Back-up    storage    devices,    Network    Switches,    etc.    along    with peripherals and accessories are to be supplied as per the specifications mentioned.
All cables,  connectors and  other accessories required  to  complete the system integration,  must be supplied  by  the Contractor.  Any  software (system or otherwise) required to make the system functional must also be provided.
All OS and  other software (including  image processing  and  GIS) as specified  in  the specifications must be installed  and  the media & necessary  licenses must be provided in the name of the client.
The entire system shall be integrated in a LAN environment, as per the scope of work defined along with the specifications of hardware. The Contractor has to carry out the structured UTP Cabling for LAN so as to integrate all the equipment’s of the project
The Contractor has to provide an integration / engineering document for the complete
system configuration. This document shall be self-contained in all respects and shall include drawings, configuration schemes, configuration details, etc.
d)           Establish Front end to collect GPRS and satellite relayed data in central and secondary stations.  This  shall  include  a  computer  that  will  support  the  reception  of  the  data stream.    This    consists    of    acquiring    all    hardware    and    software,    installation, configuration, operation and maintenance sendees for five years.
c)           Implementation of the required civil works al field level,
f)   Contracting with Ethio Telecom for the Telemetry network,
g)   The architecture of the system comprises two ccutral stations one in BeSBBO and one in   TaSBBO.   These   central   stations   are   for   data   acquisition   from   local   stations, validation  and  first  processing.  Then  secondary  stations  are  also  included  for  higher level of processing, in ABA and MOWE. The contractor will establish data acquisition central stations at Bahir Dar and Asosa to process information from the data collection systems.  This  includes  the  supply  of  appropriate  servers  and  processing  software  This software  shall  validate  and  store  data  collected  by  the  GSM/GPRS  and  Satellite receiving  stations.  The  software  system  will  include  data  quality  control  that  shall allow  for  the  flagging  and/or  removal  of  data  using  threshold  analysis.  Easy  to  use interface  allowing  sensor  by  sensor  quality  control  for  threshold  and  rate  of  change data screening is required. The software will include a web bused dissemination tool to allow  for  the  viewing  of  graphs,  plots  and  the  export  of  data  in  comma  separated variable  (CSV)  format.  The  software  shall  also  export  data  to  the  Decision  Support System  (DSS)  via  XML  tagged  data  in  real  time,  but  just  after  the  data  has  been screened by the automatic data quality control process. Data delivery' to the DSS will be   to   a   hot   directory,   with   records   being   written   to   this   directory   after   each transmission  from  GSN1/GPRS  or  satellite.  In  addition,  it  shall  be  possible  to  export data to secondary' stations in Bahir Dar and MOWE for FEWS data.The objective is to describe the system to be implemented from the point of view of:
‘ organisation of the system,
•    capacities and performances ;
•    reliability and sustainability,
This design is earned out on the basis of:
•    the present specifications;
•    the technical proposal of the contractor;
•    the quality and acceptance plans,
•    previous studies concerning this project and particularly the design of the Basin information system (MOWE 2012)
The document will describe (document and drawings) the characteristics of each elements of the system; the constraints of implementation, the study of the installation of the equipment. It will include (he detailed  program of the works,  till the end  of the guarantee period.  This document will be delivered in draft version to the Client for approval, in five hardcopies and five soft copies (CD). The final version will include the Client requirements and be submitted 2  weeks after receiving  the Client’s requirements,  in  five hardcopies and  five soft copies (CD).
The cost of this design will be included in the costs of related equipment.
3.3.2    Supply and Installation
The objective of this phase is to supply, install and verify the functioning of the whole of the equipment on site and to validate the documentation.
This phase is done on die basis of:
•    the dossiers of the preceding phase;
•    the quality plan.
3.3.3    Acceptance
The  acceptance  will  be  an  onsite  acceptance  after  testing  procedures  and  one  month  of operational working.
The requested documentation will be:
•    plan of tests ;
•    log of acceptances;
•    user’s manual;
•      manual  of  operation  of  the  system  (  describing  the  procedures  for  starting  and stopping  the  applications  correctly,  following  a  shutdown  of  the  equipment;  normal operation and degraded mode).
« maintenance manual;
•    manual of configuration of equipment;
manual of architecture of the communications (describing  the interconnections between  pieces of equipment,  nodes,  network  address,  procedures of exchanges of data and exchanged data);
•    documentation of the software developer;
•    documentation of the constructor of the equipment; ‘ drawing of general setting out of equipment;The objective is to describe the system to be implemented from the point of view of.
•    organisation of the system,
*    capacities and performances ;
r  reliability and sustainability,
This design is carried out on the basis of:
*    the present specifications;
•    the technical proposal of the contractor,
- die quality and acceptance plans,
c  previous studies concerning this project and particularly the design of the Basin information system (MOWE 2012)
The document will describe (document and  drawings) the characteristics of each  elements of the system; the constraints of implementation,  the study  of the installation  of the equipment.  It will include the detailed  program of the works,  till the end  of the guarantee period.  This document will be delivered  in  draft version  to  the Client for approval,  in  five hardcopies and five soft copies (CD).  The final version  will include the Client requirements and  be submitted 2  weeks after receiving  the Client’s requirements,  in  five hardcopies and  five soft copies (CD).
The cost of this design will be included in the costs of related equipment.
3.3.2    Supply and Installation
The objective of tills phase is to supply, install and verify the functioning of the whole of the equipment on site and to validate the documentation.
This phase is done on the basis of:
•    the dossiers of the preceding phase;
» the quality plan.
3.3.3    Acceptance
The   acceptance   will   be   an   onsite   acceptance   after   testing   procedures   and   one   month   of operational working.
The requested documentation will be:
•    plan of tests ;
- log of acceptances;
•    user’s manual;
■   manual   of   operation   of   the   system   (   describing   the   procedures   for   startinn   and stopping  the  applications  correctly,  followmg  a  shutdown  of  the  equipment-  normal
operation and degraded mode). 
‘ maintenance manual;
manual of configuration of equipment;
manual of architecture of the communications (describing the interconnections between pieces of equipment, nodes, network address, procedures of exchangesnf
’
data and exchanged data);
•    documentation of the software developer;
*    documentation of the constructor of the equipment; > drawing of general setting out of equipment;
'     ‘ ° OI- as-built drawings.
The whole of these documents shall be supplied, correctly updated. 3.3.4      Training, Maintenance and guarantee
See chapters below of the present technical specifications document.
4 Scope of Works
An overview of the tasks and responsibilities are given here below:
a)   Technical design and configuration of the system (sec above),
b)   Supply-measuring and associated equipment as per technical specifications,
c)     Supply  of  all  hardware  and  software  components,  All  Servers,  Windows  Clients,  Disk Storage    System,    Back-up    storage    devices,    Network    Switches,    etc.    along    with peripherals and accessories are to be supplied as per the specifications mentioned.
All cables,  connectors and  other accessories required  to  complete the system integration,  must be supplied  by  the Contractor.  Any  software (system or otherwise) required to make the system functional must also be provided.
All OS and  other software (including  image processing  and  GIS) as specified  in  the specifications must be installed  and  the media & necessary  licenses must be provided in the name of the client.
The entire system shall be integrated in a LAN environment, as per the scope of work 
defined along with the specifications of hardware. The Contractor has to carry out the
structured UTP Cabling for LAN so as to integrate all the equipment’s of the project. 
The Contractor has to provide an integration / engineering document for the complete
system configuration. This document shall be self-contained in all respects and shall
include drawings, configuration schemes, configuration details, etc.
d)    Establish  Front  end  to  collect  GPRS  and  satellite  relayed  data  in  central  and  secondary stations.   This   shall   include   a   computer   that   will   support   the   reception   of   die   data stream.     This     consists     of     acquiring     all     hardware     and     software,     installation, configuration, operation and maintenance services for five years.
e)   Implementation of the required civil works at field level,
f)   Contracting with Elhio Telecom for the Telemetry network,
g)    The  architecture  of  the  system  comprises  two  central  stations  one  in  BcSBBO  and  one in   TaSBBO.   These   central   stations   are   for   data   acquisition   from   local   stations, validation   and   first   processing.   Then   secondary   stations   are   also   included   for   higher level  of  processing,  in  ABA  and  MOWE.  The  contractor  will  establish  data  acquisition central  stations  at  Bahir  Dar  and  Asosa  to  process  information  from  the  data  collection systems.  This  includes  the  supply  of  appropriate  servers  and  processing  software.  Tliis software   shall   validate   and   store   data   collected   by   the   GSM/GPRS   and   Satellite receiving   stations.   The   software   system   will   include   data   quality   control   that   shall allow  for  the  flagging  and/or  removal  of  data  using  threshold  analysis.  Easy  to  use interface  allowing  sensor  by  sensor  quality  control  for  threshold  and  rate  ol  change data  screening  is  required.  The  software  will  include  a  web  based  dissemination  tool  to allow  for  the  viewing  of  graphs,  plots  and  the  export  of  data  in  comma  separated variable  (CS\  )  format.  The  software  shall  also  export  data  to  the  Decision  Support System  (DSS)  via  XML  lagged  data  in  real  time,  but  just  after  the  data  has  been screened  by  the  automatic  data  quality  control  process.  Data  delivery  to  the  DSS  will be   to   a   hot   director)',   with   records   being   written   to   this   directory   after   each transmission  from  GSM/GPRS  or  satellite.  Ln  addition,  it  shall  be  possible  to  export data to secondary stations in Bahir Dar and MOWE for FEWS data.h)
Provide ancillary equipments to the central and secondary stations such a P . modems and routers necessary to route data through an INTRANET. Provide b P resources, such as high availability hard disk drives capable of backing up all sy c software with 20 years of data.
»
i)     Supply  DCP  programming  and  data  download  computers  such  as  PDAs  and  Rugged Laptop/Tablct  computers  as  specified  in  the  Equipment  Specifications,  1  he  Contractor is  required  to  acquire  equipments  that  will  be  used  solely  by  the  Contractor  to  provide the aforementioned services, and will be of the same make and type as that provided to the MoWE.
j)    Supply tools and spares required for assembly and maintenance of supplied goods.
k)    Supply  on-site  spares  to  repair  any  part  of  the  remote  stations  upon  determination  of maltunction   or   failure.   This   includes,   but   is   not   limited   to   DCP,   sensors   and accessories required in the operation of the real time data acquisition system.
l)   Supply detailed operation and maintenance manual for each component in the system.
m)   Provide  classroom  and  field  trainings  to  the  sufficient  number  of  specified  personnel on  the  data  acquisition  system.  This  includes  operation  and  maintenance  procedures. Training will also occur at selected field locations as selected by the Purchaser.
n)    Provision  for  Warranty  services  for  two  years  after  the  Final  Acceptance  of  the  data acquisition system.
o)     Provision   for   post-warranty   maintenance   services   for   three   years   after   closure   f warranty period.
p)    A  guarantee  by  the  manufacturer  that  all  equipments  being  provided  will be  supported with spares for a minimum of ten years after tne commissioning of the data acquisition system.
q)    Integrate  with  real  time  data  acquisition  system  (RTDAS)  and  back-up  acquisition system with SMS/manual entry.
r)   For procured software, all licenses and maintenance agreements should be in the name
of Purchaser and should seek full support and updates for such software for the
duration of the warranty period.
s)   Installation including ancillary services (civil/electrical works, enclosure and fencin'*
etc),  testing,  commissioning  of the hydrologic data collection  network  with  the participation  and  involvement of Implementing  Agency  personnel (ABA,  MOWE  and cooperating agencies such as NMA, EPLAU, etc),
t)     Specific  user  training  related  to  field  equipment,  Telemetry  network,  hardware  and software...
u)  Technical operation and maintenance support (manuals, users guides, ...)
v)    Maintenance  services  during  2  years  guarantee  period  to  commence  immediately  after the  Final  Acceptance  and  for  three  years  post-warranty  to  include  all  components  at the field stations as well as all newly acquired equipments in the central and secondary stations and provide installation and maintenance reports as required by the Purchaser
w)  Acceptance process, in the presence of the Client or his designated representative
x)  Two years warranty from the date of issue of acceptance,
y)   Maintenance contract proposal lor the next three years after warranty period5  General Requirements
5.1 Codes and standards
Design  and  specification  of all work  will be in  accordance with  latest laws and  regulations of the Federal Government,  with  applicable local codes and  ordinances,  and  with  codes and industry  standards referenced  herein.  Following  is a summary  of organizations with  codes and standards referenced herein.
•     NEMA 250 (1997) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
< NEMA ICS 1 (2000) Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements
•     NEMA ICS 2 (2000) Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and 
Overload Relays Rated 600 volts
•     NEMA ICS 4 (2000) Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks
« NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2001) Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures
•     NFPA 70 (2002) National Electrical Code
•     UL 1059 (2001) Terminal Blocks
•     UL 508 (1999; Rev thru Dec 1002) Control Equipment
•     ANSI C37.90 (1989) Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power
Apparatus
•     ANSI C37.90.1 (1989) Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Test for Protective Relay 
and Relay Systems
•     EIA ANSI/E1A7TIA-232-F (2002) Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and 
Data Circuit Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange
•     IEEE C62.41 (1991) Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC
Power Circuits
•     IEEE Std 100 (2000) IEEE Standard Dictionary' of Electrical and Electronics Terms
•     IEEE Std 802.4 (1990; R 1995) information Processing Systems, Local Area
Networks
■ IEC 60870-6, Telecontrol Equipment and Systems
•     IEC 61850, Communication Networks and Systems in Substations
•     IEEE 1379, Recommended Practice for Data Communications between Intelligent
Electronic Devices and Remote Terminal Units in a Substation.
-     IEEE-1379 Recommended Practice for communications between IED and RTUs
-        IEEE   C37.115,   Standard   Test   Method   for   Use   in   the   Evaluation   of   Message Communications   between   Intelligent   Electronic   Devices   in   an   Integrated   Substation Protection, Control, and Data Acquisition System
Codes and  Standards: Design  and  specification  of all work  will be in  accordance with  laLest laws and  regulations of the Stale of Ethiopia,  with  applicable local codes and  ordinances,  and with codes and industry* standards referenced herein.
5.2 Local Conditions
The  project  area  comprises  Lake  1  ana  and  Beles  River  Basins  for  field  instrumentation,  Bahir Dar and Asosa for Central stations and Bahir Dar and Addis Ababa for secondary stations.Although  it  is  not  intended  that  the  stations  of  the  project  will  have  to  be  installe  in  regions with very limited access facilities, this may happen for some of them.
According   to   environmental   conditions,   special   attention   should   be   given   to   water   eve sensors since many rivers contain a high concentration of suspended solids.
All stations must be protected against vandalism by security and hiding systems.
5.3 General requirements for the technical proposal
The technical information contained within this document is conceptual in nature and it is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide the necessary technical evidence of having the best
solution for each of the identified Project elements and for the system as a whole. 
To guarantee optimum system performance and ensure the long-term operation of the system, 
the following criteria will be considered in the assessment of the responsiveness and technical
quality of the proposed systems.
For components 1 and 2
a)    Durability  of  equipment  and  instrumentation  to  be  not  less  than  10  years  under  a  regular maintenance  program,  to  be  substantiated  by  statistical  information  and  operational  evidence from similar previous installations in operation over a minimum period of 5 (five) years.
b)   All  equipment  and  instrumentation  must  be  suitable  to  work  in  local  climatic  conditions (rainy   season   particularly)   with   no   loss   of   data   while   maintaining   full   accuracy   of measurements and data transmission capacity.
c)  All  equipment  and  instrumentation  shall  be installed  in  a way  to  minimise  the  risks  related to natural hazards (e.g. lightning), vandalism and theft.
d) All equipment and instrumentation shall be easy to use with a user-friendly interface.
c)  All  equipment  and  instrumentation  must  be  easy  for  the  Administrations  to  service  and maintain, as well as to repair for minor malfunctions.
f)    System   technologies   and   software   shall   be   selected   considering   the   affordability   of operation    and    maintenance    costs.    Statistical    or    operational    evidence    from    previous installations  of  the  estimated  cost  of  maintenance  and  operations  over  a  minimum  period  of five (5) years shall be used to evaluate this aspect.
g)    Flexibility,  expandability  and  openness  of  the  proposed  software  must  be  mentioned  by the Contractor.
For Component 3:
a)  Only  minimum  specifications  are  indicated  in  the  bid,  and  supplier  is  required  to  comply and  nuote  for  all  the  necessary'  modules/  components/  equipment  for  successful  integration of  all  hardware  eauipment’s.  Mere  compliance  to  the  specifications  will  not  absolve  the responsibility  of  the  supplier,  but  should  work  for  total  integration  and  operation  of  the computer   systems.   Any   other   Hardware,   Software,   Drivers,   Licenses,   networking   etc required  making  the  system  fully  operational  and  integrated  and  its  functionalities  7lik^
Utilities, etc.) will be in the scope of supplier/Contractor. 
k
b)   All  the  hardware  equipment  and  accessories  should  be  of  the  latest  make  state  of  the-art teclmology  and  new.  At  the  time  of  dispatch  of  the  hardware,  if  the  offered  equipment  is rendered   obsolete/   End   of   Life   by   respective   OEMs,   higher   version   of   model   / specification  (of  same  make)  arc  to  be  offered  by  the  supplier  with  the  consent  of  the client without any upward price implications.
c)  All software will be provided in English version and will be compliant with the targeted processor architecture. Software licenses I utilities / hardware etc. reauired arp k,> provided in the name of the client.
d)  The Local Area Network (LAN) is required to communicate data amongst a oroun nr computers, servers and devices of different kinds. The Wide Area Network corresponds m the network installed through which the remote offices and users, using their commit^ shall be able to access the IIIS and BIS data. The wide ara network shal" ut teclmology such as Virtual Private Network (VPN) for remote access as well as siie-to- site.e) Supplier shall indicate make & model of the quoted  equipment along  with  relevant detailed  Technical catalogues/brochures.  The Technical information  provided  along  with bid should be sufficient to evaluate the material to be supplied.
f)      The   hardware   and   software   must   cany   comprehensive   onsite   Warranty   and   technical support for two (2) years and post-warranty annual maintenance contract lor three years.
g)     Sufficient  number  of  OEM  racks  should  be  provided  to  accommodate  the  rack  mounted servers along with monitors, storage system and oilier accessories.
h)     The   equipment/system   offered   must   confirm   to   the   minimum   technical   requirements   as spelt out in the technical specifications.
i)      The   successful   bidder   shall   submit   brochures,   plans,   engineering   drawings   etc.   and   get prior approval before commissioning of equipments.
j)      Bidders  shall  quote  for  the  complete  requirement  of  goods  and  services  specified  under each  schedule  on  a  single  responsibility  basis,  failing  which,  such  bids  will  not  be  taken into  account  for  evaluation  and  will  not  be  considered  for  award.  The  successful  bidder shall   submit   brochures,   plans,   engineering   drawings   etc.   and   get   prior   approval   before commissioning of equipment’s.
The   Quality   Assurance   Protocol   and   Acceptance   Protocol   shall   be   further   detailed   by   the Contractor at the beginning of the Project in the design document.6  Technical Specifications: Component 1 Meteorological, hydrometric and  ground  water network  and  data acquisition system
General technical specifications
It is pointed  out that the manufacturer will have to  give detailed  answers to  all the specifications requested,  especially  when  his equipment docs not fit these specifications, either partly or completely.
The Data acquisition equipment will have to meet the needs of the project and notably:
' They will be automatic and self-powered,
-    They will allow on site acquisition of water level data and meteorological data,
•    Automatic programmed transmission of these data through the Teletransmission 
system;
Data acquisition equipment shall be:
■ a multi-channel configuration for surface water and complete meteorological stations networks, and will be called Data Collection Platform (DcP here after)
•    a single channel configuration for groundwater rain gauges network , and will be
called Logger here after.
All the components of the Data acquisition  equipment must meet or exceed  the requirements established  by  the present terms of reference,  and  eventually  by  the Telctransmission operator.
The DCP equipment, delivered by the manufacturer, will be composed of:
•    electronics for data acquisition and storage;
•    GPRS transmitter receiver kit,
•    autonomous power supply device with battery and solar panel,
-    Watertight housing units for these items and their appropriate fixing. The DCP itself
should be in a protective box.
•    sensors and their connections to the outstation
•    Documentation on the DCP and the sensors.
Environmental Conditions
The DCP shall be designed  and  manufactured  to  provide equipment protected  against die severe environmental conditions in  which  it will be operating.  A facility  to  earth  die DCP shall be provided; The DCP shall be capable of working in the temperature range - 40°C to +60°C,  Relative Humidity  range 0  to  100% and  in  saline atmosphere,  without any  alteration of the data measured.  The electronics shall be in  a watertight box,  i.e.  TP65  standard minimum.
The  DCP  shall  widistand  storage  temperatures  in  (he  range  of  -40°C  to  +60°C,  without  any deterioration or further related malfunctions.
The DCP shall widistand  the environmental conditions expected  during  normal shipping  by air,  land  or sea including  road  transportation  on  unmade roads.  The DCP shall be fully protected against dust and temporary immersion.
The  antenna  shall  be  suitable  for  use  in  all  forms  of  precipitation  and  be  capable  of withstanding wind speeds up to 150 km/h.Lightning  arresters  will  be  installed  on  each  local  station  in  order  to  protect  the  whole installed equipment.Field equipments
Field  Equipments arc implemented  in  local stations,  which  include sensors and  data loggers, or data collection  platforms,  housing  and  related  civil works,  and  instrumentation  for measurements and calibrations.
General
Long  term reliability  and  efficiency  of the instrumentation  at the field  station  level is critical to  (he successful achievement of the project objectives.  Accordingly,  under this Tender manufacturers and  suppliers of hydro-meteorological equipment (data loggers and  sensors) will be required to demonstrate significant experience and deployment of the technologies and instrumentation being proposed by them.
At the field  station  level the Bidder will need  to  demonstrate that the proposed instrumentation  can  be easily  and  effectively  integrated  into  a fully  functional system,  where the data logger is fully  compatible with  the sensor,  transmission,  and  power supply  devices and where all components have the same level of importance and reliability.
The Bidder shall include a schematic design  for each  field  station,  including  the instrumentation  and  the proposed  civil works,  and  demonstrate how the system components will be organized  and  their level of integration.  In  addition,  the Bidder will describe the system to be used to ground the components and protect all from lightning.
A pre Bid meeting will be organized (see BDS / ITB 7): the purpose of the meeting will be to clarify issues and to answer questions on any matter that may be raised at that stage
In  order to  understand  local site requirements and  local technical aspects,  the Bidder must visit most of all hydrometric field  sites (local stations) and  some meteorological and hydrogeological ones for the assessment of instrumentation  and  installation  requirements. The Bidder will visit also  Central and  Secondary  stations where data will be collected  and processed (see ITB 7).
Field inspection visits shall be agreed upon through official communication with the MOWE representative and Bidders are required to transmit the request for a field visit at least one
week in advance of the proposed visit. During these visits, the Bidder will be allowed to 
discuss all potential problems and to seek clarification from the MOWE representative
officers.
Travel  cost  associated  with  the  field  site  inspections  will  be  borne  by  the  Bidder  and  is  not reimbursable.
A  certificate  signed  by  MOWE  representative  will  be  issued  to  the  Bidder  as  proof  of  site inspections and may be included in the proposal as an attachment.
Requirements for field instrumentation
The output signals for each  sensor arc to  be selected  from the commonly  available formats, such  as 4-20  mA,  SDI-12,  RS-232,  RS-485,  frequency,  pulse counter,  DC voltage (0-5  VDC, 0-1 VDC).
The electrical power for the sensors and data logger is to be nominal 12 VDC. The voltage range of the sensors is to be compatible with the operating voltage range of the data logger. The power consumption of the sensors is to be compatible with the power availability of the power supply system of the station with 20% reserve.6.1 Classification of Local Stations
The procurement of local stations including  telemetry  and  data acquisition  system as per the details of the technical specifications should  he set up,  and  bidders are requested  to  quote for die complete station as a single source responsibility.
6.1.1     Category 1- Automated Rain gauge Stations with Telemetry
For  FEWS  only.  Real  time  measurement  of  the  rain.  A  back  up  of  the  GSM  /  GPRS  telemetry is required by Satellite telemetry. See paragraph 6-7-9
6.1.2     Category II- Class I Met stations (Automated Weather Stations) with Telemetry
Real  time  transmission  of  main  weather  parameters  see  paragraph  6-7-6.  It  will  be  integrated in the NMA network.
6.1.3     Category ILI-Class III Met stations
For  measuring  air  temperature  (max  and  min)  and  precipitation.  No  telemetry  is  required,  see paragraph 6-7-7
6.1.4     Category IV-Class IV Met stations
For measuring precipitation. No telemetry is required, see paragraph 6-7-8
6.1.5     Category V-Automated River gauging stations with Telemetry
Real time measurement of the water stage in  rivers or reservoirs .  For FEWS part of the network  ,  A back  up  of the GSM / GPRS telemetry  is required  by  Satellite telemetry,  see paragraph 6-7-11, 6-7-12 and 6-7-14
6.1.6     Category Vl-Upgrading existing Ground Water stations
Measurement  of  the  water  stage  in  existing  wells  after  rehabilitation,  no  telemetry  is  required, see paragraph 6-7-13
6.1.7     Category VII- New Ground Water stations
Measurement  of  the  water  stage  in  new  deep  drillings,  no  telemetry  is  required,  see  paragraph 6-7-13
6.2 Telemetry
This chapter describes the features of the communication  system necessary  to  comply  with  the constraints of the BIS,  and  then  the solution  proposed  by  ET.  The Contractor can  adopt this solution or propose another one more efficient in both terms technical and economical.
6.2.1     Fea tu res spec i ficatio ns
6.2.1.1  Conununication Link Types
In  order to  achieve the project aim,  data must be collected  from a number of sources,  and  also shared  with  others.  This will require a number of different communication  link  types,  defined in the following sections.
Communication  links between  local (field) stations LS: Real-time GSM/GPRS based telemetry'  will be utilized  upwards from LSs to  CSs.  For communication  between  FEWS automatic rainfall gauges and  hydrometry'  stations satellite communication  as secondary channel will be used.
GSM/GPRS communications links between  CS and  SS will be utilized  for data dissemination both  upwards from CS to  SS and  downwards from SS to  CS,  depending  upon  the data import point.6.2.1.2  Local Stations LS
Each  of the SBBOs will have an  automated  meteorologic,  hydrometric data collection network,  comprising  a number of Local Stations (sec figure n°2  below).  There will also  be manual measured and observed stations.
Local stations will be located  in  the field.  At the Local Stations communications connections will be required to allow measurements of variables such as river level and precipitation to be reported.
These stations will comprise the instrumentation  to  measure the variable(s),  a data collection platform (comprising  a data logger to  store the data and  a data transmission  platform) and  a data communications channel.  It is assumed  that the data collection  platform will take the form of a telemetry  outstation.  Values will be recorded  regularly  at an  adjustable time step (e.g.  every'  5  minutes) and  logged  locally.  Data will be transmitted  every  180  minutes (must be parameterized  from CC).  This period  parameter will be adjusted  face to  transmission  cost optimisation before the acceptance tests.
The Local Stations will typically be in remote locations, and hence it is proposed to use GPRS network,  For FEWS stations a satellite communication  will be used  as secondary  channel (fallback).  Data packet sizes will be adjusted  to  the communication  media,  to  transmit time series data for river level and/or precipitation.  The GRPS communication,  based  on  data volume tariff, is required.
Data sent from the Local Stations is not time critical. In case or reliable context as FEWS, a secondary  media is requested.  Therefore,  a relatively  low communications link  availability  of 97.5% for GPRS can be tolerated for local stations, with a minimum uplink speed of 40kbps.
Local Station
Figure n°2 Suggested transmission mode using ftp server
To  have a global reliable data collection,  all stations hydrometric network  will be monitored by  both  CS.  Then  Data from LS will be sent preferably  on  a broadcasting  mode (each  CS receive every LS) in order to allow data savings on one CS when the other is temporarily out of service. This implies an adequate configuration of each DCP which will transmit in “push mode” (from LS to CS) to different IP addresses (one by CS) or to deliver data in file format on different Ftp server (one by CS), such as showed in the sketch above. On the other way parameter changes (alert thresholds ...) from CS to LS, will follow the same mechanism
Data streams can be explained as followed :W1 : deposit of time stamped data from LS to Ftp (writing mode);
R1  :  reading  of  time  stamped  data  from  Ftp  to  CS  (reading  mode)  and  deletion  of  data  after reading;
W2   :   deposit   of   LS   parameters   from   CS   to   Ftp   (writing   mode)   and   deletion   of   previous parameters before deposit;
R2 : reading of LS parameters from Ftp to LS (reading mode);
Appropriate software in  CS architecture (Central Station  located  in  cither Bahir Dar/TaSBBO and  Asosa/BeSBBO) will periodically  poll each  of the outstations (through  Ftp  servers) in turn  to  retrieve the logged  data and  to  deliver configuration  changes to  the outstations.  The interface for telecommunication  at the LS level is included  in  the Data Collection  Platform (sec below).Figure n°3: HIS Remote Control Network
Local Stations (LS)
e        Hydrometric ggudnc station f5 in Beres •+• 29 incfudrna 5 FEWS rn Tana} Cless 1 Rann yycjue staiwi (5 m Betas *■ 25 ifluctudtag 14 FEWS in Tarja)
Main Stations
E3 Cenirat’ SteS-on (CS)
□ Secondary Stafon {SS)
Tetetransmissson
—1CO Kb* . GPRS ? - LS to CS ------ > 1CO Kb-'s ; G^RS ? - LS to SS -/-> 5 Stop’s : ADSL ?
CS !D SS & SS to cs
BgSBO
Asosa
Ministry of Water and Energy Addis Ababa
National Flood Forecasting Centre6.2.1.3 FEWS Local Stations
19  of  the  43  Local  Stations,  forming  die  Tana  sub-basin  hydrometric  network  will  be configured to provide data to the Flood Early Warning System (FEWS) (5 Water level and 14 Rainfall  stations).  In  normal  operation  when  GSM/GPRS  communication  is  operating,  these FEWS Local Stations will be operated like the other Local Station (by using GPRS link).
Ln  storm conditions,  the operation  of the FEWS Local Stations will be as described  below. When operating in this mode, the FEWS Local Stations will report die recorded values to the central station in real time mode (small time step to be adjustable, sec below).
In order to monitor a storm and provide the necessary information for flood management, data transmission from site (FEWS Local Station) to CS is time critical. Data must be received at the CS, within 1 minute of the measurement having been recorded, in crisis mode.
The crisis mode will be define in the local station (LS):
By a information given by CS to all FEWS in a same zone;
- Locally by a threshold crossing of the measurement (water level or rainfall);
Ln crisis mode, in case of loss of a main communications link (GPRS) during more than 10 minutes (must be parameterized  from CS),  a secondary  media will be used  for FEWS (Satellite).
As the satellite media may be expensive, die data transmission will be done only:
when   the   measurement   varies   in   +/-   5   %   (or   a   fixed   value)   of   the   last measurement;
every 60 minutes (must be parameterized from CS),
Outside a crisis period, the FEWS will run as “normal” LS.
Pre-coded SMS messages from manually operated remote stations and eventually from FEWS stations would need o be received.
The Data Collection Platform for FEWS Local stations is similarly configured as for the other LS, with additional satellite equipment.
6.2.1.4 Automated Hydrometric Data Collection Network for BeSBBO (Asosa)
Raw time series data from the Local Stations forming  the automated  hydrometric data collection  network  will be collected  by  each  Central Station  trough  its own  ftp  server interface.
The Central Station  will be equipped  with  an  internet link  to  allow data collection  from the Local Stations.  The Central Station  will periodically  attempt to  establish  communication  with 
each  ftp  folder  for each  Local Station. This polling will initially be scheduled to occur at 1 
minute intervals (must be parameterized from CC).
Ftp server will be installed in a DMZ associated to each CC. In case of CS dysfunction, data will be delivery in the second CC.
6.2.1.5 Flood Early Warning Network
As initially, responsibility for Flood Early Wanting will rest with MoWE in Addis Ababa. It is anticipated that in future, the responsibility for Flood Early Warning will be transferred to the sub basin organizations.
Then,  initially,  these data will be send  to  the Secondary  Station  located  al MoWE  in  Addis Ababa (primary  destination),  and  additionally  to  the Central Station  located  at TaSBBO in Bahir Dar (secondary destination). When responsibility for flood warning is transferred to theSBOs,  the  FEWS  Local  Stations  will  require  a  configuration  change  to  set  the  Central  Station located at TaSBBO in Bahir Dar to be the primary destination.
That means that the Secondary  Station  located  at Mo  WE  will be equipped  as in  CS architecture (Central Station  located  in  either Bahir Dar/TaSBBO and  Asosa/BeSBBO) with appropriate software to  periodically  poll each  of the outstations in  turn  to  retrieve the logged data and to deliver configuration changes to the outstations
The  Secondary  Station  will  also  be  equipped  with  an  internet  link  to  allow  data  collection from theses FEWS Local Stations.
"Ls
Figure n° 4: Dataflow in the global network
Glossary :
CS TaSBBO : Central Station of the Abbay Basin Authority at Tana sub basin branch office CS BcSBBO : Central Station of the Abbay Basin Authority at Beles sub basin branch office SS MOWE : Secondary Station of the Ministry of Water and Energy of Ethiopia (Addis Ababa)
LS : Local Station FEWS : Flood Early Warning Station
Dedicated telecommunication process will be implemented for FEWS.
In LS telecommunication process:
-     LS will deliver measurement on its own ftp folder by LI flow
-     Each CS will read measurement from each LS ftp folder by L3 or I ilmv
-    The measurement data destruction will be perforated after reading by the difficrent Ln FEWS telecommunication process:FEWS will deliver measurement on its own ftp folder by Fl flow;
-        Each   CS   (CS   TaSBBO,   CS   BeSBBO,   SSMoWE)   will   read   measurement   from each FEW ftp folder by F2, F3 and F4 flow.
-        Only   one   entity   (in   the   two   CS   and   SSMoWE)   as   leader,   will   be   able   to acknowledge   alarms   from   the   FEWS,   and   this   entity   will   be   in   charge   of   data destruction in the ftp folder;
-      To  define  which  entity  is  leader,  an  information  is  delivered  to  the  other  entities  by L6 which is an interconnection between all CS et SS;
6.2.1.6 Asosa (BeSBBO) Central Station
The Centra] Station  at Asosa through  a telecommunication  front end  supervisor price LT1 027 will be required  to  collect data from the Local Stations forming  the automated hydrometric data collection  network  for BeSBBO,  supervise the local stations,  send  alarms, restore the data to  the BIS processing  system,  and  communicate with  the ABA Secondary Station  located  at Bahir Dar.  This CS will receive (broadcast mode) and  store temporarily data from TaSBBO network  as a relief in  case of CS TaSBBO failure.  This storage will be one month long, adjustable, automatically refreshed al each polling.
The raw data received  from the Local Stations forming  the automated  hydrometric data collection  network  for BeSBBO will be transferred  into  the local database (developed  out of this contract).
The  data  stored  within  the  BeSBBO  local  database  located  at  Asosa  will  be  periodically  (e.g. 
hourly) used to update the ABA systems located at Bahir Dar. 
. *
Occasional   exchanges   of   information   will   occur   between   BeSBBO   CS   and   ABA   or   other SSor TaSBBO CS.
For communication  with  ABA SS in  Bahir Dar,  the Central Station  at Asosa will be equipped with  a high  bandwidth  connection.  The bandwidth  requirement to  enable effective communication  with  ABA will be based  on  a SDSL  solution,  with  the same uplink  and downlink capabilities with the following criteria:
In  downlink,  permit  to  read  all  the  ftp  server  (data  coming  from  LS)  and  retrieve all files for one day, for all LS, in less of 30 seconds;
In  uplink,  permit  to  send  to  all  the  same  data  to  the  other  CS  and  SS  in  less  of  60 
seconds;
To  implement safety  procedure such  as Vmotion  (VMware solution) to  backup  a front end  computer from one CS to  another CS.  As front end  and  Supervisory  will be Web  mterface,  possibilities will be offer to  use a CS as a backup  server of the second CS;
In   terms   of   security,   all   the   network   will  be   implemented   in   a   Virtual  Private Networking;
The location  of Ftp  server will be defined  by  the contractor,  in  the way  to  offer the best reliability  of the transmission  mechanism.  In  such  way,  if VMware solution  is used,  the ftp server will be installed  as a virtual machine with  its own  IP address on  the CS server (hardware).  In  case of dysfunction  of the hardware server,  the transfer of the virtual ftp  server will be assumed by X'Mware environment.
6.2.1.7   Bahn Dar (TaSBBO) Central Station
The Central Station  al Bahir Dar through  a telecommunication  front end  supervisor price LT1  028 will be required  to  collect data from the Local Stations forming  the automated hydrometric data collection  network  for TaSBBO,  receive data from the Local Stations forming the Flood Early Warning Network, supervise the local stations, send alarms, restorethe data to  the BIS processing  system,  and  communicate with  the ABA Secondary  Station located  at Bahir Dar.  This CS will receive (broadcast mode) and  store temporarily  data from BeSBBO network  as a relief in  case of CS BeSBBO failure.  This storage will be one month long, adjustable, automatically refreshed at each polling.
The raw data received  from the Local Stations forming  the automated  hydrometric data collection  network  for TaSBBO will be transferred  into  the local database (developed  out of this contract).
The  data  stored  within  the  TaSBBO  local  data  base  located  at  Bahir  Dar  will  be  periodically (e.g. hourly) used to update the ABA systems located at Bahir Dar.
Occasional  exchanges  of  information  will  occur  between  TaSBBO  CS  and  AJBA  or  other  SS or BeSBBO CS.
For communication  with  ABA SS in  Bahir Dar,  the Central Station  at Bahir Dar will be equipped  with  a high  bandwidth  connection.  The bandwidth  requirement to  enable effective communication  with  ABA will be based  on  a DSL  solution,  with  the same uplink  and downlink capabilities with the following criteria :
In downlink, permit to read all the ftp server (data coming from LS) and retrieve all
files for one day, for all LS, in less or 30 seconds;
-      In uplink, permit to send to all the same data to the other CS and SS in less of 60 seconds;
-      To  implement  safety  procedure  such  as  Vmotion  (Vmware  solution)  to  backup  a front  end  computer  and  supervisory  from  one  CS  to  another  CS.  As  front  end  and Supervisory will be Web interface, possibilities will be offer to use a CS as a backup server of the second CS;
-      In  terms  of  security,  all  the  network  will  be  implemented  in  a  Virtual  Private Networking;
The location  of Ftp  server will be defined  by  the contractor,  in  the way  to  offer the best reliability  of the transmission  mechanism.  In  such  way,  if Vmware solution  is used,  the ftp server will be installed  as a virtual machine with  its own  IP address on  the CS server (hardware) . In case of dysfunction of the hardware server, the transfer of the virtual ftp server will be assumed by vmware environement.
6.2.1.8 Supervisor front-end specifications price LT1 027
A brief description of these items is produced hereafter. Details can be found in chapter 6.7.22 
“Central and secondary stations equipment- hardware, software, communication front-end ».
Functional domain
Required functionality
Acquisition
Measurements from sensor devices in the fields are stored on data loggers.  Data are accumulated  on  the DCP and broadcasted from local stations to Central stations and  secondary stations.
Front     end     supervisor     application     are installed at:
TaSBBO (CS)
BeSBBO (CS)
MoWE (SS)
Redundancy
All    data    are    transmitted    to Central Station a broadcast mode. Each       Central       Station      is responsible of the collection of its
the front end  Supervisor should  be able to automatically  store data coining  from another sub  basin  during  one week  (data saving in case of failure on this sub basinown  data (internal acquisition) and  is able to  store data coming from another sub  basin  (external acquisition).
network)
Data stored  during  tliis secondary acquisition  can  be manually  extracted from the supervisor database to  be transmitted  to  the faulted  Central Station and to be stored in its HIS Database
Datastream Repository Management
A   datastream   is   defined   as   one information     coming     from     one field device, information can be : Analog (reads from a sensor)
The supervisor provides interface to manage datastream repository  : Create, Update and Delete operations (CRUD)
Digital
information)
(malfunction,
The        datastream          repository contains    the    definition    of    each datastream         (address,        device number,     sensor     number,     alarm number, etc.)
Datastream repository  shall be exported  in a human  readable tabular format file.  It can  enable automated  transformation  to populate datastream repository  of a third party software
The   Datastream   repository   can   be   loaded and set from a file using the same format
Conversion
Data values transmitted  can  be different than  the expected geophysical values.
Converts raw data values to  geophysical units is required  (applying  offset or/and factor)
Sanity
Checks
Supervisor         front-end         should assign a data quality status :
Good
Warning
Bad
and a data quality qualification :
Raw,
confirmed
for each values
Front     end     supervisor     performs     sanity checks :
Is the new value out of expected range?
is  the  value  change  out  of  range  between successive observations?
Sanity  checks  settings  will  be  stored  in  the datastream repository
Alarms viewer and management
The     supervisor     front-end     shall raise times tamped alarm when :
An  alarm  is  transmitted  from  the DCP
Front    end    supervisor    provides    an    alarm list interface with sound management
A  Time  out  is  raised  by  a  specific device
A time out is raised by a specific
Cascade     alarms     and     events     shall     be avoided
datastream
J    he    alarm    viewer    provides    standard functionalities and structured messages asA sanity check failed
Acknowledgement (One/All)
Message color depending status of alarm Timestamp (Active,               inactive,        user acknowledge)
Value, description, limit
Alarms   definition   will   be   stored   in   the datastream repository
the   alarm   list   must   be   persistent   despite restart of the supervisor application
Trends
Front   end   supervisor   provides real time trends
Real time trend  means that a new value will be plot on  the graph  without refreshing selection time criteria
Datastream    range    (if    defined    for   sanity checks) will be plotted on die graph
The   maximum   period   of   data   plotted   on the graph will be set to 1 week
The data values plotted  on  the graph  will be persistent despite restart of the supervisor application
6.2.1.9  Bahir Dar (ABA) Secondary Slation
The Secondary'  Station  at Bahir Dar will be required  to  communicate with  the BeSBBO Central Station  located  at Asosa and  TaSBBO Central Station  located  at Bahir Dar Communication  with  the MoWE  Secondary'  Station  located  at Addis Ababa will also  be necessary.
Occasional  updates  to  the  data  stored  within  the  ABA  system  will  be  received  from  third patly  organizations.  If  appropriate,  this  data  will  be  imported  directly  into  the  ABA  system and  further  manual  effort  will  be  necessary  to  assign  data  to  either  BeSBBO,  TaSBBO  or  in some  cases  possibly  both  SBBOs.  The  data  held  in  the  ABA  system  and  the  BeSBBO  and TaSBBO   databases   will   be   periodically   (e.g.   daily)   updated   to   ensure   that   the   data   is synchronized.   Note   that   as   data   may   be   impoitcd   at   ABA   or   al   either   SBBO   this synchronization  must  compare  the  data  stored  in  both  systems  to  ensure  that  new  data  is  not ignored or overwritten.
For conununication with the Central and Secondary- stations see 6-2-1-6 and 6-2-1-7
6.2.1.10 Addis Ababa (MoWE) Secondary' Station
The Secondary  Station  at Addis Ababa through  a telecommunication  front end  supervisor price LT1  027 will be required  to  receive directly  data from the Local Stations in  the
TaSBBO automated hydrometric data collection network which form the Flood EarlyWarning  Network  (Broadcast  mode),  and  communicate  with  the  ABA  Secondary  Station located at Bahir Dar.
For communication with the Central and Secondary stations see 6-2-1-6 and 6-2-1-7
A   WFP-funded   project   provided   to   the   H&WQ   Directorate   AWLR,   DCP   and   GSM transmission  devices  for  Awash  Basin  Monitoring.  These  equipments  will  be  monitored  from the H&WQ Directorate in Addis Ababa. The present Secondary Station at Addis Ababa could be configured (if possible) to send data to the gateway installed at the H&WQ Directorate for Awash Basin, since such a gateway could accommodate 250 stations. ADCON is the supplier.
6.2.1.11  Other central station
When the Abbay Basin Authority will be at its completed stage, a third SBBO Central Station will be required  to  collect data from the future Local Stations forming  the automated hydrometric data collection network for the rest of Abbay Basin.
Technical   characteristics   of   this   CS   will   be   the   same   as   the   previous   ones   but   its implementation will be postponed.
6.2.1.12  Other Secondary Station
Any  other Secondary  Station  through  a telecommunication  front end  supervisor price LT1  028 will be required  to  communicate with  the ABA Secondary  Station  located  at Bahir Dar. (for information only, not included in this contract)
6.2.2 Ethio Telecom proposal
The Contractor will get in  touch  with  Ethio  Telecom (ET) in  order to  update,  validate and optimize its proposed  solutions.  The Contractor will contract ET  for providing  its telecommunication  services during  the whole period  of warranty  and  post-warranty: Price LT1 029.
The solutions proposed by ET are as follows (for information only, no contractual obligation) : All ETs GSM BTSs are EDGE enabled near all stations, LS or CS. EDGE will provide a theoretical max  of 384Kbps (»20Kbps).  Consequently,  ET  is proposing  to  use EDGE which is a teletransmission technology that provides a bigger bandwidth than GPRS.
Thus each Standard LSs will have a single EDGE communication link to the CSs through ETs GSM network.
Also each FEWS LSs will have a single EDGE communication link to the CSs through ETs
GSM network. They don’t need to have a secondary' EDGE link to the SS at MoWE since it
can be handled using an application on the CS. An application can replicate the data to SS at periodic basis and send it through the WAN link to MoWE.
ET doesn’t have a backup satellite link for FEWS LSs. It will provide 5Mbps full duplex fiber link for all CSs and SSs.
ET proposes 20Mbps full duplex single WAN link for ABA SS in Bahir Dar since it is going to have a communication to all of the CSs and SSs. (5Mbps*4 =20Mbps max).
Thus ET  will define a single VPN (“Virtual Private Network”) for the HIS remote control network on the new IP NGN back bone to connect the two CSs and the three SSs. Physically, the CSs and SSs are connected to a “MSAG” device through optical fiber. MSAG is a device installed a bit everywhere on ET network that allow the connection to a VPN.
VPN is highly  secure and  extremely  flexible technology.  Synchronizing  data between  the servers can be handled easily over this VPN using any replication software. The data from alllocal stations will be mapped  to  this VPN when  entering  the [P NGN network  using  EDGE as a link. As a result, the application on the CS will replicate the data to the destined SS, in this case MoWE.  Therefore,  a secondary  EDGE  link  to  SS station  at MoWE  is not necessary.  Still as a consequence of the use of VPN, no GSM receiver device is needed at each CSs to receive data from LSs.
Additionally,  an  EDGE  receiver for CS in  Asosa,  CS in  Bahir Dar and  SS at MoWE  is not recommended  because of implementation  complexity.  This can  be handled  using  the WAN link  to  the VPN which  El'  will provide.  That is why  ET  will map  each  data to  this VPN. Consequently, the bandwidth bottle neck at the receivers will be solved.
This  proposed  solution  with  VPN  is  flexible,  and  allows  easily  extensions  to  every  kind  of new stations, as it is a key aspect of the Abbay Basin Authority development.
Concerning  the  fallback  for  FEWS  data  transmission,  Inidium  satellite  solution  for  backup  is not possible, but “Thuraya” solution can be used (see chapter below).
In terms of schedule, 4 to 5 months are requested to set-up the whole system. The 2 following schematics present the architecture proposed by ET:
Figure n°5: Logical architecture:
Assosa CSFigure 6: Corresponding Physical Architecture
Each LSs data will be
mappod to the destined C
using dlffcronl accoss
point so that the central
station will have a periodii
communication with the
corresponding LSs.
Standard
LS
MPLS
VPN over
IP NGN Backbone
Network vc
Standard
Ol
FEWS LS
ABA SS
Bahir Dar
N.B:
■ 20M Fiber Link
------------ SM Fiber Link
VPN over ET
Rouler
MSAG
W<3dein
MoWE SS
Addis Ababa
Bahir Dar CS
6.2.3     Satellite telemetry
In  case of GPRS default,  an  additional telecommunication  media as secondary  channel will be available for FEWS.  Satellite data communication  equipment shall meet the requirements of the operating and regulating agencies of Ethiopia.
The   following   technical   proposition   must   be   seen   as   a   suggestion   to   be   developed   in accordance with Ethio Telecom rules.
As    Thuraya    is    available    in    Ethiopia,    the    GmPRS    solution    can    be    used    on    Thuraya environment to offer a similar operational condition to GPRS.
But  the  contractor  will  have  to  keep  in  mind  the  communication  financial  budget,  and  will  pay attention of potential commercial offers such as SMS.
In  case of SMS use,  the communication  solution  between  FEWS and  CS must consider the following  alarm context: if the FEWS send  an  alarm via sms,  then  the CS must send acknowledge to FEWS
6.3 Data Acquisition System
The Data Acquistion  System consists of Central Data Acquisition  Stations in  Bahir Dar and Asosa and  secondary  stations for higher level processing  in  ABA (Bahar Dar) and  MOWE (Addis).  The objective is to  ensure that the high  quality  real-time data collection,  compilation, processing  and  analyses arc available for making  sound  water management decisions.  The central and  secondary  stations will be located  in  offices spaces provided  by  the client. 
The client will provide the necessary  electrical connections as well as network  connections and  environmental control,  such  as air conditioning.  The Central stations will receive data from the GPRS enabled  remote (local) stations and  will store this data in  their data base. Additionally,  Bahar Dar central station  will receive satellite transmitted  FEWS data (fallback case) in this same data base.Specific attention:
Central Stations shall be able to accept pre-coded SMS messages from manually operate
remote stations and eventually as a back-up to the real-time systems (FEWS).
The Contractor will design  and  develop  such  a system and  specifications for each  central station,  back-up  data stations for FEWS data and  servers,  connectivity  and  evolve,  test and implement a coding design. There will be a minimum of 100 days of data stored.
The components of Central stations include GPRS communication  system (and  satellite for Bahar Dar Central station) and  data collection/application  servers for the collection,  quality control and  relay  of information  to  the higher-level data centres.  It includes also  the infrastructure that includes all communication  and  networking  devices to  connect the equipment via INTRANET  to  the higher-level data centres (secondary  stations) corresponding to Component 3 of this tender document.
The Contractor shall have responsibility  in  developing  a tool to  view the data,  which  will include ad-hoc graphical queries,  ad-hoc data reports,  including  daily  and  monthly  summaries of all data collected,  along  with  tools for quality  control.  This will be used  by  central station personnel involved  in  reviewing  the data and  providing  assessments on  stations requiring maintenance
Data flows;
Data communication will either go through GPRS or satellite as fall-back option (secondary channel) for FEWS stations network and will be received at the respective central stations. . 
The data will be brought into an application server(s) which will perform quality control
processing, data visualization function, as well as archival.
The application  servers) will also  function  as a tool to  determine stations that are in  need  of maintenance and  repair.  Software will provide station  outage reports and  a summary  of total hours of statiou outage for each station as well as the entire network, by day, month and year or any period of time of interest to the client.
Sec  data  flow  from  local  stations  (hydrometric  and  FEWS)  to  central  stations  in  the  diagrams here above.
6.4   Installation and commissioning
Installation of all data collection stations, sensors and central and secondary stations
components shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor will be required to devise
acceptable mounts for sensors, as sensor placement should abide by WMO convention as
applicable or by standard hydrological practices. The Contractor shall also devise acceptable
mounts to the existing bridges that should take into account obtaining a good measurement as
well as adequately securing the sensor from tampering and/or vandalism. The Purchaser may 
inspect some or all equipments prior to installation to assure the products meet specifications
The Purchaser may also delegate this activity to a third party. Each station shall be
commissioned by the Purchaser upon inspection of complete installation and functioning data collection activities. Installation shall be considered complete when all stations have been commissioned and operating for a 30 day period with no break in service for any 
station/sensor longer than 24 hours.
The following inspections and tests shall be performed:
1.           Testing and Inspection
It is the Contractor’s responsibility  to  ensure that the equipment is sufficiently  tested  prior to sliipmenl and  installation.  During  final acceptance testing,  the Contractor will have to demonstrate full functionality  and  performance of all system components according  to specifications. Prior to final acceptance, all expenditures related to unsatisfactory performanceof the equipment,  such  as the costs of repairs,  additional site visits,  shipping  costs etc.,  will be at the Contractor’s expenses.  The costs for all tests and  for all inspections to  be made under the contract shall be borne by  the Contractor and  shall be deemed  to  be included  in  the contract price with the exception of the Purchaser’s costs for witnessing tests.
2.    Factory Acceptance Test
Prior to  system shipment,  the Contractor shall conduct a Factory  Acceptance Test (I*Al).  The FAT  shall be conducted  at the Contractor’s facilities and  shall demonstrate “end-to-end” performance of the system components.  In  order to  avoid  delays,  the factory'  acceptance testing  shall not be witnessed.  However,  the Contractor is required  to  write a FAT report that will describe the test layout,  the individual testing  results for each  station  / component,  as well as any  problems found.  All deficiencies revealed  by  testing  shall be rectified  by  the Contractor at his own  expenses and  to  the approval of the Purchaser.  Rectified  components shall be subject to re-tesling.
3.   Receiving Inspection
The system is to  be inspected  in-country,  after clearing  customs,  to  ensure that 100  percent of the shipment is received  and  delivered.  The Contractor is to  arrange for this receiving inspection  as well as for customs clearance and  delivery  to  appropriate storage facilities to  be provided and maintained by the Contractor.
4.   Site Installation and Acceptance Tests
The Contractor will install all the equipments and  will undertake site tests of each  gauge and tests .for each  component of equipments.  The exact locations for installation  by  Contractor shall be decided  by  the Purchaser in  consultation  with  the Contractor.  After final configuration  and  programming,  the Contractor will conduct an  “end-to-end” operational test for each  of these stations.  A formal check  list shall be followed  and  the results of the tests shall be recorded.  The Purchaser’s personnel will be trained  in  conducting  the same site acceptance tests.  A Site Acceptance Test will be passed  if all sensors and  data collection platforms obtain and store correct values for a period of 24 hours.
5.   Operational Test (OT)
Operational  Tests  shall  be  conducted  at  two  stages  of  project  implementation.  In  each  case, any  operational  problems  related  to  the  remote  stations  arc  to  be  fixed  before  approval  can  be received   for   the   system   OT.   The   first   OT   must   be   conducted   immediately   after   the   first component  of  remote  stations  has  been  installed  by  the  Contractor.  All  hardware  and  software components  of  this  real  lime  network  have  to  be  tested.  The  OT  will  be  considered  to  be successfill  if  all  components  as  a  whole  have  been  operating  without  problems  during  al  least 72  hours  period.  The  second,  third,  fourth  and  final  OT  will  be  witnessed  by  the  Purchaser’s designated   representatives   as   each   component   of   stations   arc   completed.   It   will   take   place when  all  the  remote  stations  have  been  installed;  however,  the  final  OT  will  not  be  delayed due   to   delays   or   problems   related   to   the   installation   of   individual   remote   stations.   The Purchaser   shall   decide   the   start   date   of   the   test   in   consultation   with   the   Contractor.   The Contractor   shall   notify   the   Purchaser   accordingly   and   shall   perform   the   OT.   The   final   OT shall  be  test  for  “end-to-end”  performance  of  the  entire  system  for  a  period  of  one  week.  The Contractor   shall   demonstrate   and   document   that   tire   system   correctly   generated   95%   of   all expected   data   (normally   scheduled   data   collections   and   transmissions)   for   the   one   week period.  The  Contractor  will  produce  a  report  documenting  the  quantities  of  data  expected  / received  and  indicating  the  success  /  failure  of  the  OT.  The  OT  will  be  repeated  until  the  98% success  level  is  achieved  or  a  specific  waiver  of  the  requirement  (minimum  95%)  is  obtained. All  equipment  failures  will  be  counted  except  those  that  can  be  specifically  determined  to  be “acts  of  God”.  Failure  of  stations  due  to  acts  of  God  (natural  disasters  or  other  incidents)  will not count against the 95%. Equipment needed for testing shall be provided by the Contractor.
6.           Final AcceptanceWhen  the system has passed  the Final OT,  the Contractor can  apply  for Final Acceptance. When  Final Acceptance is given,  the system will be officially  considered  to  be under Warranty.
6.5 Maintenance
Both  during  warranty  and  post-warranty  periods the Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance of all network  stations/ data centres components after installation, commissioning,  site acceptance and  operational test All equipment maintenance costs, repairs,  replacement and  repairs to  civil work  shall be borne by  the Contractor during  the maintenance period.  A 3  (three) year contract for maintenance support in  the post-warranty period  is envisaged  to  be the commitment of the bidder as part of this bid.  The bidder shall propose a draft maintenance contract.  The bidder shall commit to  provide a Maintenance Support for a period  of 3  (three) years after Warranty  period  under a separate maintenance contract to  be executed  then.  The bidder shall provide along  with  the bid  a maintenance plan for 2  years in  the warranty  period  and  3(three) years in  post-warranty  period  with  cost estimates at current prices which  shall be added  to  the bid  price for evaluation.  The bidder may  propose the price revision  formula that he would  like to  see applied  to  this price.  The scope of maintenance support would  include all materials and  services including  major replacement components,  mandatory  spare parts required  to  ensure smooth  and  sustainable operation of the entire system, even though they may not be expressly described here. 
This maintenance support contract shall refer to  the complete data collection  network,  proper functioning  of GSM/GPRS and  satellite data collection  local stations and  central and secondary  stations including  the data processing  hardware and  software components. Assistance and  troubleshooting  will be provided  for all necessary  maintenance,  servicing, testing  and  recalibration  operations.  The Contractor will intervene with  his personnel within the agreed  dates,  on  site in  case of damages or malfunctioning  of equipment or software and will proceed  to  the investigation  of the cause and  search  for a prompt solution  to  ensure proper working  of the system.  The Contractor shall set up  one or more offices at appropriate locations and  provide appropriate number of staff.  The Contractor will provide at each  field office to  provide prompt maintenance.  The Contractor will provide all cquipmcnt/computers, transportation  and  internet connectivity,  necessary  to  maintain  the network.  Emergency maintenance shall be performed  immediately  upon  notification  of a sensor/station  outage. Preventative maintenance will be provided  twice per year,  once just prior to  the rainy  season and  once just after the season.  The Contractor will provide monthly  maintenance reports during  the course of the maintenance period.  The monthly  maintenance reports will cite station  and  sensor outages,  including  the amount of lime stations/sensors have been  out of operation or incorrectly reporting.
The annual maintenance charges shall be quoted  on  a year-by-year basis for the three year post-warranty  maintenance period.  The Purchaser reserves the right to  terminate the contract in full or in part at the end of any one year maintenance period. On hand over of the complete system to the MoWE at the end of (he 3 year maintenance period, the Contractor shall supply a manual specifying  all faults experienced  by  the system together with  an  account of how such  faults have been  rectified.  The objective is that the Purchaser will know from lessons learnt during the 5 years operation &, maintenance period.
6.6   Training
Training  shall be provided  by  the Contractor tn  several phases.  The training  shall be provided for the installation  of stations/sensors as well as operation  and  maintenance of the stations/sensors. The training shall include both classroom and field trainings. The Client’sofficials shall also  be trained  on  the operation  of the GSM/GPRS and  satellite data collection central stations and  secondary  stations.  Each  training  shall be for 20  people unless otherwise indicated.  There shall be two  weeks of training  on  the data collection  platforms,  radios, sensors etc.  There shall also  be field  trainings which  will include on-site training  at two  river stage monitoring  sites,  two  reservoir water elevation  sites,  two  rainfall measurement sites and two  automated  full weather stations.  There shall be two  weeks of training  on  the operation and  maintenance of the GSM/GPRS and  satellite central stations with  a combination  of classroom and  hands-on  training.  There shall be one week  of training  for the data control computer function.  The bidder shall prepare a training  course plan  and  include the same in  the bid document
6.7   Equipment Specifications
6.7.1 General requirements
Sec also Chapter n° 5 “general requirements’'
The following  equipment specifications will apply  for all stations.  All sensors shall have operating  temperature from -40  to  +60°C,  relative humidity  0% to  100% non-condensing  and located  at an  altitude ranging  from 0  to  +3700  m.  The equipment must be designed  to  operate without degradation  under the dusty  conditions experienced  at exposed  sites.  Improvements/ modifications in  the specifications as per suitability  of technology  adopted  but for betterment and  smooth  running  may  be suggested.  The complete tool kit for installation  and  routine maintenance along  with  manuals,  documentation  etc.  in  English  shall be provided  in  sufficient numbers in  hard  copy  and  also  in  appropriate electronic format for all the documents.  The documentation  will include user’s manuals and  guidelines for operation  and  maintenance for all equipments and software components. The manuals shall also include the following:
i.            Specific equipment layout
ii.      A procedural handbook
iii.       System block diagrams (logical connections)
iv.       Wiring diagrams
v.       Interface specifications, including communication protocols and configuration 
models
vi.       Software licences
6.7.2    Data Collection Equipment
6.7.2.1 DCP and logger
Data acquisition equipment shall be:
• a multi-channel configuration for surface waler network, and will be called Data
Collection Platform (DCP here after): price LT1 009.
- a single channel configuration for groundwater network, and will be called Logger
here after: price LT Oil.
1  he  Data  Collection  Platform  shall  be  a  well  proven  and  widely  used  model,  produced  by  a primary  brand  name  and  tested  in  a  large  number  of  installations.  A  manufacturer’s  certificate shall  be  provided  that  the  model  proposed  has  been  in  production  al  least  2  years. 
Either single or multi channel DCPs shall be of the same make and  model,  with  identical configurations so  that the each  type can  be used  throughout the entire network.  Data collection  platform shall survive reverse polarity  connections (system will operate normally when polarity is applied properly without any other changes, such as fuses). The DCP shall beof open design, operating a wide variety of sensors. The DCPs shall have multi tasking 
operating system capable of simultaneous data collection and transmission.
6.7.2.2   Hardware requirements
6.7.2.2.1 Environmental conditions
The equipment must be designed to function satisfactorily under the following conditions.
•    Temperature range: Storage and operation -40°C to +60°C
•    Relative humidity: 0 to 100 per cent, with condensation
•    Elevation: 0 to + 3500 meters above sea level
The equipment must be designed to operate without degradation under the dusty conditions experienced at exposed sites.
6.7.2.2.2Data processing
Only intelligent data loggers, equipped with a microprocessor will be considered.
The data logger must be equipped with a CPU watchdog circuit that will automatically restart
die system in the event of a severe electrical or electromagnetic disturbance.
6.7.2.2.3        Real-time clock
•    The data loggers must be equipped with a battery-backed hardware real-time clock 
system.
■ The real-time clock system must provide time (24 hour system) and date information 
and shall make provision for leap years.
•    The accuracy and stability of the real-time clock must be better than ±30 seconds per
month, operating under harsh and extreme environmental conditions.
6.7.2.2.4        Memory
The data loggers must be provided non volatile data memory for:
•    Programs and default parameters;
‘ Station parameters and user-defined variables
The downloaded data should still be available and accessible on the data logger’s memory 
after being read out or sent via the data communication module.
The memory will be sized in order to be able to store I year of data renewable by lost of the
oldest data at every new collected data.
6.7.2.2.5        Operator interface
The data logger shall be provided with the following minimum built-in facilities, to be used 
by the operational and maintenance staff:
•    An LCD unit capable of displaying the full ASCII character set
A  keyboard  that  allows  the  operator  to  enter  parameters,  interrogate  the  data  logger  and  enter messages
-    The keyboard shall comply with the following requirements:
-    The construction shall be a walerproofed-menibranc type
Keys must provide positive feedback
6.7.2.2.6        Communication port
Each   data   logger   shall   be   equipped   to   allow   bi-directional   communication   with   outside equipment (laptop) via a WIFI interface (or Ethernet connection).The  port configuration  (Serial  or Ethernet) shall  allow user  selection  of  format transmissions and protocols.
The  logger  shall  have  the  facility  to  interface  with  transmission  equipments  with  standard interfaces (IP protocol will be available).
6.7.2.2.7Surge protection
Surge-protection  equipment  must  be  installed  on  all  system  input/output  circuits  and  power supply input circuits (DC, mains).
The following equipment shall be the absolute minimum:
•    On all analogue/digilal input and output circuits, DEHN BLITZDUCTORS TYPE 
LZ(or equivalent) with appropriate voltage ratings
•    On all mains power supply circuits, DEHN type VA-280 surge arrestors (or
equivalent)
The equipment will be used  without direct supervision  and  must provide the required protection.  The contractor must implement any  additional measures required  to  achieve the necessary protection level.
6.7.2.3   Dedicated DCP specifications (multi - channels) price LT1 009
Data will be transmitted to the central station as a couple of values time / level.
Any default must be transmitted to the central station.
The switch  from one scan  frequency  to  another one will be locally.determined  by  the Data Collection Platform regarding the exceeding of a threshold or of a rate of change, once to 3 consecutive times (adjustable).
6.7.2.3.1 Input functions and interlacing
The data logger shall be designed to allow the input of combinations of measurements for a minimum of 16 user definable channels for analogue and digital inputs.
The analogue modules shall be designed for inputs of signals at 0-20 mA; 4-20 mA; 0-10 V; 1-10 V; -2-H-2V; 0-5V or 1-5V.
Analogue input signals shall be converted to digital signals using an AD converter with not fewer than 12 bits.
Digital inputs shall be parallel, pulse or 24V signals.
Dedicated modules or changes to the internal software must directly accept all types of sensors.
The analogue input signals shall be measured to an overall accuracy of better than 0.5 per cent. The input circuits shall be designed so that no errors are introduced by ground loops. The input channel for a specific sensor shall be user selectable.
In order to conserve power, the data logger shall control the power supply to each sensor. Sensors shall be switched on in sequence and readings taken under processor control. Sufficient warm-up and stabilization lime for sensors must be controlled by the logger. During periods of non-mcasurcmcnt, power supply to the sensors and signal converter units shall be interrupted for all analogue channels.
Full calibration procedures shall be provided for each sensor and signal-conditioning unit. Input connectors for sensors shall be clearly labelled, polarized to prevent mismatching of connectors and configured to prevent damage if a unit is accidentally or intentionally connected to the wrong input channel. Each connector shall make provision for all the necessary signal lines, grounding, 0V and 12V (switched) supplied lines.
6.7.2.3.2Enclosure and housing
The logger housing shall be water and dust protected and shall comply with rating 1P65 as defined in IEC144.The housing shall be manufactured of corrosion-resistant material.
Provision  must  be  made  in  the  housing  to  enable  data  transmission  via  te  ep  one  tne, cellular-telephone link through a plug connector.
The housing will have an operator interface and a wireless interface.
6.7.2.33Internal power supply
Each  data logger shall be equipped  with  an  internal source that would  prevent equipment shutdown  or loss of data when  the main  battery  is disconnected  for a short period  or exchanged (±15 minutes).
Power for all the sensors will be from the main battery through the data logger
The data logger must have low power consumption on standby mode.
The data logger must be reverse polarity protected.
6.7.23.4 External power supply
External  power  supply  shall  be  by  a  12  volt  lead/acid  type  battery  with  solid  electrolyte chargeable with solar panels. The DCP design has to include the location of the battery.
However it shall be possible to install it outside, without sending it back to the factory. Power supply  shall be by  external battery  with  a floating  regulation.  A silicon  solar panel,  mono  or polycrystalline type (minimum 10W) shall be enough  to  provide sufficient autonomy  to  the station without any sun radiations, as specified hereafter
17 Autonomy of 18 Rainy the DCP battery
supplied should
be at least for
the basic DCP
with a radar
water        level 20 Dry' sensor and
under normal conditions of use
19  15 days
21  25 days
In  case of supply  failure,  the DCP and  its transmission  set shall be able to  restart
automatically,  including  time re-synchronization  of the internal clock,  or using  eventually  the
GPS facility. 
J
The solar charging  system should  be capable of providing  three times tire daily  mean  energy 
requirement of the DCP (including  sensor) when  exposed  to  normal solar radiation  based  on  , 
mean of 7,5 KWb/m . 
1
‘ sea on 3
Equipment should be protected against polarity inverse
on on the power supply line and the necessary fuses must be integrated in this line in order tn 
protect individual units. 
6.7.2.4  Dedicated Logger specifications (mono - channels) price LT1 009 bis These specifications are similar to DCP specifications except for following items-
10
6.7.2.4.1 Input functions and interfacing
The  data  logger shall be designed to allow only one (1) analogue input for groundwater I,, 1 
The analogue module shall be designed for inputs of signals at 4-20 mA
° CVC ‘
6.7.2.4.2 Enclosure and housing
The logger housing  shall be water and  dust protected  and  shall comply  with  mine
(immersion depth max. 2 m -duration of immersion maximum 24 hours) ’
* g UThe housing  shall be manufactured  of corrosion-resistant material.  Provision  must be made in the housing  to  enable data transmission  via telephone line,  and  cellular-telephone link  through a plug connector. The housing will have an operator interface and a wireless interface.
6.7.2.43 Internal power supply
Each  data logger shall be equipped  with  an  internal source that would  prevent equipment shutdown  or loss of data when  the main  battery  is disconnected  for a short period  or exchanged (±15 minutes).
The data logger shall be powered  by  secondary  internal power supply,  with  the use of commercially  available dry  alkaline batteries or Lithium batteries,  which  permit to  logger to operate for 18 months. Easy access for changing the batteries must be assured
Power for the water level sensor will be from the secondary  internal power supply.  The data logger must have low power consumption  on  standby  mode.  The data logger must be reverse polarity protected.
6.7.2.5   Internal software requirements
6.7.2.5.1 General
All software packages shall be written and structured in a high-level programming language. 
To conserve memory space and power, the use of a compiled program is recommended. 
The data-logger operating software shall be located in non volatile memory and the contractor
shall be responsible for the provision of all the software required for the data logger. 
It must be impossible for an operator of any data logger to accidentally or intentionally 
destroy the database or data recordings by entering faulty or erroneous instructions or
messages.
The   data-logger   software   shall   allow   the   equipment   to   operate   in   a   completely   unattended mode,   and   all   reasonable   precautions   shall   be   taken   to   structure   error-trapping   routines   in order to prevent system hang-up.
6.7.2.5.2 Cold start
When the data logger is switched on, it shall perform a self test, checking that all required 
cards and devices are present and that all memory is operational. If any fault is detected, it
shall display the fault description and halt operation. If no fault or error is detected, it shall
resume operation, using system information available in a dedicated memory zone.
6.7.2.6 Data acquisition
The data logger shall operate with two data sequences: fixed interval logging and variable
interval logging.
Each  data input channel shall be treated  separately  and  have its own  scanning-interval parameters.  Al start-up,  the default parameter set shall be loaded  for each  channel.  It must be possible for the operator to modify the parameter set al any stage.
For the water-level measurement channels, operators shall be able to select a fixed interval and fixed variation data storage method apart from a manufacturer’s default method. 
For each input channel the data logger shall provide a scaling factor and offset so that the measured value can be adjusted to the actual reading. For the water-level channels, the transducer selected will determine the scaling factor. This will allow for placement of the transducer above or below the zero thresholds.
6.7.2.7  Data storage
The storage of measured data records shall be done in order that the data-retricval process at the station can be done without operator intervention. This means that recorded messages and data shall be coded in different groups.Data records shall contain  the following  information: ID numbers,  channel numbers, timc/date and  measured  value.  The measured  value may  be given  in  engineering  units. Channels shall be numbered  numerically.  Data storage shall be based  on  a circulating  storage system (firstin,  first-out).  It must be possible to  read  out data as often  as desired  without destroying it. Memory contents must be retained in the event of a power supply breakdown.
6.7.2.8 Data display
All  conversation  between  the  data  logger  and  operator  shall  be  done  via  the  keyboard  of  the data logger display-unit or laptop.
When  connecting  to  the data logger,  the following information should be displayed: measured values, date, time, battery status and minimum and maximum values for the previous 24-hour period.
A time-out shall be provided, so that the display will go into a sleeping mode if no keyboard activity is detected for a period (typically five minutes).
The data-loggcr display will indicate when it is transferring data.
6.7.2.9  Operating procedures
The data logger must have three levels of access
6.7.2.9.1 Data display and data retrieval
No password should be required for this level, which should be activated by touching any key on  the keyboard  of the data logger or laptop.  The data logger should  request “data display/read-out” or “operation  menu”.  Any  change of any  parameter must be impossible at this level.
Upon  selection  of “operation menu” a password should be required. This second level allows access to  the data logger to  perform all functions with  the exception  of station  number,  I.D. settings,  baud-rate settings,  data reset,  system reset,  interrogation  and  storage intervals, manufacturer's settings,  install additional channels,  remove unused  channels,  erase selective channel data, and restore factory settings or any other action which can cause loss of data or system failure.
With the exception of manufacturer’s settings, these functions should be accessible to a trained technician or hydrologist requiring a second password.
6.7.2.9.2Menu-driven procedures
AU operator activities shall be menu driven.
1.           Station settings must be able to display and set
•    Alphanumerical station ID
•    Date and time settings
•    Internal lithium cell voltage
•    Software version
•    Memory capacity
Number of sensors
•    Last data-rcadout dale
« Port settings
. Language settings (if appropriate)2.  Sensor settings (Each sensor must be capable of separate adjustment and must include the
following.)
•     Sensor number
•     Sensor description
” Display units
-     Minimum and maximum values for the past 24 hours
•     Sample intervals
•     Storage intervals
«• Delta values for event logging
3.   Sendee settings (password protected)
■ Install additional channels
•     Remove unused channels
•     Erase selective channel data
-     System rcset/start-up date
« Restore factory settings
4.   General settings
When   scanning   the   current   active   parameter   list,   the   operator   shall   have   access   to   the parameters listed here before in list 2 and 3.
With  the input channel facility,  the operator shall be able to  select any  input channel,  and  the data logger shall measure and  display  the current input value (or a non  selected  message,  if the channel is not activated).
Where single-channel, non-expandable, dedicated units can be used, they should be furnished.
6.7.2.9.3 Data retrieval
It should be possible to retrieve data by the following means:
•     A laptop via wireless link, a laptop via Ethernet cable
•     Or dedicated data reader.
6.7.2.9.4 Determination of sampling intervals
• Procedure
•     Time recording
•     Samples at set intervals. Record each sample or average
c  Set of samples and store at set intervals. Minimum of five seconds and a maximum of
24 hours for intervals of sampling and storing.
Della recording for waler levels - Compare measured value with previous stored value
at set time intervals. If new value differs from the pre-set difference, it must be stored, 
in addition to the last value. If not, the value must be ignored. Wait for next time
interval.
6.7.2.10    Potential extension
As    far    as    practicably    possible,    the    contractor    must    make    provision    in    the    system    to accommodate future extensions, ensuring compatibility with the current product.Without any hardware extension, DCP shall be designed in such a way to al ow urt er
addition of sensors, without any necessity to send them back to the factory. The centra unit o 
the stations shall thcrcfore*be able to accommodate aboutTO’sensors, such as.
•    A second water level
•    potential extension will be also available for :
rainfall,
water temperature,
water pH, conductivity, turbidity,
air temperature,
wind speed and direction;
6.7.3    GSM/GPRS Telemetry
The GSM/GPRS data communications equipment shall meet the requirements of Ethio Telecom.  Evidence of meeting  these requirements or certification  will be required  as part of tlie bid.  The GSM/GPRS technology  will allow for on-demand  data collection  and reprogramming  of the data collection  platform.  This functionality  may  be requested  to  be demonstrated  as part of the bid  acceptance process at the request of the Purchaser.  The GSM/GPRS antenna shall also  meet the requirements of the GSM/GPRS provider.  The Contractor will contract all arrangements for GSM/GPRS access and  will include the usage fees in the maintenance contract.
See also chapter 6-2 “telemetry”.
6.7.4    Satellite telemetry
Satellite data communication  equipment shall meet the requirements of the operating  and regulating  agencies of Ethiopia.  This not only  consists of the transmitting  radios located  at each  FEWS local station,  but also  the Front end  receivers in  central stations.  Evidence of meeting  these requirements or certification  will be required  as part of the bid.  The satellite mobile communication  shall also  meet the requirements of relevant agencies in  Ethiopia.  The Contractor will contract all arrangements for the acquisition  of satellite radio  frequencies for all stations.
See also chapter 6-2 “telemetry”.
6.7.5    Meteorological Local Stations
The meteorological monitoring system will be owned, managed and operated by the National Meteorological Administration of the MOWE.
Similar branded instruments to NMA present equipment are recommended for data homogeneity 
and consistency of accessories, spare parts and maintenance reasons.
6.7.6   Automated Class I Stations
Price LT 1 001
Right   location   of   the   stations,   installation,   commissioning,   acceptance,   guarantee   and maintenance are to be supported by NMA.
All class 1 stations will be Automatic Weather Station (AWS) to be connected to the existing NMA network.  This is the responsibility  of the Contractor to  ensure this connectivity  taking 
all necessary arrangements with NMA. Technical specifications for sensors:
®Parameter
Measured
Specification
1.
Wind Speed
speed range: 0 to 200 km/h ------------- ----------.« - Still air : 0 %
Power consumption Ito 2,5 ma
Speed range 0,4 ... 55,556 m/s (1,44 ...
200km/h)
Resolution <0,lm/s
Accuracy < ± 0,5 m/s
Onset speed < 0,4 m/s
Material used Senser :anodized aluminum
2.
Wind Direction
Direction range: 0 to 360 Deg.
Starting threshold: < 1.0 m/s
Accuracy: < ± 2,5°.
Operating temperature: -40 to +60°C
Resolution 1°
Onset speed < 0,4 m/s
Protection class IP64
3.
Air         Temperature (maximum             and minimum)
Measurement range: -40 to +60 °C Accuracy at +20°C +<0.2C°.
4.
Relative Humidity
Range: 0-100%
Accuracy  at +20°C.  ± 2% in  range from 0 
- 90 %
Excellent    linearity    and    sensitivity    with fast response and long-term stability.
Operating Temp, range: - 40 to +60°C
5
Solar Radiation
Measures    total    global    radiation    at    a spectral range of 400 to 1100 nm
-     Sensitivity 100pV/Wm2
Max. Irradiance 2000 W/m2
-     T.C. of Sensitivity +/-0.15%/°C
-      Operating  Temperature  -30°C  ...  +70°C  - 22°F ... +158°F
6
Rain Precipitation
-     Orifice and Resolution 200cm2 :0,2mm.
- Capacity  per Minute Max.  30  tips( 3 
resp. 6mm)-     Accuracy < 2mm/min: ± 1%
-     Signal output Pulse signal
Measuring Principle Tipping bucket
double spoon
- Lifetime of reed switch min. 1 Million 
operations
-     Mounting mast mounting.
7
Evaporation pan
- Range : 0 to 250 mm water guage Accuracy of lmmof water depth
Genera! Requirements
The Contractor should consider the following requirements:                                                                     J The  data  transfer  component  should  have  a  universal  commercial  compatibility  > and it will be integrateu with the existing NMA central system.
-      The  system  should  use  GPRS  technology  to  transfer  die  data  to  a  central  data server on a regular interval automatically.
-     The remote station use solar panel as a source power with a backup battery, to be charged from the solar panel.
-     The remote station should have data longer, which could hold data for 6-12 month and  send  all  delayed  data  automatically  whenever  the  connection  to  the  central data  server  is  established.  The  direct  access  to  the  data  from  the  data  logger  bv connecting it to a computer must be available.
Have a central data collector server with  a standard  database for data archiving, quality  control,  data processing  and  date presentation  in  both  tabular and  graphic format. It should also have easy data backup and resorting tools.
Data security should be ensured by the system.
-  The  Telemetry  gateway  should  have  different  connection  ports  to  the  LAN  and  the central  data  server  (Ethernet,  serial  ports).  Il  should  also  operate  with  a  well known operating system like MS-Windows, Linux
-      The  Telemetry  gateway  should  control  a  good  number  of  station  networks  for future expansions (up to 200 AWS station units).
-      The  logger  must  be  housed  in  a  rugged  housing,  water  and  dust  proof  scaled enclosure with pad locks that can withstand direct exposure to harsh environment
-      The  Software  should  have  capabilities  to  Real  time  data  as  well  as  “Archeiv^t” histoneal  data  at  a  pre-defined  interval  programmed  in  the  base  station  software automatically without user intervention.
-    All support anus holding sensors should be manufactured from anodic
aluminum  or  galvanized  steel  and  luted  to  the  tower-scaffold  bv  means  of  .iX--
steel and/or hot galvanized clamps and stock of screws. 
' 
Sunless
-    Spare parts will be available for a period of 10 years. In the event that a part is n s longer available, a substitute identical in function should be identified in time
-    Users and technical service manuals will be provided.
-     fools for installation and maintenance will be provided.Sensor  tester;  pole  mast;  arm  for  rain  gauge  installation;  battry  charger  should  be included.
At least factory  level training  is necessary  for Hardware software and  Data processing  personals for calibrating,  installing,  maintaining  and  data processing  in order to have sustainable operation.
6.7.7     Class III Stations
Price LT1 002
Right    location    of    the    stations,    installation,    commissioning,    acceptance,    guarantee    and
maintenance are to he supported by NMA.
Technical specifications for Class 3 stations
No.
1
Item
Description requested
Maximum Thermometer
Mercury -in — glass Thermometer
With indication of maximum temperature
- Measuring range: -30°C to +50°C
- Division in 0.5°C
Accuracy 4- 0.05°C
- Manufactured according to DIN 58654 or equivalent standard
- Standard packing including small screen and stand
2
Minimum Thermometer:
- Liquid - in - glass thermometer with colourless liquid and
blue floating index;
- Measuring range: -40°C to 4- 40°C
- Division in 0.5°C
- Accuracy + 0.05°C
- Manufactured according to DIN58653 or equivalent standard;
- Standard packing including small screen and stand
3
Measuring cylinder
Graduated in nun reading accuracy 0.1 mm
-Made of glass
-For ordinary rain gauge
-Collection area of 314 cm2
3
Ordinary rain gauge
Collector, Funnel, Locking Rings and Base. Non corrosive material
With its stand and holder
Receiving surface -200cm  (WMO standard)
2Collecting capacity : 2 liter bottle
Operating temperature range above 0°C
6.7.8   Class IV Stations
Price LT1 003
Right location of the stations, installation, commissioning, acceptance, guarantee and
maintenance are to be supported by NMA.
Technical specifications for Class 4 stations
No.
Item
Description requested
1
Measuring cylinder
Graduated in mm reading accuracy 0.1 mm
-Made of glass
-For ordinary rain gauge
-Collection area of 314 cm2
2
Ordinary rain gauge
Collector, Funnel, Locking Rings and Base. Non corrosive material
With its stand and holder
Receiving surface -200cm2 (WMO standard)
Collecting capacity : 2 liter bottle
Operating temperature range above OoC
6.7.9   Automated ram gauge for FEWS only 
Price LT 1 010
The technical specifications are as follows:
•   Tipping-bucket   technology   will   be   preferred   although   it   is   not   compulsory   Other solutions   for   rainfall   sensors   will   be   considered   (acoustic   sensor   for   example) provided  that  the  measurement  specifications  meet  or  exceed  those  listed  below  The proposed  rain  gauge  must  have  successfully  passed  WMO  laboratory  inter-comparison tests  before  the  closing  of  the  lender.  The  sensor  is  to  be  connected  to  a  data collection platform for automatic data storage and transmission for FEWS only
c
Range and resolution: 0.5 mm
• Accuracy: +- 0.3% at 50 nun per hour
Equipped with cable to data logger,
The  sensors  will  be  made  of  non-corrosive  metal.  The  rain  gauges  must  be  cimMo providing reliable observations for both low and high intensity rainstorms. 'P 1
Classic   standard   manual   rain   gauges,   recognized   by   the   WMO   should   it™
provided for each monitoring location. 
’ a aiso
be6.7.10    Staff gauge price LT 1 004
6.7.10.1   Design and technical details
The  staff  gauge  will  be  used  for  manual  water  level  observation  and  for  reference  purposes  in combination with sensor in rivers, lakes and reservoirs.
The  staff  gauge  shall  be  of  such  a  design  that  it  can  be  effectively  used  under  the  prevailing environmental conditions. It needs to be readable for al) possible water levels at site.
< The staff gauge shall be of a sturdy construction
« The staff gauge shall be easy to observe and maintain.
•     All materials on the staff gauge shall be non-corrosive (enamelled type)
Clear   dark   markings   on   a   white   background,   length:   lm,   centimetres   markings   with labelled decimetres, supply with separate meter number plates.
Number of elements for each station will be determined by the Contractor.
6.7.10.2  Civil works
The staff gauge may  be supported  by  a concrete or steel pole of sufficient length  for stable installation  on  water banks and  riverbeds.  The pole shall have provisions to  rigidly  attach  the staff gauges and  a provision  to  adjust the staff gauges to  the required  elevation.  The concrete pole shall have such  solidity  that it can  permanently  sustain  partial and/or full immersion  in water and resist to any kind of water transported debris.
6.7.1      1 Radar sensor for surface water-level measurement price LT1 005
For water level sensors, the preferred technologies are pressure and radar sensors and shall
have certified documentation of performance. The sensor is to be connected to a data logger
for automatic data storage and transmission (data collection platform).
Radar sensor will be used  preferably  when  the site suits well (bridge or other existing  infra structure).  It shall be capable of measuring  water levels from 0.5  metre to  30  metres.  This technology has been selected as some rivers are subjected:
‘ to large water surface fluctuation (range of water level between drought level and 
flood peak),
•     to heavy siltation occurrences;
•     to debris carried by the current during floods;
As the sensor shall be installed in a mast, it must be suitably protected against lightning.
6.7.11.1    Design and technical details
Housing
•       The  sensor  housing  must  be  robust,  corrosion  resistant,  resistant  to  ultra-violet  rays, insensitive  to  vibration  and  be  water  and  dust  protected  to  comply  with  rating  IP68  as defined in IEC144.
The  sensor  housing  must  be  fitted  with  a  watertight  plug  for  connection  to  the  data transmission cable.Measuring sensor
. rnor
•    The sensor shall be designed to function satisfactorily between -40 C ana ou c.
6  The sensor must have a standard resolution of 1 mm and an accuracy of +- 1 ern or better over the full measuring range. The range will be 0 to 30 m (electrical outpu programmable to any lower full scale and offset range, typical relative value. U to IU
m).
•    The sensor should have a measuring interval of at least 60 seconds.
Data transmission cable
•    The data transmission cable should function satisfactorily with a cable length of up to 
200 metres.
*• The outer diameter of the cable should not exceed 10 mm.
Power supply
•    The nominal power supply for the sensor should be 12 volts.
•    The power consumption of the sensor should not exceed 500 mA in measurement
mode and 1 pA during stand-by mode.
6.7.11.2  Output signal
The output signal of the sensor transmitted to the DCP should be 4-20 mA or SDI-12.
6.7.11.3  Civil works
The radar sensor shall be installed on a mast, supported by a concrete or steel pole of
sufficient length for stable installation on waler banks and riverbeds. The pole shall have
provisions to rigidly attach the radar sensor and its mast. The concrete pole shall have such 
solidity that it can permanently sustain partial and/or full immersion in water.
6.7.11.4  Measurement
The  water  level  measurement  frequency  will  be  every  5  minutes  to  several  hours,  depending of the level variations.
The switch from a frequency to another one will be locally determined by the Data Collection Platform.
6.7.12   Pressure transducer
6.7.12.1  For surface water level measurement price LTl 006
This kind of sensor will be proposed if radar sensor cannot be installed.
Pressure transducers must be capable of measuring water levels between 0 and 30 metres The pressure transducers must be highly reliable and ensure a wide range of application for measuring pressure in all fields of water level measurement.
Transducers must be suitably protected against lightning, and test results must be available upon request.
6.7.12.2  Technical characteristics Transducer housing
The transducer housing must be robust, corrosion-resistant, insensitive to impact a d vibration and watertight up to at least 100 metres of water column. 
'          °
The transducer housing can be fitted with a watertight plug for connection to the transducer cable.Pressure sensor
The measuring cell must be chemically and thermally resistant.
The pressure-measuring cell must operate using the piczorcsistive method.
The   pressure   sensor   shall   be   designed   and   calibrated   to   function   satisfactorily   under   a temperature range of -40°C to +60°C.
The pressure sensor shall have a built-in temperature compensator.
Transducer cable - The transducer cable must have the following characteristics:
Flexible  and  at  least  a  double  sheathing  with  interposed  tinned  copper-braiding  or  better  with an outer diameter of not more than 12 mm
The  transducer  cable  shall  be  used  as  the  carrying  rope  and  shall  have  an  internal  Kevlar-core assembly or equivalent for longitudinal stability.
A   polyamide   pressure-compensation   capillary   tube   for   measuring   the   reference   pressure   with an inside diameter of 3 mm but not less than 1.0 mm.
End   of   cable   connected   by   terminal   box   with   additional   Teflon   coated   filters   and   an exchangeable humidity absorber.
A  fixing  clamp  for  exact  positioning  of  the  pressure  probe  in  a  stilling  well  or  tube  must  be available, manufactured from a non-corrosive material.
The  pressure  transducer  and  transducer  cable  shall  be  designed  to  function  satisfactorily  with a cable length of 250 metres
The  transducer  cable  must  be  provided  with  a  watertight  plug  for  connection  to  the  transducer housing.
Temperature sensor
The pressure transducer should  have a platinum-resistor integrated  temperature sensor.  The sensitivity  of the measuring  element shall be 0.1°C in  a temperature range of at least -40°C to +60°C.
Output signal
The  voltage  output  signal  for  each  measuring  range  should  be  1-5  V  or  4-20  mA  or  SDI-12. Measuring accuracy
The  overall  measuring  accuracy  of  the  pressure  transducer  must  be  belter  than  or  equal  to  0.1 per cent of the full scale.
6.7.12.3    Civil works
A stilling  basin  will be constructed  to  house the sensor.  It will be located  in  the river bed  at a place always submerged  in  order to  measure the water level even  during  the drought season. This location will be in a stable spot of tlie river bed.
6.7.12.4   Measurement
The water level measurement frequency  will be every  5  minutes to  several hours,  depending of the level variations.  The switch  from a frequency  to  another one will be locally  determined by the Data Collection Platform.6.7.13  For groundwater level measurement price LTl 007 
• i a a ’ th
Pressure transducers for groundwater level measurement arc not include in  t c teletransmission network. They must be capable of measuring water levels between 0 and 200 metres with  the range of each  transducer being  determined  by  the Contractor and  pre-set in (he factory.
Typical ranges could be 0-20 m, 0-40 m and >40 m on request.
The  pressure  transducers  must  be  highly  reliable  and  ensure  a  wide  range  of  application  for measuring pressure in all fields of water level measurement.
Transducers  must  be  suitably  protected  against  lightning,  and  test  results  must  be  available upon request.
6.7.13.1 Technical characteristics
Transducer housing
The transducer housing must be robust, corrosion-resistant, insensitive to impact and 
vibration and watertight up to at least 100 metres of water column (>40 m on request). 
The transducer housing .can be fitted with a watertight plug for connection to the transducer
cable.
Pressure sensor
The measuring cell must be chemically and thermally resistant.
The pressure-measuring cell must operate using the piczoresistive method.
The   pressure   sensor   shall   be   designed   and   calibrated   to   function   satisfactorily   under   a temperature range of -40°C to +60°C.
The pressure sensor shall have a built-in temperature compensator.
Transducer cable - The transducer cable must have the following characteristics:
Flexible  and  at  least  a  double  sheathing  with  interposed  tinned  copper-braiding  or  better with an outer diameter of not more than 12 mm
The transducer cable shall be used as the carrying rope and shall have an internal Kevlar-core assembly or equivalent for longitudinal stability.
A polyamide pressure-compensation capillary tube for measuring the reference pressure with 
an inside diameter of 3 mm but not less than 1.0 mm.
End of cable connected by terminal box with additional Tefloncoated filters and an 
exchangeable humidity absorber.
A fixing clamp for exact positioning of the pressure probe in a stilling well or tube must be available, manufactured from a non-corrosive material.
The  pressure  transducer  and  transducer  cable  shall  be  designed  to  function  satisfactorily  with a cable length of 250 metres
The transducer cable must be provided with a watertight plug for connection to the transducer housing.
Temperature sensor
The pressure transducer should  have a platinum-resistor integrated  temperature sensor The sensitivity of the measuring element shall be 0.1 °C in a temperature range of at least 40°C to +60°C.
Output signal
The voltage output signal for each measuring range should be 1-5 V or 4 -20 mAMeasuring accuracy
The  overall  measuring  accuracy  of  the  pressure  transducer  must  be  better  than  oi  equal  to  0.1 per cent of the full scale.
6.7.13.2 Measurement
The water level measure will be done ever}' 6 hours.
6.7.14   Turbidity sensor
Price LT1 008
< The range will be: 0-5000 NTU Nephelometric Turbidity Unit.
« The housing will be stainless steel casing,
•    The sensor will be fitted with the appropriate length of cable,
■   An integral wiper (nominal wipe time under 10 seconds) will be included,
•    Technique to be adopted: 90dcg modulated infrared (ISO 7027),
•     Equipped with RS 232 and SDI 12 interfaces,
■   Linearity: 3%
•     Accuracy: 3% up to 5000 NTU,
•    Turbidity calibration solution included for the guarantee period.
6.7.15   Current meter
Price LT1 012
The    current    meter    will    be    used    for    water    velocity    measurement    and    thus    discharge measurements in rivers and canals. It may be used in wading or suspended mode.
Conditions & Requirements
-    The current meter shall be of such a design that it operates reliably and accurately 
under the prevailing flow and environmental conditions.
•    The current meter shall be easy to operate and maintain.
•    The current meter shall be supplied with the accessories as needed for effective
deployment.
-     All materials of the current meter shall be non-corrosive.
-     An operator’s manual, related to the type and model of the current meter, shall be part
of the delivery.
•      The  current  meter  shall  come  with  the  calibration  data,  i.e.  actual  calibration  velocity versus   actual   revolutions   per   second   as   collected   during   the   calibration   process. Calibration    data    shall    uniquely    identify    the    instrument    body,    the    propeller,    the observer, rating tank, way of suspension, methodology and similar information.
•    The current meter shall come with a rating table and a rating chart in m/s versus
revolutions per second, uniquely related to the propeller by propeller serial number. Each impeller (propeller) of the current meter is calibrated individually and calibration chart for individual impeller is supplied (multiple calibration)
“ The propeller calibration  shall be independent of the current meter body; propellers shall be interchangeable from one body  to  another body  of the same model without any change in calibration.
•    The current meter shall have a provision to adjust its trimming.
3 he design shall be sediment resistant and have an oil-filled bearing chamber.*    The bearings shall be on Geld exchangeable.
1   The  current  meter  shall  come  without  a  protection  ring/yoke  in  front  of  the  propeller, such  a  yoke  would  make  the  current  meter  sensitive  to  its  alignment  into  the  ilow, which should be avoided.
*   The current meter shall be as slim as possible to avoid excessive drag.
*   The electrical connections shall be small, of a reliable and sturdy construction.
*   The current meter and accessories shall be supplied in a sturdy carrying case.
*■ An appropriate tool-set shall be included in the delivery.
*   The current meter shall generally comply with IS 3910-1992
*     For  operation,  adequate  fish  weight  shall  be  attached  below  the  current  meter  or integrated with current meter body and tail.
e    The  fish  weight  shall  have  a  streamlined  form  and  shall  be  suspended  from  a  bar  of adequate strength.
’  Horizontal  and  vertical  tail  fins  at  the  rear  end  shall  align  the  Gsh  weight  in  the direction of Gow.
*   Except for the suspension bar, no elements shall protrude from the body.
*   The fish weight shall generally comply with IS 4073-1967 and ISO 3454-1983.
Specifications
Current meter
*    current meter range 0.025 to 5 m/s (starting to maximum operational velocity)
*    propeller 2 to 4 blades
•    propeller diameter =0.1 to =0.2 m
•    propeller length about 0.1 m
-  The  current  meter  may  be  provided  with  one  propeller  or  with  a  set  of  propellers  that differ in their pitch and/or in their diameter.
The propellers shall be made interchangeable.
The  propellers  shall  be  made  of  cast  material,  e.g.  bronze, tough, high impact resistant and corrosion proof material.
polycarbonate or similar
The response shall be instantly and consistent to all changes in velocity.
The  rate  of  change  of  the  angular  velocity  of  the  propeller  shall  be  synchronous  with the rale of change of the flow velocity.
Propellers of the same mode! shall be interchangeable without affecting calibration. The propellers shall be uniquely identifiable by engraved serial number.
materials all materials of the current meter and combinations thereof shall be corrosion proof
bearing low friction, field replaceable without affecting the calibration rotation sensor reed switch closure, one closure per revolution accuracy for velocities up to 0.3 m/s 1 % Full Scalefor velocities >0.3 m/s 0.5 % Full Scale
Suspension Wading
*    wading rod total length 3 m, graduation in cm,
*     electrical cable : running from current meter to counter, 10 m
*    From a cable : suspension cable with single integrated electrical wire for rotation 
sensor and bottom detector
length 30 m
diameter 2.5 to 3.5 mm
electrical cable from winch to counter, 7 m
torque free suspension cable
The suspension  cable should  not exert any  torque that may  adversely  affect the alignment of the flow sensor into  the direction  of flow.  In  particular in  case a heavy  suspension  weight is used, there is a risk of cable induced torque.
-   suspension-rod   :   for   cable   suspended   measurements   with   light   weight   sinkers.   The suspension  rod  shall  have  sufficient  freedom  of  movement  to  allow  it  to  accommodate to inclination of the suspension cable under high current velocities.
< inclination range -45° (forward) to 10° (backward) from vertical.
•      tail  fin  length  >0.6  m  beyond  the  attach  point  of  the  suspension.  The  tail  fin  shall  be capable  of  aligning  the  current  meter,  in  the  direction  of  flow  and  keep  it  stable  in  that position throughout the full velocity range.
Fish weight
•     model USGS Columbus or similar
•     material cast iron or lead
•     finish smooth, painted surface
•     mass of fish weights 25, 50 and 100 kg, as required for depth and current velocity. The
fish weight may be integrated in the instrument or an addition below the instrument.
•     bottom detector the bottom detector shall be small and sturdy
•       bottom   detection   bottom   detection   will   be   signalled   by   permanently   closing   a   reed switch.   That   switch   will   override   the   rotation   sensor   switch.   The   bottom   detection signal will be sent on the same integrated wire as the rotation signals.
•     suspension bar, fitting cuircnt meter and cable terminal
Option
•    propeller for velocities up to 10 m/s
if the instrument is used from a cable way then an integrated bottom detector is required
Accessories
standard instrument tools
•     spare bearings
‘ carrying case for current meter with counter
•     carrying case for fish weight(s) Consumables
•     bearing oilElectronic stopwatch Price LT1 013
The electronic stopwatch will be used during discharge measurements with rotating e emen current meters and during pumping tests. The revolution counter integration time and e tune lapsed from the starting of pumping at specified intervals of time will be measured wi t le stopwatch.
Conditions & Requirements
•    The instrument shall be compatible with the environment of operation.
- The instrument shall be adequate for the application and the mode of working. Specifications
•    range stopwatch >59 minutes
•    range count down 59 minutes
•    resolution 0.1 s
« accuracy 0.1 sover 1 hour
■ stopwatch modes lap time, split time
•    display LCD, good visibility in daylight
•    enclosure water resistant
•    power supply standard button cell(s)
•    battery lifetime > 1 year
•    instrument life time >5 years of operation
•    temperature range -40 to 50 °C
•    robustness the instrument shall survive several drops on concrete
•    housing splash waterproof
Consumables
- batteries
6.7.16   Sediment samplers
... 
,        . 
.....
Sediment and water quality that may be sampled using approved equipment is divided into 
three categories depending on its location in the stream. 
.
■  Suspended  sediment  is  sediment  that  is  earned  in  suspension  tn  the  tlow  of  a  stream for appreciable  lengths of lime, being kept in this state by the upward components of (low turbulence or by Brownian motions.
Bedload is defined as that part of the sedimentary load of the stream which is moving in  almost continuous contact with  the stream bed,  being  rolled  or pushed  along  the bottom by  the tractive force of the moving  water.The mechanisms by which it moves can be varied and complex.
Bed material is sediment in the streambed that is at rest, but as coarse suspended sediment or move as bedload.
may rc-suspend and moveTo be use in Ethiopia, different equipments have been selected from US Geological Survey:
« For Suspended-Sediment Sampling,
Point Integrating suspended sediment and water quality sampler US P-72 model (or similar)
Depth Integrating
Wadeable : US DH 81 (or similar)
Depths to 12 meters : US DH 2(or similar)
Depths to 5 meters (hand line): US DH 95(or similar)
«• For Bed material Sampling,
Wadcablc : US BMH 53(or similar)
* For Bed load Sampling,
Wadeable : US BLH 84 (or similar)
US DH-72 (or similar) price LT1 014
The sampler has a streamlined  cast aluminum body  28  in  long  that weighs 41  lbs.  It has tail fins to  orient the sampler so  that the intake nozzle in  the head  points directly  into  the approaching  flow.  The sampler head  is hinged  to  provide access to  the pint or quart bottle sample container located  in  a cavity  in  the sampler body.  An  exhaust port pointing downstream on  the side of the sampler head  permits escape of air from the sampler container as it is displaced  by  the sample being  collected.  The sampler uses a 3/16-in  internal diameter nozzle and  can  be used  in  stream velocities ranging  from 1.5  to  5.3  ft/scc.  Il can  be used  to  a depth of 72 fl with a pint container and 51 ft with a quart container.
US DH 81 (or similar) price LT1 015
The sampler will collect samples at acceptable inflow efficiency  in  stream velocities ranging from 2.0  to  6.2  ft/sec with  a 3/16-in  nozzle,  1.5  to  7.6  fl/sec with  a 1/4-in  nozzle,  and  2.0  to 7.0  fl/sec with  a 5/16-in  nozzle.  Based  on  the recommended  maximum volume of 800  ml (or equivalent) the US sampler will collect samples to  a maximum recommended  depth  of 12  ft. The sampler can  be used  to  a depth  of 15  fl by  collecting  up  to  1  liter of sample.  To  sample depths greater than  can  be waded,  wading  rod  extensions in  1- and  3-ft lengths can  be added to  the sampler.  With  the extensions,  the sampler can  be deployed  from a low bridge or boat. The unsampled zone is 4 in.
US DH 2(or similar) price LT1 016
The sampler can  be used  in  stream depths up  to  37  ft using  a 3/16-in  internal diameter nozzle, 20  ft using  a 1/4-in  internal diameter nozzle,  and  13  ft using  a 5/16-in  internal diameter nozzle.  The sampler can  be used  in  stream velocities ranging  from 2.0  to  6.0  ft/scc.  The sampler is fabricated  from cast bronze and  high-density  polyethylene and  is plastic coated.  It is 19  in  long  and  weighs 29  lbs.  The sampler uses plastic or TFE  nozzles and  plastic or PFA bags. The unsampled zone using the US DH-2 is 4 in.
US DH 95 (or similar) price LT1 017
The suspended-sediment and  water-quality  sampler is a dep  th-integrating  sampler designed for use in  streams not exceeding  15  fl in  depth.  It meets the protocols for water quality sampling.  The sampler is lowered  and  raised  by  means of a suspension  system such  as a reel and  crane or bridge board.  The sampler is designed  to  sample at an  acceptable inflow efficiency in stream velocities ranging from 1.5 to 7.5 fl/sec.
The sampler weighs 64  pounds and  is 26  in  long  with  the bottle,  cap,  and  nozzle in  place.  The bronze body  casting  is coated  with  plastic and  the tail section  is constructed  from plastic to help  avoid  metal contamination  during  water quality  sampling.  The sampler is designed  to  use a 1-liter Teflon  sampler cap  and  nozzle.  Plastic and  TFE  nozzles with  3/16-,  1/4-,  and  5/16-in internal diameter arc available.  The unsampled  zone using  the US D-95TM is 4.8  inches.  The recommended sample volume to be collected with the US D-95TM sampler is 800 ml.BMH 53(or similar) price LTl 018
The sampler is a hand-held  piston-type bed-material sampler.  The sampler is used  to  co  cct a sample of material from the bed of a shallow stream. The overall length of the tubular sampler is 46 in and it weighs 7.5 lbs. The lower end of the sampler contains a 2-in diameter, 8 in long cylinder (hat is pressed  into  the stream bed  to  collect the sample.  A handle for pressing  the cylinder into the bed is on the upper end, and passes through the sampler frame to the piston inside.  The suction  created  by  the piston  holds the sample in  the cylinder.  The sample is pushed out of the cylinder by the piston.
US BLH 84(or similar) price LTl 019
This is a wading-type hand-held  bed  load  sampler.  The sampler consists of an  expanding nozzle,  a sample bag,  and  a wading  rod  assembly.  The sampler design  enables collection  of particle sizes larger than  the bag  mesh  opening  and  smaller than  1.5  in  (38  mm) at stream velocities up to 9.8 ft/sec. The sampler has a 3 by 3 in entrance nozzle and an area expansion ratio  (ratio  of nozzle exit area to  entrance area) of 1.4.  A polyester mesh  bag  with  mesh openings of 0.25  mm is attached  to  the rear of the nozzle assembly  with  a rubber "O" ring. The sampler is constructed of aluminium, weighs 10 lbs and is 28 in long.
6.7.17 Bank Operated Cableways
New equipment: Price LTl 020
ISO 4375
A cableway  system with  bank-side winch  is required  to  operate over a span  of about 100m (order of magnitude,  the Contractor will determine the exact required  lengths at each  station), with a sinker of 5 to 50 kg (Values to be validated during the field visit). It shall be compliant with the international standard ISO 4375 “Cableway systems for stream gauging”.
SINKER WEIGHT
Teclmical calculation  required  for the cableways design  need  to  select the appropriate sinker weight as this affects cable selection,  support design,  foundations and  winch.  It is important not to over specify the sinker weight.
Note that the sinker weights will rarely exceed 50 kg. Generally, the mass of a sinker-weight needed in kg as approximately 5 x mean velocity of water in m/sec x depth of water in metres. For transport constraints, the sinker weight should not exceed 100 kg.
Global features
The working sag shall be 2% of the span.
The  current  meter  suspension  cable  shall  have  a  breaking  strength  of  at  least  5  times  the sinker weight.
The main  cable,  fixings,  supports and  foundations shall be capable of withstanding  a load  at midspan  equal to  twice the load  on  the current meter suspension  cable or the release load of the torque limiter.  Cable terminations shall be 100% efficient.  Test certificates shall be provided  for all ropes,  ngging  screws and  shackles used.  Shear links are to  be avoided.  The supports shall be designed  on  the assumption  that there is no  automatic tensioning  device so that the system may operate with or without automatic tensioning.
The winch  shall provide interlocked  traversing  and  sounding  modes,  with  a loop  traversing cable and  a spooled  sounding  cable.  Il shall incoqjoratc a load  Limiter to  allow the traverse drive system to slip in the event of accidental overload. The winch shall include current meter connections to the coaxial signal cable via a slip ring or similar device and provide depth and distance counters, in metres, displaying 2 decimal places.
The winch should be electrically driven but fully convertible to manual operation in the event of power failure.  The input power requirement shall not exceed  (220V,  2kVA) and  shall be 50Hz, single phase, using an electrical generator.The motor control system shall provide “soft start” to  minimise shock  loading,  cunent limiting  and  stall detection  so  that the motor will be shut down  in  the event of accidental overload.
Winch  motor controls shall be interlocked  push  buttons,  preferably  on  a pendant.  It shall be necessary  to  maintain  the pressure on  the control button  for the motor to  run.  Releasing  the button  shall cause the motor to  stop.  An  emergency  stop  button,  with  key  release,  shall be provided in the power supply line.
The system shall fail safe in the event of power failure.
In  manual  operation,  the  operator  shall  be  protected  by  a  load  activated  brake,  automatic  in action, so that the handle cannot be driven by the load.
All   traveller   track   wheels,   pulley   wheels   and   guide   rollers   shall   be   close   fitting   to   prevent ropes   coming   off   the   pulleys   and   becoming   snagged.   The   main   traveller   track   wheel   and sounding  cable  pulley  grooves  shall  have  a  bottom  radius  to  suit  the  cable.  The  track  wheel radius  shall  be  appropriate  for  the  selected  main  cable  diameter.  If  more  than  one  track  wheel is  provided  they  should  be  arranged  so  as  to  equally  share  the  load  in  operation.  In  operation, the  traveller  shall  be  captive  on  the  main  cable  and  the  sounding  cable  shall  be  captive  on  the traveller.  The  return  span  of  traversing  cable  shall  pass  through  roller  guides  on  the  traveller. Guidance  on  cableway  design  given  has  to  be  perused  to  appreciate  the  details  from  site  by survey and investigation.
The  cableways  will  be  furnished  with  two  sinkers:  one  of  30  kg  weight  and  one  from  the maximum weight based on the calculation mentioned here before.
Bank Operated Cableway refurbishment
Price LT 1 021
Two   hydrometric   stations   arc   concerned:   Angareb   near   Gondar   and   Gilgel   Abbay   near Merawi. The evaluation of the repairing works must be evaluated during the Held visit.
6.7.18   Portable trolley
Price LT 022
The  portable  trolley  will  be  with  mounted  crane  and  winch  fitted  with  30m-connector  cable, for current meter gauging from bridges. Il will include:
Gauging Trolley with mounted crane,
fix mounted crane with central stand (pillar),
360° tumablc, can be arrested every 90°
Telescopic   arm,   sections   to   be   armed   in   and   out  manually,   can   be   arrested   in   end position.
Pulley for suspension cable and adaption fixings for single drum winch.
6.7.19   Portable deep meter
Price LT 1023
Portable equipment for Ground water level measurement.
It will be mounted  on  cable reel,  stainless steel probe with  electric light and  peeping  sound facilities when  in  contact with  water.  Since it is labeled  with  metric numbers,  it is possible to read  the water level from the tape as the probe touch  the water and  record  the water level in the standard recording format.
The device is provided  with  a probe,  which  is connected  to  a measuring  tape with  centimeter graduation.  When  the probe touches the water,  a clear acoustic and  light signal is produced.  If the cable is then  lifted  a little,  the signal will slop.  Determination  of this point allows the user to read the depth directly from the measuring tape (accuracy: ± 0.5 cm).Technical characteristics:
Measuring  Tape:  200  meter  of  polyethylene  coated  twin  —  leader  seal  wire  with printed metric number in meters and centimetres. Dimension 9 x 2mm
- Probe: Stainless steel AISI 303.Dimension 012mm x 260mm. Weight approx. 
175 grams
Electronic Circuit: Integrated and water proof with built in electronic switch and 
low energy consumption
Indication: Sound : Frequency approx. 3000Hz, 80dB. Light: 08mm LED-diode, 
ultra bright
Cable reel: Shockproof plastic material (ABS)
-    Frame: Steel frame with built in brake
-    Battery: 9Volt alkaline 6LR61 or similar Dimensions 17 x 26 x 47mm
Meter Dimension: Height 375 x Width 290 x Depth 215mm
- Weight: 5 kg
6.7.20  Existing wells rehabilitation price LT1 024
This   rehabilitation   program   will   be   defined   in   the   frame   of   theF   Detailed   Groundwater Investigation and Monitoring of the Tana and Bales Sub-basins
6.7.21  Logistics price LT 1 025
It will consist in the purchase for each field team, of:
• One 4WD car
• One GPS unit
6.7.22    Central
end Price LT1 027
and  secondary  stations  equipment-  hardware,  software,  communication  front
The  set  of  Central  and  secondary  stations  will  include:  GSM/GPRS  receiver  and  ancillary 
equipments,  Satellite  Station  receiver  and  ancillary  equipments  for  FEWS  network  computer
system  used  with  GSM/GPRS  and  Satellite  data  collection  and  quality  control’,  including 
design,   manufacture,   testing,   delivery   along  with  the  software  solution,  web  based  tools’
associated   interface   wiring,   termination,   commissioning,   site   acceptance   testin<>   supply   of
mandatory spares, etc. as per following technical specifications. 
7
The  Purchaser  will  provide  the  office  space,  power  and  environmental control  required  for the CS and SS.
A Central Station (CS) will include:
the automatic data collection System (called here after Font End Computer),
the supervisory system to manage the hydrometric network
the Man Machine Interface,
other equipments such as printers, network...
ental concepts of the system, including industry standards and definitions, are presented The  fun  unct.on   reque5ts   necessary  to  the  hydrometric  network.  Topics  covered  include  system t°   define   netwQrk     communication   methods,   reliability   considerations,   operator   interfaces,   and acorchmmiteissi  ctuoren,ing, control          architecture is proposed, with special reliability considerations,6.7,22.1.1    Brief description of the expected architecture
The expected control centre (including front end computer, supervisory  system) is  envisaged as  a Web-based architecture system, using a multi-tier distributed framework such as J2EE technology (or similar). The Web Application will be deployed on the client (user) computer by  using only  a web browser and an internet connection. Compatibility  will be available for Internet Explorer, Firefox, Safari.
6.7.22.1.2   Front end computer
A) Redundancy
The purpose of the communication front-ends  is  to manage data communication between the control stations applications and the outstations. The front-ends software shall constantly maintain a real-time database containing the latest value for each data, transmitted to or from the control centre, during 1 month duration.
To ensure constant availability  of this  function, two front-ends  installed on virtual machine, distinct but entirely  alike, will be installed in redundancy. A single "hot" front-end will manage communications. Its database shall be continuously recopied on the second "stand-by'* front-end. If possible, the front-end "hot" will be installed in a CS infrastructure, and the front-end "stand by" in the second CS. By this solution, in case of failure on a CS infrastructure (like power outage), the problem will be totally invisible for the operator.
B) Transmission functions
Periodically,  the  front-end  will  handle  station-by-station  data  collection,  to  verify  the  status  of  each station. In case of no reply from a station (no files in the Ftp server), the front-end will set an alarm.
The front-end's  application software should be entirely  dynamic. Adding a new station or an additional peripheral may  be carried out without additional software development but through set up modifications. The front-ends database shall be entirely defined dynamically.
The front-ends  shall be equipped with a Web system console allowing to monitor communication table status in real time and to select the parameters of the application. In case of unavailability, this console will serve as  a terminal for downgraded operation and will allow operators  to ensure minimal management of the hydrometric network.
C) External device management
This software feature shall be available for DCP and logger connected to Cellular network (GPRS, EDGE, UMTS...) and satellite (Thuraya or other specific format) data links or similar, for which the amount of data transferred shall be minimized. For permanent communication links, data time stamped shall be done in the field data acquisition device (DCP, Logger).
The front end computer software shall also manage transmission device balancing. In case of Front End Computer (FEC) failure, the new hot EEC shall taken device management rights.
If  available,  when  data  transmission  is  performed  by  permanent  link  such  as  xDSL,  Leased  line, Satellite, the FEC will manage a backup (if available) in permanent mode to recovery data collection.D) Specific protocol
The SCADA software shall be provided with a SMS (Cellular and Satellite) and Ftp client (GPRS and GnPRS) protocol driver enabling data acquisition from datalogger using these data transmission format.
6.7.22.1.3  Supervisory system
A) General
The supervisory system must provide the following functions, through acquisition links with station (Data Collection Platform and Logger).
Provide an overall view of the facilities through animated mimic views
Enable controlling and setting equipment
Detect alarms and highlight them by a buzzer, graphic view, and print-out
Archive events and generate reports.
B) Development
The supervisory  system provided will include the development tools  required to configure the application. These tools are not restricted to use on a single station, and it must be possible to install and use them on other stations, without limitation of the number, for development and user training purposes. The operating software can be installed without particular protection on several stations for testing applications; these copies of the software are not intended for actual operation: in this case, the restrictions of use will concern the time of use or any other method enabling to perform tests satisfactorily on the applications.
The development tools will enable generating cross-references lists of the application variables. In the absence of communication with field equipment, a simulator will enable allocating values to the variables of these devices, in order to test the configuration applied.
C)Acquisition - basic processing
The data acquired over the field devices must be processed and formatted to be compliant with spreadsheet layout manager used to process variables in basic calculation formulas. This manager must be developed specifically for supervision, and offer excellent real-time calculation performance.
More particularly, the manager will include the following functions:
-    Acquisition of real time data (Boolean and analog values, faults, counters, etc.)
-      Acquisition  of  data  time-stamped  by  the  DCP  and  logger.  As  field  stations  will  not  be connected permanently (for energy consumption optimisation) to the Control Station, the acquisition process will enable treating the time stamped data done by the DCP and loggers. This processing will be performed without any additional configuration for acquisition; the association  between  variables  on  instant  data  and  time-stamped  data  will  be  fully transparent for the user, more particularly analog values using the same formulas for scaling The data will be stored automatically in the appropriate historical database. There will be no additional or separate configuration of real time and time-stamped variables, which must be handled, from the operator's point of view, as one unique variable.Switching  each  on/off  device  by  simple  command,  to  stop  acquisitions  during  maintenance operations
Formatting raw data using calculation formulas, including more specifically  the scaling functions  for analog values, combination of logical functions, and concerning both variables issued by devices as internal variables.
Processing  function  capability  shall  contained  as  minimum:  timers,  memorization  of  values on condition, time counting, and events
Transmission  of  operator  commands  to  the  equipment;  the  system  can  transmit  commands and settings automatically based on calculated formulas
It must be possible to submit operator commands, to a validity  check  by  password requirement. Memorization of these commands  shall be done in ''event archive database" with date and time, and username, for traceability. The supervisory system must be able to support at least 20 user categories  with different rights, and a total of at least 200 usernames. The categories  will not be organized by  hierarchy  of rights, i.e. an upper level category  will not systematically  have all the rights  of a lower category. The rights  shall be allocated individually for each function access level.
Archiving events  (historical database) and periodical sampling of logic  or analog values. Sampling shall be possible over a fixed period or a variation threshold (dead band, absolute or percent value), and if required, based on the presence of an external trigger variable. The periodicity  or dead band values  shall be configurable individually  for each variable; the periodicity shall be in a range of 1 second to 24 hours at least.
Alarms monitoring: At least, eight different levels of faults shall be available :
o Alarm signal can be PC buzzer activation, external siren, printed message on a log printer, or simply a colour modification on a screen graphic element,
o Alarm acknowledgement by user, shall be available. It will be memorize in "event
archive database", memorizing date and time, and username, for traceability The acknowledgment status of a default will be display by graphic animation such as 
blinking....
. Supervisor should assign a measurement data a quality efficiency (Good,Warning,Bad) and a quality status ( Raw, prevalidated) for each values of each measurement;
6.7.22.1.4    Graphic mimics
Graphic  mimics  provide animated schematic  representations  of water basins. The supervisory software shall be able to use non animated map backgrounds, in the form of bitmap images, such as scanned images  or drawings  from other applications, without any  software limitation in terms  of resolution or colour.
Graphic animations shall be displayed overlaid on these bitmap backgrounds, using a graphic editor integrated into the central station software, to create and modify objects.To avoid software capability restriction, graphic objects will not be predefined items wit imi e animations, but basic graphic items such as lines, rectangles, circles, polygons, texts, bitmaps,... wi dedicate animation properties. These properties will be given, at least:
a 24 bits color definition for any object, vectorial or bitmap, without any restriction in the number of colour used;
display of any value
variable colour and ability to hide an item, blinking
filling an object regardless of its shape: rectangle (bar graph), circle, polygon mobility on screen (variable origin)
association with process variables (remote commands and setting, acknowledgment,...)
6.7.22.1.5  Historical logs - Trends, reports
The system must enable generating the following:
events histories
trend curves
reports
A)  Historical logs
Historical database is used to archive all events related to rivers basin or Hydrometry system. Each event shall included at least, the event s date and time, a plain text title, the current value and status (normal/fault) associated to the corresponding variable, the variable's label, the username having triggered the command (in case of).
Timestamp function will be systematically used for device linked to the SCADA (with or without switched communication link). All information record shall also be obligatory time stamped in the field device.
The system provides history viewing with free presentation:
-     easy selecting will be possible; to this effect, each of the fields in recordings can be selected and subject to selection conditions
-     in addition to the usual criteria (date, designation, value, fault level, etc...), the system will enable  to  define  for  each  variable  at  least  two  fields  specifically  dedicated  to  selection criteria (equipment concerned, type of fault, section,...)
B)  Graph trends
Trend curves will be included to mimics, ensuring animated synoptic display can be used to view concurrently the matching curve without any additional operation.By default, curves will be displayed in the "real time trends” status, i.e. the last values known over a determined time range. This  presentation will provide access  to the following functions  without using a separate application:
view history
zoom x and y, with unlimited zoom factor
comparison over time of two curves  or a curve with itself (e.g. current day  temperature curve compared with the day before); comparing a curve with itself must be possible without configuring two different instances of the same curve
viewing by cursor the values of the sampled points
display or hide curves by clicking a button to facilitate reading when required
modify   all   parameters   during   operation,   without   using   the   configuration   mode;   these modifications will not be permanent, unless saved in configuration mode
automatic and on-demand printing; in manual printing, printed items must use the layout on screen according to modifications made by the operator during use
C)          Reports
The  supervisory  system  must  provide  generation  of  freely  configurable  reports  for  paper  printing  or text files export (pdf, HTML), and email.
The  system  must  enable  to  generate  reports  with  different  timescale  (hour,  day,  month,  year)  and including all measurement type available in the database.
6.7.22.1.6   Standby service - remote alarm notification
The  supervisory  system  must  be  able  to  alert  an  "On-Call"  technician  at  home,  by  using  telephone call, cellular call, SMS on cellular phone.
The standby  module will not be external to the supervisor, in the form of a separate module (Add On), but fully  integrated, ensuring all the parameters  of the variables  can be used as  such (titles, values, etc.), without requiring new entry. The allocation of a basic variable to a standby call will be limited to allocating a standby group number to it (minimum 100 groups). Standby service groups will be composed of a set of operators in the call sequence, with the media used (SMS etc.). These groups must be easily modifiable manually or automatically.
A  standby  calendar  will  enable  graphic  programming  of  the  time  ranges  for  the  operation  of  the standby  service  per  typical  days,  which  can  be  defined  freely  (working  days,  week-end,  etc.)  with automatic   allocation   according   to   a   weekly   periodicity,   or   manually   (holidays,   days   off,   etc.). Individual modifications can be programmed in the form of derogations.
The system will enable to easily edit standby teams made through: Definition of operators (generic)
Call sequence
Definition of teams by allocating individuals to each type of operator Weekly allocation of the teamsWeekly rotation of standby teams must be possible easily without reprogramming, week after week, the composition of the teams, until devising the standby schedule one year in advance.
A standby operator can be suspended momentarily (ignored in the standby call cycle) or replaced by another person by setting the beginning and end of this derogation.
6.7.22.1.7  Configuration
The supervisory software configuration will be performed in the application server. When saving, the application will be then accessible with these new modifications, for all users in all places, without any  computer adaptation (hardware and software), any  task  which required human intervention, such as manual correction.
6.7.22.1.8  Computer equipment and other
All these equipment shall be protected by an on-site warranty (2 years) with a permanent company located in Ethiopia.
A) Workstation - server,
Workstations shall be installed in each Control Station with the following features:
• In the regional offices, two (2) servers with a minimum of 6 CPUs, 40 Gb memory, 1 Tb hard disk, DVD/RW, and LCD screen 22 inches, and an external storage (500 Gb);
’ Two (2) workstations with a minimum of 2 CPU, 10 Gb memory, 500 Gb hard disk, DVD/RW, and LCD screen 27 inches
Associated equipments such as hub, router, and firewall shall be furnished for all stations.
B) Wide Area Network (WAN)
To permit permanent and reliable communication links between CS and SS, a VPN shall be installed as wide area network. The contractor must proposed solutions available in Ethiopia and compliant with local regulations.
C) Printers
A laser printer A4 format speed 12 page per minute, 600 dpi resolution will be installed in each Central Station.
These printers shall be directly connected to the L.A.N. (Local Area Network).D)  UPS
A UPS shall install in each CS with the following features:
utilisation output : 220 volts AC monophase +/- 5%, distortion < 2%:
no-maintenance battery,
solid state rectifier and converter,
automatic switch-over to mains supply in case of DC/AC converter failure,
during   a   power   supply   break-down,   80%   battery   run-down   threshold   is   signalled,   and converter output is automatically shut-down should the battery voltage be too low,
UPS  shall  be   installed  with  external  mains  supply  by-pass  allowing  dead  maintenance  and/or dismantling of UPS without cutting off equipment usually supplied by the UPS.
UPS shall permit the system functioning  during  60  minutes after the main  energy  supply failure.  To  limit the UPS configuration,  a small one can  be proposed  with  additional external power supply such generator.
6.7.23  Ancillary Equipments and Tools
Price LT I 028
Ancillary  equipments and  tools will be provided  by  the Contractor to  the Purchaser for the sole use by  the Purchaser.  Equipments required  for maintenance will be supplied  in  addition to  the equipments provided  by  the Contractor and  shall remain  the property  of the Purchaser. The bidder will define and  justify  all the ancillary  equipment which  is considered  as necessary for the operation of the system.
Among   these   equipments,   the  Contractor  will  provide  3  Process  Meters  (Digital  Volt  Meter) and 3 Walt Meters.
The process meter shall meet or exceed the following specifications:
- Fluke 789 Process Meter of better
- Current Measurement:
o Range 0-1A AC or DC
o Resolution 1 mA
o Accuracy 0.2% + 2 LSD
- Current Sourcing:
o Range 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA
o Resolution 0.05% of span
o Drive Capability: 24 V Compliance or 1200 Ohms @ 20 niA
- Frequency to 19.999 kHz, 0.005% 4 1 LSD
- Voltage Measurement:
o Range 0-1000 V AC (true rms) or DC
o Resolution 0.1 mV io 1.0V
o Accuracy 0.1% Rdg + 1 LSD (VDC)
- Resistance Measurement to 40 MOhms, 0.2% +1 LSD
- Diode Test 2.0V shows diode voltage drop
- Display Current and % of span
- Auto step, auto ramp
- Operating Temperature: 0 to +60° C
- Storage Temperature: -5 to +60° C
- Batteries AA Alkaline
- Warranty 3 years- Battery life 140 hours typical, 10 hours typical if sourcing @ 20 mA
The 10 Watt Meters shall meet or exceed the following specifications:
- Bird Model 4304A Watt Meter or better
-  5,  15,  50,  150,  500  W,  with  no  scale  limitations  except  power  limited  to  150W  from  800- 1000 MHz
- Frequency Range: 25 MHz - 1.0 GHz
-  Accuracy:  25-100  MHz,  ±  7%  of  full  scale,  using  correction  charts.  100-512  MHz,  ±  6  of full scale, no correction needed. 512-1000 MHz, ± 7% of full scale, no correction needed
- Insertion Loss: 25-521 MHz, 1.05 max. (UHF female conn.), 512-1000 MHz, 1.07 max
6.7.24 Cabling and Connecting
This price is included in the price of the corresponding cabled equipment.
The term cable shall always include necessary  type of connectors at both  the ends for connecting  between  two  equipments.  The connectors shall be properly  anchored  with protective sheathing of the cable in such a way that the loads due to pulling and twisting shall be borne by the protective sheathing and the conductors shall not be subjected to any stress,
ii. The connectors shall be so fixed on the individual components of the system that the metal/ plastic  connector  shall  always  transfer  the  loads  due  to  pulling  and  twisting  directly  to  the protective  body  of  the  component  and  the  internal  interface  cords  /  connections  shall  not  be subjected to any load.
Cable   laying   of   data   and   power   supply   cables   will   be   protected   them   with   necessary conduits.
Wherever the cables are to be laid indoors and the length of the individual cable run exceeds 1 
metre,  the cable shall be housed  in  a protective conduit made of electrical supply  grade conduit of appropriate diameter and  the conduit shall be fixed  with  the wall at a height not less than 1 metre above the floor surface. Whenever the indoor cable is required to cross the floor, it shall be housed in a Galvanized Iron pipe of 12.5 mm internal diameter and the pipe shall be fixed  to  the floor with  suitable protective covering  to  avoid  topping  of personnel using the area or disturbance to the pipe due to such movement.
Wherever cables are to  run  through  open ground including the public road and pathways, tire
cable  shall  be  armored  and  shall  be  water  ingress  proof  upto  static  water  pressure  of  5 
kg/cm2.  All joints made in  cable shall also  meet the water proofing  criteria.  In  addition  die cable shall be protected by housing the same in 12.5 mm Galvanised Iron pipe embedded at a depth of not less than 1.5 metre below the ground surface with a warning brick on the same. A sketch of the cable layout with respect to the identifiable marks of the area shall be prepared and handed over to the Purchaser for each such cable run on completion of the work of cable laying operation.The joints in  the cable connecting  between  the sensor and  data collection  platform shall be avoided  by  measuring  the appropriate length  of the cable required  and  attaching  the same in one piece.  If the cable joints become necessary,  prior permission  of the Purchaser shall be obtained  before executing  the same.  The joint fabricated  through  a splicing  and  jointing  kit shall be stronger than the parent cable.
The cable carrying  data and  electrical power shall be housed  separately  in  different conduits separated  by  adequate distance to  prevent leakage currents.  The data cables shall also  be laid out in such a way that the data integrity' is not compromised due to mutual interference.
6.7.25  Construction Requirements & Workmanship
Also sec Section 5-1 “Codes and standards”
All these prices are included in the price of the corresponding installed equipment
6.7.25.1   Civil Works
The civil works shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.  The Contractor shall furnish  details and  standard  drawings of equipment mounting  arrangements and  installation.  The Contractor shall also  provide detailed  instructions regarding  the requirements for lightening  protection and  power supply  as well as recommendations for security  arrangements needed  for systems and  sensors installed  in  open  areas (c.g.  fencing,  locks etc.).  The civil works shall be executed as per details given below and with the standard specifications of Ethiopian codes.
6.7.25.1.1    Materials
(1) Storage, handling and use of materials
Materials   and   components   shall   be   handled   in   such   a   manner   as   to   avoid   any   damage   or contamination and in accordance with all applicable recommendations of the manufacturers.
(2) Bricks
Bricks,  blocks  and  tiles  shall  be  regular  and  uniform  in  shape  and  colour  and  all  of  a  similar size to the respective type.
(3) Cement
Cement  shall  be  factory'  produced  by  a  reputed  manufacturer  and  stored  in  dry  conditions  until required.
(4) Mortar
Mortar shall be mixed  only  as and  when  required  in  the proportions of 1  part cement to  3  parts sand  with  fresh,  clean  and  clear water,  until its colour and  consistency  arc uniform.  It shall be conveyed  fresh  as required  for use and  used  within  20  minutes of mixing.  Fine aggregates for mortar shall be washed natural sand or crushed natural stone.
(5) Timber
All  timber  to  be  used  in  the  permanent  works  shall  be  new  and  free  from  bows  or  warps  or significant knots.
(6) Ferrous metal work
Ferrous metal work exposed to the outside shall be treated with a continuous coating of
bituminous primer over the whole exposed area Where the metal work is of a decorative
nature, it shall be primed and painted with a paint suitable for external use.
(7) Nuts and bolts
Bolt lengths shall be sufficient to  ensure that nuts are full-threaded  when  tightened  in  their final position,  with  minimum two  threads showing.  Where bolting  is incompatible with  the material being  fixed,  suitable isolation  washers and  sleeves shall be used.  Washers shall be provided under the head of the boll and under the nut.(8) Natural stone
Natural stone shall be of durable quality,  uniform in  texture and  free from iron  ban  s,  spo  s, sand  holes,  flaws,  shakes and  other imperfections which  would  adversely  affect its streng  or appearance. The dimensions of stones shall be adequate for proper coursing and bonding.
6.7.25,1.2  Excavation, Backfilling and Reinstatement
(1) Excavation
i.  The  Contractor  shall  carry  out  his  operations  in  such  a  manner  as  to  avoid  damage  to  or deterioration of, the formation of excavations.
ii. The sides of excavations shall be adequately supported at all times.
iii.   The  Contractor  shall  be  responsible  for  the  disposal  off  site  of  all  surplus  excavated material,  but  no  excavated  material  suitable  for  re-use  shall  be  removed  from  the  site.  No surplus material shall be disposed off on the site.
iv.    The   Contractor  shall  not  allow  water  to  lie  anywhere  on  the  site.  Where  water  is encountered in excavation operations, it shall be disposed off to a suitable area away from the works  and  so  as  not  to  inconvenience  others.  Any  temporary  sumps  which  are  constructed  for dewatering shall be backfilled al the end of operations, with material similar to that excavated.
v. The Contractor shall carry out excavation operations in all types of strata met with.
(2) Trenches
i.   Trenches  in  rock  for  pipes  upto  100  mm  nominal  bore  shall  be  excavated  to  provide  a minimum  clearance  of  100  mm  around  the  outside  of  the  pipe  barrels  and  joints.  For  pipes with nominal bores exceeding 100 mm, the minimum clearance shall be 200 mm.
ii.  Trenches  for  pipes  shall  be  excavated  to  a  sufficient  depth  to  ensure  a  minimum  cover  of 500 nun to the top of the pipes. For pipes carrying water under pressure or for pipes laid with a water load above, this depth shall be increased to 900 mm.
iii.  Where  trench  excavations  encounter  obstructions  in  the  ground  conditions  (e.g.  hard  rock or major tree roots), the obstruction shall be bypassed by a separate trench enabling a straight line  or  minimum  suitable  radius,  between  the  pipe  source  and  destination  locations.  The trench  shall  be  backfilled  in  a  similar  manner  to  other  excavations  as  per  the  specification given below.
(3) Backfilling
i.   Backfilling  shall,  where  practicable,  be  undertaken  immediately  die  specified  operations preceding  it  have  been  completed.  Backfilling  shall  not,  however,  be  commenced  until  the works  to  be  covered  have  achieved  a  strength  sufficient  to  withstand  all  loading  imposed thereon.
ii. Backfilling shall be undertaken in such a manner as to avoid uneven loading or damage.
iii. Filling material to the permanent works shall be of a granular type, without clay or
siltatious material (a well assorted mixture of grain size between 2 mm and 40mm diameter) deposited in 300 mm layers and compacted at each layer.
iv.  Backfilling to a roadway surface shall be compacted and completed such that tlie finished surface  is  of  a  level  flush  and  comparable  to  the  adjoining  area,  after  any  settlement  has occurred.  Where  the  surrounding  surface  is  of  a  bituminous  (tarmac)  type,  the  backfilling shall be finished with similar.
v.  Where the excavations have been supported and the supports are to be removed 
these, where practicable, shall be withdrawn progressively as backfilling proceeds, in such a manner as to minimise (he danger of collapse and all voids formed behind the supports shall be carefully filled and compacted.
:(4) Reinstatement
i.    Kerbs,   channels   and   edgings   disturbed   by   the   works   shall   be   re-laid   with   existing   units, provided    they    are    not    damaged.    Where    existing    units    arc    not    suitable    for    re-use,    the Contractor    shall    provide    replacement    units    of    similar    texture,    colour,    type    and    quality, consistent with those adjacent.
ii.  The  frames  of  all  manholes  and  surface  boxes  shall  be  reinstated  by  bedding  and  Launching in  mortar  as  specified.  Chamber  or  frame  tops  shall  be  flush  with  the  existing  surface  on  all sides.
iii.   On  completion  of  work  in  unpaved  land,  the  Contractor  shall  break  up  the  surface  of  all land  affected,  to  a  depth  of  atlcast  300  mm  and  cleai  stones  and  extraneous  material  greater than  50  mm  in  size  before  placing  and  raking  topsoil  of  atleast  300  mm  in  depth,  to  the finished surface level.
iv.   The  utmost  care  shall  be  taken  to  protect  trees,  crops  and  significant  shrubs  in  the  vicinity of  the  site  area.  Any  that  are  damaged  or  killed  shall  be  replaced  with  a  new  plant  or  plants,  of a similar species and type, in the area of the original.
v.    Any  existing  sendees  of  pipes  or  cables  shall  be  avoided  if  possible.  Where  temporary removal  is  required,  the  sendee  shall  be  turned  off  and  an  accurate  locationof  the  point  or points   of   interception   marked.   The   Contractor   shall   record   these   positions,   depths,   pipe   and cable  diameters  and  types  of  construction  and  shall  reinstate  them  to  their  previous  standard, following construction of the new works. Backfill shall be to the standard specified above.
vi.    The  Contractor  shall  ensure  that  all  pipes,  whether  new  or  reinstated,  shall  be  clear  of debris upon completion of the works.
vii.  Embankments and other areas of fill shall be formed of suitable materials capable of
normal compaction to form stable fill, deposited and compacted evenly as soon as practicable
after excavation, in a maximum of 300 min layers.
6.7.25.1.3   Concrete, Formwork and Reinforcement
(I) Concrete
i.  The  cementitious  content  of  any  concrete  shall  be  between  350  kg/m3  and  400  kg/m3,  with a  maximum  free  water  I  cementitious  content  ratio  of  between  0.45  and  0.50.  The  mix  and strength of such concrete shall not be inferior to M20.
ii.     Calcium   chloride   or   admixtures   containing   calcium   chloride   shall   not   be   used   in   the production of concrete.
iii. The nominal size of coarse aggregate shall be from 6 mm to 20 mm.
iv.     The   Contractor   shall   not   permit   any   cement   to   come   into   contact   with   water   at   a temperature above 60 degrees Celsius.
v.     The   concrete   shall   be   mixed   only   as   and   when   required,   to   a   uniform   colour   and consistency.
vi.    Workability  of  fresh  concrete  shall  be  such  that  the  concrete  can  be  handled  and  placed without  segregation  and  after  compaction  can  completely  fill  the  formwork  and  surround  all reinforcement and ducts.
vii. The quantity of water to be used shall not exceed that required to produce a concrete with appropriate workability to be placed and compacted in the required location. Water used in the concrete mix shall be fresh, clean and clear.i. Formwork shall be sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent loss of mortar om   con 
e
and to maintain the correct position, shape and dimensions of the finished wor . t s a c
constructed as to removable from the cast concrete without shock or damage.
ii. The forms shall be capable of producing a consistent quality of surface.
iii.    Where   holes   arc   required   in   forms   to   accommodate   projecting   reinforcement,   ixing devices or other built-in items, precautions shall be taken to prevent loss of mortar matrix.
iv.   Formwork  shall  give  access  for  the  preparation  of  joint  surfaces  before  the  concrete  as hardened.
v. Top fonnwork shall be provided to slopes 30 degrees or more from the horizontal.
vi.  The  Contractor’s  method  of  constructing  formwork  shall  allow  for  props  to  soffit  forms  to remain in position until the formwork is struck.
vii. Formwork shall be removed without shock to or disturbance of the concrete.
viii. Formwork  to  vertical  or  sloping  surfaces  shall  not  be  removed  until  the  concrete  strength shall be sufficient to meet any wind loading upon the concrete likely to arise at the time when the formwork is removed. This shall be a period of minimum 2 days.
ix.   The  formwork  for  elevated  slabs  and  beams  shall  remain  in  place  for  a  minimum  of  7 days.
x.    All  concrete  surfaces  shall  have  a  fair  finish,  formed  by  formwork  which  is  designed  to produce  a  hard,  smooth  surface  with  true,  clean  arises.  Only  minor  surface  blemishes  shall  be permitted  and  there  shall  be  no  staining  or  discolouration.  Any  projections  shall  be  removed and  the  surfaces  made  good.  For  finishes  to  surfaces  not  formed  by  formwork,  the  concrete shall  be  levelled  and  screedcd  with  a  wooden  trowel,  following  which  a  fair  finish  shall  be formed  with  firm  pressure  from  a  steel  trowel,  to  produce  a  dense,  smooth,  uniform  surface free from trowel marks.
xi.   If  any  blemishes  to  the  finished  surface  appear,  they  shall  be  made  good  with  fresh, specially  prepared  cement  and  fine  aggregate  paste,  whilst  the  concrete  is  still  green  where possible.  After  the  concrete  has  been  properly  cured,  the  faces  shall  be  rubbed  down  to produce  a  smooth  and  even  surface,  making  every  effort  possible  to  match  the  colour  of  the concrete.
(3) Reinforcement and other built-in items
i.  Reinforcement and other built in items (such as pipes and sleeves) shall be firmly supported in position and of sufficient strength to secure against displacement during
the concrete pour.
ii.   Non-structural  connections  for  the  positioning  of  reinforcement  and  other  built  in  items shall be made with tying wire or other fixing device. Precautions shall be made to ensure that projecting  end  of  tying  wire  or  other  fixing  device  or  clips  do  not  encroach  into  the  concrete cover.
iii.  All  reinforcement  and  other  built-in-items  shall  be  clean  and  free  of  rust  or  other  debris bonding.
iv. Reinforcement shall be of HYSD/TMT variety manufactured by SAIL or its subsid' ’
Cover to all reinforcement shall be 50 nim minimum. 
ncs.
V. Tie bolts for formwork shall be of the high tensile variety and shall be cast directly into th concrete. Only tic bolts which avoid embedding any metal pans permanently within 50 mm f
the concrete surface shall be permitted. Voids remaining after the removal of all
°r each tic bolt shall be filled flush with the surrounding concrete using a frcshl’
cement   and   fine   aggregate   paste.   All   such   voids   shall   be   prepared   by   removi^^H^
laitance prior to filling to ensure bond is achieved. 
surlacc(4)  Placing of concrete
i.  The  interiors  of  all  formwork  shall  be  thoroughly  cleaned  out  before  any  concrete  is  placed. The  faces  of  the  forms  in  contact  with  the  concrete  shall  be  clean  and  treated  with  a  suitable releasing agent, where possible.
ii.   Each  batch  of  concrete  shall  be  continuously  and  thoroughly  compacted  in  its  final  position within  20  minutes  of  mixing.  Sufficient  compaction  shall  take  place  until  the  expulsion  of  air has  virtually  ceased,  and  in  a  manner  which  does  not  promote  segregation  of  the  ingredients, in order to avoid surface blemishes.
iii.   Concrete  to  each  discrete  section  shall  be  placed  in  one  pour  or  in  a  continuous  fashion such  that  fresh  concrete  shall  not  adjoin  concrete  which  has  been  in  place  for  more  than  30 minutes.   If   this   does   occur,   concreting   to   this   section   shall   be   stopped   until   the   placed concrete has set, but not hardened and a construction joint shall be formed.
iv.  The  surface  of  any  set  concrete  against  which  new  concrete  is  to  be  cast,  otherwise  known as  a  construction  joint,  shall  be  free  from  water  or  loose  debris  and  shall  be  roughened  to  the extent  that  the  large  aggregate  is  exposed  but  not  disturbed.  The  joint  surface  shall  be  cleaned immediately before the fresh concrete is placed againstit.
v.   All  measures  shall  be  taken  to  keep  the  temperature  of  fresh  concrete  below  32  degrees Celsius  and  to  prevent  excessive  evaporation  of  surface  water.  This  shall  include  placing  and constantly   keeping   moist   with   cold   water,   hessian   (or   similar   coarse   weave   natural   material) and   spraying   the   surface   with   curing   agents   to   aid   temperature   escape,   as   soon   after   the formwork had been removed as possible.
vi.   Where  a  kicker  is  used,  it  shall  be  at  least  70  mm  high  and  shall  be  incorporated  with  the previous concrete.
vii.    Concrete  shall  not  be  allowed  to  taper  off  to  a  thickness  of  less  than  50  mm.  Vertical joints    shall    be    formed    against    a    stop    board    suitably    notched    to    accommodate    the reinforcement.   The   top   surface   of   each   lift   of   concrete   shall   be   straight   and   level,   unless described otherwise in the contract.
(5) Tolerance for concrete structures
Concrete structures in the final work shall have no abrupt irregularities which are, to an 
extent, observable by eye. Subject to retaining the required concrete cover to reinforcement, 
other deviations from the surfaces described in the contract shall not deviate from line, level, 
vertically, cross sectional dimension or length by more than 10 mm.
6.7.25.2  Construction of Pipe Work
The cable runs along  the ground  for connecting  the sensors to  the DCP shall be made through the pipes of HDPE.  The materials and  manufacturing  quality  of the pipes shall be as per relevant Ethiopian Standards.
(1) General
i.   Suitable  measures  shall  be  taken  to  prevent  extraneous  material  from  entering  pipes  and  to anchor each pipe to prevent flotation or other movement before the works are complete.
ii. Pipeline marker tape shall be laid between 100 mm and 300 mm above the pipe.
(2) Pipe bedding and covering
i.   In  case  of  laying  pipes  for  carrying  the  air  tubing  for  the  bubbler  system,  the  care  should  be taken  to  embed  the  pipe  at  a  depth  below  the  general  profile  of  the  river  bank  slope  such  that the   same   shall   not   be   exposed   on   account   of   rainfall/drainage   induced   gully   erosion   in   the monsoons.   Such   depths   shall   be   determined   by   the   Purchaser’s   site   in   charge   and   the representative of the Contractor.
ii   for   making   horizontal   runs   of   embedded   pipes,   crossing   open   ground   and/   or   walk   ways fiequented  by  tiaffic  or  cattle,  a  layer  of  warning  bricks  shall  be  laid  over  the  pipe  before filling up the trench.iii.  Bedding  for pipes shall be constructed  by  spreading  and  compacting  granu  ar ing material of at least 100  mm thick  over the full width  of the pipe trench- After e P’P^3 ave been  laid,  additional material shall be placed  and  compacted  equally  on  each  side o  t e pipe. Where practicable, this shall be done in sequence with the removal of the trench supports.
iv. Bedding, haunching and fill material to pipe or cabling work shall be of a granu ar
without clay or siltatious material (a well assorted mixture of grain size between 2 mm an 
mm diameter).
v.   After  completion  of  the  relevant  operations,  fill  material  shall  be  placed  and  compacted over  the  full  width  of  the  trench  in  layers  not  exceeding  150  mm  before  compaction,  to  a finished  thickness  of  250  mm  above  the  crown  of  the  pipes.  Thereafter,  layers  shall  be  filled and compacted in 300 mm thicknesses, to 300 mm from the surrounding ground surface level. Topsoil shall then be placed to a level flush with the surrounding ground surface.
(3) Pipe jointing
i.  Pipe  jointing  surfaces  and  components  shall  be  kept  clean  and  free  from  extraneous  matter until  the  joints  have  been  made  or  assembled.  Care  shall  be  taken  to  ensure  that  there  is  no ingress  of  grout  or  other  extraneous  material  into  the  joint  annulus  after  the  joint  has  been made.
ii. Where pipes with flexible joints are required to be laid to curves, the deflection at any joint as  laid  shall  not  exceed  three  quarters  of  the  maximum  deflection  recommended  by  the manufacturer.
iii.  Fusion  welding  joints  in  high  density  and  medium  density  polythene  shall  be  made  only between  pipes  having  the  same  physical  characteristics.  No  fusion  joints  between  pipes  from dissimilar  materials  shall  be  made.  When  solvent  welding  HDPE  pipes  are  jointed  outside  the trench,   they   shall   not   be   lowered   into   place   until   the   period   recommended   by   the manufacturer  for  complete  setting  of  the  joints  has  elapsed.  A  pipe  section  containing  a completed weld shall achieve the same strength characteristics as the parent pipe.
iv. Flanged joints shall be properly aligned before any bolts are tightened.
v. For weld jointing of steel pipes, the ends of the pipes shall be cut and prepared, and be free from  fins,  planar  defects,  tears  and  other  surface  defects,  prior  to  welding.  Cleaning  to  base metal shall extend for at least 25 mm from the end of the pipe on both internal and external faces.
vi.  For cement mortar joints, the spigot of the pipe shall be entered into the socket of the last pipe laid until it bears on the back face of the socket and it shall be centred in the socket. Two turns of tarred yam shall then be caulked into the back of the socket and cement mortar shall be  pressed  into  the  joint  to  fill  the  socket  and  shall  be  levelled  off  at  45  degrees  from  the outside edge of the socket.
(4) Pipe protection
i.  Where  concrete  surrounds  are  provided  to  pipes,  they  shall  be  supported  on  precast  setting blocks, the top face of each block being covered with two layers of compressible packing *
ii. Where pipes with flexible joints are used, any concrete protection shall be interrupted over
its full cross section of each pipe by shaped compressible filler. 
1
iii. Plastic pipes shall be wrapped with a layer of plastic sheeting before being surrounded bv any concrete. 
y
iv.  Ferrous pipes shall be protected by a continuous coating of bitumen primer over the whole area to be protected.
(5) Pipe cutting
Pipes  shall  be  cut  by  a  method  which  provides  a  clean,  square  profile,  without  splitting fracturing the pipe wall and which causes minimal damage to any protective coating °6.7.25.3    Manholes
Manholes  shall  be  constructed  with  steps,  ladders  or  slabs  aligned  correctly  and  of  sufficient size to permit unrestricted access to workers.
6.7.25.4    Enclosures and Fencing
All enclosures should  withstand  hostile environments and  must be protected  against vandalism.  The door must be secured  using  a tamper proof lock.  Additional security  devices may  be recommended.  Outdoor enclosures will contain  all instrumentation  except solar panels and  sensors.  The required  degree of protection  is 1P65  or NEMA4.  A radiation  shield  of a double wall must protect the enclosure against excessive heating  by  radiation.  For fencing, Chain  link  fence with  barbed  wire is to  be provided.  The chain  link  fence material and installation  as per guideline provided  by  CLFMI-Chain  Link  Fence Manufacturers Association,  ASTM (American  Society  of Testing  Material and  ASTM F 1553”The Standard Guide for Specifying Chain Link Fence” or equivalent international standards.
6.8    Bid Price and Contract Price
Definitions:
Bid  price  -  Cost  of  all  items  that  would  be  added  for  price  comparison  and  evaluation. 
Contract Price - Cost of all items of contract performance payable under the contract
The bidder shall quote the price for the following items:
a)  Goods  listed  in  the  List  of  Goods  and  Deliver)7   Schedule  of  the  Schedule  of  Requirements. The  Bidder  shall  estimate  this  cost,  which  shall  be  added  to  the  bid  price  for  bid  evaluation and shall also be part of the contract price
b) The Bidder shall separately provide a complete list of spare parts with rate and hold it valid 
for ten (10) years from the date of issue of Final Acceptance Certificate and shall be obliged 
to supply such spare parts at such rates as and when orders are placed during this period, for
which the payment shall be made on performance of supply. The Bidder is not required to 
supply these spare parts during the period of contract and this shall neither be included in the
bid price for evaluation nor in the contract price.
c) Transportation Charges as per terms and conditions of the Contract.
d)   Cost  of  services  for  Installation  and  Commissioning  including  on  the  job  training  during installation   and   commissioning   as  per   terms   and   conditions   of   the   Contract   inclusive   of  the cost   of   daily   remuneration   (all   allowances,   cost   of   communication,   etc   included),   travel   cost (cost  of  travel,  transit,  visa,  etc.),  accommodation,  etc  for  each  of  the  Bidder’s  personnel.  The Bidder  shall  estimate  this  cost,  which  shall  be  added  to  the  bid  price  for  bid  evaluation  and shall also be part of the contract price.
e)   Cost  of  sendees  for  Training  Purchaser’s  Personnel  for  operation  and  maintenance  of  the system  inclusive  of  the  cost  of  daily  remuneration  (all  allowances,  cost  of  communication,  etc included),  travel  cost  (cost  of  travel,  transit,  visa,  etc.),  accommodation,  etc  for  each  of  the Bidder’s   personnel   and   also   of   any   training   material.   The   Bidder   shall   estimate   this   cost, which  shall  be  added  to  the  bid  price  for  bid  evaluation  and  shall  also  be  part  of  the  contract price.
f)   Cost  of  organizing  the  training  specified  in  Para  d)  and  e)  above  such  as  cost  for  hiring premises,  travel  cost,  working  lunch,  etc.  will  be  borne  by  the  Supplier  and  included  in  the Price Schedule 4.
g)   The  cost  of  Integration  of  real  lime  data  acquisition  system  and  back-up  acquisition  system with  SMS  and  manual  entry  as  per  technical  specifications  will  be  included  in  both  the  Bid Price for evaluation and the Contract Price.h)    The   cost   of   Tool   kit   for   assembly,   installation   and   maintenance   as   per   technical specifications will be included in both the Bid Price for evaluation and the Contract Price.
i)   The  cost  of  Manuals,  documentation  and  reports  as  per  technical  specifications  wi  c included in both the Bid Price for evaluation and the Contract Price.
j)    Cost   of   Maintenance   (part   facilities)   for   the   remainder   of   the   contract   period   after Operational  Testing  till  final  acceptance  as  per  terms  and  conditions  of  the  Contract  inclusive of the cost of daily remuneration (all allowances, cost of communication, etc included), travel cost (cost of travel, transit, visa, etc.), accommodation, etc. for each of the Bidder s personnel. The  Bidder  shall  estimate  this  cost,  which  shall  be  added  to  the  bid  price  for  bid  evaluation and shall be part of the contract price. Refer Price Schedule 4.
k)  Cost  of  maintenance  for  a  period  of  five  years  inclusive of  Warranty  period  of  two  years from  the  date  of  issue  of  Final  Acceptance  Certificate  as  per  terms  and  conditions  of  the Contract  inclusive  of  the  cost  of  daily  remuneration  (all  allowances,  cost  of  communication, etc included), travel cost (cost of travel, transit, visa, etc.), accommodation, etc for each of the
Bidder’s  personnel.  The  Bidder  shall  provide  along  with  the  bid  a  maintenance  plan  for  3 
(three) years with cost estimates at current prices which shall be added to the bid price for bid evaluation.  This cost shall not be included  in  the contract price.  The annual maintenance charges shall be quoted  on  a ycar-by-year basis for the three year maintenance period.  Free maintenance services for equipment as well as civil works and  other related  accessories like cables, etc., shall be provided by the Bidder during the period of warranty (2 year after final acceptance of the system). After warranty period, annual maintenance and repairs of the entire system (comprising  of those components and  group  of remote stations forming  part of the acceptance certificate) consisting  of equipment and  civil works including  supply  of spares for the next 36 months will be done by the Bidder.
6.9    Site Preparation and Installation Clause
a)   The client will provide details of the installation sites before die scheduled installation date  to  allow  the  Contractor  to  perform  site  inspection  and  construction  of  suitable structures before the installation of the hardware.
b)   The  location  of  antenna  and  sensors  will be  decided  by the respective Site Engineer in-charge depending on the site and river flow conditions.
c)    The  Contractor  should  complete  the  required  works  al  the  site  for  proper  installation of the equipment before receipt of the equipment.
6.10 Incidental Services Clause
The Contractor shall be required to provide any or all of the following services and/or equipment:
a) . Performance or supervision of the on-site assembly and/or start-up of the supplied Goods' b) . Furnishing of electrical, air-conditioning, uninterruplable power supply for operation of server and nodes, and the related accessories to the Data Center;
c) Furnishing of appropriate hardware, system design and programming services required for development and/or maintenance of the supplied Goods;
d) . Furnishing of tools required for assembly and/or maintenance of the supplied Goods
e). Furnishing of detailed operations and maintenance manual for each appropriate unit of supplied Goods;
f) . Performance or supervision or maintenance and/or repair/replacement of the suDDli d Goods, for a period of five years beyond the date of commissioning, provided that this sc ’ shall not relieve the Contractor of any warranty obligations under this contract-' 
ctviccg) .  Software updates and  bug  fix  sendees for the software originally  developed  by  the Contractor during  the period  of warranty  and  subsequent maintenance.  For the third  party software packages supplied updates shall be provided during the warranty period.
h)  .  Training  of  the  Client  personnel,  in  assembly,  start-up,  operation,  maintenance,  and  repair of the supplied Goods al the stations to be decided by the Client.
i)  .  The  travel,  boarding,  lodging  related  to  the  installation  and  maintenance  at  the  sites  will  be the  responsibility  of  the  Contractor.  The  Client  will  however  provide  office  space  at  various field offices for the Contractor’s technicians.
6.11  Warranty Clause
a)   The  Contractor  warrants  that  the  Goods  supplied  under  the  contract  are  new,  unused,  of the  most  recent  or  current  models  and  that  they  incoq^orate  all  recent  improvements  in  design and  materials  unless  provided  otherwise  in  the  contract.  The  Contractor  further  warrants  that all  Goods  supplied  and  all  civil  works  undertaken  under  this  contract  shall  have  no  defect, arising    from    design,    materials,    or    workmanship    or    from    any    act    or    omission    of    the Contractor,   that   may   develop   under   normal   use   of   the   supplied   Goods   in   the   conditions prevailing in the country of final destination.
b)   This  warranty,  in  respect  of  stations  which  have  been  accepted  as  a  part  of  the  acceptance certification,   shall   remain   valid   for   twenty   four   (24)   months   from   the   date   of   signing   the Acceptance   Certificate.   In   case   of   individual   certification,   the   warranty   shall   commence   on the  date  on  which  the  acceptance  certificate  for  that  particular  station  has  been  signed.  The Contractor   shall,   in   addition,   comply   with   die   performance   guarantees   specified   under   the contract.   If,   for   reasons   attributable   to   the   Contractor,   these   guarantees   are   not   attained   in whole  or  in  part,  the  Contractor  shall,  make  such  changes,  modifications,  and/or  addition  to the  Goods  or  any  part  specified  in  the  contract  at  its  own  cost  and  expense  and  to  carry  out further performance tests in accordance with Inspection and Test Clause.
c)  .  The  client  shall  promptly  notify  the  Contractor  in  writing  of  any  claims  arising  under  this warranty.
d)  The client shall notify the Contractor of any errors and malfunctions, which occur and 
noticed when equipment are in use, by email/telcphonc/fax directly or through the
Contractor’s Service technician(s) at the Contractor’s office address during normal working 
hours or at their residence after normal office hours and/or on holidays.
e) . The Contractor shall ensure proper functioning of all equipment installed at the Data
Centcr/satcllite station/ GSM/GPRS and satisfactory data transmission from all Data
Collection Platform’s and data receipt at satellite and/or GSM/GPRS receive station by 
utilizing the spare parts available at designated places and by providing additional spare parts
for which no additional cost will be paid by the client.
f)  The  maximum  response  time  for  a  complaint  from  the  client  to  restore  the  data  acquisition from   the   remote   station   after   receipt   of   such   complaint   shall   not   exceed   72   hours.   Upon receipt  of  such  notice,  the  Contractor  shall  visit  the  site  and  repair  or  replace  the  defective Goods  or  pails  thereof,  without  cost  to  the  client.  If,  by  act  of  nature,  travel  to  the  Remote Station   is   prohibited,   the   72   hours   will   begin   once   access   to   the   area   is   restored.   The Contractor   will   inform   the   Client   immediately,   or   as   soon   as   possible,   when   conditions prevent   the   emergency   servicing   of   a   Remote   Station   within   72   hours   of   receipt   of   a complaint.
g) The maximum response time for a complaint from the Client to restore the data acquisition to/from the satellite and GSM/GPRS receive station after a complaint is placed shall not exceed 48 hours. Upon receipt of such notice, the Contractor shall visit the satellite and/or
GSM/GPRS receive station and repair or replace the defective Goods or parts thereof without cost to the Client. 
’h) .  A remote site shall be treated  as faulty  if it fails to  respond  or transmits erroneous data during  three consecutive pre-programmed  observation  cycles.  The decision  of the Engineer in-Charge about errors in data shall be final and binding. If a remote site continues to remain ‘failed*  for more than  6  hours in  excess of the maintenance time schedule of 72  hours.  The Contractor is liable to  pay  penalty  @  ETB 0.05% of the Equipment Price day/rcmote site. The Day for the purpose of penalty shall be taken as failure period of 24 hours or part thereof for a particular remote site.
i)   The  Contractor  shall  ensure  satisfactory  receipt  of  data  at  the  satellite  and  GSM/GPRS receive station. If still no data is received at the satellite and/or GSM/GPRS receive station, it will  be  treated  as  “fail”  and  if  such  failure  of  satellite  and/or  GSM/GPRS  receive  station continues for more than 2 hours in excess of maintenance time of 48 hours, the Contractor is liable to pay a penalty at the rate of ETB 0.05% of the Equipment Price /day. Total number of failure periods for the case of satellite shall be computed in the same manner as for
Remote Stations under clause h  above.  However,  non-receipt of data at the satellite and/or GSM/GPRS data collection station due to any failure shall not be treated as valid for incurring such penalty.
j)  The Contractor shall, at his own cost, carry out repair of the defective equipment or parts thereof,  to  the  satisfaction  of  Client  and  return  the  equipment  after  satisfactory  repair  within 90  days  from  the  date  of  written  complaint/request  made.  All  charges  towards  the  collection, transportation of defective equipment, return of equipment after repair including cost of repair defective  equipment  or  parts  thereof,  shall  be  borne  by  the  Bidder  and  no  charges  shall  be paid by the Client.
k) If the Contractor fails to replenish the spares or return equipment after satisfactory repairs
within 90 days from date of complaint made, this will be considered as failure of Remote
Stations or satellite and/or GSM/GPRS data collection station and a penalty of ETB0.05% of
the Equipment Price./day/item shall be applicable.
l)   If  the  Contractor,  having  been  notified,  fails  to  remedy  the  defect(s)  within  the  time specified in Clauses f,g„ and j, the Client may proceed to take such remedial action as may be necessary,  at  the  Contractor’s  risk  and expense as specified in clause f,g, and k, and without prejudice  to  any  other  rights  which  the  Client  may  have  against  the  Contractor  under  the contract.
m)    If  the  Contractor  fails  to  rectify  the  defects  or  fails  to  return  the  equipment  after satisfactory  repair  with  the  permitted  time  frame,  he  shall  be  liable  to  pay  the penalty  at the rales indicated in clauses g,h, and k above. The period of penalty shall be calculated from the time    effective    from    the    time    of    expiry    of    the    time    schedule    allowed    for    fault rectification/retum of the equipment after satisfactory repair.
n)  The amount of penalty as indicated in the above clauses will be subject to maximum 10% of the tendered amount. The amount of penalty will be recovered from the balance 10% amount withheld (Security Deposit/Performance Guarantee) during warranty. The Client may also proceed to take such remedial action as may be necessary, at the Contractor’s risk and expense and without prejudice to any other rights which the Client may have against the Contractor under the contract.
o) The authority to decide and review the penalty shall be the MOWE.
6.12  Prices clarification
The following tables are given to facilitate the fulfilling of the prices tables in section IV schedules n°l and 2,
Basic prices:COMPONENT &Line Item
N°
1
Description of: Component 1 Goods
Quantity
Physical
unit
-inal (Project 11 Site)
Delivery (as per Incoterms)
Date
Destination  as specified  in BDS
Latest
Delivery
Date
Bidder’s offered Delivery  date [to he provided  by the bidder] I
Climatology
LT1
001
Class 1 meteorological station new
7
Number
LT1
002
Class 3 meteorological station new
4
LT1
003
Class 4 meteorological station new
22
Hydrometry
LT1
004
Staff gauge
10
LTI
005
Radar sensor for water level in river
14
LT)
006
Pressure   transducer   for   river   water level
13
LTI
Pressure   transducer   for   groundwater 007         level
20
LTI
008       (Turbidity sensor
8
LTI
009         Data collection platform multi channel
43
LTI
010         rain gauge for FEWS
19
LTI
Oil
Data logger for groundwater level
20
LTI
012
Current meter propeller
4
LTI
013         electronic stopwatch
4
LTI
014         Sediment sampler type US DH 72
4
LTI
015         Sediment sampler type US DH 81
4
LTI
016         Sediment sampler type US DH 2
4
LTI
017         Sediment sampler type US DH 95
4LTl
018
Sediment sampler type US BMH 53
4
—
LTl
019
Sediment sampler type US BL1I 84
4
LTl
020
BOC (new)
5
LTl
021
BOC repair
2
LTl
022
Portable Trolley
2
LTl
023
Portable  Deep  meter  for  groundwater level
2
LTl
024         Rehabilitation of existing wells
14
LTl
025
Logistics
6
LT3
026
Teletransmission initial investment
1
LTl
027
Front end for Central station
2
LTl
028         Front end for secondary station
2
LT)
029
ET  contract  till  the  end  of  guarantee period
1
LTl
030
Training
1
LTl
031
Guarantee (2 years)
1
LTl
032
Maintenance contract (3 years)
1
Prices aggregation:LTI
124
)irma at Kola Diba
2.4271
17.326
1
j rice    LTI
)06  J
rice
T1  1
'   I
20
rice          p ,T1 008 0
rice LTI p 10 0
rice  LTI  1 09
LTI
125
Abbay at Bahr Dar
11.59
37.41
price LTI 306
1
1
rice
J)T1 008
P
(
rice    LTI )09
LT I
126
G.        Beles        nr. Mandura
1.1658
36.338
I
>rice   LTI )09
LT]
127
Main Beles at
Bridge
11.1997
36.327
price LTI
005
price LTI 009
LT1
128
Beles at Dangur
11.14
35.83
price LTI 004
price LTI
006
price
LTI
020
price LTI 008
price    LTI 009
LTI
129
Lower Beles u/s Renaissance
reservoir 1
11.06
35.45
LT1
130
Lower Beles u/s Renaissance
reservoir 2
11.1327
35.471
price LTI 004
price LTI
006
price
LTI
020
price LTI 008
price LTI
009
LTI
131
Upper     Beles     d/s tail race HP
price   LTI 004
price LTI
006
price LTI
009
LT1
132
Enjcbara Pal
10.98
36.92
price LTI 010
price LTI
009
LTI
133
Merawi
11.41
37.15
price LT
010
price LTI
009
LTI
134
Sekela
11.00
37.22
price LTI 010
price LTI
009
LT]
135
Arb Gebeva
11.63
37.74
price LT' 010
price LTI
009
LTI
136
Addis Zemcn
12.13
37.78
price LT
010
1 price LT
009
LTI
137
Hamusit
11.78
37.55
price LT
010
1 price LT
009LT1
138
Mekane Yesus
11.60
38.06
price LTl 010
price    LTl 009
LTl
139
Woreta
1 1.92
37.68
price LTl 010
price LTl
009
LTl
140
Amba Giogis
12.77
37.60
*
price LTl 010
price    LTl 009
LTl
141
Gonder
12.55
37.42
price LTl 010
price    LTl 009
LTl
142
Bahar Dar
11.60
37.42
price LTl 010
price    LTl 009
LTl
143
Gassaie
11.79
38.14
price LTl 010
price    LTl 009
LTl
144
Debre Tabor
11.85
38.01
price LTl 010
price    LTl 009
LTl
145
Dangeta
11.25
36.83
price LTl 010
price    LTl 009
•quality   sensors,   water   quality   laboratory   equipment and terrestrial/aquatic ecology kits
7.1   Air quality station
Air quality Automatic stations price LT2 027
Micro station of air quality
The station must be able to measure the following particles in ppb and ppm:
Carbons (CO, CO2)
Sulphur Dioxide (SO2),
Oxides of Nitrogen (as NO2),
Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM),
And Breathing Suspended Particulate Matter
Remote control of measurements, extraction of data on a computer, data processing software are to be supplied by the Contractor.
An example of such a station is shown here below.
Figure n°7:
7  Technical
Spccifications-Component  2  Air  and  WaterLTl
124
Dirma at Kola Diba
12.4271
37.326
price LTl
006
price LT1
020
price LTl 008
price LTl
010
price LTl
009
n
LTl
125
Abbay at Bahr Dar
11.59
37.41
price LTl
006
price LTl 008
price LTl
009
LT1
26
G. Beles nr.
Mandura
11.1658
36.338
price LTl
009
LTl
127
Main Belcs at
Bridge
11.1997
36.327
price LTl
005
price LTl
009
LTl
128
Belcs at Dangur
11.14
35.83
price LTl 004
; - J
price LTl
006
price LTl
020
price LTl 008
price    LTl 009
LT1
129
Lower Beles u/s Renaissance reservoir 1
11.06
35.45
LTl
130
Lower Beles u/s Renaissance reservoir 2
11.1327
35.471
price  LTl 004
price LTl
006
price LTl
020
price LTl 008
price LTl
009
LT!
131
Upper    Beles    d/s tailrace HP
price LTl 004
price LTl
006
price LTl
009
LT
132
Enjebara Pal
10.98
36.92
price LTl 010
price    LTl 009
LTi
133
Merawi
11.41
37.15
price LTl 010
price    LTl 009
LT1
134
Sekela
11.00
37.22
price LTl 010
price LTl
009
LTl
135
Arb Gebeya
11.63
37.74
price LTl 010
price LTl
009»*«&
LTl
136
Addis Zemen
12.13
37.78
price LTl 010
price LTl
009
•
LT!
137
Hamusit
11.78
37.55
price LTl 010
price    LTl 009r
Xmbessame
(
106
(
)09
3
T
LTl 1
11 I
<ibb nr. Gasai
1.8
38.15
1
(
jrice LTl )06
price LTl 009
LTl
12 ‘
jemero
ir.Maksegnit
2.3905
37.551
srice LTl
304
price LTl 305
.
price LTl
009
LTl
113
-egoda                   nr Arbgebeya
11.6287
37.758
price LTl 005
nice LTl
009
LTl
114
Garno nr. Infranz
12.2365
37.628
price LTl 004
price LTl
005
price LTl
009
LTl
115
Killittie nr. Durbete
11.4771
36.956
price LTl
006
price LTl
009
LTl
116
Amen at Dangila
11.26
36.85
price LTl
006
price LTl
009
LTl
117
Quashini nr. A.
Kidame
11.2
36.87
price LTl
006
price LT I
009
LTl
118
G.       Abbay nr. Merawi
11.3642
37.035
price LTl
005
price LTl
021
price LTl 008
price LTl
010
price LTl
009
LTl
119
Ribb nr. Addis
Zemen
11.9939
37.71
price LTl
005
price LTl 008
price LTl
009
LTl
120
Gumara nr.. B. Dar
11.8383
37.636
price LTl
005
price
LTl
020
price LTl 008
price LTl
010
price LTl
009
LTl
121
Megech nr. Azezo
12.4872
37.447
price LTl
005
price LTl
020
price LTl 008
price LTl
010
price LTl
009
LTl
122
Upper Rib nr
D.Tabor
12.04
37.99
price LT
009
LT
121
G.        Abbay        a ’ Chimba
' 11.706-
2 37.161
3
price LTl
005
price
LTl
020
price LTl 008
price LTl
010
price LT
009LT1
138
Mokane Yesus
11.60
38.06
price LTI 010
price    LTI 009
LTI
139
Woreta
11.92
37.68
price LTI 010
price LTI
009
LT1
140
Amba Giogis
12.77
37.60
price LTI 010
price    LTI 009
LTI
141
Gonder
12.55
37.42
price LTI 010
price LTI
009
LTI
142
Bahar Dar
11.60
37.42
price LTI 010
price LTI
009
LTI
143
Gassaie
11.79
38.14
price LTI 010
price    LTI 009
LT)
144
Debrc l abor
11.85
38.01
price LTI 010
price    LTI 009
LTI
145
Dangcta
11.25
36.83
price LTI 010
price    LTI 0097  Technical Specifications-Component 2  Air and  Water quality  sensors,  water quality  laboratory  equipment and terrestrial/aquatic ecology kits
7.1 Air quality station
Air quality Automatic stations price LT2 027
Micro station of air quality
The station must be able to measure the following particles in ppb and ppm:
Carbons (CO, CO2)
Sulphur Dioxide (SO2),
Oxides of Nitrogen (as NO2),
Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM),
And Breathing Suspended Particulate Matter
Remote control of measurements, extraction of data on a computer, data processing software are to be supplied by the Contractor.
An example of such a station is shown here below.
Figure n°7:I
I
II
I I 1
I I I I I I
I7.2 Water quality Equipments
7.2.1   Water Quality monitoring equipment
7.2.1.1  Test strips price LT2 001
200 test strips for each parameter per year (*17 parameters) are to be supplied:
- ammonium : 0 - 400 mg / L
- Nitrites : 0 - 80 mg/L
- Nitrates : 0 - 100 mg/L
- Phosphate : 0-100 mg/L
- Chlorurc : 0 - 3000 mg / I
- Sulfates : 200 - 1600 mg /L
- Calcium: 0-100 mg/L
- Potassium: 0 - 1500 mg /L
- Total hardness : 5 -45°F
- Aluminum : 0 - 500 mg /L
- Iron: 0-100 mg / L
- Arsenic: 0 - 3mg /L
- Chromate: 0-100 mg/L
- Copper: 0-300 mg/L
- Nickel: 0-100 mg/L
- Zinc: 0-100 mg/1
- heavy metals (Co, Cd, Zn, Cu,...) <10 a 400 ppb
7.2.1.2    GPS - Global positioning system price LT2 002
GPS, it is a high tech GPS able to communicate with the GIS database                   He reading). Location-based data acquisition directly on site___________________ Accuracy 1-3 meters in site acquisition. Metric post-processing. Color   screen   with   the   option   of   loading   G1S   files   (ESRI
shapcfile in particular)
___________________  ___
Expected specifications of the GPS
Waterproof and shock resistant case___________
Operating at temperatures above 60 ° C__________________________ Import and  export files GIS compatible (ESRJ shapcfile in particular)
Memoty capacity lGo MB minimum
F rench and English language s upportminimum Power mode, battery (batten- duration minimum 12 hours) Up/downloading USB cable
Waterproof storage bag
Additional characteristics:
- extra batteries and recharging of batteries per vehicle are included,compatibility with commonly used GIS (ESRI ArcGIS) is required complete associated software features (management of projection systems, formats compatibility, etc.) is required
7.2.1.3 Multiparameter kits price LT2 003
Monitoring control parameters of water quality
General
characteristics
Transportable case
Manual data acquisition
Data entry on site
Able   to   measure   at   least:   conductivity   /   salinity,   dissolved   oxygen, temperature, pH, ell
Able to measure suspended solids and turbidity would be better
Able to measure hydrocarbons would be better
Technical specifications of the
equipment
Waterproof carrying case
Optical sensor for oxygen
Able to resist high external temperatures (60°C)
Ease of availability of calibration reagent for the sensors
Storing the results would be better
Power mode, battery
Waterproof box
7.2.1.4 Secchi Disk price LT2 005
Diameter 20 cm with a graduated net of minimum 10 meters, 
Figure n°8:
Example of use of secchi disk
7.2.1.5   Thermo electric Cooler price LT2 006
Minimum volume of 31 liters up to 80 liters with compressor.Adjustable temperature, able to conserve between -5°C to 10°C Electric cord for car connection
Fixation kit for car.
7.2.1.6   Portable bacteriological kit price LT2 007
General Characteristics
Monitoring control bacteria of water quality Transportable case
Manual data acquisition Data entry on site
Monitoring of faecal streptococci and coliforms
Expected   specifications   of the Equipment
Meets WHO and EU Guidelines
Fully portable solution
Membrane filtration equipment
Waterproof case
Additional recommendations
Prices for all the probes / possible settings arc requested to be included
7.2.1.7   Bottles and consumables price LT2 015
Set of Plastic bottles with different capacity (2 x11, 2x 500 ml, 2x250 ml, 2x 125ml)
Set of glass bottles with different capacity (2 xll, 2x 500 ml, 2x250 ml, 2x 125ml)
Set of pipettes, masks, set of flask, set of beaker and jars, plastics gloves
DBO measurement kit with magnetic agitator
7.3 Water quality laboratory analytical equipment
Field  Laboratory  equipment: provision  of the building  is Client responsibility.  The building will be about 75 m2 with air conditioning in the samples storage room and air conditioning in the office.
7.3.1 Spectrophotometers price LT2 004
General Characteristics
Monitoring control parameters of water quality
Transportable case
Manual data acquisition
Data entry on site7.4.2    Printer price LT2 017 B & W laser, A3
7.5 Terrestrial and aquatic ecology kits
7.5.1    Aquat i c ecology set,
Sampling materials for Fauna, Flora and Ecosystems: price LT2 019 Sampling materials for fisheries and biology of lake and river waters include:
boats,
-     nets,
sampling scoops,
* jars
-     preserving chemicals.
Provide quotes for the above of sufficient consumables for implementation. Specific net for aquatic fauna, 500 micron mesh, 60 cm
Figure n°l2:
Quantities: 4
7.5.2    Terrestrial Ecology Fauna set price LT2 020
Non-destructive trap suitable for small mammals: Provide range of traps that can be manufactured locally.Tn this sort of trap when (he small mammal steps inside the trap, he steps on a trip plate, which will spring if an animal is heavy enough. When the trip plate is pressed, a hook next to a metal cylinder releases the door, trapping the cat. The door stays in place through the use of small magnets or a hook into an O-ring. The force of the slam bolts the hook into the O-ring. 
n°14:
The trigger for this trap  is a notched  piece of wood  that extends into  the trap.  The bait is placed  in  the rear of the trap,  so  the animal must push  by  the trigger,  which  will release the door.
7.5.3    Soils and Land Degradation set price LT2 021
Munscll  Washable  Soil  Color  Charts  2009  edition  (Munsell  Soil  Color  Books)  or  equivalent. 
http://www.munsellstore.com
ColorAccuracy.com
Figure n°157.5.4     Microscope price LT2 022
Indden?m
0SCOpC   Xl
unnnation, head tilt minimum 45°, head rotation 360
Figure n°16:
-   ° '° x40 of magnification, 
7.5.5    Binoculars, price LT2 023 Water proof binoculars, 
Minimum magnification x8, Diameter of objective minimum 32, Infrared (night) vision.
Figure n°l 7:
7.5.6     Cameras price LT2 024
Focal  length  minimum  10mm,  USB  compatible,  able  to  operate  between  -40  to  60°C,  500 Mb of memory, easy to transport (low weight), GPS integrated.
7.5.7     Cameras with infra-red triggering price LT2 025
Able to  take video  with  infra-red,  Focal lenght minimum 10mm,  USB compatible,  able to operate between  -400  to  60°C,  500  Mb  of memory,  easy  to  transport (low weight),  GPS integrated. Will comme with some clamp to fix it to a post / tree ...
Example figure n°/8:7.5.8    Plant presses: price LT2 026
Absorbent blotters, dimension 21 x 29.7 mm
Figure n°l9:
7.6 Ancillary goods (furniture, vehicles, etc)
7.6.1     Motorized Boat price LT2 008
Foldable and portable in bags,
3 passenger minimum, motor able to speed at minimum 25 km/h, minimum weight 300 kg. 
Paddles and pump.
7.6.2     4 wheel drive car price LT2 009
Folding  entrance step  with  a window in  the door,  Sliding  window with  safety  grid,  Air exhaust fan,  External generator,  External rack  to  hold  clean  and  dirty  water,  Refrigerator / Freezer - 156L/16L,Worktop  with  lockable cupboard  with  shelves and  storage,  A desk  with swivel folding  chair,  Teal I2V unit with  hand  washing  tank  (water heater works with  the engine running)Warranty
a)      The   Contractor   warrants   that   the   Goods   supplied   under   the   contract   are   new, unused,  of  the  most  recent  or  current  models  and  that  they  incorporate  all  recent improvements  in  design  and  materials  unless  provided  otherwise  in  the  contract.  The Contractor   further   warrants   that   all   Goods   supplied   shall   have   no   defect,   arising from   design,   materials,   or   workmanship   or   from   any   act   or   omission   of   the Contractor,   that   may   develop   under   normal   use   of   the   supplied   Goods   in   the conditions prevailing in the country of final destination.
b)     The  client  shall  promptly  notify  the  Contractor   in  writing  of  any  claims  arising under this warranty.
c)     The  client  shall  notify  the  Contractor  of  any  errors  and  malfunctions,  which  occur and  noticed  when  equipment  are  in  use,  by  email/telephone/fax  directly  or  through the Contractor’s Service technician(s) at the Contractor’s office address duringd)
c)
0
g")
h)
i)
normal  working  hours  or  at  their  residence  after  normal  office  hours  and/or  on holidays.
Phe Contractor shall, at his own cost, carry out repair of the defective equipment or parts (hereof, to the satisfaction of Client and return the equipment after satisfactory repair within  90  days from the date of written  complainl/rcquesl made.  All charges towards the collection,  transportation  of defective equipment,  return  of equipment after repair including  cost of repair defective equipment or parts thereof,  shall be borne by the Contractor and no charges shall be paid by the Client.
If the Contractor fails to  replenish  the spares or return  equipment after satisfactory repairs within 90 days from date of complaint made, this will be considered as failure of Remote Stations or satellite and/or GSM/GPRS data collection  station  and  a penalty of ETB 0.05% of the Equipment Price /day/item shall be applicable.
If the Contractor, having been notified, fails to remedy the defect(s) within the time specified in Clauses f,g„ and j, the Client may proceed to take such remedial action as may be necessary, at the Contractor’s risk and expense as specified in clause f,g, and k,  and  without prejudice to  any  other rights which  the Client may  have against the Contractor under the contract.
If the Contractor fails to  rectify  the defects or fails to  return  the equipment after satisfactory repair with the permitted time frame, lie shall be liable to pay the penalty at the rates indicated  in  clauses g,h,  and  k  above.  The period  of penalty  shall be calculated  from the time effective from the time of expiry  of the time schedule allowed for fault recti fication/rctum of the equipment after satisfactory repair.
The amount of penalty as indicated in the above clauses will be subject to maximum 10% of the tendered  amount.  The amount of penally  will be recovered  from the
balance 10% amount withheld  (Security  Dcposit/Pcrformancc Guarantee) during warranty.  The Client may  also  proceed  to  take such  remedial action  as may  be necessary,  at the Contractor’s risk  and  expense and  without prejudice to  any  other rights which the Client may have against the Contractor under the contract. 
The authority to decide and review the penalty shall be the MOWE.
7.7 Prices clarification
The  following  table  is  given  to  facilitate  the  fulfilling  of  the  prices  tables  in  section  IV schedules n°l and 2:
COMPONE NT & Line
Item
N° r
Description of HIS Qualitative Goods
Quantity
r
field equipment for Water Quality
LT2
001
Test strips 200*17 annual supply
2
LT2
002
GPS
8
LT2
003
Multiparameter kits
4LT2
004
Spectrophotometers
4
LT2
005
Sccchi Disk
4
LT2
J)06
Thermo electric cooler
4
LT2
007
Potable bactcriologic kit
4
LT2
OOS
Motorized boat
2
LT2
009
4  Wheel  Drive  car  (adapted  to  the service)
2
LT2
010
Fridge
2
LT2
Oil
Washing facilities
2
LT2
012
Bench work in Ceramic
2
LT2
013
I Generator
2
LT2
014
Desk and chairs
2
LT2
015
Bottles and consumables
2
LT2
016
Air conditioner
4
LT2
017
Printer
2
LT2
018
Other equipment
2
LT2
019
Aquatic ecology sets
8
LT3
020
Terrestrial ecology sets
8
LT4
021
Soil and land degradation set
6
LT2
022
Microscope
2
LT2
023
Binoculars
2
LT2
024
Camera
2
LT2
025
Camera (movie)
2
LT2
026
Plant presses
20
LT2
027
Air quality station
3
LT2
028
Training
I
LT2
029
Guarantee (2 years)
1
LT2 |030
Maintenance contract (3 years)
8 Technical Speciflcations-Component 3 Information system Hardware and Software
8.1 Classification of Data Centres
As already  presented  in  the architecture of the system,  data are received  and  primarily processed  and  validated  in  the two  central stations located  at SBBOs level which  are responsible of the quality  of the data.  Higher level of processing  is done in  the secondary stations: ABA Head quarters and MOWE Flood forecasting unit.
Additional functions at Data Centre include secondary  validation,  acquisition  processing  and integration  of data from non-point observations and  surveys and  secondary  data from other BIS stakeholders, storage of BIS data, and data sharing/dissemination.
The  tables  below  specify  what  the  Contractor  responsibility  is  and  what  is  not,  in  terms  of software supply.l- v-b .Jj igOry -1’ Sub*bas,H da,a Centres (central stations)
-               ra station will be equipped of a front end for data receiving front the network, a data sever, a workstation and field operator laptops.
ic contractor has the responsibility to populate the existing database with measured data
. m the front-end supervisor. The database used is based on the CUAHSI
1-^ata Model Version 1.1. The Extract-Transform-Load operation should be
lf C h k ’thc eonlraclor lbcn deployed at Tana SBBO and Bclcs SBBO central stations, 
s tou c implemented using the CUAHSI Streaming Data Loader software in its latest compliant version with ODM vl.l.
ic contractor will check the completeness of stations, networks, variables and units stored tn the existing CUAHSI database.
If the checking is negative:
The contractor will have the responsibility to establish the mismatch between the frontend ala ase and the existing CUAHSI database for sites, networks, variables and units records. 
• The client will have the responsibility to update its database (sites, networks, variables and units records) in order to accept the measured data values coming from the frontend supervisor.
5.1 .2 Category' II- Basin Data Centre (secondary station)
The ABA secondary' station will be equipped with a data server, a web server, a GIS workstation, a remote sensing workstation, a hydrological workstation, and laptops.
S. 1.3 Category' IIl-MoWE Data Centre (secondary' station)
This secondary’ station, flood forecasting oriented will be equipped only with a front end.
8.2 Installation, integration and commissioning
See chapter 6-4
83 Maintenance
See chapter 6-5
8.4 Training
Price LT3 066
The Contractor will provide related session of training during the installation, commissioning and  set up  of Hardware and  Software in  Central and  Secondary  stations.  This session  will allow IT  and  other specialists to  master the basic components of the BIS tool.  Proposed 
Training plans will focus on the following items depending on the targeted software:
Software
Topics
Contents
SQL Sever
Basics
Client-Server    database    architecture    and    SQL    Server architecture
Tables, relational databases, SQL and database objects
Usin° SOL Sever Management Studio
SQL query
1 Working with diagram
SQL essentials on querying tables
Security and
Authentication types, users, role, security plansbackup/rcstore
Creating, scheduling backups and restores
Replication
Replication models and type of replication
Merge replication
ArcGIS
basics
Getting
started
Exploring geographic data in ArcMap
Creating a basic GIS map
Classifying, symbolizing and labelling map features
Creating presentation-quality maps
Creating and managing metadata
Geodatabase
Working with an Access geodatabasc
Solving common coordinate system problems
Retrieving data from a GPS
Packaging and publishing maps for ArcRcader users
ArcGIS
advanced
ArcGIS Spatial analyst
Cell-based analysis
Calculating density, slope, aspect, hillshade, contour maps
Interpolations methods to create surfaces from sample data
Hydrologic analysis
Arc Hydro model
'Terrain  processing  workflow : Stream burning,  Fill the sink, Flow direction  and  flow accumulation,  stream segmentation, watershed delineation, hydro network generation
GeoStatistical analysis
Data variability, spatial relationships, unusual data values
Multivariate        analysis,        prediction        errors,        quantiles, probabilities
ENV I
Basic
Managing     image     display     from     various     data     sensors, including ASTER, SPOT, Landsat and USGS DEM
Working with vector and raster data, conversions
Image display concepts
Data fusion and color transforms
Advanced
Feature extraction
Regions of interest and classification
Vegetation analysis
8.5 Hardware and Software Specifications
8.5.1   Software technical specifications
This chapter describes all the software to be provided by the contractor. The brand of software is specified because of the necessary compatibility with the specific software developed in the frame of the project through another contract. All software shall be installed, upgraded with all relevant software updates and correctly configured. Concerning antivirus and backup utilities, the contractor may propose server software. All software will be provided in English version and will be compliant with the targeted processor architecture (described here below). IP Addressing plan will be given before operating systems  configuration. All servers  can be accessed using remote desktop connection. SQL Server Surface Area should be configured to enable LAN connection.
8.5.1.1  At SBBO level (central station):Prices LT3 001 to LT3 019
Time series data server
Component
Specifications
Supplied bv the contractor
Operating System
Microsoft Windows 200S R2
Yes
RDBMS
SQL      Server      2008      R2 Standard Edition
Yes
Database schema
CUAHSI ODM Database
No
Interface   with   the   supervisor front-end
CUAHSI    ODM    Streaming data loader
No
Antivirus
Antivirus software server and Antivirus software client
Yes
Backup
Norton    Ghost    Backup    or equivalent
YesField operator laptop
Component
Specifications
Supplied bv the contractor
Operating System
Microsoft         Windows         7 Premium
Yes
Spreadsheet
Microsoft Excel
Yes
Text Editor
Microsoft Word
Yes
HIS Data management
ODM Data Converter
No
Antivirus
Norton    Antivirus    client    or equivalent
Yes
Backup
Norton     Ghost     Backup     or equivalent
Yes
Hydrologist expert workstation
Component
1 Specifications
Supplied by the contractor
Operating System
Microsoft         Windows         7 premium
Yes
GIS Software
ESRI ArcGIS Desktop : Arc View 10
Yes
HIS Data management
ODM Data Converter CUAHSI ODM Data Loader ODM Data Validation
No
Antivirus
Norton    Antivirus    client    or equivalent
Yes
Backup
Norton     Ghost     Backup     or equivalent
Yes
Data Access
SQL Server Client Access License    (SBBO    time    series data server)
Yesp~
I rices L13 001 to LT3 019 
^ asin Authority Head Quarters level (secondary station):
<
.
Centralized time series data / spatial data server_____________
Component
Operating System
apuum ama server
Specifications
_________
Supplied bv the contractor
RDBMS
Microsoft Windows 2008 R2
Yes
Yes
Backup
SQL Server 200S R2 Web Edition
Norton    Ghost    Backup    or equivalent
Yes
Antivirus
Antivirus software server and Antivirus software client
Yes
Web server
Component
Operating System
Specifications
Supplied by the contractor
Microsoft Windows 2008 R2 Web Edition
Yes
Web Server
ITS 7 or higher
Yes
Web           portal           content management system
DotNetNuke
No
Document             Management Exchange         Add-on           to DotNetNukc
BringToMind  Document Exchange DMX PRO version
Yes
Backup
Norton    Ghost    Backup    or equivalent
Yes
Antivirus
Norton   Antivirus   client   or equivalent
Yes
Data Access
SQL  Server Client Access License (ABA centralized time series data server)
Yes
GIS / data base specialist workstation
Component
Specifications
Supplied by the contractor
Operating System
Microsoft        Windows        7 premium
Yes
GIS Software
ArcGIS Desktop : ArcView
10
Yes
Advanced GIS Software
ArcGIS Spatial Analyst Extension  (1  floating  license shared  with  RS/GIS specialist)
Yes
Advanced GIS Software
ESRI ArcGIS GeoStatistical Analyst Extension (1 floating license shared  with  RS/GIS specialist)
Yes
Advanced GIS Software
ESRI ArcGIS Publisher
YesComponent
Specifications
Supplied by the contractor
Extension  (1  floating  license shared  with  RS/GIS specialist)
HIS Data management
ODM Data Converter CUAHSI ODM Data Loader ODM Data Validation
No
Access to HIS validated data
CUAHSI HydroDesktop
No
Interface with SQL Server
SQL Server Management
Studio
Yes
included in SQL Server 2008
Spreadsheet
Microsoft Excel
Yes
Text Editor
Microsoft Word
Yes
Backup
Norton     Ghost     Backup     or equivalent
Yes
Antivirus
Norton    Antivirus    client    or equivalent
Yes
Data Access
SQL  Server Client Access License (ABA centralized time scries data server)
Yes
Remote sensing / GIS spc cialistworksta don
- ------------- & A--------------------------------
Component
Specifications
Supplied by the contractor
Operating System
Microsoft Windows
premium
Yes
GIS Software
ESRI ArcGIS Desktop Arc View 10
Yes
Image Processing
ENVI
Yes
Advanced GIS Software
ArcGIS Spatial Analyst Extension  (1  floating  license shared  with  GIS/Database specialist)
Yes
Advanced GIS Software
ESRI ArcGIS GeoStatistical Analyst Extension  (1  floating license shared  with GIS/Database specialist)
Yes
Advanced GIS Software
ESRI ArcGIS Publisher Extension  (1  floating  license shared  with  GIS/Database specialist)
Yes
Access to HIS validated data
CUAHSI HydroDesktop
No
Spreadsheet
Microsoft Excel
Yes
Text Editor
Microsoft Word
Yes
Backup
Norton     Ghost     Backup     or equivalent
Yes
Antivirus
Norton    Antivirus    client    or equivalent
YesData Access
SQL  Server Client Access License (ABA centralized time series data server)
Yes
Hvdrologist workstation
component
Operating System
Specifications
Supplied bv the contractor
Microsoft        Windows 7 premium
Yes
GIS Software
ESRI    ArcGIS    Desktop    / Arc View
Yes
HD A Tools
HEC                                 RAS HEC HMS
Hydrostat
No
Access  to  HIS  validated  data Spreadsheet
CU AH SI HydroDesktop
No
Text Editor
Microsoft Excel
Yes
Microsoft Word
Antivirus
Yes
Norton   Antivirus   client   or equivalent
Yes
Backup
IT Specialist laptop
Norton    Ghost    Backup    or equivalent
Yes
Component
Specifications
Supplied bv the contractor
Operating System
Microsoft        Windows        7 premium
Yes
Interface with SQL Server
SQL Server Management
Studio
Yes
included in SQL Server 2008
Access to HIS validated data
CUAHSI HydroDesklop
No
HIS Data management
ODM Data Converter CUAHSI ODM Data Loader ODM Data Validation
No
Spreadsheet
Microsoft Excel
Yes
Text Editor
Microsoft Word
Yes
Antivirus
Norton   Antivirus   client   or equivalent
Yes
Backup
Norton    Ghost    Backup    or equivalent
YesWebsite specialist 1 aptop
Component
Specifications
Supplied bv the contractor
Operating System
Microsoft         Windows         7 premium
Yes
Spreadsheet
Microsoft Excel
Yes
Text Editor
Microsoft Word
Yes
Adobe X Acrobat standard
Yes
Antivirus
Norton    Antivirus    client    or equivalent
Yes
Backup
□
Norton     Ghost     Backup     or equivalent
Yes
8.5.2     Hardware technical specifications
Price n°
Equipment
Specifications
Web Server
Rack
Server x64 19” Rack mountable
Processor
Quad-Core Intel Xeon Processor 2.13 GHz
No. of Processors
Mono Processor
Cache Memory
12 MB
Chipset
Intel Chipset
Memory
12 GB DDR3-1066/1333 registered DIMM
LT3 041
Storage
2 X 1TB SATA72OORPM
Multimedia
DVD+/WR
Graphics
Integrated chipset with 32MB Video RAM
Interface
1000BASE-T x 4 NIC, 1 Serial, 1 VGA, 4 USB,
Windows Server 2008 R2 Web Edition
Supported OS
Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise and Datacenter /SP2/
Power Supply
Dual Power Supply supporting 220/240 VA
LT3 042
Data ServerRack
Server x64 19” Rack mountable
Processor
Quad-Core Intel Xeon Processor 2.13 GHz
No. of Processors
Mono Processor
Cache Memory
12 MB
Chipset
Intel Chipset
Memory
12 GB DDR3-1066/1333 registered DIMM
Storage
4 X 1TB SATA 7200RPM
Multimedia
DVD+/WR
Graphics
Integrated chipset with 32MB Video RAM
Interface
1000BASE-T x 4 NIC, 1 Serial, 1 VGA, 4 USB,
Supported OS
Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise and Datacenter /SP2/
Power Supply
Dual Power Supply supporting 220/240 VA
Workstations for Hydrologists, WQ Modeler, GIS/RS
Processor
Dual-Core Intel Processor 2.4 GHz
Cache Memory
12 MB
Chipset
intel Chipset
Memory
12 GB DDR3-1066/1333 registered DIMM
LT3 043
Storage
500 GB SATA 7200RPM
External Storage
1TB External HDD
Multimedia
DVD+/WR
Monitor
19" LCD Color Monitor
Interface
1000BASE-T x 1 NIC, 1 Serial, 1 VGA, 4 USB,
Pre Installed OS and
Win 7 professional x64 (Activated), MS Office 2007/20101 Applications
Power Supply
Power Supply supporting 220/240 VA
Laptops  for 11 Specialist and Webmaster
Processor
Core i3,i5 Intel Processor 2.4 GHz x32
Cache Memory
4 MB
Chipset
Intel Chipset
Memory
4 GB DDR3-1066/1333 registered DIMM
LT3 044
Storage
500 GB SATA 7200RPM
External Storage
1TB External HDD
Multimedia
DVD+/WR
Interface
LAN WIFI, 1000BASE-T x 1 NIC, 1 Serial, 1 VGA, 4 USB,
Pre Installed OS and Applications
Win 7 professional x64 (Activated), MS Office 2007/2010
Power Supply
Power Supply supporting 220/240 VA
LT3 045
Switch
Switch 24 ports rack mount 19" 10/100/1000 Mb
LT3 046
WIFI Switch
Switch WIFI IEEE 802.llg WPA/WPA2
LT3 047
Rack for Server
Computer rack 12U 19"
LT3 048
UPS for Servers
2200 VA Rack-mountable uninterruptable power-system 30 minutes autonomy required
LT3 049
J PS                     for Workstations
1000 VA uninterruptable power-system 30 minutes autonomy 
required
LT3 050
<VM Switch with
19" LCD Color Monitor + keyboard + mouse
LT3 051       \
Web access security ?quipment
: irewall with DMZ port rack mount 19"LT3 OS 2
Router for secure Network
Connectivity
Cisco 1841 or 3800 Series Router
LT3 053
Core Switch
24 port L3 Switch for core connectivity
LT3OS4
Access Switch
24 port L2 Switch for access layer connection
LT3 055
Network Cable
CAT 5E network cable
LT3 056
Patch Panel
24 port patch panel
LT3 0S7
Patch Cable lmeter
sufficient   length   patch   cable   for   Switch   and   Patch   panel connection
LT3 058
Patch cable 5 meter
sufficient  length  patch  cable  for  users'  PC connection to wall outlet
LT3O59
Cable Trunk
cable trunk in Meter
LT3 060
Wall outlet
Nodes for end user connection to network (Wall outlet)
LT3 061
Printer      A4      size (Monochrome
Printer)
A4 size LaserJet printer
LT3 062
Printer      A0      size (Plotter)
A0 size Design Jet color Plotter
8.5.3    Communication and Nctwoking
8.5.3.1 Local Area Network
This chapter describes hardware and  expected  services from the contractor in  order to configure local area networking. Interfaces and hardware concerning Virtual Private Network are not included in this chapter. However,
-  each  component  of  a  site  shall  be  networked  with  others  components  located  in  a different site (excepted DMZ components),
VPN and firewall can be supported by the same equipment.
The contractor will install all the internal wiring prices LT3 040 and LT3 054 necessary to connect the various components of each system.
8 5 3 1.1 At SBBO level price LT3 055
Data server, wire and WIFI switches, power system are rack-mounted and connected using category 5 cable minimum
LAN switches are configured and operationalWorkstations and printers are connected to the switch using Category 5 cable minimum Printers drivers are installed on each computer (laptops and workstations)
Each component shall respond at least to a ping request
8.5.3.1.2 At Abbay Basin Authority Head Quarters price LT3 056 
Data and Web servers, wire and WIFI switches, power system, firewall are rack-mounted 
and connected using category 5 cable minimun
LAN switches and firewall arc configured and operational
Workstations and printers are connected to the switch using Category 5 cable minimum Printers drivers are installed on each computer (laptops and workstations)
Each component shall respond at least to a ping request
The  web  server  is  installed  in  the  DMZ  and  visible  from  the  Internet  via  an  URJL  (the domain name will be given before installation).
The  contractor  proceeds  domain  registration  and  informs  on  the  renewal  cost  (annual  fee) in his proposal
As shown  in  the following  diagram the centralized  Data server is accessed  by  the web server to  enable dissemination  of time series data - A firewall rule shall be implemented to  enable this link.  To  enhance security  of the system,  the contractor could  Dropose different solution  using  for example a reverse proxy  server or based  on  Microsoft Forefront Threat Management Gateway or equivalent.
Figiire n°20:
8.5.3.2 Wide Area Network
See corresponding chapter in COMPONEN I 1 technical specifications.
8.5.4   Cabling and Connecting
See chapter 6-7-24
8.6  Bid Price and Contract Price
Definitions:
Bid price - Cost of all items that would be added for price comparison and evaluation. Contract Price - Cost of all items of contract performance payable under the contract1 he bidder shall quote the price for the following items:
00  ,  bsted in the List of Goods and Delivery Schedule of the Schedule of
s
b)
c)
d)
c)
cquiremcnts. The Bidder shall estimate this cost, which shall be added to the bid price
or id evaluation and shall also be part of the contract price
ransportation Charges as per terms and conditions of the Contract.
ost of services for Installation and Commissioning including on the job training during insta lation and commissioning as per terms and conditions of the Contract inclusive of t  c  cost  of  daily  remuneration  (all  allowances,  cost  of  communication,  etc  included), travel cost (cost of travel, transit, visa, etc.), accommodation, etc for each of the Bidder’s personnel. The Bidder shall estimate this cost, which shall be added to the bid price for bid evaluation and shall also be part of the contract price.
Cost of services for Training Purchaser’s Personnel for operation and maintenance of the system inclusive of the cost of daily  remuneration  (all allowances,  cost of communication,  etc included),  travel cost (cost of travel,  transit,  visa,  etc.), accommodation, etc for each of the Bidder’s personnel and also of any training material, rhe Bidder shall estimate this cost,  which  shall be added  to  the bid  price for bid evaluation and shall also be part of the contract price.
Cost of organizing the training specified in Para d) and c) above such as cost for hiring premises, travel cost, working lunch, etc. will be borne by the Supplier and included in the Price Schedule 4.
f)     The  cost  of  Tool  kit  for  assembly,  installation  and  maintenance  as  per  technical specifications will be included in both the Bid Price for evaluation and the Contract Price.
g)    The cost of Manuals, documentation and reports as per technical specifications will be included in both the Bid Price for evaluation and the Contract Price.
h)   Cost of Maintenance (part facilities) for the remainder of the contract period after
Operational Testing till final acceptance as per terms and conditions of the Contract inclusive of the cost of daily remuneration (all allowances, cost of communication, etc included), travel cost (cost of travel, transit, visa, etc.), accommodation, etc. for each of
the Bidder’s personnel. The Bidder shall estimate this cost, which shall be added to the
bid price for bid evaluation and shall be part of the contract price. Refer Price Schedule 4.
i)    Cost of maintenance for a period of five years inclusive of Warranty period of two years from the date of issue of Final Acceptance Certificate as per terms and conditions of the Contract   inclusive   of   the   cost   of   daily   remuneration   (all   allowances,   cost   of communication,    etc    included),    travel    cost    (cost    of    travel,    transit,    visa,    etc.), accommodation, etc for each of the Bidder’s personnel. The Bidder shall provide along with the bid a maintenance plan for 3 (three) years with cost estimates at current prices which shall be added to the bid price for bid evaluation. This cost shall not be included in the  contract  price.  The  annual  maintenance  charges  shall  be  quoted  on  a  year-by-ycar basis for the three year maintenance period. Free maintenance services for equipment as well as civil works and other related accessories like cables, etc., shall be provided by the Contractor during the period of warranty (2 year after final acceptance of the system). After warranty period, annual maintenance and repairs of the entire system (comprising of  those  components  and  group  of  remote  stations  forming  part  of  the  acceptance certificate)  consisting  of  equipment  and  civil  works  including  supply  of  spares  for  the next 36 months will be done by the Contractor.8.7  Installation and integration Clause
a)     The  client  will  provide  details  of  the  installation  sites  before  the  scheduled  installation date  to  allow  the  Contractor  to  perform  site  inspection  and  construction  of  suitable structures before the installation of the hardware.
b)     The  Contractor  should  complete  the  required  works  at  the  site  for  proper  installation of the equipment before receipt of the equipment.
8.8 Incidental Services Clause
The  Contractor  shall  be  required  to  provide  any  or  all  of  the  following  services  and/or equipment:
a)        Performance   or   supervision   of   the   on-site   assembly   and/or   start-up   of   the   supplied Goods;
b)   .  Furnishing  of  electrical,  air-conditioning,  uninterruptable  power  supply  for  operation  of server and nodes, and the related accessories to the Data Centers;
c)   Furnishing  of  appropriate  hardware,  system  design  and  programming  services  required  for development and/or maintenance of the supplied Goods;
d) . Furnishing of tools required for assembly and/or maintenance of the supplied Goods;
c).   Furnishing   of   detailed   operations   and   maintenance   manual   for   each   appropriate   unit   of supplied Goods;
f)  .   Performance   or   supervision   or   maintenance   and/or   repair/replaccment   of   the   supplied Goods,   for   a   period   of   five   years   beyond   the   date   of   commissioning,   provided   that   this service shall not relieve the Contractor of any warranty obligations under this contract;
g)  .   Software   updates   and   bug   fix   services   for   the   software   originally   developed   by   the Contractor  during  the  period  of  warranty  and  subsequent  maintenance.  For  the  third  party software packages supplied updates shall be provided during the warranty period.
h) .  Training  of  the  Client  personnel,  in  assembly,  start-up,  operation,  maintenance,  and  repair of the supplied Goods at the stations to be decided by the Client.
i)  .  The  travel,  boarding,  lodging  related  to  the  installation  and  maintenance  at  the  sites  will  be the  responsibility  of  the  Contractor.  The  Client  will  however  provide  office  space  at  various field offices for the Contractor’s technicians.
8.9  Warranty Clause
a)      The   Contractor   warrants   that   the   Goods   supplied   under   the   contract   arc   new, unused,  of  the  most  recent  or  current  models  and  that  they  incorporate  all  recent improvements  in  design  and  materials  unless  provided  otherwise  in  the  contract.  The Contractor  further  warrants  that  all  Goods  supplied  and  all  civil  works  undertaken under    this    contract    shall    have    no    defect,    arising    from    design,    materials,    or workmanship  or  from  any  act  or  omission  of  the  Contractor,  that  may  develop  under normal  use  of  the  supplied  Goods  in  the  conditions  prevailing  in  the  country  of  final destination.,
b)     The   client   shall   promptly   notify   the   Contractor   in   writing   of   any   claims   arising under this warranty.c) 1 he client shall notify the Contractor of any errors and malfunctions, which occur and noticed when equipment arc in use, by cmail/tclcphonc/fax directly or through the Contractor’s Service technician(s) at the Contractor’s office address during normal working  hours or at their residence after normal office hours and/or on holidays.
d)   The  Contractor  shall  ensure  permanent  “hot-line”  (phone,  fax,  e-mail)  technical support to the Beneficiary with a response time of 48 hours or less.
e)   The Contractor shall, at his own cost, carry out repair of the defective equipment or parts thereof, to the satisfaction of Client and return the equipment after satisfactory repair within 20 days from the date of written complaint/rcqucst made. All charges towards  the  collection,  transportation  of  defective  equipment,  return  of  equipment after  repair  including  cost  of  repair  defective  equipment  or  parts  thereof,  shall  be borne by the Contractor and no charges shall be paid by the Client.
f)    If the Contractor fails to replenish the spares or return equipment after satisfactory repairs within 90 days from date of complaint made, this will be considered as failure of  Remote  Stations  or  satellite  and/or  GSM/GPRS  data  collection  station  and  a penalty of ETB 0.05% of the Equipment Price day/item shall be applicable.
g)   If the Contractor, having been notified, fails to remedy the defcct(s) within the time specified in Clauses fig,, and j, the Client may proceed to take such remedial action as may be necessary, at the Contractor’s risk and expense as specified in clause fig, and k, and without prejudice to any other rights which the Client may have against the Contractor under the contract.
h)   If the Contractor fails to rectify the defects or fails to return the equipment after satisfactory repair with the permitted time frame, he shall be liable to pay the penalty at the rates indicated in clauses g,h, and k above. The period of penalty shall be calculated from the time effective from the time of expiry of the time schedule
allowed for fault recti fication/retum of the equipment after satisfactory repair.
i)    The amount of penalty as indicated in the above clauses will be subject to maximum 10%  of  the  tendered  amount.  The  amount  of  penalty  will  be  recovered  from  the
balance 10% amount withheld  (Security  Dcposit/Performance Guarantee) during warranty.  The Client may  also  proceed  to  take such  remedial action  as may  be necessary,  at the Contractor’s risk  and  expense and  without prejudice to  any  other rights which the Client may have against the Contractor under the contract.
j)    The authority to decide and review the penalty shall be the MOWE.8.10  Prices clarification
The   following   tabic  is   given   to   facilitate   the  fulfilling   of  the  prices   tables   in   section   IV schedules n°l and 2:
COMPONENT &Line Item
N°
Description of BIS Goods
Quantity
Software
LT3
001
SQL Server 2008 R2 Standard Edition
2
LT3
002
SQL    Server    Client    Access    License    (SBBO time series data server)
20
LT3
003
Antivirus software server
3
LT3
004
Microsoft Windows 2008 R2
4
LT3
005
Microsoft Windows 7
13
LT3
006
IIS web server
1
LT3
007
SQL Server 2008 R2 Web Edition
1
LT3
008
ArcGIS Desktop / Arc View 10
5
LT3
009
ArcGIS Spatial Analyst Extension
2
LT3
010
ArcGIS GeoStatistical Analyst Extension
2
LT3
Oil
ArcGIS Publisher Extension
2
LT3
012
SQL Server management studio
2
LT3
013
SQL    Server    Client    Access    License    (ABA centralized time series data server)
3
LT3
014
Adobe X Acrobat standard
1
LT3
015
Word
ll’
LT3
016
Excel
11
LT3
017
ENVI
1
LT3
018
Antivirus software client
17
LT3
019
Backup
17
LT3
020
BringToMind Document Exchange version
PRO
1
Hardware
LT3
041
Web Server
I
LT3
042
Data Server
3
LT3
043
Hydrologist WQ modeler workstation
3
LT3
043
GIS / data base and RS/GIS workstation
2
LT3
044
specialist laptops
s
LT3
045
Switch
3
LT3
046
WEFT Switch
3
LT3
047
Computer rack
3
LT3
048
UPS for servers
4LT3
049
LT 3
UPS for Work stations
050
5
LT3
KVM Switch with
051
3
LT3
Web access security equipment
052
3
LT3
Router for secure Network Connectivity
053
3
Core Switch
LT3
054
3
Access Switch
LT3
055
3
LT3
Network Cable
056
3
Patch Panel
LT3
057
3
LT3
Patch Cable 1 meter set
058
3
Patch cable 5 meter set
LT3
059
3
Cable Trunk
J/T3
060
3
Wall outlet
LT3
061
12
Printer A4 size (Monochrome Printer)
LT3
062
8
pPrintcr A0 size (Plotter)
LT3
063
1
All wiring
LT3
064
1
I^an services Central stations
LT3
2
065
Lan services secondary station
LT3
1
066
Training
LT3
1
067
Guarantee (2 years)
LT3      06S
1
Maintenance contract (3 years)
1Annex 8                CUASHI Conference
Annex 8.
CUASHI Conference
Inginlerle
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System Interim ReportAnnex 8.
CUASHI Conference
July  20lT 7nn
d            nnUal   CUAHS1   conference  was  held
in  Logan.  UTAH  from  the  17th  to  the  18th  of
systems  and  r®saarchers    were  present  to  discuss  advances  in  hydrologic  data  and  information
included  t  h™  ?  in9  'ec^n°logy  and  their  use  to  advance  hydrologic  science.  The  conference
servir»«   -2'°^   usessions-   contributed   talks   and   workshops   to   introduce   the   community   to
Xue TesfA°V,Ah intnrnai
new                             Water Data Center. An abstract co-signed by Fang Zhong-
internal   collaboration   sessions:
• e an^ *avjer
Thomas was submitted in May and selected to be presented in the
watercha^ resources inforrnation system for the Lake Tana (source of the Blue Nile) and Bales and S IS current|y being implemented. It includes the updating of hydrometric, meteorological mpaciirn^ bua ity measurement networks and the introduction of automated systems of
( >>men and transmission. It also aims to establish a software platform for the storage, RpQniirr'0 a?i . d,ssemination of data. This project is led by the Ethiopian Ministry of Water
IS ^Un an ,nlernahonal group of companies: BRLi (France), Omega (Ethiopia), y ( rance) and Halcrow (UK). This project is supported by the World Bank.
During  the  inception  phase,  the  CUAHSI  information reasons following:
system paradigm was adopted for the main
e CUAHSI platform provides unique mechanisms of dissemination and sharing of information which  go  beyond  the  requirements  of  the  Ministry  of  Water  Resources.  If  this  project  is successful  it  is  hoped  that  other  data  providers  (national  meteorological  agencies,  university networks of ecological observations, etc.) will adopt this tool to unite the means of distributing water related data across the country.
►  The  Tana  Beles  information  system  is  a  first  in  Ethiopia  and  will  be  extended  to  the  whole territory.  CUAHSI  offers  freely  available  software  tools  and  their  source  code.  This  is  also  a strong argument for enhancing the current capacity of the ministry.
A short term goal is to provide the ABBAY Basin Authority and dependent organizations with a data management tool. The ABA remains in control of making the data available to the world. For that, several software packages  have been developed in this  project on the basis  of the ODM Data Loader and ODM Tools to easily integrate data from the partners of the ABA and to provide data managers  with simple data validation tools. Management of user rights  has  been introduced to match stations and variables to a set of personnel authorized to deal with them. For this the ODM model has been extended while remaining compatible with version 1.1.
In the longer term, it is a matter of adopting a mode of governance of data repositories to share a
single semantic across the country. CUAHSI also has a lot of strength for resolving the technical
and organizational issues that arise when deploying basin agencies. But we must not
underestimate the aspects of privacy of data in a country belonging to the Nile Basin and one of the
main sources is Lake Tana."
After the presentation, we held a discussion with Alva Couch (WDC Director), Richard Hooper (Executive Director) and Steve Pilot (WDC Senior Software Engineer) about the project of Tana- Beles  IWRM and the best way  to collaborate between the CUAHSI consortium and the water related institutions  of Ethiopia. Firstly.CUAHSI wants  to be global. Through its  new Data Center. CUAHSI acts  now as  a “Google search" of the worldwide water related data. WDC is  able to register the time series meta-data produced by the Basin Organisations (ABA and the next ones). Then using Hydro-Desktop software the users  will be able to access on line the time series data values. Secondly. Hydro-Desktop grows  extremely  quickly  with new functionalities  (HDA tools). It will be connected soon to a hydrological modelling platform.
The AbbayBasin organisation and the MoWRwith the support of the consultant should examine the benefits of a strengthened collaboration with CUAHSI in order to:
► Get better knowledge about CUAHSI concepts and technology.
► Access the U ser.su pport of the community,
Design, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Informatton System Interim ReportAnnex 8.               CUASHI Conference
► Attend trainings,
► Register the metadata at the WDC center.
• 
■*“'**' '■
-i-
For more information, visit the following link: http://www.cuahsi.org/WDCconf2013.aspx
***aitMf*
\ • * • V } x 
_______ _________________ —
** 3es/g4, Development & Support in Implementation & Operation of a Basin Information System
Interim ReportI

Summery

Tana and Beles Basin Information System (BIS) - Interim Report Summary

Project Overview

The Tana and Beles Integrated Water Resources Development Project (TBIWRDP) aims to design, develop, and implement a Basin Information System (BIS) to support water resource management in Ethiopia. The project is divided into four phases:

Inception Phase: Stakeholder consultations and preliminary design (completed in 2011).
Design Phase: Detailed system architecture and specifications (completed in 2012).
Implementation Phase: Procurement, software development, and training (ongoing).
Final Reporting Phase: System commissioning and documentation (upcoming).

Key Components

Hydrological Information System (HIS): Data collection from automated stations (hydrology, meteorology, water quality).
Spatial Data System (SDS): GIS-based repository for maps and geospatial data.
Information Management System (IMS): Tools for data validation, gap-filling, and analysis.
Knowledge Management System (KMS): Future integration with decision-support tools.
Data Dissemination System (DDS): Web portal for public and stakeholder access.

Progress Highlights

Software Development

Release 1 (June 2012): Data entry tools and database setup using CUAHSI ODM.
Release 2 (April 2013): Advanced features (rating curves, gap-filling, validation).
Upcoming Releases: Web portal (Release 3) and system commissioning (Release 4).

Procurement

Bidding process completed for hydrometric, water quality, and IT equipment.
Negotiations ongoing with the selected bidder (Kehalle International PLC).

Training

HIS/BIS Software: Sessions on database management, data validation, and tool usage.
Hydrometry: Field training on discharge and sediment measurement.
Hydrological Modeling: HEC-HMS and HEC-RAS workshops.
Water Quality & Ecology: Hands-on sampling and analysis training.
GIS: ArcGIS and remote sensing applications for basin management.

Challenges and Next Steps

Delays in procurement due to budget revisions and bid evaluation.
Need for additional training to ensure system sustainability.
Finalize equipment installation and operationalize the BIS.

Conclusion

The interim report outlines significant progress in designing and implementing the BIS, with a focus on stakeholder engagement, capacity building, and leveraging open-source tools like CUAHSI. The next phase will focus on commissioning and ensuring long-term operational sustainability.